

















*^^- ,<-'^- 









-'<> ,,x^^ 






i' 



'■ ^£:--:^._r --i 



J''^. 



\ 









H V 



"^.^ V^^ 



^.-^^ 



-/- 









^•^^. 



'^ .<'■ 



.^^' 






b '^^/ 















."^^ 






r . 



*. o. 




OCT - 






,0- 






>^o;%. *«-^' ^^' 









■■i. /■•■^ 



0^ .'"•' 



V' 



^^- \V' 



.' .v"' 



/"-?< 






^- * " - "^ ' ^^ 









^^^ ■''^. 



xV 



:>■ 



^^. 












^^^ 



>. *, 



GREEK EXERCISES, 

IN 

SYNTAX, ELLIPSIS, DIALECTS, PROSODY, 

AND 

METAPHRASIS. 

TO WHICH IS PREFIXED, 

A CONCISE BUT COMPREHENSIVE 

SYNTAX. 

WITH 
OBSERVATIONS ON SOME IDIOMS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 



By the Rev. WILLIAM NEILSON, D.D. M.R.I.A. 

LATE PROFESSOR OF GREEK, AND HEBREW, IN BELFAST COLLEGE. 



/^yO 



O Greece ! thou sapient nurse of Finer A rt3 ! 
Which to bright Science blooming Fancy bore. 
Be this thy praise, that Thou, and Thou alone. 
In these hast led the way, in those excell'd, 
Crown'd with tiie laurel of assenting time. 

In thy full Language, sj)eaking mighty things; 
Like a clear torrent close, or else diff'useii 
A broad, majestic stream, and rolling on 
Through all the winding harmony of sound. Thomson. 



A NEW EDITIOK 



LONDON: 

PRINTED FOR 

LONGMAN, REES, ORME, BROWN, AND GREEN, 

PATERNOSTER-ROW. 
1831. 



^(\^ 






LoKDOK : 
Printed by A. & R. SpottiswoOaie, 

New- Street-Square. 



TO THE 

Rev. JOHN KEARNEY, D.D. 

PROVOST 

OF TRINITY COLLEGE, DUBLIN. 

Sir, 

In being permitted to dedicate this work to 
you^ IJeelthat grateful pleasure, which arises from 
the co7itemplation of labours sanctioned and encou- 
raged by the patron and judge of elegant literature. 

It shall be my constant endeavour, as it is my 
amcious wish, to merit a continua7ice of your kind 
attention, 

I am. Sir, 

With the sincerest respect. 
Your obliged, humble servant, 

W, NEILSON. 



A 2 



s^ 



PREFACE 



To acquire a correct knowledge of any language, it is 
necessary to study not only the words of it, but the manner 
of their combination, in the construction of sentences. 
Without this minute analysis, words may be learned, as by 
rote ; but no taste for elegance of style can be formed ; no 
understanding of apparently obscure expressions, nor general 
idea of the language can be obtained. 

For this reason, many works have been published, intro- 
ductory to the making of Latin, and used with the best 
effect. That which is now offered to the public, is an 
attempt to furnish a similar opportunity for improvement, 
in the most beautiful and important language of antiquity : 
the language from which almost all the terms of science are 
derived, and in which the substance of general knowledge 
is contained. 

In the concise Syntax, which is prefixed to the Exercises, 
the rules, or parts of rules, which differ from Latin con- 
struction, are marked with asterisms : that the student may 
see, at once, the agreement, and the difference of the two 
languages. It is particularly recommended to the teacher, 
to make the pupil study the notes on syntax, and the 
observations at the end of the volume, to which references 
are made, and give an account of them, when he recites 
the rules to which they are annexed. 

A 3 



VI 



The sentences, of which the Exercises on Syntax are 
composed, have been selected from a great variety of the 
finest authors. It was judged unnecessary to insert the 
author's name, at the end of each sentence, as this part of 
the work exhibits those forms of expression only, which are 
common to all the Greek writers. As the understandino; 
of the sacred Scriptures is, unquestionably, the most im- 
portant object, in learning Greek, particular attention has 
been paid to the introduction of appropriate examples from 
the Septuagint, and New Testament. 

The sentences are all, except in one or two unavoidable 
instances, in Attic prose ; for it is evidently improper 
to distract the learner's attention from syntax, to poetic 
licenses, or variety of dialects. 

Each chapter is divided into three parts. The first 
contains plain sentences, rarely anticipating any subsequent 
rule : these ought to be all rendered into correct Greek, 
before the other parts of the chapters are attempted. The 
second contains more variety of expression, and exemplifies 
the rules promiscuously, as well as the particular one pre- 
fixed to each chapter : this part is from % to the end of the 
English sentences. Having finished these sentences, in all 
the chapters on syntax, the student will be able to translate 
the third part of each chapter, which consists of Latin sen- 
tences, with no corresponding Greek. 

As there are many Elliptical expressions, which cannot 
be comprehended under any general rules of syntax, a 
selection of the most important examples has been made 
from Bos's excellent work on Ellipsis. The scholar is to 
supply the words omitted ; which he will do with ease, 
being enabled, by the translation, to find them, and di- 
rected, by the blank spaces in the Greek page, w^here they 
ought to be placed. 

In order to give a knowledge of the different Dialects, 
quotations from Ionic, Doric, and iEolic writers, and 
Homer, are inserted, which are to be rendered into the 



Vll 



common Attic Greek. The student will thus learn every 
thing of importance in each dialect, with much more ease 
and pleasure, than by committing a number of rules to 
memory. 

The lines reduced to prosaic order, and to be returned 
into metre, are intended to form a taste for the melody of 
Greek poetry. And, to impress upon the mind the distinc- 
tion between a poetic and prosaic style, it is recommended 
to exercise learners in paraphrasing, or imitating in prose, 
select passages of the Greek poets. This is usually called 
Metaphrasis. A short specimen of it is given in the last 
chapter. It was thought unnecessary to insert more pieces 
of this kind, as any poet will furnish sufficient exercises. 

To this edition are added. Observations on some Idioms of 
the Greek Language, The understanding of the peculiar 
idioms of a language being, at once, a difficult and im- 
portant business, it is hoped that these observations will 
facilitate it to the student. 

In making them, no attention was paid to the technical 
order of syntax. The object was to show how the Greeks 
expressed ideas which are common to all persons, but 
uttered in various manners : to follow, as much as possible, 
the course of nature, and habit, in the formation of the 
language. How far the author has succeeded must be de- 
cided by those who are competent judges. Many of the 
observations must be, already, familiar to the Greek 
scholar ; but he beheves that several of them are original. 
Where he has ventured to differ in opinion from eminent 
writers, it is with diffidence and respect. 

It will be evident, that the whole is merely a concise 
view of the general principles, and most usual idioms. To 
have gone at large into the elucidation of any one title in 
it} would have required a volume. But it is hoped that 
the student, who impresses these observations on his mind, 
will find both ease and pleasure, in applying them to the 
solution of such phrases as may occur in the course of his 
reading. 



VUl 



Those who wish for more minute and extensive investi- 
gations on this subject, may consult MiddletorCs Doctrine of 
the Greek Article; Bos^s Ellipses; Vigerius's Idiotisms ; 
Kuster on the Middle Voice; HoogeveerHs Particles; and 
Da^mes^s Miscellanea Critica. 

The author feels particularly gratified in acknowledging 
the very kind attention paid to this work by the late Pro- 
fessor Dalzell, Edinburgh, and Professor Young, Glasgow. 
The continued friendship of the Rev. Dr. Bruce, Belfast 
Academy, and Rev. Mr. Hincks, Fermoy, (lately Cork), 
with that of many other gentlemen, who have assisted him 
in improving it, demands his warmest acknowledgments. 

N.B, It may be proper to inform the reader that 6^, he, 
is used throughout the Exercises. This is according to 
Dr. Moor's Greek Grammar, and is sanctioned by the 
authority of Xenophon. Grammarians, in general, ex- 
hibit the substantive pronoun of the third person, as want- 
ing the nominative, gen, ov, dat, o», &c. like the Latin, sni, 
sibi, &c. 



CONTENTS, 



Page 
Rules of Syntax ------ 1 

EXERCISES. 

Chap. 

1. Nouns Substantive - - - - 21 

2. Verb and Nominative - - - - 23 
5. Adjective and Substantive - - - 27 

4. Verbs active govern an accusative - - - 28 

5. Adjective in neuter, xpVH-a- understood. 

When an infinitive, &c. is in the place of the nomi- 
native, &c. - - - - - 50 

6. Substantive verbs, &c. have a nominative before and 

after them - - - - - 32 

7. Conjunctions km, &c. have the same case after them as 

before them - - - - - 33 

8. Av, eav, &c. joined with subjunctive mood. 

Ay, Kav, &c. give subjunctive meaning to other moods - 34 

9. One substantive agrees with another - - - 36 

10. Infinitives, such as eivai, have the same case after them 

as before them - - - - 37 

1 1. One substantive governs another in the genitive. 

Adjectives in the neuter, vnthout a substantive, govern 

the genitive ----- 53 

12. Relative agrees with its antecedent, &c. - - - 40 

13. Prepositions, avri, oiro, &c. - - - -42 

14. Ajo and vtrep, &C. - - - - - - 45 

15. Kara, from, or against, &c. - - - - 46 

16. Adverbs of time, &c. govern the genitive. 

Ntj and /xoj &c. 

Some derivative adverbs govern the case of their pri- 
mitives - - - - - . 43 

17. Infinitive has an accusative before it, &c. 

Infinitive governed by verbs, adjectives, &c. 

' put elliptically, 6pa, &c. understood - - 52 



Chap. Page 

18. Cause, &c. put in the dative. 

Sometimes passive verbs have a dative of the agent. . 
Comparatives and superlatives govern the measure of 

excess in the dative - - - - 57 

19. Adjectives o^ plenty, &c. require the genitive. 

Comparative degree governs the genitive when trans- 
lated by than - - - - . 61 

20. Adjectives placed partitively govern the genitive plural ^ 64 

21. Adjectives o^ profit, &c. govern the dative. 

EffTi, for €x<y, to have, governs the dative. 

All verbs put acquisitively govern the dative - - 68 

22. Eifu, &e. signifying possession, &c. govern the genitive. 

Verbs of beginning, &c. govern the genitive - - 72 

23. Two or more substantives singular have verb, &c. plural 76 

24. Verbs of accusing, &c. with the genitive or dative, govern 

also the accusative - - - - - 77 

25. Verbs of asking, &c. govern two accusatives - - 79 

26. Participles govern the case of their own verbs - - 81 

27. Passive verbs take a genitive of the agent - - 83 

28. Accusative absolutely, Kara understood - - - 85 

29. Neuters plural have commonly verbs singular - - 88 
50. Primitive pronouns in the genitive, instead of possessive 

pronouns - - - - - 90 

31. Impersonal verbs govern the dative. 

Xpv, Tpeiret, &c. 

Aet and xPVi signifying necessity, &c. - - - 92 

32. Substantives, with participles, &c. put in the genitive 

absolute, &c. 

Participles ofimpersonal verbs used absolutely - 96 

55. The time when, &c. - - - - 100 

34. The question, whither, Sec. 

Adverbs in Oi and m, &c. 

The distance of place, &c. - - - - 103 

35. The price, or measure, &c. - - - - 1 06 

36. A preposition in composition, &c. - - - - 108 

37. Genitive absolute, lycKo, &c. understood - - 111 

38. Dative absolute, <n;»' understood - - - - 113 

39. MeAAo), with an infinitive, &c. - - - - 1 1 5 

40. Verbs of gesture, €1111, &c. - - - - 117 

41. Infinitive mood, or a participle, used to supply the place 

of gerunds and supines - - - - - 122 

42. Verbal adjectives, governing a dative of the agent, &c. - 126 

43. Every verb may take an accusative of a corresponding noun 128 



Chap. Page 

44. Verbs of sense, with the Attics, take an accusative * 130 

45. Participles and adjectives often put, by attraction, in the 

same case with the noun or pronoun to which thev 

refer. 

Attics often put the relative, by attraction, in the same 

case with the antecedent - - - - 132 

46. Adjective sometimes put in a different gender from the 

substantive, &c. - - - - 136 

47. Noun dual may have a verb plural, &c. - - - 138 

48. Two or more negatives, &c. - - - - 139 

49. The article, &c. - - - - - 142 

50. Ellipsis - - - - - . 145 

51. Dialects - - - - - 164 

52. Prosody - - - - --190 

53. Metaphrasis - - - - . 204 

Observations ON Idioms ----- 207 



xu 



Remarks necessary to be ohseroed in 'writing Gi'eeL 

1. The final letter is frequently cut off (except in verbs) 
from words ending in a, c, <, o, at, or o<, when the following 
word begins with a vowel ; as, ITavT eXayov. 

2. All words ending in a-i, and verbs in e and t, take v, when 
the following word begins with a vowel ; as, Eiycoa-iv avSpe?. 

3. N is changed into 7, in compounds, before x, 7, %, and into 
fx, before w, jS, ^, 1//; as, Eyxptiw, a-vy-fXtyu, 

4. When the following word begins with an aspirated vowel, 
the tenuis, or intermediate consonant preceding, is changed 
into an aspirate ; as, airo ov Af ov. 

5. En and ov are used before consonants, sf and oyvt, or ov^, 
before vowels ; as, E| vfAuVf ov rovro, ovk. e<rhf oy% ovTcoq» 

6. The Attics use all contractions. 

The manner of expression, in which each tense is translated 
in the second chapter, is retained, in general, throughout the 
work : but as this could not be always done, and as there are 
many varieties of expression, which the most literal translation 
could not ascertain, small English letters and figures are aflSxed 
to such Greek words as might probably be rendered im- 
properly. 



After a Verb, 


After a Substantive, Adjective, 


a denotes Active. 


Pronoun, or Participle, 


m 


- Middle. 


" denotes Masculine. 


P 


- Passive. 


' - - Feminine. 


^ 


- Present. 


"^ - - Neuter. 


' 


- Imperfect. 


• - - Singular. 


' 


- 1st Future, 


p or "J - Plural. 


* 


- 2d Future. 


° - - Nominative. 


* 


- 1st Aorist. 


s - - Genitive. 


« 


- 2d Aorist. 


^ - - Dative. 


' — 


- Perfect. 


* - - Accusative. 


8 


- Pluperfect. 


c - - Comparative. 


'} 


- Indicative. 


sap - - Superlative. 


8 


- Subjunctive. 


imp . . Impersonal. 





- Optative. 




1 


- Infinitive. 




^ - 


- Participle. 





RULES 



OF 



GREEK SYNTAX. 



THE ARTICLE. 

* 1. 1 HE article is used to mark a distinction or emphasis. 
With the infinitive, it suppHes the place of nouns, gerunds, 
and supines. With a participle, it is translated by the rela- 
tive and indicative. With ju-sv and 8?, it signifies jpartly ; 
and it is often used for ornament: as, (see observation 
33—42.) 

hid'/uKo^ 6 Tpuycudog. Aeschylus the tragedian. 

Kaxoov Toov Trpiv i^nioiv To remember former evils. 

Tu s^oo. The things without. 

Ev Tcp (ppovsiv. In wisdom. 

'O gp%Oju,evo?. He that cometh. 

T* uvQpooTreiov ysvog x*) fj^sv Mankind are partly good, and 

uya-Qov, TYj h <pavkov, partly bad. 

H viKYj Yj vtKYicraa-u tov Faith, the victory which over- 

Koa-f/^Qv, r} TTia-Tig, comes the world. 

CONCORD. 

ADJECTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE. 

2. An adjective agrees with its substantive, in gender, 
number, and case ; as, 

Avopeg ctyctQot. Good men. 

'OjXiXja* KOLy.ui. Evil communications. 

E5vga TToAXa. Many nations. 

B 



3. An adjective is often put absolutely in the neuter, 
X('W^ being understood ; as, 
Op^ov {xP^i^^) ^ i^M^-^^ Truth is always a right thing. 

ast. 
'H TTotTfig (piXrarov (xP^r To men their country is most 

[jt,cc) (ipoToig. dear. 

* 4. An adjective is sometimes put in a different gender 
from the substantive with which it stands, as agreeing with 
some other substantive understood ; as, ""(see obs. 3.) 
A$-^vYj /!^ioSTSKoc uTpuTcovYi. Miucrva, invincible daughter of 

Jove. 

<I><A: TBKvov. Dear child (son). 

Q. ^vxYi OS M^' i^a-Srjg. O soul ! who hast not been gra- 

tified. 

* 5. Participles and adjectives are often put, by attrac- 
tion, in the same case with the noun or pronoun to w^hich 
they refer; as, (see obs. 4 — 6.) 

Oioju.svcov e*vaj (ro(pooTUTa)T/ Thinking themselves to be the 
avSpwTTwv, for avTovg wisest of men. 

e»va» (TO<p'jiToirous. 



VERB AND NOMINATIVE. 

6. A verb agrees with its nominative, in number and 
person; as, 

Zsv^ic sypa^s. Zeuxis painted. 

OipQaA/xw Xafj^TTSTov. His eyes shine. 

KciTcidoiKTiv opvi&sc. Birds sing. 



» Thus ra yvvaiY.s, the tvomen; rco x£ioe, the hands; according 
to the nature of the Attic dialect, which makes the masculine 
and feminine of many adjectives in oq the same. 
KBavarov [AEra (pvX' it^v, itpXmovr Modesty andjustice, having left 

avhowKovc, AtSa? >cat Ne/xeo-k. men^ departed to the hea-oenly 



This form of construction is used to generalise the expression 



* 7. Neuters in the plural have commonly verbs singu- 
lar ; as, (see obs. 3. note.) 

Ta /3sAr] sKTTiTTTsi. The darts fall out. 

T^ upyupsM {/■jroToia-(TSTCii All things are subject to mone}'. 
Travra. 

8. Substantive verbs, verbs passive of naming, and verbs 
of gesture, have a nominative both before and after them, 
belonging to the same thing ; as, 

*T/x,s<^ 6G-TS TO (pco^ Tov Kod- Ye are the light of the vi^orld. 

Kaxwv e7r<xaAuja,aa scttjv Wealth is the cloak of evils. 

6 ttKovtoc. 

9. The infinitives of substantive verbs, such as sivai, 
ytvsa-^ai, Sfc. have the same case after them that goes before 
them ; as,^ 

Toy? jw,=v sihrotg tuvtoc He thought that those who 

YjysiTo xoiXoug x,oii ayoiQoug knew these things were good and 

sivoci, roug 5s ayvoovvrag honourable ; but that those who 

^v^puTto^oo^cig av dtKUKtig were ignorant of them should be 

7isy.KYj(jQcci. justly called slavish. 

10. The infinitive mood has an accusative before it, 
when its agent or subject is different from that of the pre- 
ceding verb; (see obs. 5.) * but a nominative when they 
are the same ; as,^ 



a Sometimes when a dative precedes the infinitive, an accu- 
sative follows it, agreeing with an accusative, understood, before 
it; as, 

*Hp|M,o^£ a-oi ^aa-iXsa, sivai opvecov. You Ought to he hlHg ofhirds. 

b The accusative, very rarely, precedes the infinitive, when it 

refers to the agent or subject of the preceding verb ; as, 

Ovy^ d yiceia-crccv r,Zei av, aXX' diiEi) He commenced not those things, 

tv Y/Bst kasvrw "^rrova, ovra, Toavra, in Ivhich he knetv hiynselfto be 

'hpx^' superior; but those inxi>hichhe 

xuell knen) that he xvas inferior-. 
B 2 



4 



Ti ^§orov$ (ppov£ivKcyov(ri; Why do they say that mortal 

men are wise ? 
Edsi^s 7roXs[xio$ sivai |3a- He showed that he himself was 
(TiAei. an enemy to the king. 



RELATIVE AND ANTECEDENT. 

11. The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender 
and number. If there comes no nominative between the 
relative and the verb, the relative is the nominative to the 
verb ; but if there does, the relative is governed by some 
word in the sentence ; as, 

Avdpotg ol eKTovTon. Men who will know. 

'O Xoyog 6v sitts. The word which he spoke. 

* 12. The Attics often put the relative, by attraction, in 
the same case with the antecedent; and, sometimes, the 
antecedent in the same case with the relative; as, (see 
obs. 7, 8.) 

Tlgog TovToig o\g Kzyzi Hs- Added to what Xenophon says, 

OvTog sa-Tiv 6v Xsyeig av- This is the man that you say. 

QgoOTTOV. 

GENERAL RULES. 

* 13. A noun of the dual number may have a verb, 
adjective, or relative plural ; but a plural noun can have a 
verb, adjective, or relative dual, only when it signifies 
two; as, 

AjX(pco eAsyov. They both said. 

'Sl$ ai/s{ji,oi (§yo) ogiverov. As two winds excite. 

^iXctg %cqi %£<§£ ^ctXcofjLsv. Lctusputour dear hands around. 

14. Two or more substantives singular have a verb, ad- 
jective, or relative plural ; if they be of different persons or 
genders, the verb or adjective will agree with the most 



worthy ; if they signify things without life, the adjective iu 

commonly in the neuter f as, 

Eav uhK<^os >] aSsAi^yj yu^h- If a brother or sister be naked. 

vol U7tCiq')(U)(Tl. 

Al hvoca-Tsidi xon 6 %Kou- Power and riches are desirable 
Toj lia, T>)v T»ju,>3v s(TTiv for the sake of honour. 
ulgsTu ( X§>3iW'«T^)' 

Eyco xcii (TV Tu liKuiu, You and I will do the things 
( X?*Jl"'^'^^) '^'^^W^M^' which are just. 

15. When an infinitive or a sentence is in place of the 
nominative to a verb, or substantive to an adjective, the 
vero is in the third person singular, and tlie adjective in 
the neuter gender ; as, 

To Traa-iv agsa-ai ^u(rags(r- It is very hard to please all. 
TCiTOv (x§>3i«'a) S(rTl, 

SUBSTANTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE. 

16. One substantive agrees with another, signifying the 
same thing, in case ; as, 

KvA^agri^ 6 tvohs too Act- Cyaxares the son of Astyages. 

Tuayou. 

AvToKvKov ^vyoLTYig \Lzyot.' Anticlea, the daughter of the 

'kr^Tog(i(i AvTixXeia. magnanimous Autolycus. 



a To this rule may be added nouns of multitude, which often 
require verbs and adjectives plural ; as, 

Ej>wT>jo-aj/ avTov aicav to 'wXriOoi;. All the 7nultitiide asked him. 

The same occurs, when an indefinite pronoun refers to several 
objects, taken individually ; as, 
'HTiVi tyvvyyjy.voitv ^ i\ SouXo), tj Ckzv Whatever slave, or freeman, 

Os^ai, iravraq £y.r£ivQv, they met, they slew them all. 

Indeed there is considerable variety in the application of the 
rule to which this note is attached. For, when two synony- 
mous nouns are used, the verb is frequently in the singular ; as, 
Ma^Tj -TToXe/xo? T£ SfSvjf. The fight and battle raged. 

And, sometimes, the verb agrees with that nominative which 
is nearest to it ; as, 
kvtmq re Mai ycvf/.a 'neXocaa-e. The tvind and Wave impelled. 

B 3 



GOVERNMENT.* 



SUBSTANTIVES. 



17. One substantive governs another, signifying a dif- 
ferent thing, in the genitive ; as,^ 

Toy ©sou [xa.KgoQupi.ici, The long suffering of ^od. 

18. An adjective in the neuter gender, without a sub- 
stantive, governs the genitive ; as. 

To XoiTTov (fts^of) TY); >jjxe- The rest of the day. 

^^§' 
To xgcKTio-Tov {fj^sgog) r>j? The best part of philosophy. 

* 19. The primitive pronoun is used in the genitive, in- 
stead of the possessive pronoun ; as, 
TlccTrig fjiov for -syarrig ei^og. My father, (see obs. 57, 58.) 

a Although the rules, with respect to the construction of 
cases, appear very numerous, yet they may all be reduced to 
the following principles : 

1. Every nominative agrees with some verb, expressed or 
understood. 

2. Every genitive expresses that Jro7n tvhich something pro- 
ceeds, or bi/ tvhich it is possessed; and, in general, depends upon 
a noun, or preposition, expressed or understood. 

3. Every dative expresses that to which something is acquired. 
But, as the dative, in Greek, corresponds also to the ablative, 
in Latin, it expresses that Jrom which any thing is taken, or hy 
means of which it is done. 

4. Every accusative is governed by an active verb, or a pre- 
position, expressed, or understood ; or it agrees with an injfi- 
nitive. 

AVhen other words are said to govern certain cases, as >verhs, 
the geniti've, 8^c. or when cases are said to be put absolutely, 
these principles should be referred to, and they will shew the 
force and nature of the expression. In order to assist the 
learner in doing so, the elliptical words are inserted, in the ex- 
amples to the rules on government. 

b The dative is, sometimes, used instead of the genitive ; as, 
liar 01 riacc^av (povov. The avenger of your father s murder. 

And the poets, sometimes, change the substantive, that should 
be in the genitive, into a corresponding adjective; as, 
AovXeia xef aX?;. The head of a slave, (see obs. 4-9.) 



ADJECTIVES. 

* 20. Adjectives signifying plenty^ 'worthy commendation^ 
'■po'wer^ difference^ and their contraries ; also verbals com- 
pounded with a privative, and those which signify an emo- 
tion of the mind, require the genitive ; as, 

Eg'y.'Tj(avrO'rX£i(rTouaJ»a. Works worthy of the highest 

value. 
(/Wo) rwv 'x^aKs'Koiv a- You shall live without trouble. 

Tvi^^vacTioL [j.ea-TCi (ej) ctv- Places of exercise full of men. 

dgoov. 
AvxiTiog (ett') a(^goG-uvr}g. Not blamable for imprudence. 

21. All adjectives, taken partitively, govern the genitive 
plural; as, 

0* iruKoLioi (ex) roiv ntoi- The ancient poets. 

rjrcoy. 

Movoj (sx) ^qorviv. The only one of mortals. 

OI vscarsgoi (ej) avS^wTrwv. The younger of the men. 

EaAAtcTToj (sx) '^oTdfjiMv The most beautiful of rivers. 

'EKdo-rog (ex) rwv Trap- Each of those who were present 

ovTcov eXsys. said. 

Aid (ex) yuvaixcov. Noble of women. 

* 22. The comparative degree governs the genitive^ 
when it is translated by than ; as,^ 

(ll^o) ^ovXyis ovhv sa-Tiv Nothing is more odious than bad 
s^Qiov xa.KYi$, counsel. 



^ We, sometimes, meet with another construction of the com- 
parative ; as, 

M£iC,av iirapoc T'/jv v.a.BB(7Tfiv.viav a§av. Greater than the usual season. 
And the government of the comparative is often, but not al* 
ways, resolved by ^, than; as, 

Kpsia-a-ccv tj fiXot;. Better than a friend. 

B 4? 



8 

23. Adjectives sigmfy'mg profit, liJceness, obedience, Jitness, 
trust, clearness, decency, facility, and their contraries; 
*and those compounded mth a-vv and 6i/,ou, govern the 
dative; as,^ 

'Hjw.<v sGTcn ^griG-ifj^ov, It will be useful to ns. 

'^vvTgo(pos TY) uTr^oTYjTi. Accustomed to simpliciity. 

EKsv^sgcti avdpi svxtov. To be wished for by a liberal man. 

Toig yevvuiois TO uktx^ov To the generous, a base thing is 
^X^qov, detestable. 

* 24. Comparatives and superlatives govern the measure 
of excess in the dative ; as, 
(Ef) AvQpwTTOjy (sTT*) ]u,a- By far the best of men. 



VERBS. 

25. When ejjtxj and yivoy^ui signify possession, property, 
or duty, they govern the genitive ; as, 
'O TriTrgacrxojxsvoj hsgov He who is sold becomes the pro- 

(xTrjjw-a) yivsToii. perty of another. 

* 26. Verbs of beginning, admiring, wanting, remember- 
ing, accusing, excelling, valuing, sharing, and the like, with 
their contraries, govern the genitive ; also those which sig- 
nify distance and sense (except sight); as,^ 



a The genitive is sometimes used instead of the dative ; as, 
Ilio-TOi ovrtq Kvpoi;. Being faithful to Cyrus. 

^ This is a very general rule. It includes all verbs signify- 
ing to 

1. Begin, attempt, undertake, endeavour — cea&e, dismiss, 

2. Admire, desire, lo-oe — neglect, ridicule. 

3. Want, ask, deprive, despair, abstain from, spare, empty, 
frustrate, err, fail — obtain, abound, fill, enjoy. 

4. Remember, know — forget. 

5. Accuse, blame, speak falsely of, judge — pardon, acquit. 



AKrSavofxon ^^o^ov. I hear a noise. 

HoLVTcjov rcav %aKu)v Yjgoi. He loved all that were virtuous. 

OySs (oiTTo) TovTou So)- Neither did he fail of having 

[xagTS, this. 

AfjisXng (^uTTo) Twv (piXctiv. You neglect your friends. 

AttoKccvsi [ex) tmv Trctgov- He enjoys things present. 

TOOV, 

27. EcTTi taken for s^oo, to have, governs the dative ; as, 
EcTTj [xoi ^gi^fxuToi, I have riches. 

28. All verbs put acquisitively, i. e, verbs of serving, 
giving, * using, * rejoiciiig, obeying, trusting, discoursing, 
* fighting, and the like, with their contraries, govern the 
dative; as,* 



6. Excel, merit, command, conquer, restrain, seize on, hold by, 

7. Value, care for — despise. 

8. Share, differ, partake of, se'parate, 

9. Distance from. 

10. Sense, as hear, smell, touch, taste. 

However, many of these verbs are, occasionally, found with 
other cases ; particularly, verbs signifying to 

Remember, desire, obtain, enjoy, the accusative ; as, 
M£[jivrjiJt.cx,i ravra. I remember these things. 

XioBa avTov. I long for him. 

Tu%£<y diravra. To obtain all things. 

Command, abound, the dative ; as, 
'HysiTO avroit;. He led them. 

Bjjy&jv ixsKirreci^. Abounding with bees. 

And many verbs seem to govern a genitive, or accusative, 
indifferently. But the genitive, in such cases, always denotes 
a part, in contradistinction to the whole, and depends upon n, 
fjt.s^o<;, or the like, understood ; as, . 

Iltj/a? oivQv. I drink the tvi^ie. 

Uiva {ri or [xs^oq £^) oivov. I drink (some, or part) of the 

wine. 

^ A preposition may be understood, after verbs o^ following, 
and discoursing ; as, 

Kv.o\ovBt:y {crvy) rivi. Tofollow a person. 

0[A.iX£iv (a-w) a-ofoK;, To converse with wise men. 



10 



Bovi^siv TYj TTdTgihi. To help his country. 

Eixeiv noiKois, To yield to misfortunes. 

Ma^sa-Qui roig TroAejOotoij. To encounter with the enemy. 

TLas avYig uvTM Tzovsi, Every man labours for himself. 

29. A verb signifying actively governs the accusa- 
tive; as, V 

TouTov (TV chg uyccQov avdgoc You honour him as a good man. 

* 30. VeilDs of sense, with the Attics, commonly take 
an accusative; as, 

Axouco ravTu. I hear these things. 

3 1 . Every verb may take an accusative of a correspond- 
ing noun ; as, 

AovXsDsiv dovXsioiv oLidyj- To scrve a base slavery. 

IloXe/jtoy TToXejxi^siv. To wage war. 

32. Verbs transitive of accusing, giving, and their con- 
traries ; and those of declaring, and comparing, with the 
genitive or dative, govern also the accusative ; as, 

Aog (J.01 ruvra. Give me these things. 

33. Verbs of asking, teaching, clothing, and concealing \ 
* And sometimes with the Attics, verbs o^ giving, hurting, 
and accusing, with their contraries, govern two accu- 
satives ; as, 

^A'TtccvTOL (e<^) ere lila^o- I will teach you all things. 

Xg»3 aiTziv Tovg ^sovg [xol" We should ask good things of 

IT a, or sTTt) uya^cc. the Gods. 

ATTOcrre^st ju^s (xara) ra He deprives me of my goods. 

(E;j) c-£ ysuw jxs^y. I give you wine to taste. 



11 



PASSIVE VERBS. 



* 34. Passive verbs take a genitive of the agent, after 
them, which is governed by a preposition understood or 
expressed; as, 

Kai %gos xj^umv Xsi<^^y\TQ' Shall I be left by you also? 

('Ttto) (^iKmy vixcovTcii (p<- Friends are prevailed upon by 

Ao/. friends. 

Tlgog ^soDv co^jxijjxsvof. Impelled by the Gods. 

* 35. Sometimes passive verbs have a dative of the 
agent after them ; as, 

To jxsysSoj sKsivco rcov The greatness of his actions. 
vs7rgoiy[Levcov, 

IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

36. An impersonal verb governs the dative ; as, 
Msyio-Tov ccuTO) eSo Jsv eiva*. It seemed greatest to him. 

* 37. Xp>], TrgsTTsi, and hi, it hehoveth, govern the accu- 
sative, with the infinitive ; as, 

X§>j v,aac TTOisivrovTo, You must do this. 

* 38. Ae< and x§^i signifying necessity or *want, eXXsiTrsi, 
y.=Xsi, dioKpsgsi, jotsrecTTi, svh^sToii, with their compounds, 
govern the genitive and dative ; as, 

Xgvj G-oi [ttXyiQus) <piA«jv. You need fi'iends. 

Exsivm Toig cpuvKois (i"--- The wicked have a share of 

gos) [/^sTsa-Ti, them. 

A SI avTOj (ji, or i^sgos) He has occasion for money. 



12 



THE INFINITIVE. 

* 39. The infinitive mood is governed by verbs, adjec- 
tives, or some particle, such as cij, Trgiv, «iX?'j /^^X?* > ^^> 

'Oa-Tig lav sTTiQuiJ^si, rsi- Whoever desires to live, let him 

gcto-^o) viKuv, try to conquer. 

'12o-Tc auTovs [j,sv s^siv. So that they possessed them, 

* 40. The infinitive is often put elliptically, oga, /SAstts, 
(TKOTTsi, or cha-Ts being understood ; as, (see obs. 77.) 

Autos evi 'nqMTOKTi [(SXstts) Do you yourself fight among 

[j.a^£<rQai. the first. 

('i2(7re) fxixgti duv. Almost. 

* 41. The Greeks use y^sWoo with an infinitive, to ex- 
press the fiiture, both active and passive, which in Latin 
would be rendered by a participle of the fiiture and the 
verb sum; as, (see obs. 88.) 

Uegi chv v[xsi§ jxsAXsTs xgi- Of which things ye are about to 
vsiv. judge. Judicaturi estis. 



PARTICIPLE. 

42. Participles govern the case of their own v^erbs ; as, 

Tioug vsooTsgovc tokxvtu rjfirj Instructing the younger men in 
'KOLilsuovTsg. such manners, 

* 43. Verbs of gesture, sifxi, rvy^avcti, vTrotg^oo, yivo^Lai, 
Kvpco, gp^oj, (pQcivu), and Aavfiavw, are used, with participles after 
them, to express, what in Latin would be rendered by 
some tense of a single verb ; as, (see obs. 89 — 92.) 

^lyovTo (psgovTss, They carried away. Abstulere. 



13 



^lyoL vuv s(TTaic, Koii [ji=v5 Be now silent standing there, and 

ch§ xupsis ex««v. remain as thou art. Es. 

'^coxgciTYig Tuy;)^av=i tte^j- Socrates walks. Ambulat. 

Trarcov. 

* 44. Participles are often used, instead of the infinitive, 
after verbs signifying an emotion of the mind; as, (see 
obs. 86.)^ 






He continues to love me. Per- 
se ver at am are. 

I remember that I did it. Me- 
mini fecisse. 



THE SUPPLYING OF GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 

* 45. The infinitive mood, or a participle, is used to 
supply the place of gerunds and supines; as, (see obs. 80.) 

Ei^ TO drquTiMTOLi <Tvv- To gather the soldiers together. 

ayoLyeiv, Ad congregandum milites. 

Evsqytrcav avTovg sjcTYi<ra' I acquired them by doing kindly. 

jxrjv. Benefaciendo. 

Uoisiv aKTxgov, Shameful to be done. Turpe 

factu. 

* 46. Verbal adjectives, governing a dative of the agent, 
and the case of their own verbs, are used to signify neces- 
sity ; as, (see obs. 96.) 

TguftTsov £[ioi e7no-ToX>3V. I must write a letter. Scriben- 

dum est mihi epistolam. 



* Under this rule are comprehended verbs signifying to per- 
severe, desist, perceive, appear, and the like ; as, 
i^t^av iraveToii, Sitire desinit. He ceases thirsting. 

Allied to the principle of this rule is the construction of ad- 
jectives followed by participles, (see obs. 93.) 



14 



THE CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 

* 47. The cause, manner, or instrument is put in the 
dative; as, 

KguTsi (ev) i/^Yj^uvuis. He conquers by stra,tagems. 

(Ev) aqyvqzon^ Koy^oLKTi Fight with silver weapons, and 
[/.a^ov, xai TTuvTU KqoL- you will conquer all things. 

''•' 48. The question nxHiither ? is commonly answered by 
zic, or TT^o^^ with the accusative : nxJhere ? by ev, with the 
dative : *whence P by sk or aTro, with the genitive : and Iri/ or 
through what place P by §<«, with the genitive ; as, * 

Ev Vcof/.Yj, In Rome. 

E<j TYjv A-vrio^eioiv, To Antioch. 

Ex, or uTto Tr}s TToAswj. From the city. 

Aiu yy}§. By land. 

* 49. Adverbs in Qi and cri are used to signify at a place : 
in h, <rs, or ^e, to a place : and in ^ev and ^e^from a place ; 
Is is also added to accusatives, to signify to a place ; as, ^ 

KogivQoSi otTciu voncov. Inhabiting houses at Corinth. 

KXicrtYi^ev aveiXsro %aX- He took the brazen spear from 

xcov s-y^os. the tent. 

E</*; cf:^<>jv5£. I go to Phthia. 

50. The distance of one place from another is put in the 
accusative ; as, 

E(ps(rog dTTs^si, {koltu) Ephesus is distant three days' 
rqioiv Yji/^spoov blov, journey. 



^ The preposition is often omitted; as, 

lovviQv l§ov a^fA0(jf.B9a„ We came to sacred Suniiim, 

AiOeoi vociuy, DtvelUng in Aethe?'. 

^ These adverbs in a-i are, originally, Ionic datives plural, 
governed by cv understood ; as A^^vtjcti, for ev A6-/}vaiq. 



15 



* 51. 'Hie time whcji is commonly put in the genitive, 
sometimes in the dative^ ; haw lo7ig, in the accusative ; as, ^ 

{A<a) Yiiisqa^ xoti vuKTog, By day and night. 

(Ev) f^aspa f^iot. On one day. 

Ogyri (pikowrcov {KdTci) The anger of those who love, 

oXiyov idyyzi ^govov. prevails but a short time. 

* 52. The price or measure of any thing is put in the 
genitive ; sometimes, the price is put in the dative ; as, 

Av^piag {kutu to (ji^yitcos, >], A statue twelve cubits high. 

SlvYia-uf^riv («VT<) Ivo o^o- I bought it for two pence. 

Kctiv. 
(Etti) xP^^^i^ T>)v vijcvjv «)- He bought the victory with gold. 



ABSOLUTE CASES. 

* 53. The genitive case of a substantive is often put 
absolutely, the former substantive, evsxa, %apiy, ex, s^, or 
some case of ris or elg being understood ; as, (see obs. 
10, 11. and 17.) 

Toe {sgya) UXotrcovo^, The works of Plato. 

0Xy/A7r;a? ^ (i"'*]^*]?) AAs^- Olympias the mother of Alex- 

avlpov. ander. 

Ettouvco [hsKu) ryjj <piKo- I commend you for your love of 

fj.ov(nug. music. 

T*3? yrjg (|«.£^oc) ers'^ov. They laid waste part of the land, 



^ The genitive is used when an indefinite part of the specified 
time is expressed ; the dative, when that time is to be distin- 
guished from other times ; as, 

E7£i/£To ^/x,£j)a5. It happened in some part of a day. 

E-ysvETo i^wspa. It happened on a certain day. 

Adjectives formed from nouns of time are, sometimes, used 
in place of the nouns themselves ; as, 

llavfJiAB^ioi lAoXtTTj ^£ov IXaaY.ovro. They p)ropitiated the god tvith a 

song, during the whole day. 



16 



ASpaoToy §* syrjfis [li^iav He married one of the daughters 

ex) ^vyoiTquiv, of Adrastus. 

i2 (Ij/sxa) T»jj avuihias. O ! impudence. 

* 54. The dative is often put absolutely, especially after 
oLVTog, (Tvv being understood ; as, 

Tcov avToov spycov (<ruv) The same works with them. 
exsjvoij. 

* 55. The accusative is often put absolutely, xuto. being 
understood; as, 

(Kara) Trargidu Voofxaios, By country a Roman. 
MaXa (xara) ^wju-ov g;:^o- He was much enraged in his 
Xcti^Y}, mind. 

* 56. A substantive with a participle, whose case de- 
pends upon no other word, is put in the genitive absolute ; 
sometimes, by the Attics, in the accusative ; very seldom 
in the dative ; as, ^ 

* The dative is seldom used, in such expression, unless with 
a preposition ; although it is from this case that the Latins 
took their ablative absolute ; as, 

Ata5>j>t7j ETTt v£y.^oiq [roii; Sia0£jM,£- Testamentum mortuis (testanti- 
voit;) ^e^aia, bus) Jtrmum est. A xuill is 

of force, the (testators) being 
dead. 
'T-n-to-xvov/xEvo? c-sr' £/xci Tf xXvjpoyo/Aoj Promising to myself that he 
re6vy)^£a-6ai. toould die, (me haerede) leav- 

ing me his heir. 
It is doubtful whether the Geek language does not also ad- 
mit the nominative to be used, as an absolute case, as the 
English does ; as, 

Maxojuevot xa* jSao-tXei;^ xat Kypo?, The King and Cyrus fighting, 
Kai olafA(f avTovi; vtteo €Y.arEO(JV, and their respective assistants 
oTcoa-oi jxev rccv oc/xcpi ^aaiAecx. for each of them, Ctesias tells 
wmBavQv, Krria-ioci; Xsysi. kotv many of the kings men 

fill. 
But the expressions, in which the nominative appears abso- 
lute, may be considered as elliptical ; the finite verb, with some 
conjunction preceding being understood ; as, (see obs. 32.) 
*Orav) at rifji.t§ct,i i^yo^ivai (Tjo-av). When the days tvere come. 
E-TTstSav) ol aroariccrai -Kara, to When the soldiers tvere in the 
(AEaou vtbiov [arvyxotfou) ovreq. midst of the plain. 



17 

(E J, ij e^)*) ^X»oy TsXkovTog, The sun rising. 

(Kara) Tgia. ovra tcov Act- There being three garrisons of 

<rv§ioov ^govgia. the Assyrians, 

{^uv, >j £^*) olj ysvofxsvotg. Which things being done. 

The participles of impersonal verbs are often 

used absolutely ; as, 

Tsi^KTon dsov. It being necessary to build a wall. 

(Mera) Axouo-fiev* It being heard. 



ADVERBS. 

57. Adverbs of time, place, quantity, *ordei', exception^ 
and the like, govern the genitive; as,^ 

Eyyu^ (e<p') aXo^ Near the sea. 

Ilsga (uTreg) 8ix>jf . Contrary to justice. 

* 58. N>j and jw-a govern the accusative ; ofta, and h[i.w^ 
the dative ; as, 

Ma (oiMvv[xi) Aia. By Jupiter. 

*A]u,a ((Tuv) Tw v^ocTi. Together with the water. 

* 59. Two or more negatives strengthen the negation ; 
as, (see obs. 29.)^ 

Ov 8uv«Tov ouhsTTooTTOTs It Is impossiblc ever to do any 

ou^sv TovToov TrgcuTTSiv, of these things. 

60. Some derivative adverbs govern the case of their 
primitives; as, 
A^iws TYii KXria-EU)^. Worthily of the calling. 



^ That is, adverbs formed from nouns. 

^ Sometimes two negatives make an aflBrmative, as in Latin 
and English. This is the case when a verb comes between 
them; as, 

Ov lv)iai/.ai (A'fj [A£i/.vqadai. Nou possuni 72071 meminisse. I 

cannot forget. 

c 



18 



PREPOSITIONS. 

*61. The prepositions avn, aTro, ex or s^, and Trgo^ 
govern the genitive ; ev, and a-vv, the dative , c»j Dr gj, and 
ava, the accusative; as, (see obs. 97 — 104?.) ^ 

E0 ArTiKYis. From Attica. 

Ev oixco. In a house. 

Eij oixov. Into a house. 



The poets sometimes have am, with a genitive, 

or dative ; as, 

Avu [sTTt) vrjo^ £^>j He went into the ship. 

* 62. Aid. and uTrsp govern the genitive or accusative ; 
cijxtpi, STTJ, TTgpi, and WTTO, the genitive, dative, or accusative ; 
a-s, a 

A<a TTu^o^ Through fire. 

Ett* ^^svou. Upon a throne. 

Etti Tijv y>]y. To the ground. 

Eip' Ittttco, Upon horseback. 



a The general principle is, that when rest is implied, the geni- 
tive or dative is used; when motion tovoards, the accusative. It 
may be observed, farther, that as the dative denotes the end, 
a[ji,:fi, £%iy 'Ttepi, and v-iro, are followed by a dative, only when they 
express close arou?id, resting or depending on, immediately 
under-, or under the influence of; as, 

A/Af' ccixoia-iv. Close around the shoulders, 

Eiri 'Ttaa-i Tovroiq, In addition to all these things. 

Ta £^' ijjixtv. The things depending on ouj'- 

selves, i. e. in our ovon poxver, 

Tlfpi ra a-rs^vtp. Close about the breast. 

E//.aiq iito X£^(ri* Under my hands, i. e. poii^er. 

*TTro ®Ea. Under the influence of God. 



19 



* 03, Kara, from, or against, commonly governs the 
genitive ; at, or according to, the accusative. Mera, mth, 
the genitive ; to, or after, the accusative. Hupoc and %pog, 
from, the genitive ; at, or mth, the dative ; to, beside^ m 
against, the accusative; as,"^ 
Kara Trergcov. From the rocks. 

Kara Suv«,aiv. According to my power. 

Mera (ptXwv. With friends. 

ITa^a Kvpiou, From the lord, 

n^oj yv[xvu<Tiov. To school. 

The poets sometimes have jxstoc, with a dative; 

as, 

Met (ev) oivdgoi<n //.ap^scr- To fight with men. ' 

64. A preposition often governs the same case, in com- 
position, that it does without it ; as, 
Atdjvjjj e}C}cvK^v^sToiu He is tossed from his chariot. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

65, The conjunctions, xaj, re, 8e, aXXu, jw,=v, curs, and 
the like, will have the same case; and, commonly, the 
same mood and tense after them, that goes before them ; 
as, 
Ila/x7roXXoy o^kov ovrog. The multitude being very great, 

Tcai {XY} £)(^ovToov Ti <pix- aud they having nothing to 

yaxri, eat. 

^EaigciKCK. Kdi liiZiuaqritqri'AOL. I have seen and borne witness. 



a Ilapa and 'it§o<; are joined, in this rule, for the sake of con- 
ciseness ; as they may, commonly, be translated in the same 
words. But there is a marked distinction in the ideas expressed 
by them; ifoc^a implying permanencey duration^ possession^ and 
Trpo^', contingency. 

c 2 



20 



66* Av, SUV, STTSl^aV, IVU, Q<PqCt, OTTCtiC, OTOCVf OTTOTOCV, XCtV, XSV, 

and vjg, are, for the most part, joined with the subjunctive 

mood; as,* 

'hoe. yvcoTs, That ye may know. 

Kav «jxeivov otycjovi<roo[jia.i. Though I should fight better. 

Av, xav, and xev, are often used to give a sub- 
junctive meaning to the other moods ; as, (see obs. 7h 
15, 76.) ^ 
Av xa* T^yyoLVzi ^ota-iXsvg Although he were a king. 

cov. 



a It cannot be said that any of these conjunctions necessarily 
requires the subjunctive mood; nor that there is any difference 
in the meaning of the conjunctions, according to the different 
moods with which they are used. In this respect the verb and 
conjunction appear totally independent of each other. Practice 
only, and the careful reading of the best authors, will direct the 
writers in the appHcation of this rule. Some grammarians have 
been at great pains, in specifying with what particular moods 
and tenses certain conjunctive particles are used; but he who 
depends on any other rule, in this case, than his own Jcnowledge, 
and imitation of chaste xuriters, will be ever liable to errors. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



CHAPTER. I. 



1. Of honours, to a city, la- 
bour, of an old man, to oxen, to 
lions, faith, to a horn, of parsi- 
mony, O Thomas, two sons of 
Atreus, of Pythagoras. 

2. Mountains, of two winds, 
bows, of a day, O Mercury, to a 
day, two brothers, of a Saviour, 
O woman, to Jove, life, of muses. 

3. To trees, O man, of De- 
mosthenes, to Latona, of a phrase, 
to a father, O king, of a poet, to 
a mouse, of an end, virgins, 
friendship. 

4. To tribunals, O robber, a 
ship, to men, of a king, bowls, 
of a mind, oxen, to daughters, to 
shepherds, a stream, parts. 

5. To nations, of a flock, a 
priest, a fish, to a husband, of 
spring, to feet, O Hector, O Ajax, 
a crow, of a wall, two serpents. 

6. Of two men, a storm, a 
father, cities,"Arabians, a snake, 
to fathers, a comb, lions, walls, 
clusters, winter. 

T Dogs, to a vine, a sea, a 
wild boar, of an army, to horns, 

c 3 



TifJLYI, Ci<TTV, 'TTOVOS », 

TTpsa-^sugj jSoyj, Xeoov, ttkt- 
Arpsi^fig, YlvQwyogocg. 

Zsvg, /3<oj% [xov(ru, 

AevSpov, otVYig, A>jjtAO<r- 
Ssvr^S, AriTco, <ppaa-is, iru- 

ftuj, "TTspots, 7rotgQsvo;% (pi' 
Xicc.^ 

Byjjxa, KY,(rTYig, volvs\ 

/Soy J*, ^vyotTi^g, 'KOiy^riVj 
poos\ {/.epog. 

ESvoj, ttcov, Ugsvg% i^- 
^yja, TToa-ig, sag, Troy^, 'Ex- 
Twp, A<aj, xopaf % rsixos, 
dpuxoov, 

AvQgooTTOc, KotiXa\^% Tct-^- 
Tvip^, iroXig, Apoi^, o^ptS^ 

'TTUrrip, XT£IJ*, Xsoov, tsi- 

XOS, ^orgvs^, ;5(^e*^ajv.a 

Kucov, ctfj^TrsXog, ^aXcx.s'-' 
craa, avgy<TTpciT£VfiUy)C£pu§.^ 



of a mother, kings, a stone, fa- 
vour, to a heart, O boy. 

8. A mother, to an oak, O Si- 
mois, a giant, of power, to honey, 
birds, of heroes, roses, O sun, 
O Scythian, to orators. 

9. To birds, of two Uons, to a 
bone, debts, O Hercules, sons, of 
a word, to shepherds, of a citadel, 
snakes, of a foot, to bellies. 

10. Teeth, O Neptune, to fa- 
thers, a belly, to bodies, honours, 
O impudent, to mustard, of a 
hatchet, parsimony, of youth, of 
doors. 

11. Of Pelides, a fountain, of 
love, to Phoebus, marriages, two 
heads, of oxen, servants, night, 
to power, of two horses, a port. 

12. Of Sparta, of a wound, a 
goblet, to cities, to reverence, 
two mouths, O interpreter, 
trenches, virtues, to two hands, 
to myriads, a multitude. 

13. Air, two eyes, a beach, 
flowers, to a well, of years, of 
water, customs, Trojans, Greece, 
O judge, of a tripod. 

14. Possessions, a sea, coun- 
tries, eyebrows, knees, O Jesus, 
disciples, of a spear, a kingdom, 
parents, of Atlas, laughter. 



^ocpi^^ asap, TTCtig, 

vjpoog, podov, y|X*oj, ^xu5)jj, 
pi^Toop, 

Opvig,\soQV^ oa-TSOVfyfS" 
og, 'HpaxXsTjj, vlsvg^ STrog, 
vofj^sug, OCG-TV, o<p^$% TTOVg^ 
yacTrip, 

OSouj, no<reiBa;v,7raT>j^, 
yacrT>5p% o-(a[ji.oi, tj/x>3% xv- 

S«;% vsoTYig, ^vpoL, 

T>5f, ^oi^og, yoifJLog, xs^ct- 
A>5, ^oug, ^spuTTCiiv, vv^% 
xguTog, Ittttoc, Xi[/,rj]/,^ 

^7rapTa,,lAxoj, xprirr,p\ 
7ro\ig, uidcoc, cTOfJia, spfJ^r}- 
vsug, TCi(pgog% apsTif, x-^^^ 
IJ^upioic, TrXriQvg,^ 

Ai^rip% oixfxcc, fr)yfx.iv^, 
uv^og, <ppso(.p, BTog, vdcop, 
shg,Tpwg,'EX\ixg% xpirr^c, 
TpiTTOvg. 

Krsxp, aXj% TTOLTpic, 
o<ppvg, yovv, Iijcrouc, [ji.otQr]- 
r>)c, dogv, /3a(7iAsia% tp- 
xsvg, ArXtxg, ysKcog,'^ 



€S 



CHAP. II. 

A verb agrees with its nominative, in number and 
person. 

Verbum cohaeret, &c. Eton, 
Concordantise sunt, &c. Wetten. 
A verb agrees with, &c. Bell. 
Concordantiae duae sunt, &c. Holmes, 

ACTIVE. 



1. Pres. I HONOUR, thou 
strikest, he says, ye two write, 
they two give, we send, ye bring, 
they are wilUng. 

2. Imperf. I was carrying, thou 
wast seeing, he was sending, they 
were laughing, we were running, 
ye were thinking. 

3. 1 . Fut, Ye two shall drive, 
they shall say, I shall follow, 
thou shalt call, ye shall labour. 

4. 2. Fut, I will do, he will 
bury, ye will cut, they two will 
strike. 

5. 1. Aor, I wondered, they 
gave, he did, thou placedst, they 
two remained, we wrote. 

6. 2. Aor, They did come, I 
did find, thou didst see, we did 
strike, they two did give. 

7. Perfi I have seen, we have 
got, ye two have spoken, he has 
honoured, we have laboured. 

c 4 



Ticy, TUffTW, KsyoOf ygot- 



5s£<;, xaAsco, Troveco. 

TVTTTOO. 

QctviJi.ot^u)f d^^oofJiif'Trpoia''- 
Ep;^Oftaj, evgKTKctiy £*§«;, 
'OgctoOy Tvy^civoo, XsyeHy 



24 



8. PL peif. I had written, ye 
two had known, thou hadst 
made, they had struck. 

MIDDLE. 

9. Pies.Thou sittest, he comes, 
they turn themselves. 

10. Imperf, I was beginning, 
ye were hurting yourselves, they 
were standing. 

11.1. Fut. Thou shalt prepare 
thyself, we shall take, I shall 
know, ye shall receive. 

12. 2. FuL Ye two will strike 
yourselves, he will drink, I will 
turn myself. 

13. 1. Aor. He ceased, they 
two did, I stretched myself. 

14. 2. Aor, We two did give, 
they were, he did place himself. 

15. Pe7'f. I have suffered, we 
have struck ourselves, thou hast 
trusted, he has escaped. 

16. Pl.psrf. He had left, I 
had heard, they had come. 



TUTTTOO. 



'HjUtaj, lxOfX,Ol.ly TpSTTM, 



Aqx^l^^h ^>^ot'7rTCJ0, ia-- 



rrifxi. 



^ 



TUTTTCO, -jriVOOt TpSTTOO. 



ITat/co, irponT(roo, reivco, 
^svyoo. 



PASSIVE. 

17. Pres, He is named, we two 
are nourished, they are admired. 

1 8. Imperf, I was struck, they 
were prepared, it was written, 

19. 1. Fut. I shall be punish- 
ed, thou shalt be left, he shall be 
sent. 

20. 2. FuL Ye will be struck, 
he will be delivered. 

21. 1. Aor. It was said, we 
were found, ye were loved. 



TuTrrco, %apoi<rxsvxt^(0, 

'ypa.(poo. 



TvTTTCOy WTraWoUKTOO, 



'25 



22. 2. Aor, He was buried, they 
were manifested, I was sent. 

23. Perf. It has been done, 
they have been struck, we have 
been loved. 

24. PL perf, I had been edu- 
cated, it had been judged. 

25. P. P. Put, She shall be 
buried. 






PROMISCUOUS EXAMPLES. 



26. He was challenging, he 
was laughing, to make, having 
perceived, thou mayest send, to 
go, he was blaming, they would 
guard, he was learning, he had 
stood, he did perceive, having 
descended, seeing, he did take, 
to give, I may become. 

27. I would affirm, they may 
be, I was contented, they might 
leap, he would be taken, it has 
been wrought, I would appear, 
being about to find, he has suf- 
fered, having composed, he would 
compare, to be able, to have 
struck, having read. 

28. They have used, to return, 
they died, to think, he would re- 
buke, to have sinned, he buried, 
ye think, we did come, they have 
been injured, they were thinkmg, 
hear ye, they showed. 

29. Thou wouldst have, to go 
away, they might be deceived, 
they were vexed, having hoped, 
to be about to be taken away, he 



Hgoxa.Xscti"', ysXoia}', 

TTO), TTOQSVOfJiOlt, [J.SlJL(pOf/l,CH, 

(pyAao-cro), [^avQctvoo, Io-tyi- 



A(pogi^o 



Slli.1, 



tg. 



voo, s^sgyot^oixai; d&xsM% 
sugKTXco^, TTota-^u), o"yvTi- 
fl>)jU-j^, TTCcgsmu^oo^y dvvot- 

^gCiO^OLl^y BTTUVSg^O- 

[/i>oii% u7ro&VYi(r}ca)^y vojtti^co, 
S7riT<|xaco^, aiJ.oigT(X.voo, ^oiTr- 
TM, OlOfJiOCl, a(pixvso[Ji,on, 
a^iKsu), oioiJLCii, aKOucii% 

Aco^, uvictco , eX'm^(ti% 
T<fi)j/xi^, vixaod'y ejxo)^™, 



26 



(xg^Ofj^ai, sifj^i^ Sjaraercrw, 



yivojxi 



^5 6 lojav- 



would learn, having put on, hav- ^euof^ui, p>jo-(rw , sixcc^oo, 

ing conquered, to have resembled, &=», /Sjoco", /3oaa;^, a^so-xw. 
thou sawest, they were broken, 
thou comparedst, it will be ne- 
cessary, ye shall live, I would 
shout, they are pleased. 

SO. To have been hurt, honour BXaTrrw, Ttju-aco*", dvva- 

thyself, he is able, they may turn, ftai, t^sttco, xccXvoo, ottto- 

he shall prevent, he hath been /xa<, (rvy^sco, y»voju,ai^% 
seen, they confuse, to have been, 

he would begin, thou shalt be, h.vTreu) 
they have ordained, to have been 
grieved. 

31. Nothing was made, John Ou( 
answered, do not ye say that it v>jj oc7roKgivo[j.on^^, ovx. au 
is four months, and the harvest Asyw on rsTgufMYivov eiju,i, 
comes ? Jesus bore witness, Cy- acti 6 ^ggio-jotoj sg^o[/,ai ; 
rus received, then the man went lyjcrouj fxecgrugsco, Kvgo$ 
away. Ssp^ojooa*, aTrsg^ofLoci^ ouv 

6 oiv^gcowog^ 

32. Philip has died, Chrysan- ^<Aj7r7roc ^vrjcrxa;, Xg'j- 
tas did stand up, and he spoke a-uvrag avKrrriiJii, xai Xsyco 
thus, the time would be, the man wds, Tcoiipog bi^ii, ocvSgcoTrog 
shall love, Panthea having sent (piksca, ^ UuvScitx. Trsfjt.Trco^ 
did say, do not grieve, O Cyrus, snrov, ju-ij XvTrsaf^, so Kvgog, 
that Araspas is gone. on AguG-Trag oixofJ-ai. 

33. Amabam, novi, invenies, scribunt, cecidi, ibat, cu- 
curristi, "^ timuit, veniebamus, sedebo, ero, pugnabat, acce- 
pit, moriemur, ^ absumptus est, ureris, percassus sum, 
pugnavi, magnificabitur. 

34. Lex est, tempus videtur, homines cognoscunt, filius 
moritur, rex existimabat, majores fuerunt, pater coepit, Deus 
potest, discipuli veniunt, poet« cogitant. 



2? 



CHAP. III. 



An adjective agrees with its substantive, in gender, 
number, and case. 

Adjectivum cum substantive, &c. Eton, 
An adjective agrees, &c. Bell. 



1. A USEFUL man, a common 
city, sweet honour, black sorrow, 
of a bad custom, to a worthy 
man, a holy day, O immortal 
poet, a sweet voice, two black 
eyes. 

2. The eighth woman, an ho- 
nourable fortun^e, of a bloody 
sword, lofty mountains, a sweet 
word, a happy life, every way, 
true horns, a tender heart. 

3. A greater man, much wealth, 
most admirable wisdom, to a more 
formidable giant, a most graceful 
virgin, happy gods, a most bene- 
volent nation, a black wall, swifter 
horses. 

4. A most hateful name, a bet- 
ter man, the deepest well, to the 
greatest father, two horns, of 
three men, the third hour, of 
this thing, another ship, to my 
book, some women. 

5. % Sweet peace ; horses that 
work together, stand together 
more agreeably ; the servants 
were equal sharers ; my friends, 



TTOkig, Tiy^ri rjSyj, Xwrcri jics- 
Aac, >j9oj xuKO^i avOgcoTTOS 
a0<o^, rji.(<spoc ayioc, 7ro<rj- 
TYis aQotvarog, (poovY} r^dvcy 
oix[j(,!X |xeX«f. 

Tvvy] oydoos^ "^^X^? t'- 

ogog u\[/>)Aoj, sTTog yXuxv^. 

xspoig aXYi^vis, xsxp re^rjv. 
AvYip jxeyac, Trokvg 

TTXOVTOS^, (TO(pi(X. ^UVpLOKT- 

t^vos svvovSf Tsi^os [j^sXaSy 

Oyojxa s^Qgog, avYjg 
ayot^og, (pgsag ^aSvg, ttu- 
Ti^g fJ^syuSi Suw Jcsgocc, rgstg 
oivQgctiTrog, oiga rgirog , 
T^gayiLcc ovTOg, vavg aA- 
Aoj% ^iSXiov e[jt,og, yvvi] rig, 

E»p?jv>j y^dug' 6 iTTTTog 
(rviXTTOVcov, TrgOrOg (riivi(rT>;- 
ju^r* 6 wtYigsTY^g i(ro^Qigog 
siy^r ciVYig (jSiAof, o jw-sv 



^8 

the battle is near, for the ene- 
mies advance. 

6. Thou art a happier man ; 
all the men sailed wounded; 
those tragic actors ; that is the 
temple; Agamemnon was pass- 
ing on joyful. 

7. Wherefore, the law is holy, 
and the commandment holy, and 
just and good. 



Tgauii^oLTias 5e iraj s-rri- 
ttXbco^' b rgoLyi-KOi vrroxgi- 

hgov Argsi^Yis %oLgoiy(o^on 
yri^ocruvog, V 

aoLi svtoXy) a.yio§, xon 



8. Homines illustres, capita caduca, cranium muliebre, 
alia dogmata, laeti et alacres viri, quaenam hera, pulchrum et 
bonum virum, maxima pars, dagmonia multa, medio mari, 
benedictus rex, priori tempore, humanae speciei, rectam 
rationem. 



CHAP. IV. 



A verb signifying actively governs the accusative. 
Accusativus sequitur verba, &c. Etmi, 
Transitive, &c. Wetten. 
Verbs signifying actively, &c. Bell. 
Regimen Graecis cum, &c. Holmes, 

1. -Tor ye have the poor al- 
ways, but ye have not me always 



2. I did one work, and ye all 
wonder. 

3. Do ye not know that the 
unjust shall not inhei'it the king- 
dom P 

4. The samts judge the world. 



'O TTTca^og yag ttocvto- 
T6 e^oHi syoo 8e ou ttuvtots 

Etc g^yov TTOieoi^, xui 

H ovK giSeo)™^, OTt aSi- 
xo$ |3acr<As*a ou x\r}govo~ 

'O uyiog 6 xo(7i/,os xgivcjti. 



€9 



5. Fear God, and honour thy 
parents. 

6. i/<2if^ those thatjlatter, as 
those that deceive; for both, 
when trusted, injm^e those who 
ttnist them. 

7. The poets know that this is 
so, and the difference. 

8. ^ And thinJcest thou this, O 
man, that judgest them who do 
such things, and dost the same, 
that thou shalt escape the judg- 
ment of God ? 

9. For it has not shoes by the 
smith, nor arms by the shoe- 
maker. 

10. But the disciples did not 
Jcnonx> these things. 

11. Hippocrates having cured 
many diseases, fell sick and died ; 
the Chaldeans yor^^o/c? the deaths 






cocrTTsg o Si;o(.7iara.oo, uiJi(^o- 



Tepo§ yap 

'Oxi ourog outw§ ^X^^j 
xa.1 6 ^loifogu ktv}u,i 6 ttoi- 

YlTYig. 

AoyiloyjoLi Se ovrog, co 

UvSpCJOTTOg, 6 KpiVOti^ 6 6 TOi- 

ouTog TTpota-o-oo^, kui iroieoo^^ 
avTog, OTi o-y sx,(pevyoo^ 6 
KpiiJ,u 6 &so$; 

OuSs ytxg UTroS^jjU-a s^co 
8<a p^aXx£U5% ouSs OTrAa 
Sia 6 (TKVTsvg.^ 

OvTog &s oux yivooaKco^ 
6 [j,a.ST^TT^g, 

'iTTTTOKgOtTYig TToXvg vo(yo$ 
iaoy.a.1% vodscti^ ctTToQ- 
vYi<TX,co^' 6 ^ccX'^uiog TToKvg 



of many, then fate took them off Savarog Trgoayopsvoo^, sitcx. 



also; Alexander, and Pompey, 
and Caius Cagsar having entirely 
destroyed whole cities so often, 
and having ad off many myriads 
of horse and foot in battle, at last 
departed from life themselves. 



Spoj, xa* no/jt:r>)iOr, ,xa» 
FaVoj KotKrug okog TroXig 
agdYjV TO(T(XVTU}Cig avciipsM% 
KCLi £v TTctgotTOi^ig itoKvg 
fjivgiag iTTTTsvg^ xon Tre^oj^ 



xaraxoTrrcti 



xat auTO^ 



TTore s^sp^oficci^ 6 ^iog. 
12. Jubebant eos, habebant currus, mittunt nuncios, 
dicebat haec, adducere obsides, socios metuebant, relinquere 
nullum, vera loqueris, eosdem honoro, quos ego video, be- 
nevolentiam habens, videbunt filium, dimittet nuncios, mu- 
tabat ^ habitus. 



30 



CHAP. V. 

An Adjective is often put absolutely in the neuter, XPW^ 
beinor understood. 

o 

When an infinitive or a sentence is in place of the 
nominative to a verb, or substantive to an adjective, the 
verb is in the third person singular, and the adjective in the 
neuter gender. 

When an infinitive, &c. Bell, 



1. Which then is Nireus, and 
which Thersites? for neither is 
this yet manifest, 

2. They do nothing new^ but 
plunder, perjure, write down their 
debtors, and weigh the farthings. 

3. Let some one having come 
show, either that I do not say 
these things true ; or that those who 
have been deceived will trust him. 

4. Yes ; for the light was a 
pleascmt thing, and to die, dread- 
ful and to be avoided, 

5. Receive me quickly, O sea, 
having suffered dreadful things, 

6. % Tell me, said he, are not 
you one of those persons, vvho 
think that riches are a better 
thing than brothers ? 

7. To depart from men is no- 
thing dreadful, if there are gods, 
for they would not encompass you 
with evil; but if either there are 
none, or they do not care for 
human affairs, ^ischat is it to me to 



YloTBqoc ovv 6 ISipsuc, 
ycai TTorepog 6 ©sgcriTrj^; 
ou^STTOo yap ovrog ^YjXog. 

Kaivo^ ou^sig ttoisoo, ak- 

KOL upTTOt^CO, STriOpXSOO, TQ- 

xoyXvi^sco, oooXoa-TccTSco. 

Hccpsp^ofjion^^ rig hix- 
vviJ^i^, ri chg ovx. ccKi^d^g ou- 
TQ5 syoo ksycti' yj chg o e^- 
(XTraTeoo^ Tiicrreuco auroc. 

Naj* Yjdvg yap eifjii 6 
(pcog, xsii 6 TgSvijjtt/, dsivog 
Kui (psvxTsog. 

As^ofLCii^ eyoj, co ^x- 
KoLddOL, deivog Tracr^u),'' 

YaIttov zyoi, (pr,\Li, ov &)j- 

'TTOXJ Xai <7V Sl^i 6 TGIGVTOC 

avSpoo'TTOc, 6$ xgYi(riu,og vo- 

*0 £0 avQpCtiTTOg dTTSp^O- 

jxat^, s< fXBV ^sog sijxi, ovlsig 
dsivog' xcLKo: yag crv oux 

Tic^'^ OVX, siij:,i, )j cy fxsXsi 
ciVTOc 6 a.v^qmTTSio:, Tig syui 



31 



IlpcoTsus, ouji oLTriQavog, 
svuXiog ye s<jw<i* xa; ej As- 



aya5oj"% 



live in a world void of gods, or ^aco sv ycotriiog xsvoj d=oc, 

void of providence. >5 Trgovoiu xsvo^ ; 

8. We received CEdipus, and 'O OidiTrovg, koli 6 fjiSTcc 
those with him, when unfortunate, sksivo^^, sxTrmTw^^ vTroh- 
and we have done man2/ other x^i"'^'' ^ srsgos iroKvg zyoi 

friendly 2iVi.^ lionour able things to vTrug^oo^"^^^ (PiXuvQoooTros 
the Thebans. 

9. It is not incredible, O Pro- 
teus, that you, being an inhabi- 
tant of the sea, become water; 
and if you would be ever changed cov ottots aXXacro-coP^, ojxwj 
into a lion, neither is this beyond ov'^s ovtos s^co Tna-rig, Ei 
faith. But if it is possible that ^s koli Ttvp yivof^oci 5yva- 
you, dwelling in the sea, can be- roc, ev 6 ^olKckktol oitcsoo, 
come fire, I entirely wonder at ovrog^ Travu day/xa^o; xa< 
this, and disbelieve it. aTrio-rw. 

1 0. Our excellencies and de- Atto 6 j eywP'^ 6 
fects are wont to arise nearly from (t^sIov utto uvrog 
the same causes. 

11. I speak those things, which 
I have seen with my father, and 
ye do the things which ye have xai o-v ovv 6g opaco Trupa, 6 
seen with your father. TruTYig <rv, outo^ Troisco. 

12. Indeed ??zfl;m/ ify^zV?;g-5, but it Nyj Zeyj yicti TroXvg, ax- 
is not right to publish the7n to all Xa ov ^sjaij sx(psgco uvrog 
men, nor to reveal ^^^ secrets. "Trpog uTrag, ovde 6 uTroppv}- 

Tos s^ayogsvcti. 

'O jtxsv ovv, CO uvYjg A5)j- 

AoyOJ^, TrpOTDSTTCO 6 ?s»^'P^ 
TTOiscjo <ru, ov^i TcaXoog zyoi 

14. Perniciosissimum est, non modo domum suam de- 
struere, sed etiarn corpus, et animam. 

15. Hi multa quidem dicunt atque pr cedar a, sed nihil 
intelligunt. 



OtJTO$ 

xoti 6 xuxog ysvvaco™ (fnXsM. 

Eyco 6j oguoo Tragcc b 

TTUTYip sycv^ ovTOg Xaksco, 



13. But Athenians, I do not 
think it is proper to relate the 
strength of Philip, and by these 
words, to persuade you to do the 
things which are necessary. 



3Q 



CHAP. VL 

Substantive verbs, verbs passive of 7iaming, and verbs 
of gesture, have a nominative both before and after them, 
belonging to the same thing. 

Verba substantiva, &c. \^ 

Nominativus postponitur etiam, he. Eton, 
Verba passiva vocandi, &c. Wetten. 
Tuy^(xvu)y =<]Xi, &c. 
Verbs of naming, &c. BelL 



I.And Cyrus took care, that 
they might never come in *izitliout 
having s'weated. 

2. What then can one say, 
when such old persons are lovers 
of lifer 

3. I wish there were some- 
thing, said Araspas, in which I 
could be iLsefid, 

4. Gordian *was proclaimed 
emperor being about thirteen 
years old. 

5.^ Be such to your parents, 
as you would wish your own 
children to be to yom'self. 

6. Am I not free P am I not 
-an apostle P have I not seen Jesus 
our Lord ? If / am not an ajjostle 
to others, yet doubtless I am to 
you ; for ye are the seal of mine 
apostleship ; are not ye my '■d:o7-k 
in the Lord? 



6 Kupoc, OTToog fx^riTTOTS av- 

idgcjoTog yivoixen^ eio-gijxi.^ 

Tif ovv ay ng bti Asyco^ 

OTTOTS 6 TYjXlXOVTOg ^iXo- 

El yaq yivoiMdi^, (prjijn 
6 AgoLO-TTOic, 6, Ti eyu) av 
yivofji^cti^ X§W^(^0S' 

Tog^lCCVGC TTSqi ETOC^ TTOV 

yivofji^oci^ TpKTxon^sxu av- 
TOxpciTcjog av(x,deix.yvy,i.^ 

ToiovTog yivoi^oLi Trepi 6 
yovs'jg^, olog^ av ev^oixai^ 
irspi (TcOLUTOV^ yivQfj.ui b 
csoivrov TTdig, 

Ovx ei/ii 6\BV$spog ; ovx 
eifMi UTTOdroXog ; ou-^i Ir^- 
<roug 6 Kvpiog syu) opuco; 
E< uKKog ovx e<jx< octto- 
CToXoc, aXKct. ye <rv eiix,r 6 
yccp (Ti^pixyig 6 eu,og ufro- 
(TToXyi (TV sijxr ou 6 epyov 
eycti (ju eiju,j ev Kvpiog; 



Ch. 7. 



33 



7. It is directed to such persons 
as advance to any actions, to set 
before their eyes those who are or 
have been good; and to consider, 
what Plato would have done in 
this case, what Epaminondas 
would have said, hoio Lycurgus or 
Agesilaus would have appeared. 



8. And then to leave all tliose 
things, that thou mayest not be 
cast in hound, like sheep. 

9. Forte quce humana sapieniia 

10. Hie familiaris mens erat ab 

11. Hie sapientissimus est, qui 
revera, est, quoad sapientiam. 



HS>] 8s 6 T010VT0§ 'na.q' 



STTOfJiaij 



/3a8i Jco" 



ri; 8= oiv 'TrqcKTdOi^^ ev ou- 
rog HXaTcav, ng 8= otv ei~ 

8s av OTTTOfji^oii^^ Avxovgyog 
V) AyYi<JiKoLOg. 

Kai TOTS TTug exeivog 

^aAAco^, chg 6 Trgo^oiTOV, 

est. 

juventute. 

novit quod nihilo dzgnus, 



CHAP. VII. 

The conjunctions, xa<, re, h, aXXcx., jxsv, qvts, and tl)e 
like, will have the same case; and, commonly, the same 
mood and tense after them, that goes before them. 



1. By night and day, in the 
mountains, and the tombs. 

2. He confessed, and denied 
not. 

3. I think that we all have 
the pledges of faith, in our own 
jnifids, and in our own hands, 

4. Let this robber^ Sostratus be 
cast into Pyriphlegethon ; aiid 



Nu^^ xai Yjfxsgoi, sv 6 

'OjU-oAoyso;, xa» odtc «§- 

Evvosco on zyoi nzcig 6 
iTKTTOg^^, ev 6 Yi(j,sTsgos 
^^X^^^ xa* sv ^{xsTsgog 

'O jw-sv XYj<rTY}g ovTOg 
%co<rTguTog eg 6 ITo^j^Xe* 



34 



Ch. 8. 



tiie saailegious man be torn asun- ysW^ bil^olXKvP • o h U- 
der by the Chimaera. qoo-^jKo^ v-no 6 Xj/^aipa^ 

5. ^ You have already seen 'O TropSfjjsvg ovtoc, 6g 
this Jh'fyma7i who brought you c-v^ ^lotTrspaco, y.a.1 6 Xifji^vrj, 
over, and the lake. ^jSyj opaco. 

6. WeoughttoshunMo5^^'-zW5 'O"^ o vjSo^ jx^ aTrAooc, 
of manners which are not simple, aXXcc sTri^ovXog, qivKaaaca^^ 
huti?isidwus, more t/ian vipers. [ji^aXXov dsi >} o^=;^<?. 

7. I shall endeavour to show 
you, what this is, which has 
caused me both the name and 
the calumny. 

8. Qui proximi sunt Deo, et circa eum ordine instructi, 
geometrce, et arithmetici, et philosophic et medici, et astronomic 
et grammatici. 

9. In his enim solis silentio melior est oratio; in aliis 
vero tacere satius est qudm loqui^ 



Eyw (TU TTSipUOO^ UTTO- 

hixwfji.i'^, rig ttots biih 
OVTOC, 6g sya) ttoiso) 6 rs 
ovo[X(X xai b diu^oXYj, 



Av, 



CHAP. VIII. 

SUV, sTTSiSav, »va, o<ppu, ottooc, otolv, OTroxav, xav, ksv, and 
thg, are, for the most part, joined with the subjunctive 
mood. 

• Av, xotv, and xsv, are often used to give a sub- 
junctive meaning to the other moods. 

Subjunctivo junguntur, eav, &c. Et07i. 
Av et SUV, &c. Wetten. 
The conjunctions »v«, &c. 
The conjunctions uv, &c. Bell. 

1. But the chief priests con- EouXeyco™ h 6 ap%ie- 
sulted among themselves, that pevg, Ivoc xai 6 Au^agos 
they might kill Lazarus also. «9roxT6»v«.^ 



Ch. 8. 



35 



2. Though we should take to us 
both the earth and the sea. 

3. As soon as you will have as- 
cended^ if you see Menippus the 
Cynic in any place. 

4. And she asked him, that 
he would cast out the devil. 

5. And if you desire these things, 
both to be rich and to govern. 

6. If you he fond of learning, 
you will learn much. 

7. H Look inward ; the foun- 
tain of good is within, and always 
able to spring, if you always dig, 

8. No other shall hurt you, 
unless you please; then only you 
will be hurt, when you think that 
you are hurt. 

9. He hath blinded their eyes, 
and hardened their heart, lest 
they might see with their eyes, 
and understand with their heart, 
and he converted^ and I should heal 
them. 

10. And it is necessary often 
to take courage in hunting, when 
any one of the strong wild beasts 
sets itself against us. 

11. Unless the ^rain having 

o o 

fallen die, it remaineth alone, but 
if it die, it bears much fruit. 

12. Yet he should not, on this 
account, appear better than a 
noble and skilful commander. 

D 2 



Ka< ciV 6 y=a, xa» olv o 
'ETTSidciV •xa.yjkfJTOi oivsg- 

ViTTTTOg 6 KVCOV. 

Kai egMTuotr avrog, hex. 

lEciv S= XXI oitrog e$sXoo, 
jcat ttKovtsu) xui a^oyja. 

'TTOKVfJiCi^jrig. 

Ev^ov /SAstto)* evSov o 
'TTYiyvi 6 ayu^Qc, koii as* 
uvuSKu^m Syya/x,a<^, sotv 

aSl (TKaTTTCJO, 

gav [xr) (Tu ^=Xm' tots 5= 

Ti/tpAoco avTog 6 o(pQotX- 
[xog, Kdi TToogooo uvrog 6 

Z«< iCiOfLUl^OiVTOg. 

Kixt 6 ^u^rj^ TToXKcixig 
avayxr} dyjyo;™ sv 6 ^Yiga., 
OTOtv Tig 6 uKxiixog drjgiov 

aV^lCTTYll^l, 

Eav |U,>3 6 ycoKKog ttitttco^ 
airohYi(rxoo^, aurog fi^ovog 
ixsvoo, eav ds aTroSvrjcr^cio'', 
TTOkvc xaqTTOg (pspcjo. 

Ov (xiiv Sia ovTOg^ aya^og 
Zoxscti^^ uv yzvvoix'og xca 
(JTguTviyixog a'JYig. 



36 



Ch. 9. 



13. Lord, if thou wert here, Kvgiog, ei sifii (hh, ovx uv 
my brother should not have died, aTroflvvjo-xo;^^ eyoo 6 aSeX^Dj. 

14-. Idcirco et legislator primum hoc posuit in judicum 
jurejurando, " Sententiam feram secundum leges;" illud 
nimirum bene sciens, quod, cum conservarentur civitati leges, 
servatur etiam democratia. 



^ 



CHAP. IX. 



One substantive agrees with another, signifying tlie 
same thing, in case. 

One substantive agrees, &c. Bell, 



1. I Paul the pj'isoner, 

2. Of God the father and the 
Lord Jesus Christ, 

3. I am a relation to you, be- 
ing also myself a cur, 

4. ^ For Homer, relating the 
wounds, dissensions, revenges, 
tears, chains, and sufferings of (ttuo-i^, rifj^wgia, ^axgv, 
every kind of the gods, seems to Sso-jw-ov, ttu^os Tra/xc^y^ro;, 
me, as much as in his power, to 
have made the 7ne?i who fought 
at Troy, gods, and the gods, men. 



&£og TzaTfig xui Kvgio$ 
li^<roug Kgiarog, 

^uyysvyjf sifjn cu^, xvccv 

'Oli^rigog yag, syco "^ox-sca^ 
ituga^itoii/.i rgoiv[/.o(. ^eog. 



5, And a certain Pharisee of 
the council rising up, by name 
Gamaliel, a doctor of law, ordered 
them to put out the men a little 
while. 

6. You may teach the son of 
Croesus; for I wish to be a talker, 
and not a statue. 



6 [JiSV S7CI 6 IXltXKOS^ aV" 

QgcoTTog (xrog^^ stti 6 Suva- 
[Ji^ig% ^sog "TPOisco, 6 ^sog Bs, 
a.vQgcti'n-og. 

Av»(7T>jjU,»^ 5s rig ex 6 
(Tvve^giov ^agKraiog, ovofxa. 
FajxaXirjA, vofxo^i^adKcc- 
Xog, xsXsvcjo s^oo ^gct^^J 6 
av^gooTTog %Oizca.^ . 

'X2^a <Tv^ 6 ILgoKTog 
'TTUig TTcudsvca* syco yxg 
KuXog ovx, uv^gioig sifjt^i 



Ch. 10. 



37 



7. Venia, O Ajax, (ei debetur) si, cum esset homo, ap- 
petivit gloriam, rem dulcissimam, propter quam et nostrum 
imusquisque periclitari sustinet; quandoquidem etiam vicit 
te, et haec apud judices Trojanos. 



CHAP. X. 



The infinitives of substantive verbs, such as siva*, yivscr^cni, 
8cc. have the same case after them that goes before them. 

The infinitives simi, &c. Bell. 



1. The name "boaster" ap- 'O fiev aXu^cov syco^ ys 
pears to me, to lie upon those nsoho '^ox,zoi ovoixa, xsifji^oii stti 6^ 
pretend to he richer than they are, Tr^ocTroieco™'^ xai TrXova-^og 
and more valiant, and who promise eifjbi, >j sifjii, xon av^gsio^, 
to do those things which they are 
not fit to do. 

2. You see how nothing hinders 
the Scythian Anacharsis to be ad- 
mired, and called a wise man. 



„Sf 



h 



'Ogaco (hg ovdeig xcoXvui 
^(jtu/xa^o;, re xai cro(pog o- 



3. f The shortest, and safest, 
and most honourable way, is, in 
whatever thing you wish to seem (o-y) av ^ovXoixoci hxsoo a- 
to he good, to endeavour to he yakg eijLti, touto hou ((re) 
good in it. yivoyrUi^ ayaQos TrsigoicaJ^ 

4. Mihi videtur injustus esse, a quocunque quispiam 
beneficiis affeccus, sive amico sive hoste, referre gratiam 
nonenititur. 



d3 



38 



CHAP. XL 



One substantive governs another, signifying a different 
thing, in the genitive case. 

An adjective in the neuter gender, without a substantive, 
governs the genitive. 

Greecis cum Latinis, &c. Wetten. ^ 

One substantive governs, &c. 

An adjective of the neuter, &c. Bell. 



1. Blessed be he that cometh 
in the name of the Lord, the king 
o? Israel. 

2. Now is the judgment of this 
'world; now the ruler of this 
world shall be cast out. 

3. And immediately his ears 
were opened, and the bond of his 
tongue w^as loosed. 

4. You see a citizen of the 
"xorld. 

5. A little time breaks the 
connections of the wicked; but 
no length of time can destroy 
the friendships of the good. 

6. The miiid of man upbraids 
itself, when it is hypocritical. 

7. Nightly visions are not only 
the echoes of dailTj accidents and 
conversations, but also \hfi produc- 
tions of a remiss habit. 

8. If ye desire that I should 
lose my good things, that ye may 
acquire things which are not 



Xsvg 6 lagixrjX. 

Nuv xoKng etjxt 6 xocfMog 
ouTog' vvv b cqyjjiv o xocr- 
ju-o^ oirrog saSaXXcjo s^co. 

ro§ 6 cixoYj, xoci KutxP 6 5ccr- 
[xog 6 yXcjocra-cc cturog. 

'O xo(rixog TToXiTTig ogaco. 

'O ^gy (puvXog (twjyiQbicc 

oKiyog x^ovog liccKuof' b os 
6 (TTrovOuiog <piXiu ovl= av 
6 TTug ciioov e^ciXeKfoo,^^ 

^Togi^oo exvTOU^ 6 6 av- 
QgcoTTOg ^v^riy otuv VTTOxgi- 

'O vuxTsgivog (pccvrucricc 
ov {Jiovov 6 [xs^Tifj^sgivog sifxi 
(TvyTV^nx. xcii btJuXicx. ciTn^- 
X^il^^i aAXa xui 6 paSyaoj 

E< zyjj^ a^iccti 6 ayct^og 
6 ejxa'jToy aTroAXujU-*^^, Ivot 
cv 6 u,riayuSos ^=§<7roisoj"'^. 



Ch. 11 



89 



good, see yourselves how unjust 
and thoughtless ye are. 

9. For as when a light is pre- 
sent at night, it draws the eyes of 
all to itself, so the beauty of Auto- 
lycus attracts the regards of all to 
itself. 

10. ^ He will easily find his 
leathern coat again, and his 
spade, in the lees of his cask. 

11. I am a deliverer of inen, 
and an healer of passions, but 
upon the whole, I desire to be 
\he prophet oi truth audi freedom, 

1 2. By their present great j 03^, 
they had something of a slight 
hope, that, in future, they should 
not be consumed by any other 
disorder. 

1 3. You desire nothing of a 
dvfficidt matter, wishing to know 
what the law is. 

1 4. A resemblance differs from 
a symbol ; inasmuch as the re- 
semblance aims, as much as pos- 
sible, to represent the very nature 
of the thing, and it is not in our 
power to vary it ; but the symbol 
is wholly in our power, as exist- 
ing by our imagination alone. 



1 5. The end of tragedy and of 
history is not the same, but oppo- 
site ; in the former you must 
strike and captivate the hearers, 

D 4 



xoci uyvctiiLMv. 

'£l(T7rsg yag qtolv (^syyog 
ev vv^ Tra^eijw,*®, Trctg TrgoT" 
ctyco 6 o[j.fxot,ovToo xoti 6 Au- 
roXvKo; koiKKoc tto.; e(psK- 

'PaSjcoj evgio-KM^ 6 Siipfs- 
gu uvQig, Kui 6 dixsXXa, ev 
6 rgu^^ 6 TTjSof. 

QgoQTTO^, xai largog 6 ttuQoc, 
6 ds 6Ko§^% aKr^^sia xtxi 
•TroippYia-ioi 7rgo(pYiTYig sif/^i 

'O TTuga^gYifxsi 'jrsgi^w 
grig, sg 6 sTreiToi ^govog, eX- 

av VTTO (xWog vo(rYiix<x,^ ttots 
STi diai^Qsigco.^^ 

TtgayiLOL s7riSy/x-gw, (SouKo- 
l/^cnyivooornoo^ TigsiiJii voy.og. 

Aiix(psgoi3 6 6ixoiooy,oi 6 
G-vfji^oXovS' KotQoa-ov 6 [/.SV 
6[ji,oiooy.ai 6 <pvcrig avrog 6 
'TrgccyixoL, xaru 6 8uvaT0c°% 
oiTreixovt^af ^ovXofioti, jcui 
ova sifjii sTTi syoo^ auTog [/,£- 
TdTrXoL^TdcxP' b §s ys (tv^jl^o- 
Kov b oAo^"*^ STTi zyca s^a*, 
ccrs xai ex jt^ovoj v<^Krru- 
fxcii}^ b Yiy^sTsgog STTivoioi. 

'O TsXog rguyoolicc xcci 
IcTTopia. ov b avTog, olKXol b 
svavTtog* sxsi jw.ev yap dsi dia 
b TciQavog Xoyog^, exTthoKT' 



40 



Ch. 12. 



at present, by the most persuasive o-w^ 
words; in the latter by real facts 
and narrations, you must, always, 
instruct and persuade those who 
wish to learn. 



xotTU 6^^ Tragej/Ai*', 6 ukovco' 
sgyov xui Xoyo^, ei§ 7rot$ 6 

16. Socrates, et Homerus, et Hippocrates, et Plato, 
eorumque admiratores, quos etiam aeque ac deos colimus, 
tanquam p^cefecti quidam, atque Dei ministri. 



CHAP. XII. 

The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender and 
number. If there comes no nominative between the rela- 
tive and the verb, the relative is the nominative to the verb ; 
but if there does, the relative is governed by some word in 
the sentence. 

Relativum cum antecedente, &c. Eton. 

The relative, 6j, ^, 6, &c. 

If a nominative comes, &c. BelL 



1. That the word might be 
fulfilled Kahicli he spoke. 

2. Having seen the chariots 
ttj/z/c^ Joseph sent, the spirit of our 
father Jacob revived. 

S. You seem never to have 
seen the polypus, nor to know 
what this fish does. 

4. There was a certain rich 
man, *who had a steward. 

5. % What time or what oppor- 
tunity do ye seek better than the 



'Iva 'KXviqoa^ 6 Koyo^ 6$ 

SiTTOV. 

(TTSXXoti IcOCDJip, OtVU^aiTTVgcCti 

6 Trvsufxa. IukcoS 6 TruTYig. 

"^U doXSCO Ovde TTOXUTTOVg 

opaa) TTciiTroTs, ouh 6^"* 

Av^gooTTog ng eifjn ttKov- 

Tig X9°^°^9 *3 "^'^ ''^*" 
gog b TragBiixi^ uyxQog ^i^- 



Ch. 12. 



41 



present ? or when will ye do the 
things which are necessary^ if not 
nowP 

6. Whom I often saved when in 
danger of being cut off by the 
Phrygians. 

7. I lost none of those persons 
whom thou gavest to me. 

8. One, of those who sat with 
him, having heard these things, 
said ; He is happy who shall eat 
bread in the kingdom of God. 

9. It is superfluous to say these 
things to them, which they know. 

10. The first person is that in 
nxhich the speaker speaks of him 
self; the second^ in which^ of him- 
to whom he speaks ; the third, iii 
which^ of another. 

1 1 . Such are hyperboles and 
plurals ; but we shall show in the 
sequel, the danger which they 
seem to have. 



a-oo'\ SI jx>3 vvv ; 

xivdvvsvoo^ xaraxOTTTw"'^ u- 

'Og 8»5a;ju,< syco, b^ uu- 
rog ovheig a7roAXu/xi. 

AkOVOO^ Tig, 6 (TVVCiVUKSl- 

jxa*^, ovTog, uttov' Maxu- 
piog 6g (potyvS^* aprog ev 6 
/Sacr/Asia 6 0goj. 

TIspi(r(ros^^ ouTog Xsyco 
Trpoc uvTog, hg iG-Yifxi, 

TlgooTOg Trpoa-coTTSV 6g^ 
'TTspi eoiVTog^ (ppa^cD 6 Xs- 
yoi)^* ^suTspog, bg Trsgi 6 
Ttqog bg b Koyog' t^itoc, bg 
TTspi sTspog, 

ToiovTog^^ TTcag xon b 
vTrsp^oKv}, xoLi b TrXyj^uvTi- 
xog^^' ^iixvupn ds ev 6? 
STTsiroc b xivluvogy bg e^co 



sixca. 



m7 



12. Circumque ipsum omnes ordine instruct! sunt, locttm 
unusquisque, quern ille dedit, non relinquentes. 

1 3. Diram quandam narras homiiium stultitiam, qui tanto 
amore amant rem pallidam gravemque. 



4rjg 



CHAP. XIII. 

The prepositions avn, cctto, sx., or sf and tt^o, govern the 
genitive ; sv, and o-uv, the dative ; eij, or sg, and «va, the 
accusative. 

The poets sometimes have uvu, witl^ a genitive, 

or dative. 



Eton. 






Praepositiones sunt, &c, 

Genitivo soli, &c. 

Dativo soli, &c. 

Accusativo soli, &c. Wetfen, 

The prepositions txvri, &c. 

Ev and <rvv, &c. 

Ava and sij, &c. Bell, 



1. I DID proceed, and I come 
Jrom God; for I have not come 
Jrom myself^ but he sent me. 

2. He fights for his own things, 

3. Then one of the disciples 
says. 

4. I did catch in the cave^ hav- 
ing returned from the feeding of 
my cattle, many fellows. 

5. Pleasure is rather in rest, 
than in motion. 

6. And all the brethren mth 
me, to the churches of Galatia. 

7. When he went to the Per- 
sians. ' 

8. He was a manslayer ^ot?? 
the beginning, and he has not 
stood in the truth; because the 
truth is not in him. 



yicn xcx.i rixoo' ov yap wtto 
e[j,cx.vrov eg^ofji^oti, a.X\a 
sxeivog eydo a7:o<rrsXXw, 

Ylqo idio; fLU^O[xcn. 

Asyco ouv slg SK 6 ixccQy}' 

TYiS. 

KocraXa-^^avco sv 6 av- 
rpov, ciTTO 6 )/Q[j.ri ctvadTps' 
(pco', TToXvs ris. 

'HSovrj (/.aXXov ev Yjgefiix 
sip.1, Y^ 5V xiVYi(rtc, 

K.CH 6 <7vv syoo ttu^ udsK- 
<poc, 6 sxx.KY^(riu 6 FaXaxja. 

Ore eig Hspa-vig ccttsi- 

£i[jii ccTTO a^X>5, xa< sv 6 
uXr^Qsicc ov^ la-TYifxr oti 
aXri^nu ovx sifj^i sv avroc. 



Ch. 14. 



43 



9. And some were Grecians of Eifii ds Tig'ExXrjv, ex. o 
those who went up, that they might uva^uivca^^, Ivu 7rpo<Txvvsai^ 



worship in the festival, 

1 0. It is a fine thing to receive 
immortal glory, in exchange ^07* 
a mortal body, 

11.^1 think it the duty of a 
good citizen, to choose the safety 
of affairs, before grace in speaking. 

12. It contributes much to 
their learning, to be temperate, 
that they see the older men also roj, ot^ kui 6 Trpscr^vg 
living temperately, through every bpaoo, avu iras V^P^j ^^ 
day, 

1 3. Having in his hands, the 
crown of the far-darting Apollo, 
071 the golden sceptre, 

14. Ego meis posteris generis princeps ero, meumque a 
me genus incipiet, tuum vero in te desinet. 

15. Alii vero, constructo rogo ante tumtdos, et effossa 
fovea quadam, adolentque sumptuosas illas coenas, et in- 
fundunt vinum, mulsumque in foveas. 



BV eopTYj, 

xuTciXXa<T(rcjo,^'^^' 

6 6 TTpuyiJioi crcoTYj^iu, avri 
b BV b KzyiJ yoLp\<; alpsoo.^ 

6"® [xavSavM^ crooippovscjo olu- 



'^TSjJipi.oc Ts s')(ai sv y^cip 
hxYi^oKog AttoWmv, Xgy- 
(Tsos avci (rXYjTTTpOV,^ 



CHAP. XIV. 



Aia and vTrsg govern the genitive, or accusative; ay,<^i, 
iTTiy TTsgif and vtto, the genitive, dative, or accusative. 

Aitx, &c. Ajx(p<, &c. Bell, 

GENITIVE. 

1. 1 HEY are troubled jf^rOT/^^ TocpoKra-cjo S*a tt^^; q 
all their life, ^log. 

2. Take away desire entirely, 'O ogs^ig TravrsXooc, stu 
at present. o Trapsiy.i^', avaipeoQ,^ 



u 



Ch. 14. 



3. Begin therefore from small 
things ; never say of ani/ thing, 
that I lost it, but that I restored 
it. 

4. Your forgetfulness, aboiU all 
things, is near ; and the forgetful- 
ness of all, about you, is near also. 

5. He was always discoursing 
about the affairs of men-, consider- 
ing what was pious, what impious; 
what honourable, what shameful ; 
what just, what unjust. 



kq'-/o\LCL\r* TOiyugovv wno 

^sis siTTOv^, on OtTTOWv- 
ix,i uuTog, uXXu on wko^i- 

Eyyuj jCirv 6 (To^, ttsoi 
TTOLi, XrjQyj' syyvg Se 6 Tra^ 

TTSgi (TV, >^r}&Yl» 

AvTog Ttsqi avQgcoTTSiog 
ccsi diaXsyo[ji,a.r o-xottsoo, 
Ti§^^ sv(rs^T^S, Tig cta-sSrjg^ 
ns xuKog, rig aio-^pog' Tig 
dixutog, Tig oc^iKog. 



>^ 



DATIVE. 

6. Strip this man also, for 
thou shalt see many, and ridicu- 
lous things, concealed tinder his 
garment. 

7. And they were astonished 
at his doctrine, for he was teach- 
ing them, as one having power, 
not as the scribes. 

8. And the general of the 
Lord says to Joshua, loose the 
shoe off thy feet, for the place 
upon nsohich thou hast now stood, 
on it, is holy. 

9. They have the horses tied by 
the feet to the stalls; and if any one 
would go against them, it is a la- 
bour to loose the horses at night, 
a labour to put on the bit , a labour 
to put on the saddle, a labour to 
put on the coat of mail ; and it is , 
entirely impossible, that they 



Atto^uo;^ xoLi ovTog' ott- 
TOfji^ai yotg TroXvg, x.cti y=- 

XoiOg, VTTO 6 l[XCiTlOV XgVTT- 

Koti SK7rXYi(r<rco'^ siri 6 h~ 
Icfx/i uvTOg, sifxi yoig SiSao"- 
xco uvTOg, cvg E^ov(rioi s^co, 
ov^ (hg b ygay^^LUTSug, 

Kai Kzyui 6 ug-^idTgu- 
TYiyog Kvgiog irgog Iridovg^, 
Auw™^ 6 VTrodrii/^ci 6 Trough 
<ru^, 6 yotg TOTrog stti 6g vvv 
*Vt>j/jh, stti oiVTog^, ayiog 

STTl 6 (pOCTVYj' KOLl SI Tig STTl 

avTog^ eifxi^, sgyov jooev vv^^ 
Kvcfi^^ iTTTTog, egyov Se ^a- 
Xivooo^, sgyov 8= sttig-uttco^, 
sgyov ds STnQoogoixi^a)"^^' 
■.avccSotivoo^^^ Bs STTl iTT'Trog^ 
sXoiUVM^^ S/« 6 crguTOTiS'-^ 



Ch. 14. 



45 



having mounted on the horses 8ov^, 7ravTa7racr<v olIvvuto;, 
could drive through the camp. 

ACCUSATIVE. 

1 0. Cyrus sometimes invited a KaXsco s^t^ ^sittvov 
whole company to supper, with 
the captain. 

11. They came, not on account 
(^ J^sus alone, but that they 



Slti OSITTVOV 
Kvgog OXO^ TTOTS TU^tg, (TUV 

Eg^G[j^ai^, ov dice 6 I)j- 
(Tovg [jiovog, aXKoL hex. xcn 6 

Au^agog f/Soj.^ 

Ex^oyj^sco xa» avTog, cruv 
TTsgi avTog. 

AXXu ov^i xai VTTO ysoi, 
wg oi[ji,cn\ TcaXog eg^OfJisii, 



might also see Lazarus. 

1 2. He also goes out to assist, 
with those that are about him. 

13. But, as I think, you did 
not come the most beautiful per- 
son, U7ider the earth. 

14. Many at last were spent ^ 
weakness; for the disorder first 
seated in the head having begun s^sii^i^ yug S;a Trag 6 a-co 
from above, went throughout the 
whole body. 



YloKug oG'Tsgov 



sigoti^' x.ai 






15. % If God hejbrus, who 



can be against us ? 



jtjta^, civcoQsv ag^O[jt,on^y 6^^ 
sv 6 >ts<paAtj TrgctiTOV l^gvM^^ 
xaxog. 

E* 6 Qsog vTTsg eyoo^, ng 
KUTx syco; 

Arag sittov syco, Tcoog o 



16. But tell thou me, how the 
things upon ear'th are, and what uirsg yza,' zyoi, xai rig 
they do in the city. ttoisoo sv b TtoXig. 



1 7. And the others who fouijht 



K. 



mSh 



) (Tvcngarsiicjo 

with Darius against the Scythians ; Axgsiog aXKog stii ^^x'jfirjj^* 
because the whole Persian army on stti ovrog^, 6 -nag Ileg- 
was in their power, to destroy, ov (riKog a-rguria yivofjix", 
to save it. ^iu(pQzigai^, kch TrsgiTroisoo,' 

18. Timon shall do no such Ov^sig eri roiovTog 6 Ti- 
thing about you any more, ior the [Ji^aov sgyu^oy^oii %sgi (7L»% 
spade has completely taught him, ttuvv yxg avrog 6 dusWu 
that he ought tp choose you to Trui^ayooysco, Jog x^^"' ^^j 

avrt b TTsvia* ttpoc/jpsoo. 



got 



himself, before poverty. 

19. Sic enim vivis, quo pacto quivis servus sub domino 
victitans, non maneret. 



46 



Ch. 15. 



20. Si vero nonnunquam invitatus ad coenam veWet ac- 
cedere, quod operosissimum est plurimis, cavere scilicet, ne 
se repleant ult7^a satietatem, hoc perquam facile cavebat. 



CHAP. XV. 

Kara, from^ or against^ commonly governs the genitive ; 
at^ or according to, the accusative. Msra, "with^ the geni- 
tive; to, or after, the accusative. ITapa and 'xpoc, from, the 
genitive; at or with^ the dative; ^o, beside, or against, the 
accusative. 

— — The poets sometimes have jxsra, among, With a 
dative. 

1. The article stands tyzV/z a 
noun, and the pronoun, for a 
noun. 

2. It was terrible, not according 
to one only of the circumstances, y^ovoc 6 Trgocyfji.cx,.^ 



*0 ccgQgov /xsra ovo[j,u, 

XCCi 6 UVTCOVUfXlU, (XV r I 

Asivog sifjt,h ou xatTci sic 



3. The way to be filled is much 
more simple and straight wit/i us, 
than with you, 

4. Of not fewer than five hun- 
dred, who sailed in the ship, 
three "mtli (and) tliirty only were 
saved. 

5. As two are to four, so are 
four to eight. 



rioAu uTrKoog koli evSig 

'O ttAsco'-'^ £v 6 vauc, oyx 
sXci^vg Yi 'KSVToLKO(noi, rqsig 
Trgo: 6 TgiciKOVTU y,ovov Iiol- 

'Sic 0°^ ZvG Trgog 6 Tscr- 
(Tccpsc, ovTCJO xon 6 TS(r(rcigsg 
Tcgog oxTco. 

6. 1[ He thought that those 'O o roiovTog 'Tragcc 6 
who enquired such things fv7Ji ^sog Trw^ayou.oti^^ aQsy,i(r- 
the gods, did impious things. Tog 'koism ryeofxai,- 

7. According to the customs Kara 6 Tra^a auroj e5oc, 
•a?/^^ M^?5^fo^5, they made a noise (rujU,\I/o^=«;^ 6 oTrAoy' xa« 
all together, with their arms; and crvyuXoLXalco^^ opftucti stti 
having shouted together, they b -KoKziuiog,^ 

rushed against the enemies. 



Ch. 15. 



47 



8. And after them, all the 
other arts are the third rank, 
thus arranged, according to their 
parts; but they all look to the 

God, obeying the common com- 
mundifroin him. 

9. The soldiers, having heard 
that he did not say he was going 
against the king, applauded; and 
frvm Xenias and Pasio more than 
two thousand, having taken their 
arms, encamped with Clearchm, 

10. Already were two gener- 
ations of articulate- voiced men 
decayed, and he was reigning 
among the third. 



TTUc, Kara fLsgog fj^sv, outco 

6 TTuga avrog TrgodTuyiJ^a. 

^0(rTponiooTYig oi>covca^,6Ti 
OX) <^Yiiui^ Tragci ^ccdiXsvg 
7rogevo[^ui, sTTUiveco' Trugct 
ds azvioLg Koti Hacricov tto- 
Kvg Yi did^iXioi^, Xctf^^uvco^ 
6 ottKov, <rTpa.T07rsdeuoo^ 
TTupa, KXsup^og. 

— H5>3 Suo jasv ysvsa. 
fjisgo"^ uv&gco'^og, 

— jxsra 5s TpiTurog^^ a- 
yacrcrco. 



1 1 . Ego vero fretus venio, primum equidem dels, deinde 
legibus ac vobis, existimans nullum apparatum valere apud 
vos, plus quam leges atque jura. 

12. Ex his igitur cupiebat aliquid jam negotiorum ad- 
versus hostes genere. 

13. Cum his et Cyrum contemplabere, et Priamum et 
Dionvsium. 



48 



CHAP. XVI. 

Adverbs of time, place, quantity, order, exception, and the 
like, govern the genitive. 

N>3 and iiu govern the accusative; a/xa, and oilou, the 
dative. 

Some derivative adverbs govern the case of their pri- 
mitives. 

Adverbia loci, &c. *^ 

A/x^a et oiLorj, &c. 

N>j et jxa, &c. Eton. 

Genitivum post se, &c. 

Dativus sequitur, &c. 

Accusativus, &c. Wetten. 

Adverbs of time, &c. 

Some adverbs of order, &c. Bell. 

1. The world has gone cifter 'O ko(tij.o$ oTtia-vi avTO$ 
him, 

2. And Cyrus desired this de- 
cree, ofi account of the 6[^oTi[ji,oi 
themselves. 

3. Within the encloswe, a mul- 
titude of women was seen. 

4. From the beginning, to this 
part which is last. 

5. A tragedy cannot be ^without 
action; but it may be without 
morals. 

6. Between us and you. 

7. Sufficiently for me. 

8. Neither a feast without con- 
cord, nor v/ealth without virtue, 
has any pleasure. 

9. That which is called the law 
of a state, without obedience of the 
subjects, is quite a vain compo- i^on^, avyyguy,{/.u eiat cx.\ 
sition. Act)? xsvoj. 



'O ^g Kupog ^ovXofJiai^iy 
Tcsci avTOs sveacx. 6 Of/^OTiito:, 
ovTog 6 ;|/r)(pjcr/xa. 

EvSov TTspi^o^ov, 7rX>3- 
Qo; Tis yuvYi bpa.M,- 

Atto upx^ii MXP^ °'^°^ 

Aveo jotsv Trpcc^ig ovx, av 
yivofxcti^^ Tpaycjpdioc' avsv 
^s yjfloj yivoiLcii^^ av. 

McTa^u sy(/i 'KOLi cry.P 

^TVocpxovvTois eyca. 

OuTg (ru[/,'7ro(nov uvsv 6- 
]tjtovoi«3 OVTS ttKovtoc ^wpig 

apSTY], YltoVYj S^M. 

vofjioc, aveo TreiSo) 6 %pao- 



Ch. 16. 



40 



10. This evil is noX, far from 
madness. 

11. A bare thought by itself, 
*without utterance, is sometimes 
admired, upon account of the 
grandeur itself. 

12. Near the very great city 
Babylon, 

13. And when Gadatas was 
near these villages, he sends some 
spies before him. 

14. However, with the morn- 
ing, they come to the sea, and 
having gone into the way called 
I^orinaj they proceeded. 

15. The Athenians knowing 
that they were not concealed, 
laid down their arms again, 
except about three hundred men. 

\6. % Without you, we are 
afraid to go home. 

17. And the Assyrian having 
followed as far as he thought it 
to be safe, returned. 

18. Then the Assyrians, and 
those with them, when the armies 
were near each other, cast a ram- 
part around themselves; which 
barbarian kings do even yet, 
when they pitch their camps. 

19. At first he called himself 
nobody; but when he ran off, 
and was out of reach of my dart, 
he said that he was named Ulys- 
ses. 

20. I saw them quarrelling 



Kaci (poovv} St%a, ^ocu 

fJI^CH^Cti TTOTS vJ/iAoj XU1CC 
koiVTOU^ 6 SVVOIU, hlOt aUTO:* 

Acov syyvg. 

'O §e Tadaras ^f syyvg 

SlfLl OVTOg 6 KCtijXYl, ^SjU-TTCO 

*AjU.a §e 6 r}cog, ottpiKvs^ 
oy.ai oi^oos Tirgog 6 ^ccKa(T<ya, 
xai sd^aivoi^ sg 6 o'^og 6 EXw- 
givr] ycaXsoo^, Trogsvo^jLon.^ 

TlVCtXTKCO^ A&YlVOilOg OTl 

TTuXiv, TrXvjv Tgiuxoa-ioi [ji.oi- 
XKTTCi avi^g. 

Avsv cry, x<xi oixuh 

Ka/ 6 j«,ej/ A<r<rvgiog htco* 
Koi)^ a^gig 6g a(r(paX>j^"*oio- 
fiay^ sifx^i, UTTorgsTro).^^ 

'O ouv A(r(rvgiog, xcti b 
(Tvv uvTog, sTTSi^Y] syyvg ccK- 
XyiKoov 6 (rrguTevfj^ci yiyyo- 
lfiOii% Tct(pgog 'TTsgi^oiXXui'^' 
oa-TTsg Tcai vvv sri 6 ^ugSu- 
gog ^aa-iXevg froieco, birarav 

'O JU.SV TvgaiTQg^^ ourig 

SOtVTOV OtTTOKuKsai'^* STTSl ts 

diacpsvycti^, xoli s^oo eifjui 
^eXog, Odvo'orsvg^ ovofj,ei^(tf 



50 



Ch. 16. 



about interest, and teachincy for a 
hire, and undergoing everything, 
fen' the sake of these things. And 
those who cast away glory from 
themselves, doing every thing 
eagerly j'^r it. 

21. In their trouble, they na- 
turally remembered this saying, 
" The Doric war will come, and 
a plague "mth itP 

22. Do you see then, says he, 
before that grove, a place which 
seems to be beautiful and like a 
meadow, and illuminated with 
much light ? 

23. It has been well said, that 
every end does not appear along 
with the beginning. 

24. They live entirely for the 
succeeding time ^without bodies, 
and go into dwellings yet more 
beautiful than these. 

25. Since then you have tried 
almost all lives, and know all 
things, you could tell clearly, 
what things are peculiar to the 
rich. 

26. I think, bi/ the gods, that 
he is intoxicated with the sreat- 
ness of the things which have 
been done ; but not, indeed, that 
he chooses to act in such a man- 
ner, that the most foolish, of 
those with us, may know what 
he is about to do. 

27. No one having sense, 
fights with his neighbours, merely 



SsuoJ, KOLi TToig evsxot. ovTog 
vTCOfj^svoo. 'O^ 8e 6 do^oi 
dTToSaXXoo^, avTog kvsxot 

Ev KUTCog old eiKOc, 

'^og, 'Hkco^ AcjogiuTiog ttoXe- 
fjiog, Kdi Xoifji^og ccllcx. avTog, 

Qs 6 o(.K<rogsKsivog, roTrogng, 
bg Soxew x.oiXog re si[ji,i, xai 
Aei/xcovosiSyjf, xa» (pcagTroXvg 

Eu sipco, 6"® fj^Yj afjioc a§- 

AVSU TS a-COfJLCL ^CtCO TO 

ItCtqUTTOLV 6ig 6 STTSITU %^0- 

vog, Kui sig oiXYitrtg sti gu- 
Tog xaXog aiptxvsoiJi,(Xi. 

xoii Tocg siSsa)'"^, XzyuP olv 
TjSyj (TU<pcog, ihog [J^ev 6 6 
'^rXovo'iog.^ 

Eyco o<jU,«i fx,sv, vv) 6 
^sog, exsivog ixs^uuf 6 [j^sys- 
Sog 6 7rgcicr(ra)^' ov [xsvroiys, 
fjt.oc Zsvg, ourui Trgouigeo)^ 
TrgucTG'u}, (h(TTc 6 avoYjTog, 6 
"Ttaqct syui, sidecu^^ ng /xeX- 

Kcti TTOlSCJt) SKSIVOC. 

Ovrs TToAejaeco 6 TreXug 
oohig, VQOg s^oo, hexsv «u- 



Ch. 16. 



51 



for the sake of conquering his 
opponents; nor sails upon the 
seas, only to pass over them ; 
nor takes up the sciences, or 
arts, merely Jbr the sake of the 
knowledge itself; but all men do 
all \hmgs, on account of the plea- 
sures, honours, or profits which 
arise from the works. 

28. Ye see to what a pitch of 
^wantonness the man |,has come, 
who does not allow you a choice 
of fighting or being at peace ; 
but threatens and uses proud 
words, as they say ; and is not 
satisfied, possessing the things 
which have been conquered, to 
stay with them, but is always 
adding something about them. 



TO J 6 xaTayooviJojxai^*' 6 
avTiTacrcrco'"^* ours TrXeai 
6 TteXa.yof' ^ctqiv 6 Tregajo- 
OjM<0«P^^|X0V0V xai jxijvouSg 
ejXTTgjgia xai tb^vvj oiuto$ 
Ivexa 6 gTnfvjjxyj otvuXufji^cit- 
voi' TCOLz Se TTgaccrco Tra j, ya- 
giv 6 sTTiyivo/xai^'^ 6 sgyov^ 
rjSyj, >) xuXo$f *j (rvfL<pegui,^ 
Ogoica ol 7rQoeg^o[jt,c(i 
oio- sKyeioL av$gcu7ro$, ogov^e 
algs(ri$ (tv 5<5cojx< 6^ Trgacr- 
(Tu/ Yj ayoD Yjo-vyia* aWoL 
cc7rsi\£(oxcn Koyog vTrsgriipoi- 
vof, wf <p*3]x/, Aeyoj* xa< oux 
oloc: re e<ju<<, s^co og kutoc- 
(TTgeipa), ju-svco stti ovto$^, aA- 
Aa asi Ti$ :r^oo-wegitoaAAa;.™ 



29. Definite mihi, ad quot usque annos existimare opor- 
tet, homines esse juvenes. 

30. Quis enim absque hac bonum aliquid discat ? 

31. Vestes quidem qui commutant, ^?gor/5 eas ^estusque 
causa commutant. 

32. Et, yer canem, O viri Athenienses, certe ego pa- 
tiebar aliquid tale. 



52 



CHAP. XVII. 

The infinitive mood has an accusative before it, when 
its agent or subject is diflPerent from that of the preceding 
verb ; but a nominative, when they are the same. 

Tlie infinitive mood is governed by verbs, adjectives, or 
some particle, such as wj, tt^jv, «%§<, ftex^'. 

The infinitive is often put elliptically, ogct, ^Kstts, a-xoTreiy 
or (h§, being understood. 

Infinitivus saepissime loco, &c. 
r Modo infinitivo eleganter, &c. Eton. 

Latinum obtinet plerumque, &c. Wetten, 

The infinitive will have, &c. 

Sometimes the infinitive, &c. 

The infinitive is sometimes put, &c. 

One verb governs another, &c. 

The Greek infinitive is often, &c. Bell, 

Infinitivus subjicitur, &c. Holmes, 



1. He heard that he had done 
this miracle. 

2. Another again, ijoas shonxing 
that wealth itself was good, 

3. It pleased them that each 
should he honoured according to 
his desert, and that Q/fiis should 
be the judge. 

4. They brought all things 
sufficient, so that all the army 
supped well. 

5. I, having put you into the 
house of correction, shall per- 
suade you that lam your master. 

6. He said that he was the 



Axouo) Qvro; avTos Tfoiea 
'O rig au "KotXiv, wyctQog 

SlfXl XCil 6 TtKorjTog UVTOg 
U7ro(puivcjoJ^ 

AOKSCO KUTCL 6 ul^iO, 
eKdO-TOC TllLdCO, KugOC li 

ITaj Uuvos 'Trgoa-uyco^, 

CWJ hlTVSCO^ KuXctiS UTTUS 6 
(TTgUTlCt. 



Ch. 17. 



58 



master of his words himself, but 
fortune of his actions. 

7. Then, being such, did you 
*wish to live ? 

8. Take things concerning the 
body, as far as they are useful for 
the mind. 

9. Fear, and the law are mj^i- 
cient to restrain love. 

10. Become a friend slowly, 
but when you are such, try to 
continue ; for it is equally shame- 

ful to have no friend, and to 
change many associates. 

11. I am ready to tell ; for it 
is pleasant to remember and relate 
any thing about it. 

1 2. And he began again to teach 
beside the sea ; and a great mul- 
titude was gathered to him; 50 
that he, having gone into a vessel, 
sat on the sea, and all the mul- 
titude was at the sea side. 

i 3. Athenians, many speeches 
being made, almost, in every as- 
sembly. 

14. Demosthenes lamented 
that being the most laborious of 
all the speakers, and having al- 
most exhausted the vigour of his 
body in this, he had not favour 
with the people. 

15: H Talkativeness, if one 
*tsoould define it, isjouldseem to be an 
intemperance of speech; and the 
talkative person is such an one, as 

E S 



'O TTsgi 6 <rca[ji,a.\ f*eXg* 
sgcjog KCtiXvoo, 



jw-a/, yivofji^a 



,6h 



Se, 



ig.ac 



TToAuf sTuigos ixsTuKXoKj-a-co, 
'Eroi/AOj Ksyca* Yjdug ye 

OVV 6"^ fJI^VOtOjJiai^'^ KOLl 5i- 

^oL<TK(jo irgog b ^aXoKrcroc' xon 
G-vvayoo^ Trgog avTog Xuog 

'TtoKvg' dxTTS OtVTOg, gjEX^ai- 
VCO^^ Big TTkOlOV, TCaQYlfJLOtt sv 
6 ^U\Ci(T(TCi, XCX.I TTOtg 6 O;^- 

HoXyj, CO avr;^ ASv]Voiiog, 
Xoyog yivofji.oii, oKiyog hi, 
KUTd sKixa-Tog sxkXyig-iu. 

OdvgQjxai'^ 6 Ai^i^oa-QsvYis, 
on TTccg (piAoTTOVOj si[j.i 6 Ae- 
yoo^, xai [xixgog Sei xara- 
va.KKTxai'^ 6 6 coiy^ct axfji^y] 
sig ouroj"', %a^ij ova e;^^^ 
Trgo; 6 ^[jloc,^ 

'O XaKioL SI Tig etvTog 
ogi^co^ ^ovXofxai^, ei[ii uy 
^Ksui^^ uKgua-iot 6 Xoyog' 
'O Se XaXos TOtouTog T<f, 



m 



Ch. 17. 



uses to say to the person who meets 
him, that he himself knows all 
things. 

1 6. Having left the judgment- 
seat, we came to the place of 
pmiishment ; but there, my dear 
friend, there were many and mi- 
serable things to hear and see. 

17. But he has come to such 
a pitch of pride, that he sends to 
the Eubceans such letters. 

18. Sophocles said, ^to^^;wflf^ 
men such as they ought to be, 
and Euripides, such as they are. 

19. It is better that one should 
die of hunger, being without grief 
or fear, than live in plenty, being 
troubled, 

20. I must preach the kingdom 
of God to the other cities also ; 
because I have been sent for this. 

21. And ifCyrus saw any thing, 
any place, which would be an or- 
nament to the army, getting it, he 
gave it to the most worthy persons ; 
thinking, whatever beautiful and 
fine thing the army had, that he 
was honoured by all these. 

22. And if I shouldsee any per- 
sonperishing infire, and entreating 
meto extinguish it, I must extinguish 
it with pitch and oil. And if the 
river carry any one away, and he, 
stretching outhis hands,ew^refl^me 
to take him to myself, /must drive 



A(pi(rT>jjU,<^ 6 dixoKTTrigiov, 

sg^Ofi^ui, oo<rTe sTrKTreXXao 

(ttoXyi, 

jxsv olos hi TTOisco', "EvgiTn- 
S>35" h, olo$ eijxi. 

Ayadof K^uQs^ a7rofiv>j- 

rapot(r(rca» 

Kai 6 hsgog TroXig evcxy- 
yeki^co^^ eyu) hi o^oKnXBiu 

6 0eOj* OTl 61$ OVTO$ aTTO' 

G-reXkoo, 

K«i 6 Kvgog, eirig, ttov, 
xei\o$ £*5co^° ei$ 6 (TTgarioL, 
ouTO$ jcTaofjion ^cogsofx.cci^ 6 
U^iOS' voixi^co 6$, T»J xotXoc 
xai uyct&og iy(jjp 6 (TTgoLTZM- 

xo<rfji,£ctiJ 

diu(pdeigea^, xui <rSsvvvfji,i 
ixsTsvoo, '^no'a-u xai eXonov 

XUTOLO-^SWUlXl. Koil rjV TIC, 

6 'jroTui^og TrugofpsgM, 6 h, 6 
ysig ogeyai, oivTiXu[ji.o(xvai^°^ 
hofj^oiif a)h(0 xui ouTO^y e9r» 



Ch. 17. 



55 



him also, falling on his head, so 
that /le may not he able to lift it up. 

23. One of the powerful men, 
of the cavalry of Gadatas, (when 
he saw him revolting from the As- 
syrian,) thought that if he would 
suffer anything, he himself should 
receive^ from the Assyrian, all the 
property of Gadatas. 

24. For they must strike that 
which comes against them, and 
guard themselvesagainst that which 
runs at them; so that it is not easy 
to find, what one, of the ma- 
noeuvres of war, is not in hunting. 

25. Whenyou have to encounter 
danger for your friend or country, 
do not consult the soothsayer, whe- 
ther you ought to do it. For if the 
soothsayer declai^es to you, that the 
omens have been bad, 'tis evident 
that death is signified, or the loss 
of a party of the body, or flight. 

26. We think the "writings of 
Plotinus and Gentilianus Ame- 
lius are worthy studying; for, 
why would one think it necessary 
to touch the others, omitting to ex- 
amine those, from whom, having 
taken those things, they have 
written them ? 

27. Be ye present then, said 
he, at the doors, clothed with 
these dresses, before the sun rises, 
and stand as Pheraulas the Per- 
sian shall tell you from me. 

E 4 



Ex 6 TctloLToti; Itttt/xov, 
6 Suvaroj Tij avYiq (sTrei 
oqccoy avTOS 0L<^i(rTrii/^i' , rxTTi 

\ai/.§ccvoo^, iraqoL 6 Acrcrygj- 
0;, Tra^ 6 Tu^ara,^, 

sTTiipsgcjo^^ (h(TTs ov pothog 
svgiTxoo^ Tis, ev 6 ^Y^gct 

'Orav dsi (rvyictv^vvsvoo^ 
(pjAoj^ rj TTOiTgig, {jt,ri jxavrey- 
Ofj^cii, SI a-vyxiv^vvevTsoV 
Ka.i yccg uv itgosntov (tu 
[jt^oiVTtg, <poivXo$ yivofxcii^ 6 
Isgov, dviXov OTi 6 ^avuTog 
<Tr\iuciivv), ») '7rYigco(n$ [Jt^sgog 

YlXooTivog xa.1 TsvTiXi- 

avog AfjisXiog eyoo u^iog^^^ 

Sl[/.l VOjXi^CO eTTiO-XOTTSCoP 6 

<rvyygo(.iJ,[/.ci* 6"™ /asv yocg 
KoiTiog Ti Tig olv xivsoo oio- 

[UOLi^ Isi, a(piYlfH^ S^STd^Ot) 

sxeivog, Trctgoe. bg, ouTog 
kotfji^uvoo^ ovTog ygcc<peo ; 

Tlagsifxi ovv, <pr\iJ.i, btci 
^vgoL*, Koa-fj^sco^^^ 6 (TtoAij 
ovTog, Trgiv r])\.iog avarsXKWj 
Kcn xad<o-TV5,«,j™ oog ocv ffU 
^sgauXag b Yleg<jr\g sfay- 
yzKKvi^ iraga, syco. 



56 



Ch. 17. 






28. And he died for such a Kai ju,£v to/outoj a<- 

cause, being surely the least wor- tiol^'^ ^v>j(rxco^, ijxjo-Ta 5)} 

^^j/, of the Grecians, in my time, u^ios tii^i^ ys stti syco^ 
to come to such a degree of 
misery. 

29. When you please, 5^w^ these 
books, or rather bring them. For 
I would not cease, to request you xo/ai^w ou yag^av a(p<o-T>)- 
often, to prefer the road to us be- ]«,»*°, 6 ttoXXuxis hoix^oa <ry^, 
fore any other : if for no other 6 itgos syai bh^ 6 hsgcoas, 
cause, for our old friendship, and Trgoxpivco^- xon ay e» jic>j§£<f°^ 
the air, which is very temperate. dia ciKKof, ts %o(.\oLiog 

rgiog 6</jLi.^ 

30. If I please, I will let down a Hv sQsKco^, syoo ^lsv ex 
chain fromheaven, and if ye, hang- ovgctvogcrsiga. x«fl<>jjw,<^,o-u ds 
ing from it, endeavour to pull me riv oLiroKq^iuctui^^ y,uru(r7roL(a 
donmi, ye will labour in vain ; for ^k>l^o[ji.ui sycjo,[ji,eiTviv9rovsco^* 
truly ye shall not drag me down, ov yotg S)j xafleXxuco. 

31. He had been so habituated Ugog ro [/.erg^os dso[/,oit 
to the requiring of moderate Ttculzrjoi^ ovrcog, coo-re ttoivv 
things, that, having possessed very [/.ixgog xtuoi/.oh^'^, ttuvu 
small property, he was quite pcc^ioog ep^co a^xew.'^* 
easily satisfied. 

32. He never did promise to be 
a teacher of this, but he made 
those who conversed with him 
to hope, that they, imitating him, 
should become such persons. 

33. Rhetor Demias advenit, plebiscitum habens in dextra, 
et consanguineum^ nostrum esse dicens. 

34. Miror igitur, quo tandem pacto, persuasi fiierint 
Athenienses, Socratem de Deis non sand mente esse, 

35. Quid jucundum nosti, nihil horum causa/acere vo- 
lens P quae jucundorum appetitum non expectas, sed, prius- 
quam avpetas, omnibus repleris ; priusquam esurias, come- 
dens ; priusquam sitias, bibens. 



[j^oti S»Sa(7X«Xo^" ei[jn qvto§, 
ocXXct. eXTTi^a) ^ro/eco* 6 (TUv- 
diuTgi^M^ savTOV, /xijOteojw-ai 
sKsivoc, TOioa-^s yivofxui,^ 



57 



CHAP. XVIII. 

The cause, manner, or instrument, is put in the dative. 

Sometimes passive verbs have a dative of the agent after 
them. 

Comparatives and superlatives govern the measure of 
excess in the dative. 

Quodvis etiam verbum admittit, &c. 

Genitivus vero iste nonnunquam, &c. Eton, 

Interdum et dativum, &c. 

Passiva quaeUbet, &c. 

EfFertur scilicet, &c. 

Causae, &c. Wetten, 

The matter of which, &c. 

A noun of part, &c. 

Sometimes the adjective agrees, &c. 

Nouns signifying the cause, &c. Bell, 

Ablativus instrumenti, &c. Holmes. 

1. The city is yet stronger^ 'O TtoTuiLO^ zti icr^ugog 
the river, than bi/ the walls, f </xt 6 ttoXic, >j 6 reip^oj. 

2. I heard that they, by certain Axouw- uvtoc, e7ra;S)j ts 
incantations and charms, could xai tsKsty^ ti$, uvoiyoo o a- 
open the gates of hell. drjc b ttvKyi. 

3. I think you would laugh IToauj av oifji^ui ju^aXAov 
much more if you saw those, who ysXuoo'^^ ei ^suoyiOLi 6 iragx 
are kings and princes with us, syoo ^udiKsvs kui euTpoc- 
begging with (or among) them. Trrig, 'TTTco^svoi Trupot avrog, 

4. Think it equally shameful to 'O/aoioj^ ona^pog vopi^i^M 
be conquered In/ the ill offices of 6 B^^qog vixuoo 6 kcixottoux^ 
enemies, and to be overcome by xui 6 <piXoj Yi<r(roiO[ji,Mi 6 gu- 
the benefits of fi'iends. e§ys(n^. 

5. This place has been treated IIoXuj tt^o zyui 6 tottoj 
of by many persons, before us. s^spyu^o^oti. 



58 



Ch. 18. 



6. They accuse, and bear wit- 
ness against, and censure the 
things, which have been done 
oy us during life. 

7. There are many sublime 
expressions, without pathos, as, 
with innumerable others, those 
bold expressions qfthepoet, about 
the sons of Alous. 

8. He has exceeded all per- 
sons in expression and invention. 

9. As fire burns those that 
touch it, so the beautiful inflame 
those who view them from afar, 
until they burn *mith love. 

10. ^ If we fall much short of 
the virtue of our ancestors, it 
must be a grief to them also, if 
they have any perception ; and 
by so much the greater shame to 
ourselves, by as much as our de- 
scent is most illustrious. 

11. All these things have been 
appointed hy law, 

1 2. Come then, let us consider 
all the things that have been done 
by me, one by one ; for thus truly 
it will appear most plainly which 
of them is good, and which bad. 

13. The parts of the plot, are 
the chief things, by uohich tragedy 
captivates the mind. 

14. The things in our power 
are^ by nature, free, unhindered, 
unimpeded. 

15. They alone having con- 



[/.ugTvgeoo, xoii dtsXsy^oo 6 

•jrgoLa-a-oi)^ syu) Trocpa 6 ^log.^ 

UoXvs v'^og S<;^a TruQog, 
(hg, 7rgo§ [ivgioi olKKo^, xch 
6, TTsgi 6 AXooo(.^vig% 7roi>3- 

As^lC XUl dlUVOKX. TTOtg 

VTTsgouWco, 

'12f jxev Tvg 6 uttto- 
li,oti^ xciica, 6 ^s xoiKog y.on 
6 OCTCoQeV ^SO(.0(XCH v(poi.7rTUi, 
dxTTS aiflco™^ 6 sgoog, 

E» KotTotTToXv 6 6 Trgoyo- 
vos otgsTfi^ ciTToKsiTru)^, Autdj 
j«,£V av e<)XJ° xai sxsivo§, si 
Tig avTOg ejjooi ai(rfi>j(7<j* 
ai<T^vvri dssyoo uurog Tocrog 
ds [J^syug, 6<rog koci q ysvo$ 

TTSgifOiVT^g, 

E)ceiV05 ft^sv (XTTug vofxoc 

AyCti TOIVVV, a-KOTTSCti 6 

syoo TrgoKTO-cti irag, -koutol elg 
eKua-Tog' ovtcjo yap 5>j [jicc- 
Xkttol 5>jXoj gi/xi, hg rig ts 
auTog uyaQog hifii, xoci hg 
Tig xocxog. 

'O fx,syotg, 6g ^u^otyco- 
ysM 6 rgctycalioL, 6 ju,u$oj 

'O jxev STZi eyai^ si[jli, 
(pvcig, sXsuQegog, ocxooXuTog, 
u7rugsi/.7rodi<rTog» 

Movogy 6 fJi'Syug Trga^ig, 



Ch. 18. 



59 



quered time and envy, hy their 
great exploits, 

16. When Cyrus saw him hav- 
ing leaped from his seat, he went 
to meet him, and took him by 
the right hand; and the rest, 
knowing nothing of it, were as- 
tonished at the thing, 

1 7. Consider that learning is 
hy so much a greater good thing 
than ignorance, in as much as, all 
men, making profit, do other bad 
things; but this (ignorance) alone 
always injures those who pos- 
sess it. 

18. It is not proper, in this 
place, to omit one of the things 
that have been observed by us, 
but it shall be very short. 

19. Tho' if I must conjecture 
by the silence being yet great, and 
the cold not yet pinching me, as 
is usual in the morning, it is not 
yet midnight. 

20. And many, being deprived 
of the use of their shorter swords, 
fought tvith their hands andmouths 
instead of them, pulling, biting, 
and tearing their adversaries, as 
being much above them by the 
greatness of their bodies. 

21. I am neither swift object, 
nor strong of hands-, and I know 
that, of the things which I can do 
^ixiith my body, I should not be 



uvuTTYidoico^ ex 6 e5g«, uTrav- 

TOtCO'^ T6 CCVTO$^, KOH Bs^lOO- 

eidco^, ex7rX>)0"(rco^ 6 irqay- 

'Hysojxai 6 ttoh^sicc to- 
(TOVTog [xsyoi$ ayu$05 ei/t* 
uTraihva-iot, ocros, o [Jt,ev 

Zaivca, 'Kqci<j(TW ovTOs^ 5s 

OvJi U^lOSi e'l'* OUTO$ 

6 syoo ^soogsM^, sijxi 8s ircuvu 

(TVVTOfJLOS' 

Kcct TOi siys xgYi tsx- 
l/,cngo[j.c>n Q TS r)(7y^ia 7rokv$ 
sTi siiJ^i, xon 6 xgvog j«,>j5s7r60 
eyo) TO og$g^vov, wcrirsq 

sflcw'"'', OtTTOKVaiOO, OvdsTTU) 
[J^S<TO$ VU^P S/jOtJ. 

Ka» TToXvc, 6 6 fSgot^vg 
^Kpog x^>30'ij (TTsgscji)^, 6 re 

^Sig TCOCi (TTOfXOC OtVTl exsj- 

vo§ ayc/iVi^o[xoti'^, KOLTa.(ntccui 

b OLVTlTTCiXO^, SaXVCO CTTTOCg- 

(X(r(Tcio, UTS xaj 6 [x^sysQo; 6 
(rooiJi.ot -TToXug avTOc^ vTisg- 

Eyco eifii [ji^ev ovts %ovg 
Tcc^vg, OVTS ^sig io-p^ugoj* 
yiyvoocTKoo ds, oti, ej 6$ ocv 
syw 6 s[j^os crw^t^x 'KOisotP^, 



60 

judged first, nor second, nor 
I suppose thousandth, nor per- 
haps ten thousandth. 

22. Now the battle has been 
shown to us, which I see all men 
understanding hy nature^ even as 
all other animals understand a 
certain kind of battle, having 
learned it from nothing else than 
from nature ; as the ox to fight 
^witli his horn; the horse, *uoith his 
hoof; the dog, mth his mouth; 
the boar, mth his tusk. 

23. When Cyrus heard that 
the Chaldeans often went to the 
Indian king ; (remembering that 
some persons came from him to 
the Medes, to view their affairs, 
and went to the enemy that they 
might again see theirs) he wished 
that the Indian should learn the 
things which had been done by 
him. 

24<. From my very childhood I 
knew to put something before 
him, by 'vohom I thought I should 
be struck ; and if I had nothing 
else, holding my two hands be- 
fore me, I hindered, as much as 
I could, him that struck me. 

25. For almost all other ani- 
mals are wiihout knowledge of 
art, except some few of them, 
and these have got arts by nature, 
rather than by intention. 



Ch. 18. 



,5o 



oox uv Kgivo)-^ OVTS 'jrgcoTOS) 
OVTS devTego^i oiO[ji,ui h ouSs 

gioa-Tos. 

Nuv syco Ssjxvu/xi i^Ayyi, 

05 Byoi ogoLOi ttols avSgcoTrog 
^u<ng eTTKTTaiJion, wa-Treg ys 
xai aXXog ^ooov STrKTrocfJiOii 
Tis l*'OLX'^ lxao-TOjP'^% ovIb 
TTuga, e»V aX\o§ fj^oivQctvoo^ 
Y) Ttotga, (pvdis' olov o ^ou$ 
xegotc TTonu)* 6 (tttto^, ottA^j* 

6 xuajv, (TTOi^cf 6 xctirgos, 
odovg. 

'O 'Kvgog, ws ctxoveo or* 
•Trgos 6 Ivdos TroWuxig 6 
XaX8a<05 irogsvofxcii-, (ava- 

got auT0s,X!XToi<rxs7rT0[x,cx.t^^, 
eis M>jSof, 6 uvTOs vgocyi/.Xf 
xcn ox'^aiLa.i^ Trgog OTroXsfx^i- 
ojP', OTTcog (XV xa.1 b exsivog 
xuTcidco^) (3ouXo[xcn^ lXCivQ(X~ 
voo^blvdog 6 avTogTrooKTO-m.^ 
Eyoj cx TTotidiov eu$ug 
fj^sv Trpo^aKXco^eTTKrrotf^oni 
Ttpo ovTog 6$ Tig oiOfjuai* 
TtXY^iKTOi^' xoLi Si ftij aK\o$ 

ovdsig £X^°3 ° X^^§ '''^o^X^'j 
6jM,7ro5*^a)^ 6g ng Suvajxai^, 

6 TTOliai^ 

'O yug uXKog ^cooy trp^s- 
Sov are^vog tcug eifii, -TrXriv 

oXiyog^^ Br} ng sv ctVTog, 
uWoL xaj QVTog ^u<yig ^eiX- 
Xov ri Trgoxipscrig rs^vr^^ 



Ch. 19. 61 

26. Of animals, some being 'O ^wov, 6 jw,ev 6 eiti^v- 
led, hy the desire of eating, to the |u.*« 6 ^uyoi^ uym Trpog 6 
bait, are taken ; and some are Uxeap, a\i<yxco' 6 Se ttotoj 
ensnared by drink. eveS/jeuw. 

27. Omnibus spoliari grave est et molestum ; prsesertim 
quum ab inimico cui hoc accidat; tum vero benevolentia ves- 
tra et humanitate, quanto easdem consequi est amplissimum, 

28. Non enim civilibus dignitatibus, neque generis jprcecel- 
lentia, neque divitiis Deus optimos judicare solet. 

29. Una vero causa judicata fuit a Minoe etiam in gratiam. 



CHAP. XIX. 



Adjectives, signifying plenty, morth, condemnation, power, 
difference, and their contraries ; also, verbals compounded 
^ith a privative, and those which signify an emotion of the 
mind, require the genitive. 

The comparative degree governs the genitive, when it is 
translated by than, 

Adjectiva quae desiderium, &c. 
Comparativa, cum exponuntur, &c. Eton, 
Quorum Latina genitivum, &c. 
Sic et comparativa, &c. Wetten, 
Adjectives signifying desire, &c. 
Adjectives compounded with a privative, &c. 
Adjectives signifying merit, &c. Bell, 
Comparativa regunt, &c. 

1. The love ofthe fabulous is Meya; (^vc-ig uicoppoi^^ 
peculiar to a great genius, when >j5)j itio^ eijtt/, ev yspu§, 6 
declining, in age. (piKofjLvQo^,'^^ 

2. I am wiser than this man, Ovtos 6 uv^pwitos syo) 

3. tiothmgis bolder than Jblli/, Ovx ej/x-* otvoia ovhis 

ToXfjiYipog, 



6% 



Ch. 19. 



4. It is likely, that you, being 
an admirer of beauty, would omit 
none of the things worth seeing or 
hearing, 

5. I think that some have come 
out with us worthy of better^ and 
some of less, 

6. Every speech is futile, which 
is destitute of actions, 

7. You are without hearing the 
sweetest hearing, the praise of 
yourself; and without seeing the 
sweetest sight. 

8. % They think that to be go- 
verned by a stranger, and to be 
deprived of their command, is un- 
wm^thy the glory of the Grecians, 
and the virtue of their ancestors. 

9. Do not fear, said he, that 
you will want a husband for your 
daughter, worthy of her. 

1 0. In order to have men obe- 
dient, nothing is more useful than 
to seem to be wiser than those who 
are governed. 

1 1 . The servant is not greater 
than his master, nor the apostle 
greater than he who sent him. 

12. Whether are these mathe- 
maticians superior, as to becom- 
ins: better than other men P 

13. Your wallet will he full of 
lupins, or books stuffed with writ- 
ing 071 the bach ; and being in 



(TV, ft>j5e<f 6 u^io^ ^sa >j 

Evvow OTi £^sp^o[ji,cn <ruv 
ByoD 6 [ji,ev xai ctyct^og, 6 Ss 
xoLi [ji,ixpQ$ a^toj. 

OS, frpoL^is otfjioipog y»vo- 

'O rjhtjg otx.8(T{j!,cc, STrixivog 
csoiVTOV^, avriKOog ei[j!,r xoci 
6 7)^0$ ^eoif/^u aQsuTog. 

'Ttto a\Xo>pv\og ocvQpo)- 
TFOs^ OLpyoi, xixi 6 r}ye[x,ovix 
UTTOO'Tspsa}, avoi^iog vo[x,^^co 
si[ji,i xxi 6 6 EXXr)V do^tx, 
XXI 6 6 Trpoyovog apsT>j. 

AvYjp, (p»jfti, 6 ^vyotTi^p^, 
ju,r) (po^eofji^on cog omopsca^^, 
a^iog ovTog. 

Eig 6"* TTsiQco"^^ avQpooTTog 
s^oo, oySejj si/jti ccvv(nixog, 
6 (ppovi[/.og^^ ^oxsa/j £i[jt,i 
6 ctpyoi}^ 

Ovx sifii tovXog [J'Syocg 
6 xupiog avTog, ours utro- 
(TToXog fJ^syag 6 Tre/xTrw^ 
avTog. 

TloTspov vpoe^oo ouTog 6 
jxaSijjotarixoj, Trpog 6 aya- 
Qog yiVO\La.\^ o uKkog avQpoo- 
'TTog; 

'O TtYipu crv'^ ^spfLog silli 
fj:e(Trog, >] 07ri(r(roypa(pog /S<- 

§klOV* XOLl OVTCOg S^CO, EV- 



Ch. 19. 



63 



this state, you will say that you 
are happier than the great Icing, 

14. Well I shall hold my 
tongue for you, and be much 
more silent than the fishes, 

1 5. If you find any thing better^ 
in human life than Justice, truth, 
tempera?ice, and fortitude, being 
turned with your whole mind to 
it, enjoy that which is found the 
best. 

16. A short syllable is that 
which has a short or shortened 
vowel, not at the end of a word ; 
so that between it and the vowel 
in the next syllable, there be not 
more consonants than one simple 
one, but either one, or none. 

1 7. My father, who has given 
them to me, is greater than all ; 
and no one can wrest out of the 
hand of my father. 

1 8. It would be proper to have 
expressions "worthy of the things, 

19. Fortune gave into their 
hands riches, and glory, and 
friends ; but they rendered them- 
selves lavdoorthy of the present hap- 
piness, 

20. It IS peculiar to man to love 
even those that offend ; and this 
comes to pass, if you consider, 



Eyo) /xev yio-yp^a^o)" (tu 

KOH TTOXU OKpoOVOg SijX* 6 1^^- 

Ei ju-ev uyotQo$ evpia-xcOf 
sv 6 ccvQpctiTTivog /3<oj, dixaio- 
<ruvYi, uXyiQsiu, (rca<ppocruvYi, 
xut uv^psiu, eTTi SKsivos^ ej 

OXOS 6 ^U^Yl TpSTTO)"^^, 6 

$yo(X.cx.g^ supia-xo)^ UTtoKuvM* 

Bpa^ug sijxi cryXXa^yj 6 

s^co^^^pot^vs (puiVYiev >j jSpU" 

p^'JVCO^^, ][/,>) STTt TsXoc^ ^«-e^'J* 

ovTcog 00$ [jiSToc^v avTOs^ 

xott 6 ev 6 k^r,$ (rvWu^fi 
, f 

vov 'KoKrjg slg uttKoos, aXXa 
ijTOi s\g, ij ]U,>jSe s\g, 

'O TTdTYip eyoo, 6 SiScOjXl^ 
sycti, [Jt^syus itug sifj^r xui 
ovists Suva/jtai apTrul^oii ex 
6 p^sip 6 TTCiTYip syoti, 

'O TrpuyfJ^oL TrpsTTsi^ av 

'O jxev TW^n avTog %p))- 

Eyy^sipiloi' b S= hg* uvrog 
uvoL^iog ^Ttapyo^ suSaj- 
/xovia xu^KTTyiiJ^i,^ 

IStoj av^paoTTOS (piXeco Koct 
6 TTTatco''* ouTOs Ss yivoix^ui, 
sotv (rviJi,7rpo(r7nirTct} cv oti 



* '0$ is used here, and in some other places, according to 
Dr. Moor's Greek Grammar. In other grammars it is repre- 
sented as wanting the nominative ; viz. gen. oi, dat. at, &c. 



u 



Ch. 20. 



that they are your relations, and 
err through ignorance and un- 
willingly ; and that after a little 
you shall both die ; and, above all, 
that it did not hurt you j for it did 
not make your mind worse than 
it was before. 

21. And this is by much more 
absurd than those things. For, 
observing closely, I found those 
same persons practising the 
things most contrary to their Trihvco, 
own words. 

22. If you make me a friend, 
I shall bring you to the most 
pleasant and easy way ; and you 
shall be tasteless of nojie of the 
pleasant things, but you shall live 
unexperienced oftroMes, 

23. Mihi igitur Socrates videbatur honore esse reipub- 
licae dig7ins, potius quam morte, 

24. Vides viros dissidentes inter se, et gravius sese trac- 
tantes hominihus nihilo dignis. 



xai (ryyy£V)jj, xai ha, ay- 
voia,% x«i aexcov ai^uo- 
Totvo)' xoci wj [xeToc oXiyos 

•Trpo iru^i on ov /SXa-Trrco^ cru* 
ou yap 6 rfysyjovixov av xoc~ 

Et< 8s TOXUJ^UTOJ 6Xgl- 

vos ocTOTTo;. 'O yap avTog 
OVT05 evpKrxco''-y e7riT>jpa>, 
evavTiog 6 uvtos Xoyos stti- 



Eav eyct) <p*A>j Trotsoo^, 
£7ri 6 Yjdu^ T& x«i pa^ios 6- 
8oja ayu) G-v y.ai ju-sv Tsp~ 
TTVog ov^sig aysvaTog sijU-i, 
6 Se ^aXsTTOc airsipog Si«3C- 



CHAP. XX. 



All adjectives, placed partitively, govern the genitive 
plural. 

Nomina partitiva, &c. 

Nomina etiam quae superlativorum, &c. 

Adjectiva saepe permutant, &c. Eton. 

Adjectivum plurale cujuscunque, &c. IVetten, et Holmes. 

Plural adjectives often, &c. 

Sometimes the latter of two adjectives, &c. BeU. 



Ch. sa 



65 



1. Not marty of the inhahiU 
ants of the country know what 
thing this story may import. 

2.- If the greatest poxver of the 
enemies is there. 

3. They killed nearly thirty of 
the light-armed men. 

4. I think that he was the hap- 
piest of the men^ *who had been cele- 
brated for a long time before. 

5. There were some of the 
scribes sitting there, and arguing 
in their hearts, saying: Why 
does this man blasplieme thus ? 
who can forgive sins but God? 

6. And that which is the^T^ff^(?5^ 
and most beautiful qfall^ you see 
your own territory increased, and 
that of the enemies lessened. 

7. Think that nothing of human 
affairs is steady ; for thus, when 
fortunate, you will not be ovei- 
joyed, nor, when unfortunate, 
over sorrowful. 

8. To-day I celebrate my 
daughter's birth-day feast, and 
I have invited xiery many of my 

friends, 

9. % As are the eyes of bats to 
the light, by day, so is the intelli- 
gence of our soul to those things 
that are, by nature, the most 
manifest of all things, 

10. He believed that those of 
the persons who associated with 



Ov 6 sTTi^Mpiog noXvs 
i(Tyi[ji,if rig -kqts ovto$ 6 
fiv^oKoyioL Suva/x,ai.° 

El SX£I TtoKsii.lOg Slfll 

Attoxtsivoo eyyug rpioi' 

xovrct 6 r|/jAo^. 

yivoii^ui^^ avQgco'Tirog, 6 ev 

^pvXKsoQ,^ 

EijO./ rig 6 yptxix^fLotrsug 
sxsi xa5r5]U.ai, kui 5<«Xo- 
yj^Ojtca/ sv 6 Kap'^ia haurovy 
Xsyoo* Ti ourog ovtm ^Kokt- 
^>3i«,sco; rig ZvvciiJ.cn a<piYi[j,i 
6 apiapricc si /x>) 6 0eog ; 

'O §s Ttag fJ^eyag xa.i 
xaXog, 6 j^sv (rog %copa ay- 
^otvo^svog opoioj, oho %0' 
Xsfjt^iog iJt.siouiJi.svog, 

Noja/^co [XYi^sig siix^i 6 
avSpcoTTivog ^s^otiog* oOrco 
yug ours eurv^sw^ sifJLi 
'TTSpiy^otgrig, ours SocTTUp^ew 
TrsgiXvTTOg, 

GuyarYip, cri^fj^spoVf so-' 
riaco ysvsSXiu, tcoci Trapajca- 
Xsoo^ 6 <pi\og jO-aAa iroKug, 

^D.(ntsp 6 vvxrspig ojx- 
jtta TTpog 6 (psyyog s^o), 6 
ju-sra YjpLspcL^ ovrca kcci 6 
r^fj^srspog vf/up^r, 6 vovg, Trpog 
6, 6 (pvcrig, ^avspog 'nctg, 

Ili(Trsv(o% 6 (rvvsifjt,i^ av- 



66 



Ch. 20. 



him, that embraced the things 
which he approved, would be 
good friends to himself and to 
others. 

11 . In the same way, I think, 
the poet, representing storms, se- 
lects the most terrible of the cir- 
amistances. 

1 2. In Libya, the Carthaginians 
govern, and the Libyans are go- 
verned; *xhich then of these do 
you think to live most pleasantly? 
or of the G7'ecians, in whom you 
are yourself, xiohich seem to you to 
live most pleasantly, those who 
rule or those who are ruled ? 

15. The gods give to men 
none of the things that are good 
and glorious, without labour and 
diligence. 

14. And Cyrus having called 
some of the servants that "joere 
present, " Tell ye to me," said he, 
"has ani/ of you seen Abradates ? 
For I wonder," says he, "that 
frequently coming to us before, he 
now appears no where." Then 
one of the servants answered, 
^' Master, he does not live, but 
he fell in battle, having driven 
his chariot against the Egyp- 
tians." 

- 15. Like the bad criers in as- 
semblies, he spoke something 
rapid and not distinct. 

16. And many persons who were 



uvTos Soxijua^o;-, kctuTOV rs 
Kcci aXKos (piXos uyu^o^ 

6 ^sifjLtav^ TUTTOoo 6 7rot)jT»3f, 
snXot^Suvco 5 Trap UKoXovQ set) 

[j,sv ap^cu, Ai§u§ hs ap^co' 

OUTOg OVV TTOTSpOS^ f|StOV 01- 

ofjt,txi ^oiai; )5 6 'EAAijv, sv og 
Kdi aurog siy,i,7roTspog° au 
Soxew ^5»ov, 6 JcpuTsco^^ >) o 
KpoiTscjo, ^uca; 

'O e»jw,i^ ctyaQog xui xa- 
Aoj ovhi$, avev Trovog koh 
STTiiJ.sKsia, ^eo$ SiScojxi av- 
QpiOTTog, 

'O 5e Kvpog xaXsco^ rig 
6 -TrapeijU/*^ vnYipsri^g, Hittov 
sycOy (f)ri[Ji^i, hpaco rig <tv A§- 
poL^otTT^g ; ^uvfx^u^ci) yap^ 
(pr\i^i, on itpouhv ^ufj^i^o) 
sTTi syca% vvv ov^afjiou <poii- 
vco.^ 'O ouv WTT^pSTYig Tig 

aTTOXplVOlX.OLl^, OTi, CO SsCTTTO- 

TT^g, ov ^0100, uKXa sv 6 ju,«- 

yY\ CtTTohYjCTKM^, S[J,^01.Wm^ 

6 ap[j^oi sig 6 AiyvTTTiog* 

'^la-TTsp 6 (pavXog 6 sv 6 
aycov KYjgu^, sTrirgo^og tis 
xui OUK aG-faXrig (pQsyyo- 

Ken TroXvg 6 afj.z?^sM^'^^ 



Ch. 20. 



67 



neglected ran into wells, being 
tormented by incessant thirst. 

17. But, that I may know 
every thing, in *what meats does 
he delight ? 

18. When they learned the 
truth, they were enraged at those 
orators who encouraged the naval 
expedition, as if they had not 
voted it themselves. 

19. It is a shame that painters 
should imitate beautiful animals, 
and children not imitate good pa- 
rents. 

20. I having observed, with 
much accuracy, both good men 
and bad, did conceive that I 
ought to write those things which 
each of them practise in hfe. 



Tij %ai^6co 6 gSso-jxa; 

pyjrcop skttXoos, chG-TTsp ouk 

Aia-^pog 6 jotsv ypoKpsvg 

^aios 6 yovsug. 

Eyo) 'Trapa^sctoit.oLi^'^ , s^ 
oLKpi^siu TToXvg, 6 T6 otyo," 

ypU(poo^ 6g exoiTspos auTog 



21 . Omnium hominum continenfissimus erat. 

22. Critias quidem omnium, in oligarchia, avarissimus et 
violentissimtis fuit. 

23 Cum et Srw^a animalia doceant, et famulum ignavum 
ac inertem nulla re dignum esse ducant, solos vero se ipsos 
negligant, planum est abjectis eos servis esse similes. 



F 2 



68 



CHAP. XXI. 

Adjectives signifying jprofit^ likeness^ obedience., fitness, 
trust, clearness, decency, facility, and their con^aries ; and 
those compounded with cuv and oix.o'j, govern the dative. 

EcTTi, taken for e;^a}, to have, governs the dative. 

All verbs put acquisitively, i. e. verbs of serving, giving, 
using, rejoicing, obeying, trusting, discoursing, fighting, and 
the like, with their contraries, govern the dative. 

Adjectiva quibus commodum, &c. 
Hue referuntur adjectiva, &c. f 

Verba acquisitive posita, &c. Eton, 
Verba cedendi, &c, 

Quorum itidem Latina, &c. ^ 

.vn Verba communicandi, &c. Wetten. 
Adjectives signifying advantage, &c. 
Adjectives compounded with <Tm, &c. 
All verbs put acquisitively, &c. 
Verbs of adoring, &c. 
Also verbs of advising, &c. Bell. 
Verba dandi, &c. 
Verbum ^paoi/^ui, &c Holmes. 

1. Having said these things Ouroj xcn 6 7ra^a7rX>j- 
and others like them, I descended. <nog ovto$ ejttov xuTaSai- 

2. Behold I am really naked, ISou yvii^voc, chg opaco, 
as you see, and of equal weight oL\'r^^(assi[n,y.a,ii(ro<jTU(no^ 
with the other deadpersons. 6 aWoc vsxpoc. 

3. Well, I have at least this E»c /xev >}0>j outoc s^m, 
one thing, that I am like you. oti of^oioc siiji,i cry. 

4. I wish to return therefore to BouXo/joai roivuv sTravsp' 
the things which I did next in the x'^^^^^ ^"^^ °^* ^f*)? ''"°" 



Ch.'21 



69 



State. And m these again, con- 
sider ye what was best for the 
city. 

5. Did not you, said he, pro- 
pose contests and prizes ? But 
certainly, said Cyrus, these things 
are not like those. For whatever 
things they may have acquired 
making war, they will think to 
be common to themselves. 

9. To dispute with one another 
about words, but not to quarrel. 

7. Unless one takes pleasure 
in empty names. 

8. Then the multitude that 
stood and heard, said that there 
had been thunder ; others said. 
An angel hath spoken to him. 

9. They now serve him^ as he 
did them before. 

10. Why are you angry at me P 

11. Croesus had two sons. 

12. ^ It seems to me to be a 
great fault, that a ruler should he 
harsh to all thosethat are governed. 

13. Jupiter, the great leader 
in heaven, goes first, di'iving a 
flying chariot, and a host of 
gods 2j[id[diQit\es follows him. 



14. The aids of the gods do 
not help-itreacherous persons j as 
^ right ; for men do not commit 
njustice, until they become im- 
pious towards the gods. 

F 3 



ovTog TTuXiv ccvy Tij 6 9roA»j 

H ou cy xai 6 aycov, 

AWoL (lOL Zsuj, (prifn 6 Ku- 
pof, ov^ ofx^oiog ovTog ex5i- 
voc. *0s [/.svotv a-rpocTsvat)"^ 

YiyeofJi^on^ sifji^i. 

El jxrj Tij 0V01/.CX, y^onpoi 
xsvog. 

'O ovv o^Xog 6 l<rTYiy,i'^^ 
xa» axoKco^, Xeyoo'^ ^pov~ 
T>2 yivofjLui. AKKog Aeyw, 
AyyeKog avTog KciXsoi. 

'EiKBivog^^ vvv ouTog 8oy- 
XsocoP*, xd^aTTsp ovTog sxsi- 

VOg TTpOTSpOV. 

Tig sy CO opyi^cof^ 

E/jX< 6 KpoKTog dvo icong. 

*0"% ayrip^ cipyjiP^ ireig 
^cuKsitoLivcn 6 apyo^^ ouTog 
sycoys Soxsco y^syag afji.ap-' 

'O [Asv [Ji^syocg viys[jt,ooy ev 
oupavog Zsvg^ sXavvu) "TTTYivog 
up[ji,a, TTpaoTog TTopeuoi^oii, b 
Ss s7roiJi,on G-TpuTiu ^sog xat 

OuSs 6 irotpx b Qsog svi- 
KQupiu b 'jrpodoTYig /Sorj^eW 
sixoTcoj* ouhig^^ ya.p ^po- 
T5pov aSixsco' >j TrepJ 6 0£O$* 



70 



Ch. 21. 



15. When first the desire of 
gold and silver came into the 
city, taith the possession of wealth 
followed avarice and meanness; 
and with the use and enjoyment 
of it, luxury and effeminacy and 



extravagance. 



1 6. And lo a man from the mul- 
titude, cried out saymg; Master, 
I entreat thee to look upon my 
son, because he is my only son. 

17. If any one serve me, let 
himfollo'w me, and where I am, 
there also will my servant be; 
and if any one serves me, the 
father shall honour him. 

18. Philip comes and tells 
Andrew, and again Andrew and 
Philip tell Jesus. And Jesus 
answered them, saying, The hour 
has come, that the son of man 
should be glorified. 

19. Simon Peter saith to him ; 
Lord, whither goest thou ? Jesus 
answered him. Where I go, thou 
canst not now follow me ; but 
hereafter tlum shalt follow me, 

20. See then, this Menippus 
shall judge which of us is more 
beautiful. Tell us, O Menippus, do 
/not seem to you more beautiful ? 

21. The diffusive style vs proper 



<ros lri>^os, xui <TVVU)CQkov~ 

TrXsove^ia xa* itiTcpoKoyict* 6 
Ss %p>j<r<j vcon airoKoLva-igy 
Tpv<pri Koti pi^aXoixioi xat 
TroXwTsXsta. ^ 

Kaj idov uvrip cctto 6 o^- 
\05 ^oaco Asyco* AiSacrxa- 

sTTi 6 vlo$^ eyco, oti [ji^ovo- 
yevijj sya) si [Mi, 

E«v eyca dioixovsai rig^ 
sycti axoXovQsoo, xon ottoo 
sifjn syoo, ejcsi xui 6 Sia- 
x.ovo$ 6 ejtioj sjjXi* xui sav T<f 
sycti haxovsai, Ti/x.«co auroj 

Ksyoo 6 Avdpeois, xcci TraXiv 
AvdpsoLg xon ^iXiTTTTog Ksyoti 
6 Ivicrovg. 'O h lyjcrouj 
ci7roxptvoix,cn^ avTog, Asyw, 
Epp^Ojxa* 6 (tipa^ \vct ^o^ct^co^ 
6 ulog 6 av^pooTTog, 

Asyui avTog ^i/aojv Ilg- 
rpog' Kvpiog, irou uTuym ; 
k'KOxpivo[MOLi^^ auTog 6 !>)- 
CrOVg, OTTOD vTTuyco, ov ^vvu- 
ixcn eyco vvv (xxoXov^soo^, u- 
(TTepov Is uxoXov^SM syu), 

ISoy S>j, MeviTTTTog ov- 
T0o-< Sixa^co TTOTspog ey/xop- 
(pog e»ju.i. EiTTOv, w MevjTr- 
TTOf, ov xocXo: (TV doxsca, 

ToTcriyopiu b xy<Tig^ xon 



Ch. 21, 



71 



for q\{ familiar subjects, perora- 
tions, digressions, easy narrations, 
and pompous amusements, histo- 
ries, relations of nature, and not 
2ife*w other parts. 

22. He said that he saw most 
people knowing the number of 
their possessions, although they 
had very many, 

23. It is not certain to the per- 
son "who has planted his land well, 
who shall reap the fi'uit: nor is it 
certain to him isoho has built a 
home well for himself, who shall 
inhabit it. 

24 Anacharsis being once up- 
braided by some person, because 
he was a barbarian and a Scythian ; 
*' My country is a reproach to me," 
said he, "but jo\ito your country " 

25. AY\diChairic[Qs,being enrag- 
ed at him, " Since," said he, " O 
Socrates, you are ignorant, we 
command these things being more 
intelligible to you, not to converse 
at all mth young men," 



xoii 6 (ppua-rixo^ wKug, xui 

STTlhlXTlKOg, idtOqiCi TS, 3^ 

(^v(rioKoyiu, xoti oux, o\iyo$ 
'Oguoo^ <pvjju,< 6 TToXvs 6 

/ASV X,TrilJl,Cl, KOLl TTUVU TTOKV^^ 

Outs 6 xaXcog ayqog 
<puTsu(/i^^^^y\Kos,o(mg xccg- 
irooi^' ours 6 xaXcoj ojx<a 

xeco. 

Ava^uga-ig ttqts izqog tic,^ 

ju,*, ovsihg (sifii), av 
5e 6 'TTurgig, 

Kaj 6 "KugtxXYig, ogyi^oo^ 

CtVTOg, STTSl^OCV, (pV\l^l, CO ^CO- 

xgoiTvig, uyvQscti,^ oh (tu sv- 
[Ji'OtQriS, siy^i irgoocyogsvco, 6 



26. Quibuscunque studiorum non est finis utiUs ad vitam, 
haec non suntartes, 

27. Legationes undique veniebant, omnibus gratulan- 
tibus Romanorum sub Pertinace imperio. 

28. Mira fortasse videbor dicere, si Cyro consilium dare 
v^Z/m aliquid dicere pro nobis, cum arma sumant ii qui 
nobis futuri suntpugnce socii. 



F 4 



72 



CHAP. XXIL 

When gift* and yivo[jt,cti signify possession, 'property, or 
duty, they govern the genitive. 

Verbs of beginning, admiring, ^wanting, rememhej'ing, 
accusing, excelling, valuing, sharing, and the like, with their 
contraries, govern the genitive; also those which signii}'^ 
distance, and sense (except sight), V 

Verba amandi, &c. 

Verba sensus, &c. 

Praeter ilia quae, &c. Eton. \' ,\ 

Verba incipiendi, &c. 

Verba auditus, &c. 

Sic et verba recordandi, &c. 

Verba permutandi, &c. Wetten. 

r<vo/xai and e<jxj, &c. 

Verbs that signify any of the senses, &c. 

Verbs signifying plenty, &c. 

Verbs of attempting, &c. Bell, 

Verba sensuum, &c. 

Verba permutandi, &c. Holmes. 

1. He caught his head. 'O xs(p«A>j eipuTTTOfjion, 

2. He separates himself ^ from Xoopi^M b Qco§. 
God. 

3. It is the part of a villain, Kaxovgyoc ix,ev eiijn, xgi' 
that he should die, having been vws aTroSvrjo-xcoSVTcaTijyoj 
condemned; but of a general, 8s, [lcl-^q\lcih 6 -ttoXbij.ios.'^^ 
fighting with the enemy. 

4. A certain w^oman, having Tvvri tic, uy,ouM^ vsgi 6 
heard concerning Jesus, having Iy,(tovc^,spp^o[j,cci^sv6 o^^os 
come in the crowd behind him, o;r<o-6ev, aTrrofton 6 li^ctnov 
touched his garment, saying in her- olvtoc, 7^=yoi sv kuvTov, 'Ori 
self. That if / but touch his gar- koli olv 6 Iixatiov avros utc- 
ment, I shall be made whole. roix.ca^, a-co^co. 

5. Itis a shame to co7n?nand do- Aio-^gog 6 fx.sv oix.sTr,g 
fw^5^zc5, and be a slave to pleasures. etoy^M, 6 8s ^Sovij SouAsuw.* 



Ch, 22. 



73 



6. Verily, I say unto you, there 
are some of these here standing, 
who shall not taste of deaths until 
they see the Son of man coming 
in his kingdom. 

7. There is a city, *mJiich a man 
of royalrace, called Soras,^ot;^/'w- 
ed^ at the time that Eucratides 
governed the Bactrians, and the 
name of the city is Perimuda. 

8. Make mention oj your absent 
friends^ to those that are present, 

that you may appear not to neg- 
lect them isohen absent. 

9. Another was exhorting me 

o 

to despise riches^ and to think the 
possession of them insignificant. 

10. Then theythrew with their 
clods, and some struck breast- 
jplates, and shields, and some a 
thigh^ or a greave. 

11. It is a voluntary thing, 
said he, and every one loves isohat 
things he pleases. 

12. It is entirely necessary, 
that he "who attends to the one, 
should 7ieglect the other. 

1 3. Ifj/OM do not tale the things 
that are offered to you, but even 
despise them, then you will be 
not only a guest of the gods, but 
a joint ruler with them. 

14. ^ It is not certain to the po- 
litician, if it profits him to govern 
the state, nor is it certain to him 
^^ho has got powerful relations by 



A/x.>jv Ksyai gu^^ , eiju.1 t<j 

gjSoj^ 6 ylo^ oivQgooTTog e§%o- 
fLCii ev 6 ^ix<n\sKx. euvrov, 

'^cogug ovofji^a.^, uvYig ysvog 

6 TTokig'^ Ilg^/jXoySa. 
jxai^, TT^oj 6 7r(x.gsi(Mi, Ivot 

oKiyooqso), 

AXXog xuTci<pgoveco X§>J- 
/xa TTcigotxsXevio^, xa» aSi- 
anpogog oiofx^ai 6 xT>)(rij av- 
TOg, 

'EyravQu Sr; /SaAXco* 
^ooXog, xai si[/.i^ 6g Tuyya.- 
voi^ xai ^copa^, xon ysppov, 
6g 8s xai y^Yjfos, xai xvri[jt,i$, 

xai sguoo exacrxo^ 6s uv 
6 sTsgog aiJie\soo% 'jtas av- 

Av irOLgOLTl^YllLl^^^ (TV [J^Yj 

Aa/jt^avco^, cckXav'Trepsi^u)^, 

TOTS OU fXOVOV (jVfLTTOTYig 

^sog zii^i, aXXx xcn (rvvup- 

'Outs 6 TroXiTiKog lr,Xog, 
£1 (rvfitpspcti 6 'KoXig irpOdTsx.- 
T600, OUTS 6 dwoiTo; ev 6 
•noXig XYile(TTr\g XctiL^avoi^ 



74 



Ch. 1>2. 



marriage in the state, if by them 
he shall be dep-ived of the state. 

15. Othe speed! they run to- 
gether from every side, dusty and 
panting, I know not from whence 
smelling the gold, 

16. Whilst I was a boy, hear- 
ing Homer and Hesiod relating 
the wars and dissensions, not 
only of the demigods, but even 
of the gods themselves. 

17. As the time of the promise 
was drawing nigh, which God 
promised to Abraham, the people 
increased and was multiplied in 
Egypt; 'till another king rose up 
over Egypt, who remembered not 
Joseph. 

18. If any would propose a 
choice, whether I would rather 
wish to hear you relating such 
things, or again to see that de- 
lightful dream, which I lately 
saw, I know not which I would 
choose. 

19. Thouseest how few things 
there are *which, one possessing, is 
able to live a godlike life; for the 
gods will require nothing more, 
from the man that observes these 
things. 

20. He enacted, that we should 
neither taste Jlesh, nor eat beans; 
turning from the table my plea- 
^antest food ; and moreover per- 
suading men not to converse for 
five years. 



dvi\0$, Ei did OVTO$^ (TTsgsco'^ 

^eu rap^oj* 'ttolvtch^o- 

'TtysMG-TioLOi, ovx eiSgco™^ odsv 
ocr(ppoiivoiJ^oii 6 ^gv(riov. 

aXii(o'0[/.YipO§XUl 'HcTioSof 

jw-ai, oy jxovov 6 ^jXifleoj, aA- ,, 

'12f syyi^M 6 "x^qovo^ 6 stt- 
ctyysKio., 6g^ gTrayyeAXw °* 
6 Qsog 6 A§goiU[/., ocv^uvm b 
Kotog 3^ TrXri^vvoo^ ev AiyvTT- 
Toc' ci^pi 6g avKTTYifM^ (Ba- 
(TiKsug hsgog sttj A<yy7rT0^% 

E< Tig (xlpsorig 7rpoTi9>j- ■ 

jtx-i^Oj Tzorepov ju-aXXovsAsAco^ 

<Tl} OIKOVCO 6 TOlOVTOg Si£^6i- 

ju,i^, r) 6 7cavs\j^cniJi,oov oveipog 
sKsivog oiiiQig opuca, 6* f^ixpov 
gjXTT^ocrSev, ovk eiSco ^'^ otto- 
Tsgog av alpsoo.'^^° 

'Opdoti TTcag oKiyog sifJ^i, 
6g xguTSoo^ Tig, duva.[ji,ci> 
^sovdi^g ^1000^ ^log' xon 
yug 6 ^sog TroXvg ou^sig 

WTTOLITSCO^, TiUpOL 6 OUXaj 

No/AoOsTScw ^5jW.>jTe xpsctg^^ 
ysvca^, l^riTS xva.fx,og saSico' 
y^^vg eyco ys ovv o^ov eycTpu- 
TTSt^og ci7ro<pocivui' sti os koh 
'TTsiSco 6 otvQpooTTog sg TtsvTe 
STOg fj^vi ^luXsyojJLCii, 



Ch. 22. 



75 



(J,Y} svSvs KaiM, 6[/.oog h 
eyooys ovts Trvp skoov ejjxt^ 

Hv <ru avTog s&sXoo^ yivo- 



[J'Otl^, KOLl 'TTCHVOti^^ OiVTOg^ 



21. It is possible also that one 
touching Jive should not presently 
be burned, yet am I not willing 
to he touching Jire, 

22. If you would he your mm 
masters^ and if you would every 
one cease expecting, that he need ftsv aulzi^ sTcua-rog ttoisco^^ 
do nothing himself, but that his sXtti^oo, 6 h 7rA))cr<oj Trug 
neighbour will do all things for VTrsg otuTog^ 7rgci<T<rco^' xaj 6 
him ; you shall both recover the -HUTotppaQvfjLsoo'^ iruKiv avct- 
things that have been basely lost, XotiJ^^uvoo, kch exsivog^ tiju-co- 
and you shall avenge yourselves gsoo. 

on him. 

23. Some persons having seen Qsaoiioti^ ng (piXo(ro(po$, 
a philosopher, and having heard xui uxovo) outco rig Xsyoo, 
some one speaking thus, "How well obg sv ^ooxguTYig Asyco; xa* 
Socrates speaks '."though indeed, toi ng ovtco duvafjjui sittov 
who can speak as he ? they too (hg sKsivog ; ^sAco xoti avrog 
desire to become philosophers. ^i\oa-o(psca, 

24. If then tragedy excels in 
all these things, and moreover in 
the work of the art, as it reaches 
the end sooner, it is manifest 
that is better than Epopoeia. 

25. In conversation let every 
one avoid speaking often, and im- 
moderately of his own actions or luvogBin ttoXv xat ay^sTgoog 
dangers ; for it is not pleasant jotvao|xa<P7^* oy yap wg <tu 
toothers, to hear what things have rj^vg si^i, b^^ b <Tog TcivBuvog 
happened to you, as it is pleasant javaojaajP'', outco xai b aA- 
to you to mention your omon dan- \og ridug gjjxi, b^^ b av^ 
gers, (TUfji^oiivoo^^ ukovo), 

26. Sola vero incolumis fortuna evadit, irridens homines 
plorantes eamque vocantes. 

27. Sed alio quodam serisu ilia attigisti P 

28. Dicam autem primum, quae aliquando ipsum audivi 
de daemonio disserentem ad Aristodemum. 



E< ovv ovTOg ^nx(psgoo Trotg 
b Tgayca^io-y xut sr* o o 
Tsyyr\ sgyov, (puvegog bri 
ayaQog uv sijxl^, [jt^aWovb ts- 
Kog Tuyp^avoj'^, 6 ETroTroiVa. 

Ev 6 bjXiXioc oi7rsiy.i, 6"® 
r<5* 6 savTOU spyov yj xjv- 



76 



CHAP. XXIII. 



Two or more substantives singular have a verb, ad- 
jective, or relative plural ; if they be of different persons or 
genders, the verb or adjective will agree with the most 
worthy ; if they signify things without life, the adjective is 
commonly in the neuter. 

Two or more substantives, &c. 

of different genders, &c. 

of different persons, &c. Bell, 

1. Simon Peter, and Thomas^ E»jW'* 6/jtoy !^t/x,cov Hs- 



^ 



and Nathaniel were together. 

2. I go away to Croesus and 
Sardanapalus, being about to 
dwell near them, 

3. Peter and John answering 
to them, said ; If it is just before 
God to hear you rather than 
God, judge ye. 

4. % No, by Jove, but vain 
glory, Olid, pride, and much mad- 
ness ; these things burned you to 
a coal. 

5. And the Lord said to Joshua, 
Lo I give into thy hand, Jericho, 



rgos, xai ©oofLas, xcti Na- 
'O §e Herpos xon laouv- 

Vr^S CiTTOXpiVOfMCH^^ 7rpO$ (XV- 
TOS SITCOV* E» 5/X«*0f £I]XI 

gycoTTiov 6 ©eo§, <t\j otjcovoo 
[Jt^SlWoV Yj 6 ©soc, Kgivoo.^ 
Ou, y^a, Zeus, ccKKoL xs- 

VO'^O^IU, XOLi TV(pO§, XCCi TTO- 

Kvc xopv^ot,' ovTOS (TV airoLV- 
Qpaxoco. 

Kai siTTOV Kvpiog Trpog 



Ir^dw^, 



ISou eyco TrapoLdi- 



and her king, being powerful in Scojxt vTro^eigiov (tu** 6 Ispi 



strength. Now do thou set thy 
soldiers in a circle round her. 



6. There, it is said that Gany- 
mede being torn away, disappear- 
ed, his 'brother and his lover drag- 
ging him contrary' ways. 



^00, xa.1 6 ^oLCTiKeug cx.uro§, 

^U h TrSpKTTYjf^l^ CiVTOg^ 6 

Evfia xoii 6 Tuw[XYidy^g 
ag'K&XjJ', a.<^OLvr\s yivoixxi^ 
Koyos, ayQeXxcjo cuvro^ 6 



Ch. 24. 



77 



7. And his mother said to him; Koti eittov %pQg avrog 6 
Son, why didst thou thus to us ? M'^^P otuTog* Tsxvovti ttoi- 
behold thy Juther and I grieving eu)^ syca ovrcas ; ihu 6 ttw 
and sorrowing were seeking iliee. t>)^ <ru xa* zytfi o^uvaoi/.at 

xai KuTtsai^ ^^tsco cry. 

8. Cyrus et Cyaxares cum instruxissent (suos) exjpectahanty 
tanquam, si accederent hostes, pugnaturi, 

9. Neptunm^ et Juno, et Minerva machinati sunt vincire 
€um. 



CHAP. XXIV. 



Verbs transitive of accusing, giving, and their contraries ; 
and those of declaring, and comparing, with the genitive or 
dative, govern also the accusative. 

Verbs of comparing, &c. 

Verbs of accusing, &c. BelL 

1. Y'ou should cast up to no 
person his misfortune ,• for fortune 
is common, and the future is 
invisible. 

2. He surrendered himself to 
Gylippus, 

3. They show him those that are 
busy there. 

4. First then, / tell you my 
ami opinion, and from whence I 
was excited to the descent. 

5. Do not ye accuse the people 
of the Athenians of folly, before svuvtiov 6 ExXv\v, 6 dv}[/.os 
the Grecians. 6 A^yjvaioc. 

6. Demosthenes and Diogenes KaXoos xat 6 Aijju-oo-fisvyjj 
have spoken well; the one calHng ^ xai 6 Aioysvvis' o y.svx^^' 
rich and ignorant men, golden (tbo^ frgoSotTov xaXsco 6 
sheep ; the other, comparing them ttAouo-jo j xai aTraihvTOs* 6 



MyjSs/j, (rvf/.(popoc ovsi~ 
Si^oj^'* xoivog yotp 6 rv^v}, 

ExSiVOf kuUTOV FoAlTT- 

AsiKVVo) uvTOg 6 exei 

Kai Srj TrgctiTu, cry distfn 
6 yvcjofj^Yi 6 sfxo;, xui oQsv 
hqiLCLCjcP 7rgo§ 6 xuTct^ucig, 

M)j8g alpsoi TTotpotvoia, 



78 



Ch. 24. 



to figs upon precipices. 

7. O Athenians, I request this 
from you, 

8. To give great and pompous 
/epithets to trifling little circum- 
stances, would appear the same 
thingj as if a person would put a 
great tragic mask upon an infant 
child, 

9. In the Odyssey, a person 
*would compare Homer to the set- 
ting sun, whose greatness re- 
n?ains, without his violence. 

10. If Critias and Alcibiades 
committed any transgression, the 
accuser blames Socfrates for this; 
but because Socrates kept them 
temperate when they were young, 
does he seem to the accuser 
worthy of no praise ? 

11. But the Chaldeans came, 
entreating Cyrus to make peace 
mth them, 

12. / manifested thy name to 
the men, "whom thou hast given to 
me out of the world ; thine they 
were, and thou hast given them to 
me, and they have kept thy word. 

13. What law is full of so much 
injustice and inhumanity, as to 
deprive of grateful acknowledge- 
ment the person who has given 
some of his property (to the 
state), and has done a humane 
and generous action. 



UVSIXU^CO 01VT0§, 

12 aVYjp A&VIVCIIQ§, OUTO$ 
(TV &£OjXai. 

'O [MKpog TTpayfjiciTiov 
TTspiTi^Yifxi [Jisyag XCH (TSIX.- 
vog ovofj^u, 6 auTog av cpui- 
va)"^% (bg SI rig TpuyiKog 
Trpoa-ooTTSiov jxeyaj 7ra<^ tts- 
piTi^rifj^i^^ vv}7riQg, 

Ev 6 0^u(r(reioi,7roipsijcet- 
^00^ Tig (XV xaraSucti'" 6 'O- 
[MT^pog YiXiog, bg, Sjp^a e (r(po- 
dpOTYig, 7roipoifj.£Vco6 [/^eysQog, 

E* [xev Tig7rXi^[Ji[xeXea)'^^^^ 
KpiTiag KonAXm^iu^vig, ou- 
rog 'SctixpuTYig 6 xuTYiyopog 
aiTiaoiJ^oLi' OTi Is vsog^^ 
ziiLi^ ccvTog ^coKpciTi^g Tra- 
pua-^co^ crM(ppoov, ouhig 
sTTctivog ^OKsco 6 xctTviyopog 
u^iog sifjLi ; 

'O h Xahdotiog tjxcoQ, 
dsoi/^cti 6 Kvpog^ siprivr^ 6g 

^oivspoco 6 ovofjia <rv 6 av- 
QpcoTTog, bg Bidco[j,i eyco sx 6 
Koa-fLog* (TOg £///.<, xai eyw 
auTog di^co[j,i, Hui b \oyog 

<7U TV} p SCO, 

Tij eiju-i voju-oj TOcrovTog 
uhiKia xui [ji.KrcivSpooTria ju,s- 
g-og, oo(7TS 6 8«5a)/jc*^^ Tig^^ b 
j^iOjP, x.ai TTOisco^ 7rgciy[j,o(. 
(piXavQpotiTrog xai (piKolcjopog, 
b x^p^S^ ci7ro(rTspsw, 



Ch. 25. 79 

14. Nam si rebus animum intendas^ non propter civitates 
comperies in gloria cives esse, sed ipsum sane contrarium, 
propter viros artibus prsestantes, eorum patrias fuisse 
nobilitatas. 

15. Quid hoc? ferisne, O Timon? Antestor, O Her- 
cules ! hei ! in jus wco te de mlnere ad Areopagum. 

16. Clatmm JbrtuncE wetQYes dedere ; et basin glohosam 
pedibus subjeceruni; oculis etiam (earn) privarunt. 



CHAP. XXV. 



Verbs of asking, teaching, clothing, and concealing; 
*and sometimes, with the Attics, verbs oi giving, hurting, 
and accusing, with their contraries, govern two accusatives. 

Verba dandi, &c. Eton, 

Sic et verba rogandi, &c. 

Verba implendi, &c. 

Verba dicendi, &c. 

Verba connotantia, &c. Wetten. 

Verbs of asking, &c. Bell. 

Verba dicendi, &c. Holmes. 

1. The wicked always work 'O 7rovr}go$ ust xciKo$ 
some evil to those who are nearest xij"^ sgyu^oi/.cci 6 eyyura- 
them. TO) oiuTog sifji^ij^ 

2. The king said to the maid, Enrov 6 ^oco-t\svg 6 xo- 
Ask of me what [thing) you will, gaa-iov, Ansai^ eyoo 6s sotv 
and I will give it you. (pC^^i"'^) -^e^-co^ xa< SiSwjw,* 

(TV, 

3. Come, then. If I buy you, ^sgoo 8>j, *jv itqiaiuui au, 
what will you teach me P Tig eya) SjSao-xw;^ 

4. It is fit that men should bear AvoLyxri 6 avQ§cio'7ro§ toi- 
such things as they have done to ovrog 7racr;^«3, oloa-'Trsg uv 6 
others, uKKog dgoioo,^ 



80 



Ch. 25. 



Xuxis sig oiVTOg oigyvQiov a- 
vuXicrxo), savTOV ds a/AsAsoj. 

OVTSUV (piXogri; TTOISM^'^ 



5. They have passed a decree Kai Ylayua-cn wKamui 
to demand Pagascefrom him, and auroj vf/yjipj^coP, xai May- 
have prevented him to fortify vy^(tix KviKvoi rsiy^iloi. 
Magnesia. 

6. I never 5«?W nor did any Ov^sTTMTrors auros ovrs 
thing to him, for which he was eiira, ovts ttoism ovhig, stti 
ashamed. 

7. They teach their servants 
arts, frequently spending much 
money upon them, but they 
neglect themselves. 

8. A person cannot do his 
friends the most good in war, any aXXcoc ttm^, %oXvs aya^oc^ 

other way, than when seeming to sv TroKsfxog, yj 'tioKzi/.iq^ 

be an enemy; nor can any one loxsvi si^t* ovts av ^x^gog 

hurt his enemies more, than when ^roXujP ^Xutttoo^^, uXXcag 

seeming to be a friend. ttwj, vj (piXog ^qksm ei[x,i. 

9. % Afterwards having ob- UaXiv toivuv xureidoi 
served Neoptolemus the actor NeoTrroAsjaoc 6 (moxgirrig 
becoming bold, and doing the rvy^^vM aleia^, >cocko§ Je 
greatest evils to the state, I having e|>ya^O|a«i 6 fji^syug 6 TroXig, 
come in told it to you. 'naqzgyo^f.on^ sittov sig a-v,^^ 

10. Andin thai day 7/e shall ask Kon sv sKsivog 6 YjiJ^spa, 
me nothing. Verily, verily, I say syoo ovx. sgcjoTuu) ou^sig, A- 
unto you, that ^whatever things ye [^vjv, u^iy^v, Xsyco cru, on 
shall ask from the father in my haog av uitsm^ 6 TtuTr^q sv 6 



name, he will give them to you. 
1 1 . Our domestics do to us those 
things, which we did not expect to 
suffer from any of the barbarians ; 
and you have those for enemies, 
whom you benefited most. 

1 2. Bonum aliquid facere in patriam conatur. 

13. Pueros et ephebos contraria his docebatis. 



ovofji^a. syai, h^cay^i^ crv, 

'Og Trgog [/.Yi^sig ^ag^a- 
goc TTiio-p^co^ Trgoa-^oxsoo'^, 
ovTog ^oaco syoo 6 oixer»j$' 
xai bg [xciXio-Ta. euspysreoo, 
ovrog s^^gog £%«. 



81 



CHAP. XXVI. 



Participles govern the case of their own verbs 

Participia regunt casus, &c. Eton, 
Idem, est ac, &c. Wetten. 
Participles, govern, &c. Bell, 
Participia servant regimen, &c. Holmes, 



1. However it is possible 
that one giving trouble to the ene- 
my^ may afford safety to his friends. 

2. I having seized some of them, 
devoured them, as was right, 
being robbers. 

3. They, seeing their masters 
also obeying, immediately obeyed. 

4. If any person thinks things 
contrary to me, looking into their 
works, he shall find them bearing 
witness to my words, 

5. T/iey having forgot the first 
things, or rather indeed the 
whole subject. 

6. % Thinking that a man who 
had once taken a bribe, and been 
corrupted by money, could not 
remain a safe judge of things 
useful to the state, 

7. Then again talking of the 
great loss, which had happened to 
us J thinking that we should spend 
the rest of our life, as having 
been deprived of a father. 



Eyoo (rv\Xc/,y.^uvco^ UV' 
roc Tig, (hcTTrsg eixog e</jo<, 

'O de, ogcico kui 6 deaTTO- 

Et Se Ti? evaVTiOf zyoi 
yiyvcaa-^ui, b sgyov avrog 
s'Tna-xoTTscti, sugia-xco ocvTog 
IxocgTvgsM 6 sfxog Koyog, 

'O TrgcoTog s'TrikuvQavG- 
fxoii^^, i^&.KKov Is xa* 6 

^avo;^'^, x«< hoi.<^^eig(ti^ 

er» 6 a-v[j,(psgoo aa-^uKi\i 
jxevco TToXig, 

Tots 8s uu Tcsgi 6 trwjx- 
(^oga^ 8;6^£</Aj^, b<TOi; syca 
yivoix.ot.i^'^^ sijtxi^' ciTsy(y»i5 
YjysofMui cho'irsg irarifig (TTs ■ 
psco^, Siayco^ 6 sTrajra |8iOf. 



82 



Ch. 26. 



8. Wealth is rather the servant UkouTog Kuxia fji^aXXov 
of evil than of good ; ^rw^5/^^;lg• >} KccXoKotyuQioi vTrripsTYig 
opportimity for indulgence, and e*ju-r s^ovdia, [ji,sv 6 pahfxiu 
enticing 2/oung men to ipleasuies, '^rupua-Ksua^a), stti Ss 6 >)- 

8ov>j* 6 vsoj •jrapoixoiXsco. 

9. Most of us are affected like 'O ttoXv^ 6"^ 6 TrjXsjxa- 
Telemachus ; for he, through in- ^og^ itaayoi' ■kol\ yaq exgj- 
experience, or rather ignorance voj, utto uTreigicc^ i^uWov 8e 
of good, having seen Nestor's uTrsigoKuXiu, 6 jxsv Neo-- 
house, containing couches, tables, roog g<5w^ o»x/a xKivyj e^oo, 
vestments, carpets, and pleasant 
wine, did not call him happy, 
w7io was provided with necessary 
and useful things ; but with Me- x«j ^P^^^l^^S' Trccpot ds 6 
nelaus, having beheld ivory, gold, MsveAaoj ^ecioi/,cn^ s\s<pus, 
and amber, he was struck with xoli x^vaos, xai yiXsktdov, 
admiration. exTrArjo-o-co.^ 



Tpurre^u, ifxaTiov, (yTgcjofji.oi, 
otvog Yi^u§, Qvx [Jiuxctpi^co^ 
6 euTTogsu)^^^ 6 avayxaioj^i) 



10. Vidi reges et satrapas nostros, mendicantes apud eos, 
etprimas liter as docentes. 

11. Plures futuri sunt vos redarguentes, quos nunc ego 
compescebam. 

12. Deos et heroas precati, fines ita transierunt. 



83 



CHAR XXVII. 



Passive verbs take a genitive, of the agent, after them, 
which is governed by a preposition understood or ex- 
pressed. 

Passiva exigunt genitivum, &c. Eto7i, 

Genitivum etiam cum, &c. Wetten. 

Passive verbs will have, &c. 

Sometimes the preposition, &c. Bell. 

Passiva fere exigunt, &c. Holmes. 



1. Such are made by bad 
poets of themselves ; and by good 
ones, for the actors. 

2. They are named philoso- 
phers by us. 

3. It is one of the most shame- 
ful things, that we should be seen 
throwing away, not only the 
cities and places, of which we 
were once possessors, but even 
the auxiliaries and opportunities 
that nsoere furnished by fortune. 

4. No action of any account 
*was done by them. 

5. I seek truth, by 'which no 
person isoas ever injured; but he 
is injured who remains in his 
error and ignorance. 

6. He has been honoured by 
God and by men. 

7. I was thus taught by my 
country and yours^ to submit to 

G 2 



TOJOWTOJ^-P* i:(m(x>^ V-KQ 

avTog^* VTTO 8e 6 uyuQog, 
dux, 6 v7roxgnr\g. 

^iXo(ro<pog Tcgog syco ovo" 

vov •noXif' xai roTtog, 6g si[xi 
TTOTS xvQiog, (paivu) Trgoisfx- 
svog^^% (xXXcc xai 6^ vtto 6 
Tv^rj 7ragcia-K=uo(.^M^^ (TVfx~ 
f^x^ag Ts Kdi xuigog. 

UgOKKTOO^ OLTTO UVTOg ou- 

5ejf sgyov a^ioXoyog. 
Z-^TSoti 6 oiXfiSsiu, (mo 6g 

Ovdeig TTCOTTOTg fSXUTTTCO^' 

kavTov cntcLTf^ y.cn ccyvoiu. 
Ugog &sog xcct %gog av- 

Tlai'Bsvcjo^ QVTcug uiro 6 
Sfxog T= x«i ufjLSTsgog ttoc- 



84 



Ch. 27. 



my seniors, not only brothers, 
but citizens also. 

8. % Quintianus having taken 
his stand, in the entrance of the 
amphitheatre, having drawn his 
small sword, rushed suddenly on 
Commodus, and called out with a 
loud voice, that he hadbeen sent to 
him, hy the senate ; and not having 
quickly wounded him, but whilst 
he delayed about the uttering of 
the words, and showing of his 
sword, being seized by the king's 
life-guards, he suffered punish- 
ment for his madness. 

9. The people were destroyed, 
not only being beat down by the 
soldiers, or trampled upon by the 
horses, but also being oppressed by 
the multitude. 

10. Pertinax having said such 
things, encouraged the senate 
very much, and being applauded 
by all, and having received all 
honour and reverence from them, 
he returned into the royal court. 



a8eX(pof, aXAa xa< 7roXiT)jj 

'T(p<(rT>j|W-»^ 6 Ky'ivrtavof, 
BV b b afx.(pi$S(XTgov skto^o^, 
yvixvoco^ b ^i<piliov, sTrsg^o- 
jxai^^ re cn(pvi^ioo§, b 'K.oftfxo- 

TTOv^ UTTO b^ (TvyycKr^TO^ av- 
ros^ sTTiTrefji'Trcjo' mgooa-jcco^^ 
[j,ri <pQa.VM^^, aKKoL ev b§ irsqi 
b pijju-a i:qo<pogu^ ct.<Tyji' 

G-VAX0i[J.§a.VCO^ VTTO b (TCJOfJiOL' 

avoid v'TTs^o),^ 

^Qsigoi^b^T^lxoc, ou fLOVov 
/SaXXco""^ UTTO 6 argaTKOTvic, 

Ouds TTOCrSCO VTTO b iTTTTOg 

ciWoi xui VTTO b 7rKv}$o$ 
cofisco. 

Toiovrog b Ylsgrivu^ ei- 
•Kov, vTTsgBi^co Ts (ToyxAyj- 
rog /3cyX»), xai itgog Trug 
gu(p>)/jn^aj^, "nag r's riju,>3^ 
xai uil'jug itugoL auToc ruy- 
p^avco^, Big b (5a.(nXsiog sttoiv- 



1 1 . Super atus a morte, 

1 2. Opoi-tebat quidem me forsan prolixa dicere, quoad 
tam multa a te accusatum. 



85 



CHAP. XXVIII. 



The accusative is often put absolutely, xara being under- 
stood. 

Adjectiva, si subintelligatur xara, &c. 

Quaedam nomina, &c. 

Passiva per synecdochen, &c. 

Ubique locus est, &c. Eton, 

Plurima nomina post se habent, &c. 

Verba jurandi, &c. Wetten. 

To the genitive of measure, &c. 

Many adjectives have an accusative, &c. 

Many verbs, both in the active, &c. 

The passives of such actives, &c. 

The participles of, &c. Bell. 

Accusativum regunt quae, &c. 

Passiva regunt accusativum, &c. Holmes. 



1. Some persons without 
crowns, appear to have their legs 
and heads torn. 

2. VV^ilt thou kill me, as thou 
killedst the Egyptian yesterday ? 

3. I feel pain in my head, 

4. No one of men is wise in all 
things. 

5. A stone of a hundred feet 
in length, 

6. Having been deprived of M^ 
empire. 

7. I venture to be wise, as to 
human wisdom. 

8. Or who, being a slave to 
pleasures, would not be shame- 

G 3 



xv>3]x>j xai xs<p«X>) Soxsco 

My) avai^sow^ syui <rv de- 
Xco, 6j TgoTto^ uvuigsoo^ zy~ 
$s$ 6 AiyvTTTiog ; 

AXysu) 6 xs(paXYi. 

oiTTus a'o(pog. 

exaxov. 

A'pctipsco^ 6 cx-px^* 

'O (xvQgoiTrivog (ro(pitx, 
KivlvvsvM £</xi (ro(pog. 

H rig OVK av, 6 YjhvY) 
SouXsyoj, oiKT^poog 8taTi5)j- 



86 



Ch. 28. 



fully affected, both in body and 
mind ? 

9. % Homer is worthy to be 
praised ^r manyothey^ things, and 
especially because he alone of the 
poets knows what it becomes him 
to do. 

10. None of the immortals can 
escape thee. 

1 1 . Into whatsoever city you 
will have comeyyou will be meaner 
than the citizens, in all things. 

1 2. One of them was advising 
me to take pleasure in everything, 
and to pursue this alone above 
all ; for that this was happiness. 

13. Endeavour to be laborious 
i7i your body, and wise in your 
mind; that with the former you 
may be able to execute your de- 
signs, and with the latter may 
know to foresee useful things. 

14. Do not disturb nor ex- 
amine him ; for he is drunk, so 
that he could not answer you, 
stammering with his tongue. 

15. I saw a fair woman and 
very long as to her neck, so that 
she seemed to be the daughter of 
a swan. 

16. The man appears mag- 
nanimous in his life, and correct 
in his knoidcdge. 

1 7. Because the barbarians are 
more slavish intheir manners Xkiain 
the Gi'ecians, and those of Asia 
than those of Europej they remain 



•\fuxri; 

6t/ jxovof 6 7roir,TYig, ovx. 
uyvoev) 6j lu ttoisco uuTog. 

jtAOj oudsic. 

Ejj o-KOios av TToXig w 

(piKVSOfXCH^^, 6 TTOXlTY}^, TTOtg, 
'OjU-SV aVTOS 'TTUCUlVSCti 6 

Toj ex 'KOLS jxereijotj, ourej 
yap sifxi 6 euSajjoccov."* 

(ro(po§' ha. 6 fx,sv eirireXsa) 
TTpoopaco szKTTafxtxi 6 o-yjx- 

M>) svo^Ksu) oc.UTO§ jxrjSs 
avcixgiyco' fx^sQva) yap, cLcrTS 
ovK av aTTOxpivofxai^^ av'^, 6 
yKoidda dioXic-Qaivcti. 

EiSco^ Ksuxog /xsv tij, 
xa; g7rjju,r)X>3j 6 rpa^riXog, 
cag eixa^oi^^^ KUKVOg ^vyu' 

TYip SlfXl. ■ 

^aivca^ avrjp o jxev Ja») 
urf/rjAotppoov, 6 8e yvwaig 
axpi^i^c, 

Aia 6"^ So'jXixoj" sifti 6 
Ti^o; 6 txsv ^xgoapog 6 'EA- 
A>jv, 6 S= Trepj o Acr*a^ 6 
TTs^t 6 Ev^coTryj, vttoixsvco 6 



Ch. 28. 



87 



under the despotic government, 
in nothing murmuring. 

1 8. Timaeus is full of the other 
fault, (I mean the frigid style;) 
a man, in other things^ well 
enough. 



0$' uvvipf u,sv otXhos, laa- 

o^y)) o^oppOTTog sjjxr xa< 
aTTco ^s^co, ctiG'Trep 6 avsp- 



Ejjxi 6^ ft£y sqyoLTiico; 



19. The keen and ready- 
witted are, for the most part^ 
readily excited to passions ; and 
are borne along bounding, as 
ships without ballast. ! 

20. The one was laborious and 
manlike, and squalid as to her xui ctv^gmos, xoci otv^fj:.Yigo§ 
hair, full of hardness as to her 6 noixri, 6 ^eip tuXojP uvu- 
hands, girt up as to her rohe, full TrXscog, Sia^covvujXi^P 6 effOyig, 
of dust, as my uncle was, when tituvos xuTotyeixco^ olog 
he polished the stones ; the other eifii 6 ^sio$, ottots ^sa/^, 6 
Was very handsome, neat as to XiQog, 6^ hspog de [/.uka 
her dress, and graceful as to her euTrgoa-ctiTrog, xa< 6 cryrwi'^ 

evTrgsTtYis, xon KO(riJLio§ o 

Et; 6g rgoTro; 6 (rroi^siov 
6 y.sv sijxi (poovY}sig, 6g xa< 

X6iTa SXVTOV (pciiVYj UTTOTS' 

Kzoi' arjTog rgoTtog sifxi 
sTTivoeoo^ aui eiti o ks^ig^* 6 
ja-ev avTog, rpoirog Tig 6 
<pcovYisig, pYiTog sipn. 

EXTTiJo;, ei 6 %pog 6 ags" 
T*j oSoj rpB-nco^^, (T(^olpct, av 



gesture, 



21. Moreover as some of the 
letters are vowels, which perfect a 
sound by themselves ; so we may 
remark of expressions them- 
selves; some of them, in the 
manner of vowels, are of them- 
selves expressive. 

22. I hope, if you turn your- 
self to the "way towards virtue, 
that you will be an admirably cu o xaXog xcci asfjLvog sp- 
good performer of good and yaryjj ayaQog yivofj^ai.^ 
honourable things. 

23. Harum artiumegojamdudum cupidus sum ; praeser- 
tim si sufFecerit mihi eadem scientia, ad homines bonos 
quoad animosy et ad pulchros quoad corpora, 

G 4 



88 



CHAR XXIX. 



Neuters in the plural have commonly verbs singular. 

Neutra pluralia gaudent, &c. Eton, ^ 
Neutrum plurale gaudet, &c. Wetten. 
A neuter plural is generally, &c. Bell. 
Nomen neutrum plurale, &c. Holmes, 



1 . The animals run, 

2. Things are plainer, when 
compared together. 

3. All things which the father 
hath are mine. 

4. Do you not know that your 
bodies are members of Christ ? 

5. What then are these things ? 

6. Not things, but the opinions 
of things trouble men. 

7. The good things which you 
promised to do to us, when you 
received the money, have been 
accomplished by you already. 

8. TJie sheep follow him, be- 
cause they know his voice. 

9. How are the things not 
good, which men receive from 
fortune ? or again, how are the 
contrary things not bad ? 

1 0. 1[ Ye use the earth and sky 
for an house, and ye have as many 



Ylug oorog zyjM o "TroiT^p 



Oi 



iloi' 



on (TODfJiOl 



<7\j y.sXog XpKTTog £</jh ; 

OvTog ovv Tis eifxi ; 

TapudCTa) uvSpcjoTTog, 
ou 7rpayiJt.a, txXKa. o irsqi 
6 Trpayixu^ ^oyixoi, 

'Og v'TTKr^vsof/.a.i^ ttoisoo^ 
uyuSog eyoo^oTS Aaju,^avw"^ 

6 ^pYilLCxP, CtTTOTsXsOO (TV^ 
'O TrpoSuTOV OLWTOg OLKO- 

XovQsca, oTi siteui'^^ 6 (pcavvi 
uvTog, 

Tlcag ovx si[xi uyu^ogf 6* 
(TOg Kdi^^oLVco uvSpMirog 

TCapOL TV^YI ; 13 TTUXlV, 

evavTiog Trcog ovk sifji,i xa- 
Koc ; 

Oixiot iJLSv ^guo[xai ysa. 

TS X«l OVpOCVOg, xXlVYj S= (TV 



Ch. S9. 



89 



couches as there can be beds on 
the earth ; and ye reckon as your 
coverings, not all the wool that 
sheep jproduce^ but all the bushes 
that the mountains and the plains 
sendforth, 

11. Whoever knows good and 
bad tragedy, knows also epics; 
for the qualities which the epo- 
poeia has, are in tragedy. 

12. Riches, honours, titles, 
crowns, and whatever other things 
have their outside decked in thea- 
trical splendor, cannot, to a wise 
man at least, seem exceeding good 
things, the very despising of 
which is no moderate excellence. 

13.1 shall relate how each of 
these things have been done, ac- 
cording to their times. 

14. Let these things be sufficient 
for you, let them always be as 
principles. 

15. Let silence generally pre- 
vail, or let necessary things be 
spoken, and in few words. 

16. And it shall be, when ye 
shall have sounded with the trum- 
pet, let all the people shout to- 
gether, and whilst they are shout- 
ing, the walls of the city shall Jail 
of their own accord, and all the 
people shall enter, each one rush- 
ing forward into the city. 



v>j STT* yeoL^* (TTgoofjia. 8e vo- 

[Xl^OO OV^ OTTOCroS TCgoSlXTOV 

(P'joo sgiov^, aWu ottojos 
(pgvyotvov ogosre xoti rrs^iov 

og yoLq sTtoitonoL e%co, wrup- 
ym 6 T pay 00^ lot, 

riXouTOjP^, Ti/x.>3, Sofa, 
Tugavvis, xa/ 60-05 5)j <x\\o§ 
syco TTOkvg 6 s^aiQsv Trpofpoi- 
ycjohcjo^'^^, ovx otv, oye (ppovi^ 
fji^og, Soxsw^^ ayotQog VTrsg- 
^otXXco^, 6j ocvTog^^ 6 irspi- 
(figovsoo^ uyoiSoc^^ ov ^srgiog, 

'Q,g IxacTTojP OUTOg 
Trpua-a-oo, xtxra, x^^^^S^ ^'*3" 
ysojxai. 

OvTog <ru agxew, asi 
doy[/.u sifjii, 

'^looTTVi 6 %oKv eijtx-i, >) 
KaKsoi , xa» Sja 

oKiyog,^ 

Ka/ eiju,/, coj otv (TuX- 
77*^0)^^ o-aATTjyf, ava- 
xgci^oo^ TTug 6 XoLOg oc[ji,a, 
Koii ctvaxgot^cti^ aurog, 

'TnTTTOO^ OLVTOlUOLTOg TSi^J^g 

iroKig, jcoii eKTep'/oii^ai 
'JTcig Koiog, ogixcuco^ Ixacr- 
rog Kara, ^goa-ooTrov eig 6 



90 



Ch. so. 



1 7. Domus quidem tibi bene habet, et mancipia omnia, 
et equi sane, et canes, et prcedia, et quaecunque possides 
pulchre disposita sunt, 

18. O stulti, nescientes quantis terminis negotia mortu- 
orum et vivorum discreta sunt, et qualia sunt apud nos. 



CHAP. XXX. 



The primitive pronoun is used in the genitive, instead 
of the possessive pronoun. 

The genitives of primitive, &c. BelL 
Graeci substantivo saepe, &c. Holmes. 

1. Then Jesus said, Let thou Eittov ovv 6 Iijo-ouc, A^i- 
her alone, she has kept it until ij/x,*^ otvroc, elg 6 r^j^sqa. o 
the day of my burial, 6VTCi<pia<r[/,os syoo rripsoo ouo- 

T0§. 

2. Fear not, daughter of Sion, M>) ^o^sw'", ^uyarrjp 
lo ! tki/ king Cometh, sitting upon "^icov, idou, 6 ^a(nkeu$ au 
the colt of an ass. sg^Q[/.cn, nixQrifjiui stti ttco- 

Xog^ Qvog. 

3. And that they may not Ka< ottcoj /x>) o ^cogiov 
gladly see the place, where they rihoog opuao, svGci xutukoh- 
killed our auxiliaries. voo"^ syco 6 (ryjXjxa;^oj. 

4. And the steward said in 'Eittov ds bv ectvrov 6 oix- 
himself. What shall I do, since ovo[/.o5' Tig ttoism, oti 6 
my Lord takes my stewardship Kupiog syoo afongsca"^ 6 oix- 
away? I am not able to dig, I ovoiJ^iu syco; (rKonrroo sx. icr- 
am ashamed to beg. X""^? sTrutTSM aiap^^uvojxai. 

5. You say right, for I cured Ev Xsyw, 6ti <tv 6 zy~ 
your burns, when lately you came xuv[/,a. icx.oiJ.cn, 6ts Trgcoviv 
up half burnt. uvsg^o(ji.cn^ YjfxKpXsKTo;, 



Ch. 30. 



91 



6. % Do you then, rm/ son, be 
strong in the grace which is in 
Jesus Christ. 

7. If ye keep mi/ command- 
ments ye shall remain in rm/ love; 
as I have kept my father's com- 
mandments, and I remain in his 
love. 

8. Now mi/ soul is troubled, 
and what shall I say? Father 
save me from this hour; but, for 
this did I come to this hour. 
Father, glorify thy name. Then 
did a voice come from heaven; I 
have glorified it, and will again 
glorify it. 

9. And the book of this law 
shall not depart out oftki/ mouth, 
and thou shalt meditate in it, by 
day and by night, that thou mayest 
know to do all the things that are 
written ; then shalt thou be di- 
rected right, and thou shalt 
rightly direct thy ways, and then 
shalt thou understand. 



"^v ouv, TBKVov eyco, ev- 

X^/cTTOf I>j(royj. 

Eavd evToArj syui rripeeu^y 
[jt,evoD ev 6 ayoiTrri eyco' xa- 
$00$ eya) o 6vtoX>) o TroiTrig 
eyco Tijpgco, xcn ^Levoi avTog 
sv 6 ocyccTrYi, 

Nuv ^|'y^>) syco Tctgaa"- 
(TO)'^, Kut Tis eiTTUii Tlarrip, 
(Too^oo^ syoi) ex o ooga. ovtos* 

sig 6 (hpot ovTOS» TIctTfip^ 
do^a^oo^ (TV 6 ovofxu. E^- 
p^ojaaj ovv (pctiVYj ex 6 ovgct- 

Ka< oux a(pi(rr»j/x»" o 
/St^Aoj vofMOs ovTog ex 6 
CTOjxa 0"y, xai jU-eXsraco ev 
uoTOs^, Yj(ji.sgoc, x.a.1 vuf, hot 
eiSeo; Ttoisvi -Ttctqo ypa.(pio^^* 
TOTS euoSoaj, x«< evQ^oui 6 
olos (Tu, xa< rore (rvviri(j(,i. 



10. Num major es patre nostra? 

11. Filius /wzAs vivit. 



92 



CHAP. XXXI. 



An impersonal verb governs the dative. 

Xgvi, -TrpsTrei, and hi, it bekoveth, govern the accusative, 
with the infinitive. 

Ag< and x^^i signifying necessity, or want, eAXejVe/, /jtsAe*, 
hotfspsi, fj^sTsa-Ti, svhxsTui, with their compounds, govern 
the genitive and dative. 

Impersonalia exigunt, &c. JEton, 

Idem est manente, &c. 

Quod ad particularia, &c. Wetten. 

Impersonal verbs govern, &c. Bell, 

Hue referantur, &c. 

But ht, xp^i &c. Holmes. 

1 . Who ought to seek for death, 
as the remedy of the troubles in 
age. 

2. The definition is entirely 
worthy of praise, as having all 
things which a good definition 
should have, 

3. But should not Vulcan pity 
Achilles, being the son of Thetis ? 



vuTo;, (b$ 6 sv 6 yr\pot$ xa- 

XOf <pC)ip[Jl,(XKOV. 

UotVV STTOllVOg OL^lOg 6- 

qoc, chg TTOi; ep^co 6(ros dsi 



4. And he said this, not that 
he cared about the poor, but be- 
cause he was a thief, and had the 
bag, and carried the things that 
were put in it. 

5.. Tell me plainly thus, what 
is this dress ? or what need had 
you of the journey down? 

6. / myself have a share in the 
service. 



*0 *H($iaicrTOj Se an Se/a 

Ax'^>^su$*; 

EiTToy Se tirn^i^ ovx oTi 

TTSgi 6 TTTCOXOS^ [J^SkSl UUTOS, 
UKXUOTI TCXSTTTriS £ip, xott 

6 yXot)(ra-oxo[iov £%«;, xai o 

Asyw ouroitTi 'Trcog octt- 
Xcag, Ti; 6 (ttoXyj ; rig^^ <jv 
6 xocTCO Ttopsicc 5e/ ^ ; 

Eju-auToy jxerecTTJ o 5i«- 
xovta. 



Ch. 31 



93 



7. My friends, a most excel- 
lent man is come to us ; for all 
men ought now to know this man's 
deeds. 

8. / do not repent that 1 killed 
your son, but that I did not kill 
you also. 

9. You say a pleasant thing, if 
I must first become a musician 
and then be a wise man. 

10. It has been written ; Thou 
shalt not muzzle the ox treading 
out the corn. Does not God care 
about the oxen ? 

11. 1 do not care about you* 

12. Children ought to inherit 
as well their parents' friendship, 
as their fortune. 

13. It is less allowable for 
princes, than Jbr private persons, 
to be unjust. 

14. If you appear to them to 
speak the truth, t/ou will have no 
need of any things, but go away, 
having taken your own things. 

15. 1[ For he having a navy, 
we need swift galleys, that our 
force may sail safely. 

16. I shall try to make him, 
who gives these things to us, never 
to repent of his journey to me. 

17. Ye must hate those who 
write things contrary to law, and 
think no one of such things to be 



avrig uyuQo^' vvv yctg >j5>) 
Traj avQgooTTog 8ei eiSco^ o 
ovTO$ spyov, 

Ov^ 0T< OtTTOXTSlVCti <TV 

6 vlo§ fx,sTocy,sXsi syoo, uWoc 

OTl OV XOH (TO TT^OaonrOHTSl- 

Xa^isij Xsyoo,si7rgoTsgov 
xiQoipca^og yivofjioii^^, xat 

Tpoc<pcii' Ou <pi[x,oco ^ou$ 

jXE^ei 6 0£Of ; 

UpSTTSi 6 'TtoLis, wa-TTsg 6 
QV<ricc^, ovTco xai o (p*Aia 6 
TTCtTgixog xA>3govojU,ea}. 

TiV a^ixsoo% *J 6 idlCOTI^g, 

Av doxsco^ aAyjflyj^P Aeyco 
£xeivog, ovhsig^ trv 8s* TTQuy- 

/Xi, 6 (TSUVTOV, 

Asi yctg, e^co exsivog 
vavTixog, xai TU^vg Tgn^grig 
eyco, OTToog <x(r(poc\Ms 6 dvvoc~ 
fjii; 'ttXsco, 

'O^ jxev O'jTOj ^idajpn syco, 
TTsigaoo'^ TTOisco, iJ^nyKore fis- 
TUf/,e\ei^ 6 irgo^ syta blo^. 

Xg>j (TV fjna-ea) o 6 Trupoi- 
vofjiOS yg(x(pct)^\ xcci fxi^^sts 
fnxpos riyioyitii eiixi 6 toi* 



94 



Ch. 31. 



small, but every one exceedingly 
great. 

18. It becomes all pei^sons to 
make libations, and to sacrifice, 
and offer first fi-uits, chastely, and 
not disorderly, nor carelessly, 
nor meanly, nor beyond their 
ability. 

19. Do ye wish that we should 
lay a fine on those who do not 
do this, or are you far from de- 
siring it ? 

20. Sending out the sheep one 
by one into the pasture, having 
commanded the ram, what things 
he had to do for me. 

21. You may use, as winter 
quarters for the army, Lemnos, 
and Tliasos, and Sciathos, and 
the other islands in this place; 
in which there are harbours, and 
corn, and all things which are 
necessary for armies, 

22. For Jupiter, having begot 
Hercules and Tantalus, made the 
one immortal, on account of his 
virtue, and pimished the other 
with the severest sufferings, upon 
account of his wickedness; of 
which examples, *we making use, 
should aim at excellence. 

23. The people answered to 
him, We have heard from the 
law, that Christ remains for 
ever; and how dost thou say 
that the son of man must be lifted 
up? 



ouTOg, olWol skokttos wrsg- 
%7r6vBoo, KOLi ^veo, XOll 

(TS(rup[jievcog, |x»]5e ajxeXcoj, 
xgioc, OTTOG-og XP^^ Trpatr- 

(TOO CtVTOg VTTSg Sycti.^ 

6 aWos 6 ev outoc 6 totto; 

(TiTOc, aui J* XP""} cTTparsy- 

Zeug yotg '^HgotxXsYjg tcoli 
TavraXof yByvwji^, jotev, 
81a apeT>j% aQavuTog ttoi' 
sea, 6 §e, &i« xciXiu, [Jis- 
yug Tijxwpia xoAa^o;* eg 
XP"^ "TretpoL^ziyi^cx. p^^ao/Aa/, 
opeyai^ 6 xukoxocyotSioi,^ 

ATTOXpiVOfJ^IXl^ UUTOC; 6 

oyXog, Eyco WKOuui^ ex 
V0[X0$9 OTl 6 /KgKTTog [XSVCO 

sig 6 ociav xoLi 7roo§ cru Xsyoo, 
OTi Bs* v^oui^ 6 vlog 6 otv- 
QgcoTTog ; 



Ch. 31, 






24. Howthen willyoubeof no YIms 8e ouSs<j ovhu[j,o$^ 
consequence? who are required to e<]U,<; og ev [j,ovog sifxi Tig 
be of consequence in those things hi 6 siti cru"^, ev bg e^sjTi 
alone that are in your power, in 
which j/oM mai/ be most worthy. 

25. If he who censures those 
who write to instruct, would con- 
sider these things particularly, / o-roixa&cov eTriTifxaco^ syc av 
think he would no longer take the sti, syM loy.si^ Trsgia-crog xon 
contemplation ofthe present sub- u^grjcrTog 6 stti 6^ Trpoxen 
jects to be superfluous and useless, /w-ai^s ^ysojU,a/^° ^soogia. 

26. ^7nM5^Z^<zr« from nothing 'O h xvgiog^ ts xai ay- 
else than art, this most important toc, 6"^ sijw,*^ rig 6 sv Koyog^^ 
thing, that there are some of the stti [j^qvos 6 <pyo-ij**, ovx, aX- 
things in writing, which depend XoQsv syco, rj waga o 

on nature alone. exjxavflavco^ Ssi. 

27. It is doubtful wh ether Mo5e Ei jxsv ftijSoAcoj Xoyog 
animals which are called irra- 
tional have not some share of rea- 
son ; for perhaps, although all 
partake not of that which is ut- 
tered by the voice, which they oXKol hye xotTu 6 v|/o;^)j, 6g 
name enunciative, yet they do of evdiot^srog KoiXsa), ijlsts^oo 
that which is in the mind, which 7raj"% o ju-sv f/.ct\\ov, 6 h 
they call internal, some more yjTTov. 

and some less. 

28. Si bonum aliquem amicum paraturi simus, nos zpsos 
bonos oportet esse, et dicere pulchra et facere. 

29. Sive aesj sive aurum dicaveris, aliis quidem aliquando 
possessionem et praedam dicaveris: deo vero parva ^5^ 
cura aurificum ttuyinim. 



^ooov, otdYi^os si[ji,r KTcog yocp^ 

SI KUl TOU [J,YI KOtTU 6 , 

OS xaj 7rpo(poptxos ovo[jt,u^(i). 



96 



CHAP. XXXII. 

A substantive with a participle, whose case depends 
upon no other word, is put in the genitive absolute ; some- 
times by the Attics, in the accusative ; very sMdom in 
the dative. 

The participles of impersonal verbs are often 

used absolutely in the nominative. 

Quibuslibet verbis additur, &c. 
Et Attice, accusativus, &c. Eton, 
Genitivus absolute, &c. Wetten, 
A substantive with a participle, &c. 
The participles of, &c. Bell, 
Ablativus absolute sumptus, &c. 
Sometives an accusative, &c. Holmes. 



1 . The daughter of Herodias 
having entered, and danced, and 
pleased Herod and those that sat 
with him, the king said to the 
damsel, ask of me whatsoever you 
will, and I will give it to you. 

2. Son, how vidll you learn 
justice here, your masters being 
there ? 

3. Delos being purified by the 
Athenians, in this war, and the 
sepulchres having been removed; 
as many as were of those who 
had died in the island, above the 
half appeared to be Carians. 

4. When you see any one weep- 
ing in grief, either when his son is 



*Hga>S/aj, xai op^£OiJ,cn^, 



xaj ups<TXoo^ 



'How^g' 



xai <ruvoivuxsiiJ.cn' sittov o 
PoL(ri\su$ 6 Koga<nov, uirsoa^ 
eyco 6$ soiv ^eXoo, xa» SiSoo- 
jxi^ o-y. 

'O dixcciO(rvvi^, CO 'Ttaig, 
TToog jxavflavco™'^ evfiaSe, exsi 

AflrjvaiOjS sv oh 6 ^roXe- 
fxog, xai 6 ^T^XYj avctipzuiK 
6(rog sifLi 6 ^vyjo-xco'^ sv o 
vrjiTog, vTTsp Yi[xi(rug ^"^ 
Kap (puivoo,^^ 

'Orav xXaico Bidoo'^ rig s^ 
TTsv^oc, vj a7ro8r)jaeco rexvov, 



Ch. 32. 



m 



going abroad, or when he has lost 
his property, beware lest the ap- 
pearance may take you in. 

5. It being of great importance 
to the army, that the general 
should take care of his own safe- 
ty, for the good of all. 

6. JVJten God gives his assist- 
ance, malice has no power ; and 
tjohen he does not give it, labour is 
in vain. 

7. The Grecians having three 
^fleets worth attention ; that which 

you have, and ours, and that of 
the Corinthians. 

8. The sum of all these is, 
almost, fifteen talents. 

9. TJie year being past. 

1 0. The man having done this. 

11. Many of them also fled to 
the mountains, as expecting that 
Ale.vaiider woidd not come to them 
at least. 

12. The people voted to make 
war; but when they had deter- 
mined on it, it was impossible for 
them to begin immediately, be- 
ing unprepared. 

13.*^ Having before shown the 
things, which make writings great 
and sublime, it is manifest, that 
the contrary of these will make 
them mean and vulgar. 

14. Fathers restrain their sons 
from bad associates; the society 

H 



>) OlTTOXXVfJI^l'' qP^^ SOtUTOV, 

TrgGOS^M fjiv) (TV 6 (pavTOKnoi 
IToAy dioKpspsi 6 orrqci- 

TSUfJiOC, 6 (TT^OiTYl'yog 6 euVTOU 
jU-yjSri; IGT^VCO TTOVOg, 

Tpsi;^ £<jU,i Xoyoc af <oj 6 
'EkXviv^ vuvrmov 6 Tragu 

ClfP*^, KOLl 6 YjfJiSTSgOS, xcti 6 

Kogiv^iog, 

OvTog iis<pa.Kaiov vag 
yiyvo^oLi, [x^ixgog XsiTrcOy 

'JTSVTSKOtl^SXOt TUXOLVTOV, 

lioLgeiiXi^ sviotvTog,^ 

'12f UVYjg^ OVTOg 'KOI' 

UoXvg oiVTog koh sig 6 
ogog x/y-TcKpsvyoi^, cog 'jrgor, 
ovrog ys gv^ YjKoo^ AXsJ- 

av^Qog.^ 

'O TTXrjhg \I/>]<^i^a;™Pl 
TToXstJ.sa)' §ox=j''' 5= uuTogy 
euQug ^zV a^moLTOg^-"'^ sifii 
STTi^sigeoo, UTrapoiorKSUog^^^ 

Ilgo v7rodsix,W[jt,i'^'^ 6, odog 
svysvrig koli v'\f'f\Xog sgyu^O" 
[xcti 6 Xoyog, SvjXo^, dog o 
svoLVTiog^ ouTog ruTTSivog 

'O vUug iroLTYig eigyw 
airo 6 TTOvi^gog uv^gcoirog* 



98 



Ch. 32, 



of the good being an exercise of 
virtue, but that of the bad, a 
destruction. 

1 5 . Two things being good to all 
men ; the leading one, and greatest 
of all, to be successfid; the other, 
less than this, but the greatest of 
other things, to intend well. 

16. The earth being torn open 
from its depths, Tartarus itself ex- 
posed to view, and the whole world 
receiving a commotion and a rent; 
all things together, heaven, hell, 
things mortal, and immortal, to- 
gether combat and share the 
danger in the fight. 

17. I remember, not long 
since, how he was quite terrified, 
and this too, they being but three, 

18. O ye worst of Lydians, and 
Phrygians, and Assyrians, know 
thus, that / will not cease, 

1 9. And I blame Bacchus truly, 
because, having conquered you in 
a sea fight, he metamorphosed 
you, when he ought only to have 
held you under his own power. 

20. He prayed to the gods 
simply to give the things that 
were good, as the gods know best, 
what kind of things are good. 

21. If you esteem a pot, re- 
member that it is but a pot that 
you esteem; and thus, when it is 



oi(rxYi&is sif/.i 6 apsTij, 6 fe 
6 TTOvvipoSi xuToiXvcn;, 
Avo oiyoiQos eijU't Trotg ocv- 

QpCOTTOg' 6 [J^SV Y}ycO[Jl,OH, KOLi 

ds sXot^ug li.sv ourog, 6 Se 
cx,KKos jxeyaj, o\uKaig (iou- 
Xsuofxai, 

AvcippViyVV[Xl^ U.SV sx 

(3tx.Qpog yea, uvrog ds yv^- 
voco^ Ta.prot.pog, ocvoirpoTrYi de 
oKog xcn '^lOLU'TOLdig 6 x.o(r- 
lJ,og Xajjificivoo' Trug u[jt,oi, 
oupoivog, (xdvig, 6 ^VYjrog, 6 
aduvuTog, ui^a. b totb <ruf^- 
7roAejW,s«; xa< cruyxivSuvsua; 

Mvaojxa/P'^, ov yrpo iroXvg, 
(bg TTccvTOioog sifj^i SeiSco™''^, 
xai ouTog^^, rpeig eifii,^ 

X2 xuxog Auhg, xai 
^pv^, Hat A(T(rupiog, ovroo 
yivco(rxcti, wg ou^s ttuvm^^^ 
syco, 

Kui [ji,six(pofLoi.i ys b 
Aiovv(rog^, bri, (tu^^ xoctoc- 
vocufLU^soo^, jxera^aAXco^, 
hi ^sipou)^^ ^ovov» 

'Eu^ofj^ui^ Trpog b ^sog 
oarKoig b uyu^og "^iloufxi^ oog 
b ^cog^ kuWkttcc sihuP, 
biroiog otyaQog eiy^u 

Av %OTpa (rrspycti^, ^ivoi.- 
oiuai"^ bri p^oTpa (rrspyvi' 
xuTuyvuiJi^i^ yap avrog, ov 



i 



Ch. 32. 



99 



.;3. 



broken, you will not be troubled; 
if you dearly love your son, or 
wife, that you love but a mortal ; 
and thus, when he dies, you will 
not be troubled. 

22. They who are able pur- 
chase servants, that they may covsqij.ui, \vol a-uvsgyog e^oo' 
have them as fellow labourers ; xuKpiKosx.Tcto(xcii,wg^oYi$og 
and acquire friends, as needing deofxur 6 h aSeAipoj^ a/jts- 
assistants ; but they neglect their Aew, dxTTrsg ex TroXirrig /^ev 
brothers, as if friends could be y^yvoiion <piXog% ef a,hk(pQg 



TUptXa-O-M'^' OtV TTUlOlOV (TSOiV- 
TOV KCHTUfiXcCC, Yj yVVYj, OTl 

avQpoQTrog xaratpiAsco* o-tto- 
bvYia-^oo^ yo(.g uinog, ov to.- 

OlXSTY\g fJ^SV 6 hvV(X[XCil^ 



made of citizens, and not made 
of brothers. 

23. And now the play being 
auer, each of them having strip- 
ped oJfF that gilded dress, and 
having put off his mask, and 
come down from his buskins, 
goes about poor and humble. 



H§)j 8e TTsgotg s^ca 6 dpu- 

[JLU, aTToSujX*"^ SXOKTTOg OLU- 

Tog 6 ^gtja'0'7ru(7Tog sKsivog 
ea-Qrig, x,cn 6 TrgocrwTrsiov u- 

UTTO 6 sfjiSoiTsci, Trevrig xai 
rotTTstvog TtBgisp-^o^on, 

24. nia haec adhuc dicente, non expectavi ego finem 
verborum. 

25. His expositis, fehcitas in laudabilibus sit, an potius 
in honorabilibus rebus, videamus. 

26. Hunc igitur Pertinacem, nocte intempesta, sopore 
correptis omnibus, Laetus atque Electus adeunt. 



H 2 



100 



CHAP. XXXIII. 

The time *isolien is commonly put in the genitive, some- 
times in the dative ; lionx) long, in the accusative. 

Quae significant partem, &c. Eton, ^ 
Similiter et nomen, &c. Wetten. 
Nouns of, &c. 

Time is sometimes, &c. Bell. 
Nom'en temporis, &c. Holmes, 



1. During the night they 
were proceeding thus. 

2. Before they were yet many 
days in Attica, the sickness be- 
gan first to be among the Athe- 
nians. 

3. In which time Moses w^as 
born, and was very beautiful; 
who was nourished during three 
months, in his father's house. 

4. Cyrus wept in silence ybr 
some timey and then spoke. 

5. In this month, ye sent away 
Charidemus, having ten empty 
ships, and five talents of silver. 

6. We ought to think that man 
most unhappy, who continues a 
long time, committing wickedness 
with impunity. 

7. If a law were made, that 
persons not eating should not be 
hungry, and not drinking, not 



*0 vtj^ ovToog TTopsuofiai. 

EtfXi^ avTO^^^^ ov TTQKvg 
TToo ri[j,egci^ ey 6 Attiky}, 6 
vo(rog TrpooTOV ag^oo^ yivo- 
fx,(x.i^ 6 A5>jvajo$.^ 

Ev 6j xeapocYswccoo Mco- 
(TYi^, y.ai si[j.i aa-Tsioc 6 ©sog*** 
6g civargsipcjo^ fj-i^v rpsic, ev 
6 OiKog 6 Trarrig. 

'O Kupoc X9^^^^ H'^'^ "^'s 
(TicoTrrj x,(XTa.^cx,xpva), sttsitcc 

OvTog 6 /xr^v", Ssxa vocug 
aTToa-reXKca zym Xcipior,[/.og 

XSVO§, y-OLi TTSVTc TuXoCVTOV 

agyugiov. 

'Ourig TToXv: XP^^^S ^^'■' 
X£w cx,xo\(X(rTog fjievoi, oinog 

hi VOfJl^l^M 6 CCTVyYiS' 

E/ VOlJiOg Tl^T^fXi^^, flTfj 

ea-^KO [jt,Yi TTSivctco, xai jmy} in- 



Ch. 33. 



101 



be thirsty, nor be cold in winter, 
nor warm in summer, no law 
could make men obey as to these 
things. 

8 . On the first day of the w^eek, 
Mary Magdalene comes early to 
the tomb, and sees the stone taken 
from the tomb. 

9. % And having sailed from 
thence, the next day, we came 
over against Chios ; and the day 
after, we put into Samos; and 
having staid in Trogyllium, the 
next day, we came to Miletus. 

10. The next day, Cyrus sent 
the messenger ; and the Armen- 
ian, and the Chaldeans sent with 
him, those whom they thought 
most fit, both to act along with 
him, and to speak properly of 
Cyrus. 

11. The subject of the Odys- 
sey is long ; a person being many 
years abroad, and guarded by 
Neptune, and being alone. 

12. Your servant, Menippus; 
and whence have you come to 
us? for you have not appeared 
this long time in the city. 

1 3. They continued thus crowd- 
ed some seventy days ; then they 
dismissed the rest, except the 
Athenians, and whatever of the 
Sicilians and Italians were in the 
army. 

H 3 



p^£i,acov^, jU-yjSe ^aXTrco'" o 



TOj Qvroi; Treifjco 



mf 



xui jSAsttco 6 XiQog cnquP ex 

Kui sx£iQsv ocTTOTrXeoii^, o^ 
67rej]Xi'\ xuTuvTaco otVTixpvs 
XiQ$' Ss hegog, Trapa^aA- 
Aco^ eig "^afJLog' kui [jt,svoo^ 
sv TpoyvXKiov, 6 s^oo^^, eg- 
yo\Lai\^ si§ MiArjTO^. 

'O u(rrsgaio$^,Q re Kvgog 
TTSjj.'Traf'' 6 ixyys\os' xixi 6 
Ap[j,Yivio$, Koii 6 XaASaiOj 
a-vvTTSiJi.'Trcti'i, 6$ Ikolvos vo(j,i~ 
t^cti'^ sipii, KUi <ru[ji,7rga.a-(TM^, 
Tiui eiTTOv TTsgi Kvpog^ 6 
TT^ocrrjxov.P 

'O Odva'<rsiot. [jt^uKgog 6 

STog iroXvg, koci 'itagoL(^ij- 

AaCCCO VTTQ YiodSl'^QiV, 

Xa<^«;, 00 MeviTTTTog' xui 
TToQev syoo Qt<pix,vso[ji.cii ; tfo- 
Xvg yup x§^^°5 °^ <pixivw^ 
ev 6 TTOAtg* 

'Hfjisga fjisv I^SojXvjxovra 
Tig 8Tca 5iaiTaOj«,a»P aSgcog, 
STTSira, ttXyiv A^r^vcuog, xai 
e<T<j" ^iKsXictiTY^Yi IraAio)- 
TYig (xvirgoTsvui^, 6 eiX\o$ 



102 



Ch. 33. 



14. Socrates having talked to 
these women before Crito, and 
having directed whatever things 
he pleased, came to ns himself; 
and it was now near sunset, for 
he spent a long time within. 



15. As he was asking these 
things, (Socrates) answered no 
more ; but having remained 
quiet a little time, he moved, and 
the man uncovered him, and he 
fixed his eyes. 

1 6. I say that five hundred of 
of these should be Athenians, 
of whatever age you may think 
right, serving an appointed time, 
not long, but as much as may 
seem proper, in succession to 
each other. 

1 7. It is said that Alcibiades, 
before he was twenti/ years old, 
conversed about these things with 
Pericles who was his tutor. 

18. From the time that they 
leave the Ephebi, these live again 
five and twenty years thus. 

19. Cyaxares, king of the 
Medes, continued drinking that 
night, in which Cyrus departed, 
as if fortunate ; and, hearing 
much tumult, he thought that 
the other Medes, except a few, 
were in the camp. 



ijjcco^ TTupoc. syu)' xai eiyA 

y^qovos ya.p ttoXik dictrpi^co 
svdov. 

OvTOg egoixa.1 avTog, ov- 
dsi$ STi oc7rox.givofx,(xr uWcc 
oktyo; ^povogdnxXeiTTco^, x.i~ 
vewP T£, Kon 6 uvSpcoTTOs ex- 
xuX'jTrrai auroj, xon bg o 

OvTOs Ss AQvivohos (pYjfJH 

^Sl £ijU,l TTcVTCCXOa-lOl, 6^ 6$ 

av rig <7v rjXix.Kx x.oi\aic s^co 

i0X.Sl, X§°^'^^ TUXTOg (TTpOi- 

Tsuco™, jxrj fxaxgog ourog, 
aAAa Q(rog otv doxsi xot- 
Xctig s^cti, ex 8ia5op^>j uXXr^- 

Asyoo, A.Xxi^ictlrig, Trgiv 
s/jtocTjy erog^ £</x/, UsgixXrjg 
swiTgoTTog fxsv stjU,*^^ eccvto'j, 
TOiog Ss diciiXsyo[ji,cti.^^ 

Atto 6g av s^sg^oixcci^ 

av TTSVTS xai sixoa-i srog 
d I ay CO (hds. 

'O Kva^agrjg, 6 b M>)5oj 
^adiXsug, 6 ixsv vv^ sv 6g 
s^spxoy^ai^ 6 Kvgog, aurog 
T= jW-cSycrxco™, (hg stti svtu- 
X^^^' ^/^^ aXXog Sc Mvj^og 
oiojxai^ 7rapsi[/.i ev 6 (TrgaTO- 
'TTsdov, "ttAv/V oXiyog, axovoo 
^ogv^og TToAvf.'"* 



Ch. 34. 103 

20. Vestem indueris non modo vilem, sed eandem, quo- 
que cestate et hyeme, 

21. Postridie Tigranes ipse aderat. 

22. Quum vero advenerit finis, non oblivione inhonorati 
jacent, sed memoria per omne tempos celebrati florent. 



CHAP. XXXIV. 



The question *mhither ? is commonly answered by eij or 
Ttqo^^ with the accusative : *where f by ev, with the dative : 
*whence f by sx or aTro, with the genitive : and by or through 
*uohat place f by Si a, with the genitive. 

Adverbs in 5* and en are used to signify at a place : in Is 
(Ts, or ?e, to a place : and in fisv and Qs^Jrom a place : Is is 
also added to accusatives, to signify to a place. 

The distance to one place from another, is put in the 
accusative. 

Graeci saepissime in locis, &c. 

Aliquando usurpant, &c. 

Ae ita additur, &c. Eton, 

Nomen spatii, &c. 

Nomen loci, &c. Wetten. 

The distance of one, &c. 

To the names of towns, &c. 

The prepositions are sometimes, &c. 

The Greeks often change, &c. Bell. 

Ad locum, in, aque, &c. Holmes. 

1. And now send men to Kai vuv ^ejU-Trw^ eis Iott- 
Joppa, 71 Y} (xvrjg. 

H 4 



104 



Ch. 3k 



2. And having got up Jro?n 
thence, he comes into the coasts of 
Judea, hy the farther side of Jor- 
dan. 

3. The bees always obey their 
leader willingly ; and wherever he 
stays, no one departsyj^OTw thence. 

4. They were about twenty or 
thirty furlongs distant. 

5. But let us see Gnipho the 
usurer, if you please ; he does not 
YiYQfar off, and his door itself is 
open to us. 

6. The next day they set out 
early, and advanced about twenty 

furlongs. 

7. For after they came to their 
father's old monument, 

8. Having begun^oTW Galilee, 
to this 'place, 

9. And then he led me away 
to a certain place, darker than the 
other. 

10. ^ I do not think it neces- 
sary now, that ye should go so 
long a way to Jerusalem, to the 

• city of our enemies. 

1 1 . Epicharmus and Phormis 
began to make fables. This then 
came first from Sicily. And 
Crates first began, of those at 
Athens, to make discourses or 
fables. 

12. After this, Jesus began to 
show to his disciples, that he must 



p^o/jtaj £<f 6 opiov 6 lov^ona, 
dux TTsgoiv 6 logdo-vog, 

SKO'JO-lOg TTSlSoi^' OTTOV Ss CCV 

svrsvQsv. 

rpioLKOVTot, crrudiov, 

Eyw Is, SI §ox=i Fvi- 

<PC«V doiVSKTTl^g Si^M^' OU 

[jLOcxgog [odog) ds xon ovrog 
oiKsoo, ocvoiyco'^^ uuTog eya> 

'O vdrsquiog, Trgcai Trog- 

SVO[J^Ul% KOLl TTpOSg^Of^lXi^ 

chg sixo<ri (rrudiog. 



Ettsj 



yap sp^ofjiur 



{7:pog)'Ka.Tr\p ap^onogrcupog. 

Agx^f^^^^ aTTO 6 TaKi- 
Kotix scog M^s. 

K«i S)j otTTy-yayay^ syoo 
Tcgog Tig yjagxr^y, 6 o-Wog 
^Qpgog. 

Oy syco doxsi vuv sttsi- 
yco, (TV sig 'IsgocroKvuict tto^ 
psvofxsii, sig 6 6 s^^gog nto- 
Kig, fLU/cpog ovroog bdog. 

'O^"^ [xv$og 'TTOisM Etti- 
p^a^/xoj xui ^og[j.ig ot-p^co. 
*0"^ ]U,£V ovv s^ «^%^ sx 
'^iJcsXioc sg')(0\i.ciLi.^ 'O S= 
A5^v>/(ri KgaTT^g Trgcorog 
upy(Oi TTOisw Xoyog rj fJivQog. 

Atto tots ap^cti^ 6 I>j- 
(Tovg hiKVUCti 6 [ji,o(.^YiTr,g «u- 



Ch. 34. 



105 



depart to Jerusalem^ and suffer 
many things fi'om the elders, and 
high priests, and scribes. 



1 3. Bring forward another ; or 
rather these two ; that laughing 
msiwfromAhdera^ and that weep- 
ing one from Ephesus ; for they 
are wilKng themselves to be sold 
together. 

14. Odenatus the Palmyrenian, 
a man at first obscure and un- 
known, soon humbled him from 
his insolence, after he had come 
home again, and was raised to 
great vanity. 

15. Do not hesitate to go a 
long way, to those that promise 
to teach any thing useful. 

16. Paul had resolved to sail 
by Ephesus, lest he might have 
any delay in Asia ; for he was 
hastening to be in Jerusalem, a- 
gainst the day of Pentecost. And 

from Miletus, having sent to 
Ephesus, he called to himself the 
elders of the church. 

17. I send you who have been 
taken home, and I give you leave 
to consult with the other Chal- 
deans, whether you will fight with 
us, or be friends. 



TOJ, OTl Zsi^ aVTQS, Big 'Isf'O' 
TTOXvg TTOKT^OO^ VTTO 6 TTOSO'- 

^VTspos^, xcii ap^tsgsvc, 

XOH ypCi[Ji[JiCtT£U^, 

AX\qs Troipotyuyoo' fj^ciX- 
ysXotco 6 A^Sijpo^sv, xai o 
yap ocvrog %iTrpot.(ry.(xP /3oy- 

5ij afixvsofMai^'^, xcn Trpog 
a\a.^Qveici aipoo^^^^ iroXvg, 
ccTTOTruvu) ovx. eg ixoixpog^ 6 
<ppv<xy[x,c(. O^svuSog 6 HaA.- 
fj,vpvivog, ccvYip a(pavri; jxsv 
ret Trpcora koh otyvooro;, 

M») XCtTOJCVSOl) fjt^ixKpog 
ohog TTOpsvoiioti, Tzpog o 8j- 
daa-KU) Tig p^§>]Ti|w,oj STTcty- 

Kpivco Uavkog 7r«pa- 

TTXsM^ 6 'E<pS(TOg'^^, fJ^YlTTOTS 

yivoi^cti^^^ avTog xara(r%£- 
(Tig £V 6 Acr<a' a'Trev^M ycip^ 

Z\g 6 YjfJiSpU 6 7r£VT>)X0(rT»J, 

yivoficn^ ev 'IspoucraAijjx. 

AtTO Ss MiX)JTOj^ TTS/Jt- 

TTco^ sig Fi(ps<Tog fisTctxciKeai 
Q Trpsc^VTspog 6 sxK\Y,criu, 
Eyco a(piYi[ji,i cryP^ oixuds, 
6 Xcufji^uvM^y xon didoofjn <ru 
(Tuv 6 aWag X«x5a*oj ^ou- 
KsvoiJi.011^, ens ^ovXoixoti 
TtoKeiLecjii eyw^ eixe (piXoj 
e\}k\. 



106 Ch. 35. 

18. Descenditque post finem annorum ad Achab in Sa- 
mariam. 

19. Sed mihi neque domo exeunti mane, dei signum ad- 
versatum est, neque quando hie ascendebam. 

20. Laudaverit jure aliquis ilium Athenis legislatorem, 
qui vetuit parentem a filio ali, quern nuUam artem edo- 
cuisset. ^ 



CHAP. XXXV. 

The price or measure of any thing is put in the genitive; 
sometimes, the price is put in the dative. 

Nomina etiam, &c. 

Pretii, &c. Wetten, 

Nouns of measure, &c. 

The price is sometimes, &c. Bell. 

Laus et, &c. uti et mensura, &c. Holmes. 



yui 



1. The gods sell all good 'O itovog TrwAso; 
things to us Jbr labours. 7ru§ 6 ayccQos ^eo;. 

2. If this man be Vi^illing to Hv sQsXcjo (tv a7roS<5«j- 
give you, for two-pence at most. ij.i^^ ovtqs, 6 [x,syoi$^^ ho 

o^oKos. 

3. Consider, that calmness is ETriXsyoo, on' roa-ouros 
purchased at so micch, firmness at ttooKsoo uTra^sia, toctovto; 
so much, but nothing is got gratis. otTotpa^ict, Trpoixu de ouhis 

TTSpiyiVOlLOLl, 

4. The fruits of the palm-trees ^oivi^ xagTrog^ xcctoc 6 
being six Jingers in size. fj^syeQog 1^ SaxruAoj eiju,/. 

5. Ye know that ye were not EiSsw'"^ 6ti ov (p^apros^ 
redeemed with corruptible things, apyupiovi^^pv(Tiov,>.vTpocjo^ 
silver or gold, fi:om your vain ex 6 [xchtoho^ au avaa-rpo- 
conversation. (p)j. 



Ch. 35. 



107 



6. Of which things some per- 
sons having received small parts 
from him gratis, sold them to 
others for a g7^eat price. 

7. I brought you an anchor 
ior Jive drachmce. 

8. 1[ They say unto him; 
Shall we, having gone, buy two 
hundred penny worth of bread, 
and give them to eat. 

9. Tell me, says he, Tigranes, 
at what price you would purchase 
to get your wife again ? Cyrus, 
says he, I would purchase with 
my life, to preserve her from 
slavery. 

10. Anacreon having received 
five talents as a gift from Poly- 
crates, after he had spent two 
nights in anxiety about them, re- 
turned them^ saying, that they 
were not worth the anxiety which 
they created. 



pct exeivoj Trgoijca. Xuii.^ot'- 

AyJCVpCC XOjXt^CO TTSVTS 

^P^XM' 

Asyoi ctvTO§* ATTsg^o- 

di^vagiov aqTOs^^i ^^^ 8i8«J- 
(M^^ avTog (payui. 

"^v h, <p>jjOo<^, otiTiypavYii, 
Xsyoo^ syoo 67ro<TO§ otv irpia." 
fjt,cn° (h(rTs 6 yuvYj a7roA«jU,- 
^oivoo^ ; Eyco jxsv, (p>jju,*, oo 
KvpO$, X.CH OLV b \I/u%)j® wpi- 

AvOlKgSOOV loipSOLV TTOipOC 

Tlo\vxpaTY\§ Xa]U,/3ava>^ ttsv- 
re TaAavTOv, co^ (ppovTi^oo^^ 

STTl UVTOS'^ doM VyJS dual^ 

aTToSi^wjoti uVTog, e<7rov, ou 

Tl[XCtCti^^^ UVTOS 6 STTl UVTO^^ 

(pgovTig. 



11. Nicias, Nicerati filius, dicitur praefectum fodinis ar- 
genteis emisse talento. 

12. Neque si quid emam, si vendat minor triginta annis 
interrogabo quanti vendit ? 



108 



CHAP. XXXVI. 



V 



A preposition often governs the same case, in composi- 
tion, that it does without it. 

Prepositions in composition, &c. Bell. 
Verba cum praepositionibus, &c. Holmes. 



1. Having gone out of the 
city. 

2. It is not safe to say such 
things ; lest "we may get some 
trouble ^07/2 our prating. 

3. And in human reason, who 
Tould turn^OTW the enemy Jlying? 



4. Send to Simon, who is sur- 
named Peter. He lodges with 
one Simon a tanner, who has his 
house by the sea-side ; he shall 
tell thee what thou must do. 

5. Why do ye also transgress 
the commandments of God, by 
your tradition ? 

6. She, having taken the sword, 
killed herself before her husband. 

7. Remember, that if you abide 
in the same things^\hosevf\io laugh 
against you at first, shall admire 
you at last ; but if you be over- 



Oux. aa-tpciXYig Xsyoo 6 
TOiouTog' i^Yi xai ti$ xa,xo§ 

AvQpMTTivo; ds yvoDfxrj, rig 

rgsTTco ; "^ 

eTTiTccuXsu) TlsTpog. OvTog 

^svi^w™ Trapa ng '^ifjicav 
^upcrsu;, bg eiju^i oixiOL Truga 
^u\oL(r(rcx,' ovTog XuKivi cru 

A IX Ti xui (TU Tragoi- 

SctlVU) 6 eVTOXYj 6 0£OJ, ^tot 

6 7!:upoiZo<nf- cv ; 

Aa/Ao^vco^, ^Kpog, eao- 
rov TTpoavongsot)^ b uvi^g. 

MvaOjU,«<P7^ l^l gr^y ^cy 

ejx/xevo)^ 6 avTog, 6 xara- 
ygXaw^ av TrgOTSpov, ourog 



Ch. 36. 



J 09 



come by them, you shall receive 
double ridicule. 

8. All the maids about her 
rose up along with her, 

9. Stranger, I have all justice 
from you, since you condemn 
yourself to death. 

10. ^ If two consonants chance 
to be added to a short vffwel, they 
will make the syllable long. 

11. Folly is joined to riches 
and powers, and follows with 
them ; and with it, incontinence. 

12. Those who are ignorant 
of wisdom and virtue, but spend 
their whole time in revels and the 
like, sink downwards, and err 
through life. 

13. And Jesus having seen her, 
said unto her ; Woman, thou art 
loosed from thine infirmity; and he 
laid his hands on her, and imme- 
diately she was made straight, 
and continued glorifying God. 

14. Critias and Alcibiades, 
whilst they were with Socrates, 
were able to govern their bad 
inclinations ; but being separated 

fr'om him, Critias having fled into 
Thessaly, associated there with 
men using iniquity rather than 
justice. 

15. First then, lam right to 
answer to the first falsehoods, 



Zs YjTTOLU)^ avTOs^, SiTrXoof 
7r^ocrAa/x^avc«"*xaTayeXcoj. 

E;^co, CO ^sivog, Trctpa av 

El (TVfJi^ccivco^^ ^ga^us 
(pa)vr]Big duo <ru-j.(pcjovog^^ sttj- 
(psgoo^, {j^djcgos TTOiscti^ 6 crwA- 

^WTdo-a-oo'^ , xat avvonco- 
XovQscti 6 [xsv ttXovtos noti 6 
dvvoKTTSia avoid, xai [/.stu 
ouTog, axoKoi<n<x, 

'O (ppovv}(ng Tion agerri 
aiTSipoc, evco^id Se xai 6 
TOiovTog asi o-uveijx*^, xarco 
(psgu)^, 7CCH TrXuvoioo^ tioc 
^log,^ 

EiSco^ 5s ctVTog Iriarovg, 
siTTOV oiVTOg' Fvvv), UTToXDay^ 
6 aa-Sevsict crv' xoii s7r<Ti5>j- 
jw,< uVTog o^sip, xui iragix- 
XgYll^oL avopQoco^, xui Bo^oc- 

KpiTlUg KCil AXxi^id^Yic, 
koog [Jisv %MX.paTYig (tvvsi- 

Kog STTiSufUd^ xpdTeco' exei- 
vog ds d7Cd?iXd(rcrcJ0^, Kpirixg 
fjisv (peuyoo^ sig ©sTxaAia, 
£xei (Tvvsifjn dvQpcofrog dvo^ 
[lid [UdWov >3 diKaiO<Tvvr\ 
Xpoioi/.di. 

Tlpc/jTov /xev ouv, diKdiog 
sifxi dTToXoysofjidi^ Trgog 6 



110 



Ch. 3(). 



wkzch have been spoken against me, 
and to the first accusers ; and 
then, to the latter falsehoods, and 
the latter accusers. 

16. You need not wonder, my 
friend, for, having been lately with 
Homer and Euripides, I know not 
how I was filled with their words, 
and the verses come of their own 
accord into my mouth. 



psoo^f aon Trgog 6 icqairog 
KUTYiyogos* STrsiTU h, -frgog 
6 (xTTsgog^^^, KOLi 6 u(rTspo$, 
M>j ^oiv[jiu^(o^% CO lr«<- 
poc, vscjoTTi yag 'EvgiTri^rjg 
xai ^Oy^Y^pos ovyyivoixon^, 

6 s7:og, y,cn auTOjxaroj eyco 
6 [ji^sTgov stt; 6 (ttoilol^ ^PX^" 

Ei (TU [I,OHVOO^^, (JO AlCtc, 
(TSCtUTOS (pOVSUOO, ri$ CUTKXCO 

6 OSucrceoj ; Ken itgcar^v ou~ 

Ti 7rpo(r^Xs'KacP avTog, ottots 
^xow^ jxavreuojxaj™^^, ovts 
Trgoasiirov a^ioo)^ uvr^g (tu- 



17. Ajax, if you, being mad, 
killed yourself, why do you blame 
Ulysses ? And lately i/ow did not 
even look towards him, when he 
came to consult the prophet, nor 
did you deign to speak to a man 
that was i/our fellonxhsoldier and 
companion, 

18. Socrates taught his asso- 
ciates to refrain from things im- 
pious, unjust, and shamefid, not 
only when they would be seen 
by men, but also when they 
would be in solitude. 

1 9. Sibimet ipsi multa deesse ; prcepositum vero civitati, 
si non omnia perficiat, quae civitas velit, ob id pcenae sub- 
jectum esse, nonne hoc ingens est amentia ? 

20. Ego vero cum Diis versor, versor cum hominibus ho* 
nestis : nee ullum praeclarum facinus, sive divinum sive 
humanum, absque me perpetratur. 



A»5«(rx«; o '^coxguTrig 6 

(TVVOQV, OV fJt^OVOV OTTOTS VTTO 6 

uv^gcoTTOs ogctaf, utts^cjo^ 6 
avo(riog, re xai otdijcog, kui 

UKTX^^Sf OiXka, XOil OTTOTS 

sv sgYJixiot siiJLi, 



Ill 



CHAR XXXVII. 



The genitive case of a substantive is often put absolutely, 
the former substantive, hexcn, %af><v, sx, ef, or some case of 
Tis or els being understood. 

Ponitur genitivus, &c. 

Genitivus per se, &c. 

Mutatur nominativus post verbum, &c. 

Aliquando solus genitivus, &c. Eton, 

Nomina etiam, &c. Wetten. 

Sometimes the first substantive, &c. 

Sometimes the cause, &c. 

Sometimes the accusative, &c. 

Sometimes the nominative after the verb, &c. 

Many verbs seem, &c. Bell, 

Genitivus saepe ponitur, &c. Holmes, 



1. Cyrus, having heard this, 
pitied him on account of the mis- 

fortune, 

2. He loves him^r his ^virtue, 

3. There stood by the cross 
of Jesus, his mother, and his 
mother's sister, Mary the mfe of 
Cleophas. 

4. It is not right to blame this 
man,^r the things that have been 
omitted, so much as to commend 
him^r his ingenuity and dili- 
gence itself, 

5. The fish called Cephalus is 
one of those that live in the fens. 

6. Distant mamj dayi jmirney. 



*0 Kugso^, axouw^, 6 

qOS^ 6 lYl(T0VS,6fJiYjTYip aOTOf, 

xa< 6 a5eX(p>) 6 jU-rjT)}^ ccvrog 
Motpiu 6 6 KXcoTTctg, 

OvTog 6 ccvYjp ov^ ovrcag 

a^ioj"^ STruiVscti. 

O /%9uj Ke(pciXog sv 
A7re%w'^ ttAsjscv Yifieqa. 



112 



Ch. 37. 



7. I admire your wrtuc. 

8. Leading him out of the way, 
under some palm-trees, he or- 
dered them to spread some of the 
Median carpets under him. 

9. The king of the Romans, 
being now old, goes to the house 
of a teacher s but my king Alex- 
ander died when thirty-two years 
of age. 

10. ^ I think indeed that you 
are just, but not in any degree 
wise ; and you seem to me your- 
self to know this ; for you require 
money from no person on account 
of his living with you, 

11. In the tent there was one 
of the captains, called Aglaitidas ; 
a person who, as to his manner, 
was one of the harsher men. 

1 2. When I shall have finished 
(the term or time) of this mortal 
life. 

13. And learn oiso f-om me, 
my son, said he, these most im- 
portant things ; you should never 
attempt any thing, neither in 
yourself, nor with the army, 
against the sacrifices and auguries. 

14. O cause of much laughter ! 
But now who could look upon 
them so contemning other men ? 
or who would believe, that, after 
a Uttle time, the one shall be a 
captive, and the other shall have 
his head in a bag of blood ? 



€)ayjw,a^«; cry. 
Awayoj^ oLDTQi o^og 

S^OO, VTTO (pOlVl^^ TiJ, 6 M>J- 

Xsuco avTO$»^ 

'O ''Pa)[ji,ocios (2u(nXsvg, 
yvigoKrxco yi^yi, ej SiSacrxaAo^ 

AXs^avdgog Zuo xai rgia- 

Eyco Toi (TV iJLsv dixotio$ 

Tiovr ^oxso) ds syco xoa olv- 
Toj Qvros yiyvw<r}cca» Q\)^B^f■ 
yup ovv 6 a-vvovcioL oigywpiov 
irpsicra'ca,^ 

Ev (rxy)v>j TMyyavaP- rig 
£<|tti*' 6 Toi^iup^og, AyXoCi-^ 

TTOg, 6 (rTgv(pvog av^puiTrog, 

ETTEjSav 6 avSpMTTivog 
jSioj TeAeuT^co.^ 

Motv&uvco^ ds gyw, CO 

TTUig, XOLl 68s, (pi^JW'J, jtAS- 

yag* ^upa yap Uqov xui 
oioovog i^fiTs ev asctOTCu 

jOOV^SsTTOTS, [lY}h SV 6 (TTpOi- 

Q, TtoXug ysXcog. AAAa 

vvv rig OLV avrog Trgoo'^Xe- 
^co^" ooToog v7rep(pgov£oo 6 
aXKog^ ; >j Tig av iridTevco^^ 
(jog [j,eTOi oKiyog, ovTOg fjisv 
ai^pi^ocXcoTOg sifLi, ouTog 

h 6 XS(pxXV} S^OD SV OKTHOg 

alfjici. 



Ch. 38. 



118 



15. Then Ammon told a false- Ouxouv 5 Ajajw-wv rl/eu- 
hood, saying that you were his da)^\ Xeyca suvtov tu gjuf 
son; for you were the son of vlos' <rw h ^^iAittttoj apoc 
Philip* Alex, Certainly the son sifjii, AXe0. <f><Ai7r7roj ^>j- 
of Philip. For being the son of AaS>). Ov yap av ^vYiorxoo 
Ammon I had not died. A/x/xwv g»]xj. 

1 6. Si velles hospitem impellere, te, cum in urhem ipsius 
venisses, accipere, quid faceres ? 

17. AusGultabunt plurimi inhiantes, admirantes, et fe- 
licem praedicantes te propter vim sermonum, et patrem 
tuum propter fortunam. 



CHAP. XXXVIII. 



The dative is often put absolutely, especially after ayroj, 
(Tuv being understood. 

Subauditur ita o-uv, &c. Eton. 



1. Moreover, the epopoeia 
must have the same species mth 
tragedy. 

2. Bread and flesh bring us 
to this ; and ye desire the same 
thing with us, but ye, wandering 
up and down through many 
round courses, hardly arrive at 
length, where we are long since 
come« 

3. When the mind is intoxi- 
cated with wine, it suffers the 
same things isoith chariots that 
have lost their charioteers. 



Set S^OO 6 STTOTTOliu 6 T§a- 

yco^iot. 

Eyo) jxev aprog xa< xpeas 
sig ouTOs uyoo'^ <tv de eij 
[J.SV 6 auTOg syoo (TTreuSco, 
TToXus h ris hXiyiLog^ avta 
x.oe.1 xocTOO 'JTXuvoiai^, ^uoXig 
at^iTivsoiJ^oLi^ Q7I01 syviTtdXat 

YjXOO.^ 

'Orav 6 voug utto oivo$ 
6 a^jxa, 6 vivio^og oiTra- 



114 



Ch. 38. 



4. We do not search and 
examine common men, equally 
with those who are of splendid 
race. 

5. They sailed immediately 
with twenty-five ships, 

6. It appears to me to be a 
shameful thing for a'man to suf- 
fer the same things with the most 
stupid of animals. 

7. H In one respect Sophocles 
would be the same kind of an imi- 
tator with Horner^ for they both 
represent good men ; in another, 
with Aristophanes, for they both 
represent men acting and doing. 

8. About Egypt, two hundred 
triremes, wxV^ their crews 2LT\d.pas- 
sengersy were destroyed; about 
Cjrprus, an hundred and fifty; 
in Pontus, they lost ten thousand 
armed men of themselves and 
their auxiliaries. 

9. If Thessaly had one man 
only, and Arcadia one manthink- 
ing the same things with me, not 
one of the Grecians would have 
suffered the present misfortunes. 

10. Of writers, some made no- 
thing more than a collection and 
transcript of the things com- 
posed by the ancients, as Euclid, 
and Democritus, and Proclinus : 
others, having selected small 
parts of the history of the ancients, 
to comment on, attempted to write 
books on the same subjects with 



ocvQ^coTTog, 6 sx yevog Xenix," 

UXsao euSuc, ttsvts xa» 
eixocTi vuvg. 

Aoxe* syco aicr^qog sifjit 
uvQpcjOTrog^, 6 uvto$ -jraa-^oo 6 

OLippoOV 6 ^YjpiOV, 

'Of jxsv, 6 auTOs (XV eiju,»® I 

jX»ju<eO]w,ai ycup oijxfcjo (tttou- 
Sajoj* 6 Je, AgKrTO(pciVYi$, 
7rgrx<r(roo yotg [/,i[xeo[xoii xai 

Hspi [Jisv AiyviTTog^ dux- 
y.O(TiOi rpiYjgvjg, uvto^^ 'ttXy}- 

poOp^U, dlOK^^eipoO^' TTSpi Ss 
Ku7r^0J% 'TTSVTYIXOVTOi, XlXi 
SKOCTOV SV 6 ITOVTOC, pi^VpiOt 

ottXityis oLUTog xa< 6 (ru[j,pi,(x.- 

^0$ CCJtoWVfJH, 

E< gjf oLvrig fjiovog 0£r- 
raXia, hcli ejj avr^q A.pyca~ 
hex. eiUTog <ppovsco zyjxf* 
eyco, ovdsig 6 'EXA))v 6 7ra^- 
£/ja» xeaxog ^Qao[xai^^^ av. 

'O ygc(.<pw^\ 6 jxsv s^sig 
TToXu; Yi G-vvuywyYi xaj pus- 
Tuypci(pY} 6 6 7rps(r^y$c o-uy- 
TiOrjjU.*^^ TTOisoi, xet&ciTrsg 
EuxXs.Syjc, xai Ai^[j,0}igiTOc, 
xa» JJpojcXivog' 6 Se, fjt,ixQog 
xojU.i§r) Trpayp.a 6 6 7ra- 
Kuiog IcTTopiu a.'TioixvYjp.o- 
vevcjo^, eig b auroc to7:oc. 



Ch. 39. 



115 



them, as Annius, Medius, and exsivog sTn^eigeuj (ruvTi9))]x{ 
Phoebion. /3<^X*ov, xafiaTre^ Avvioj, 

re xoti MijSjo^, xa* *l>oi- 



xcov. 



11. Quid enim defuit felicitatis illi, qui tales majores 
habuit, quales nemo alius, nisi quis iisdem cum illo ortus ? 

12. Magnam hostium multitudinem, cum ipsis armis, 
cepit. 



CHAP. XXXIX. 

The Greeks use jw^eAXco, with an infinitive, to express the 
future, both active and passive, which, in Latin, would be 
rendered by a participle of the future and the verb sum, 

WTien an infinitive is joined, &c. 

The infinitive after the verb joteAXco, &c. Bell, 

Usurpantur verba infinita, &c. Holmes. 



1. He is to be given up. 
(tradendus est.) 

2. Judas Iscariot the son of 
Simon, *mho was about to betray 
him. (traditurus erat.) 

3. He was afraid that he should 
he seen, beginning to build the 
palace, (ne manifestus fieret.) 

4. He said this, signifying by 
what death he was to die. (mori- 
turus erat.) 

5. Who having seen Peter 
and John about to enter into the 

I 2 



T>)f, 6 jxeAXw'^ uvTOs Tragoi- 

^O^SM^^ on OTTTOf^Oll^ 

luzWuP", /SacTiXeJovP' oixo- 
Sojxeco otp^ofj.oci. 

TTOio^ ^avuTog aeXXco aTro- 
flvrjcrxco. 



116 



Ch. 39. 



Ugov, sgctiToioii'^ eXsijjxoo-ovij 



XcilJ.§C 



A>j5«>v otvuigsct) /XcAXco.'* 






lo§^ 









temple, asked to get alms, (in 
gressuros.) 

6. Whatever you are about to Tlug 6^ ti§ otv fxsWeo Xs- 
sai/, review it first in your judg- yco, vgoTsgov sTna-xoTreo) 6 
ment; for with many people the yvwjxij* woAu^ yap o yXaio-- 
tongue runs before the under- tu TrgoTgs^a) 6 8*avo<a. 
standing, (dicturus sis.) V. 

7. When the nightingale was 
about tobe slain, (occidendaesset.) 

8. 51 Those who are about to be 
auxiliaries, ought to be friends, 
not enemies, neither envious in 
the prosperity of their command- 
er, nor treacherous in his adver- 
sity, (futuros.) 

9. For who, being about to 
make any thing, is ignorant what t* j, uyvoea) 6$ /xeXXco 
he is about to make P for he does tcqism ; ou yag aXoyog 2?o~ 
not make it by a power void of vufjiis ttoizco, 

reason, (cum facturus sit,) (fac- 
turus est.) 

10. In the (play) Cresphontes, 
Merope is about to kill her son, 
and does not kill him, but dis- 
covers who he is; and in the 
Helle, the son being about to give 
up his mother, finds who she is. 
(occisura est,) (dediturus.) 

11. And he was about to do 
still more good things to his sub- 
jects ; for he had driven the in- 
formers from the city, and had 
ordered them to be punished in Travrop^oy e<jx«^ 
every place, (benefacturus erat.) xeXeow.^^ 

1 2. Nonnullos occidit, nonnuUos [interfecturus) erat. 

1 3. In hoc ipso die, laturus est unusquisque vestrmn sen< 
tentiam, de sua etiam ipsius dicendi libertate. 



Ev 6 K^eo-(povT)jj'", Me- 
qoTtt] [xeXXco 6 vlo§ caro^ 

XTSIVOO, dTTOKTSlVCO 8s OV, 

clWcl ciVixyvu)git!,(a^* xctt sv 
6 'EaX>j, 6 vlos, jX))Tij^ 
skIi^ooiii ij,%X\m, avctyvco- 

MeXXco^ h uv sTi xai- 
TToXvg eusgysTSco^ 6 uwijxooj* 
sTTsi xoci 6 (ruxo(pavT>35 d 
-TToXif e*ju,< Siwxw^^, xa» o 



Ch. 40. 



117 



CHAP. XL. 

Verbs of gesture^ s»jw-i, rvy^otvo), xmaqyui^ yjvoju,a<, xupw, 
zyoi^ (pQavco, and XoivQuvai, are used with participles after 
them, to express what in Latin would be rendered by some 
tense of a single verb. 

Participles are often used, instead of the infinitive, after 
verbs signifying an emotion of the mind. 

Verbo ruy^uvco, &c. 
Sin participium sequatur, &c. 
Nonnunquam participia, &c. Eton, 
Participium non raro, &c. Wetten. 
The participles cov, &c. 
Participles are often used, &c. 
When a participle is joined, &c. Bell. 
Pro infinitivo crebrius, &c. Holmes, 



1. If he aVways acted soberly, 
how could he justly have the 
blame of the evil which was not 
in him? (permanebat sobrius 
esse.) 

2. He said that he happened 
then to be with Demaretus. (forte 
fuisse.) 

3. Ifa companion be polluted, 
he who touches him must be 
polluted, though he himself nioere 
pure, (fuerit.) 

' I 3 



TToos oiv S/xaicoj, 6 ouK evsi- 
p*^ auToj xaKiu ccmct 



OtVT0$ 
o 



Eav 6 eTCiigog sii^t [jloKv- 

uvTOs /jcoAwvco avayxrj, xat 
uv uvTog 6//x< Tuy^otvco^ 



118 



Ch. 40, 



4. We Were walking in the 
temple of Saturn, in which we 
beheld many other offerings, 
(deambulabamus.) 

5. What a great desire have 
you raised in us, if these things 
are so ? And thei/ are so, said 
he. (se habent.) 

6. I am prepared to obey the 
laws ; but that I may not ifiad- 
nertently transgress any thing 
through ignorance, I wish to 
learn this distinctly from you. 
(inscius transgrediar.) 

7. He is worthy of praise, *who 
hasjirst conferred a favour on his 
friends, (prius bene fecerit.) 

8. And / am not ashamed to 
say this ; but be assured I would 
be ashamed to say, that, if ye 
stay with me I will pay you. 
(me pudet dicer e.) 

9. Because *we know that the 
latter is true, our mind falsely 
concludes that the former is so 
likewise.' (scimus esse,) (falsa 
ratione credit esse.) 

10. Amongst whom also was 
Longinus, whose compositions 
afford great benefit to the stu- 
dious, (conferunt.) 

11. ^ Be satisfied, Cyrus, said 
he, for though I should, never cease 
to look at her, I could not be 
overcome, so as to do any of the 
things which I ought not to do. 
(desisterem contemplari.) 



6 Kgovo; Isgov, ev 6$ ttoXus 



'i2j 6JJ fj^sytx^ Tis s9riflu-» 
jttia 6i/.§uXXcti gyco, e< ovTog 
ovTwg e^oo; AkXo. ei[M, 
(p>jjw.<, ouToog zyp. 

Eyco TTo.gao'x.svoc^co^'^ [jt,£V 

'TTSlScti^ 6 V0lJt,05' OTTOOg h [XYl 

Trxguvofxsoo^f^ouTog ^ovXo- 

0-y.P 

'E'TTonvog u^iog, 6g av 
(pQuvo)^ b (piXogBUsgyeTea), 

Kaj QUTog [Jt,sv ovk ukT' 
yrjvu)^ Xeyoii* 6 Se, >jv jw^svco 
'TToiga. syoj, aTroSiSwjU./^, eu 
<(r>jjM,» on ovTog ockt^vvm^^ 

OIV SITTOV. 

Aloc 6"^ sidscjo^^ ouTOg 
uXYi^T^g gjjtjt«, TTccpaXoyi^o- 
[/.oci eyw 6 ^v^yi xai 6 
Trgoorog (hg s*/jk. 

Ev 6g xon Aoyyivog etfxi, 
og <rvyypci[/.[j,ci eiy^i [J'Syag 

o(psXog (pspoo. 

Qctppeoo, tpYijXif CO Kvgog, 

^SU0[JiOCl, ov /xvj xgcf.Tsoo^^ 
wdTs TtQieca Tig bg^ jotvj ^pYj 

'JTOISM. 



119 



1 2. Gadatas having heard these 
things, revived and spoke, Could 
/ then, said he, quickly make my- 
self ready ^ before you depart ? 
(statim me parare.) 

i^. Do not ye forget hospi- 
taUty to strangers; for by this 
some have entertained angels un- 
ax<Dares. (inscii acceperunt.) 

14. And during the days, if he 
perceived his grandfather, or his 
mother's brother to want any 
thing, it was difficult that any 
one should do it be/ore him ; for 
v^^hatever Cyrus could do, he de- 
lighted to gratify them, (perci- 
peret indigere,) (quenquam in 
ea peragenda antevertere eum,) 
(laetabatur gratificari.) 

15. TJiey knew that Socrates, 
fi'om the smallest possessions, 
lived most contentedly,, and was 
most abstemious from all plea- 
sures, (norunt vivere), (esse.) 

1 6 . And if ye will break these, 
or permit those who are break- 
ing them, I predict to you, that 
ye will insensibly give up the 
government of the state, (impru- 
dentes concedetis.) 

1 7. There happened at the same 
time to be some thunder and 
rain, the season of the year being 
now near to the end of Autumn, 
(acciderunt.) 

18. / obser^ved that he neither 
sacrifced to the gods, nor used 

I 4 



AxOUW^ OUTOJ* 6 ToLQCi- 

TUSi otvaTzvsui T6 xaj 6»7rov, 
Apa oyv, <p>j/x*, Sovajota; 

TTpiv (TO e^sifjn ; 

Scnvo[ji,cti' §ia ouTo;^ yaq 

-TTog, Y} 6 6 j«.>]r>)p ahX<po$, 

ovTOs TTOisco^' 6o-T»j yap 
8uva]«,a»° 6 Kypo^, imsg- 



Eihsco^ ^a)xpaT>)j, utto 

X£(rT(XTu ^aco, 6 r)8ov>j^ Se 
Traj eyxguTYi^ ei[ji.i. 

El 8e xai ouTo/ xara- 
Ayco^, Y] 6 KUTO.Xvcti'^ eTnrps- 
'TTCti^i TTgoXeyo) <rv, on Xdv- 
^oLVUi^ 6 nioXiTzioL^ Tragotxco" 

£T0$ TrpOJ fJ^STOTTOUpOV rjS)^ 
£(JXt. 

OUTS ^vcjo 6 ^eoc, oure fji^av^ 



V20 



Ch. 40, 



divination, but even derided those 
who did these things, (ediscebam 
sacrificare,) (uti,) (irridere.) 

19. I know very well, that if 
this 'was so, tve should not have 
heard that he 'was in Elatea, but 
upon our own borders, (esset,) 

-(audivissemus esse.) 

20. Will you not Jirst tell me^ 
\iyou have perceived that I know 
any allurement, which I have not 
observed myself to know P (non 
prius dices,) (senseris nosse,) 
(scire ignoraverim.) 

21. You could neither say, 
nor show to him greater tokens 
of faith, than what you yourself 
have received from us. (accepisti.) 

22. l^he saw me doing you any 
wrong, there are laws about all 
things, and punishments, and 
trials, and judgments, having 
severe and great penalties, and 
it was in his power to use all 
these. (Isedere perciperit.) 

23. I would be very grateful 
to the Deity, if I be not mistaken 
in the opinion, which I have of 
you. (habeo.) 

24. And when he ceased speak- 
ing, he said unto Simon ; Launch 
out into the deep, and let ye 
down your nets for a draught, 
(loqui desiit.) 

25. When you wiU have met 
him, \S you perceive that he wishes 



STrKFTotfiieti, 6$ eyoo sihoo^ 



ju-eyaj oitTs eiTTOv^ oiv, ovre 

huCVVfJH^^ 6f^ OlUTOg, (TV 

rvy^avca^ Trugot eyoD \u[ji,- 

6gucjo% eift< vo[ji,og Trsgi 
Tiag^, KXi Tt{j(,cogi(x, xcti 
ixyoov, xai xpKTig, Tnxpog 
xui i^zyug ^yj^^ o zitiji- 
jxjov, xa* ohrog e^ecTi ccKCtg 
Xpuoixoii. 

IToXu^ oiv 6 &:og x«f <^ 

b do^u^, 6g ep^co ttscj <ru^ 
Tvyyavoo, 

'Ors 5e TTOtvco"^ XaXsw, 
siTTOV Tipog 6 2</xcov Ett- 
avxycjo eig 6 fiocQog, xoti 
y^oLXu^af* lixrvov (ru^^ sig 
ocypci. 

ETTsiSav <rvyyivo[Ji>a.i ^ 
ctVTog, sctv fjisv yivcacxoo^ 



Ch. 40. 



121 



to be our friend, you must plan 
it so, that he may not appear to he 
a friend to us. (velle sentias,) 
(non videatur esse.) 

26. The same day, when he 
heard that Cyrus was thei'e^ he led 
away the army to him. (adesse 
audivit,) (deduxit.) 

27. The most dreadful of all 
the evil was the despair, when 
any one perceived that he was 
sick, (sentiret aegrotare.) 

28. Do you think, then, that 
there is so much pleasure from 
all these things, as from a per- 
son's perceiving that he is be- 
coming better, and acquiring 
better friends ? these things in- 
deed / always think, (nunquam 
non existimo.) 

29. And if sometimes I would 
even lift the water, and put it to 
my mouth, / cannot suddenly wet 
the edge of my lip, when flowing 
through my fingers, 1 know not 
how, it again leaves my hand 
dry. (praeoccupo madefaciens.) 

30. As then you know and 
are persuaded, that all persons 
should be ready, willing to do 
their duty, 1 cease to speak of it. 
(ultro velle,) (desisto loqui.) 

31. When the Assyrian knew 
that the spies were advancing^ he 
orders two or three chariots, and 
a few cavalry, to spring forth 
and fly. (perciperet accedere.) 



eiai syu). 

TTUpSljMl KupO^f 0<p^OjXa|2 

vpos uvTO$ otya) 6 (TTpaTsu- 
Asivog TTug sijxi 6 xaxof 

6 uQufHUf OTTOTS Tig OLitT^OL- 
VOIJl.011^^ XOl[J,V(ti,^ 

OiOjaai ovv otTTO TTag ov- 
TOjTOcrouTOj rj5ov>) eifjn, 6<Tog 
otno 6"* eocvTOv^ ts r}yso~ 
jxai^ uyotQog yiyvo[xcti\ 
X.OLI (pi\os otyotQog xrex.0- 
y^cti^l ^y(ti TOivuv BiareXew 

apt 

vhcop, xai TTqOfT^ZpUi^^ 6 (TTO- 

fjiix, ov (pdavco /Spsp^co^ ax- 
g<i4 6 ^siXoj*, 7CCX.I 8<a 6 
^axTuXog^ tioippveoo^^, ovx 
siSew™^ OTTMg^ oLV^ig cfnoXei^ 
%ai ^fipog 6 ^sio syoi, 

*12j jotsv oov Ssi 6 Trqoo'Y^- 
xoyP TTOiscti e^sXco^ utiapyja 
aTTocg STOtpt^og dig syvcaxoog^ 
ouP xai TTSiSajP^**, ^rauco™ Ae- 
yoo. 

O A(r(rvpiog, (hg yivcaa-- 
Koo^ irpoasiixi^ 6 8<epeuvaw^, 
(psvyoti xsXsvoo ix^pi^ot e^av- 
KTTifjjW,!^'^ Suo r) rqsig, xa* 
iTTTrog oKiyog. 



12^ Ch. 41. 

32. Wlien the camp of the As- 'Ore uXicrxM'i 6 6 Aa- 
syrians was taken, her husband a-vgiog a-TguTOTrehv^ 6 avYjp 
happened not to be in the camp, ayroj ou ruy^avoi^ sv 6 
but was gone as ambassador to (TTpuTOTre^ov sifjt,if olKXcc 
the king of the Bactrians. (forte ^rpoj 6 Buxrpiuvog ^ua-i- 
fuit,) (legatione fungebatur.) Xsyj Trpsa-oeuo) oi^ofxoii.^ 

33. Unless ye punish these Ei i^r^ Tt/jcwgeo/xa*^' 6 
orators, the people- cawwo^ aw?^? pr^ruig outoc, ouk uv (pQct- 
becoming slaves to these monsters. vco° 6 TrXri^og ouTog 6 ^ripiov 
(non effugiet servitutem.) hvksvcov,^^^ 

34}. The king, fearing this, *0 Qa.(riKsvg^ hiW 

crossed the bridge, and Jled, ovTog, ^iuSchvm^ 6 ^suyiiot, 

(fugit.) xat (psvyoD^^ oi^Q[x.cii.^ 

35. Non cessabo scribere, 

36. Sed quomodo agit ? Sitire desinit, 

37. Pueri, ad scholas ventitantes, in justitia discenda 
versantur. 

38. Una adhuc pars imperii reliqua est, si quid modo 
ego intelligo. 



CHAP. XLI. 



The infinitive mood, or a participle, is used to supply 
the place of gerunds and supines. 

Pro gerundiis et supinis, &c. Eton, et Wetten. 

The gerund in dum of the accusative, &c. 

The supines, &c. 

The gerund in di, &c. 

The infinitive is sometimes, &c. Bell. 

Pro gerundiis, &c. 

Pro supinis simpliciter, &c. Holmes. 

INFINITIVE. 

1. The opportunity of ^5525^- Ka<^o^ 6 /Sorj^eco. 
ing. (auxiliandi.) 



Ch. 41 



123 



2. Not powerful in speaking, 
but unable to keep silence, (lo- 
quendo,) (ad tacendum.) 

3. Refrain entirely from shout- 
ing and laughing at any thing, 
(irridendo.) 

4. Your tempers are hard to he 
managed, (difficilis imperatu.) 

5. For the sake of conquering, 
(vincendL) 

6. It is time for you to depart 
from. Jighting. (abeundi,) (pug- 
nando.) 

7. He spent the greatest part 
of his time in enquiring, and con- 
sidering, and consulting, (quaer en- 
do,) (cogitandoj) (consultando.) 



Ov Ksyui Ssivoj, a,K\OL 
(Tiyouti ulmoLTO^, 

Bo>), xa» STTiysXaco 



'EVSKCX. 6 VIXOICO. 



Ev 6 ?>jTew, xoci (ppoV' 



PARTICIPLE. 

8. I have spent my own pro- 
perty in doing nothing else, than 
honouring, and bestowing gifts, 
when I admired any of the sol- 
diers, (faciendo,) (honorando,) 
(donando.) 

9. Socrates acts unjustly in not 
acknowledging those gods, whom 
the city acknowledges, (agno- 
scendo.) 

10. I went to you, to see how 
you are. (visum.) 

11. We gain friends, not ^j/ 
receiving, but bi/ doing favours, 
(patiendo,) (agendo.) 

12. Cyrus had soon attached 
to himself the fathers of his com- 
panions, h/ visiting them, and 



*0 ^^l05 ypYifj^ay'' avoi" 

Kl(TX.(0, OU^Sl^ UXXO^ 'TTOISCO, 

broLV ris oiyc(fy\f.oLi^^ h 
<rTguTiooTr]$, 

Eyw Trgos (rv sifj^i^'^, 
67ri(rx.s7rTO[jt,on^ Troog sp^co. 

Ov 7ra.(ryco sv, aXXu 
^guco, xraojxai o (^iXog. 



Tijj avugroioo^ 



Ku, 



POS, 



'Kpo(rei(jii% xcn £v5»)Xoj ei/jti 



124 



Ch.4]. 



showing manifestly that he loved 
their sons, (visendo,) (ostenden- 
do.) 

PROMISCUOUS 

1 3. 11 But if battles are decided 
now, as formerly, by those that 
fight well, ye cannot be wrong 
in taking heart, (confidendo.) 



vlsvc. 



14;. The Persians take care of 
/zMW^/wg- publicly ; and the king, 
as also in war, is their leader, 
and hunts himself, and takes 
care of the rest that they may 
hunt, (venandi.) 



Ej jw.evTO», uiC-TTSo -nqoa-' 
QsVf §»« 6* siA^ fj.a.^o[x,(Xi , 
STi xa* vuv, 6 fJ^ot^ri xpivw, 

^uppsw^ ouSsjj"^ ctv a-<pct\^ 

AvjfjLoa-ioc 6 ^ripaca STrt- 
jSao-iXsuf, (hu'Ttsp xoLi sv 

Sifll, KOLl UVrOS §S ^YjpOCM, 
OTTCJOg OtV ^YjptXOO.^ 

Ka< olog ^sipoTOvsM o 
\I/>j!p»(r/x,« xuTct 6 7rXoy(7»oc, 
Of, ja-a 6 Ksp^spog, ov^sig 
fXYj^ccvYj 6 diaipevyu)^ avTO§.^ 

Tu^v 6 ev 6 TTupotlcKTo; 



15. And what decrees have 
been passed against the rich, 
which, by Cerberus, they have no 
means of escaping, (effugiendi.) 

16. He had soon destroyed 
che wild beasts in the park, bi/ ^rjpiov oivoiXi(rxoo,diooxM,xon 
pursui?ig, and striking, and kill- ^uXXco, xcx.i xuraxoiivoo, 
ing them, (persequendo,) (ferien- 

do,) (inter imendo.) 

17. This is the way leading to 
true learning, and it is very diffi- 
cult in appearance* (aspectu.) 



18. He was quick in speaking, 
and with his quickness, a certain 
persuasion sat upon his lips, (lo- 
quendo.) 

1 9. To love too much is the 
cause of not loving, (amandi.) 

20. Women are quick in find- 
ing devices, (inveniendo.) 



OuTOJ £</** 'o^Qg, 6 

uyoD Tzqog 6 ^Arj^ivoj ttui- 
Seia, xai fi,a\u ys p^aXe^roj 
Trpoasi^oo.^ 

Tu^vg Ksyui ju,sv, Trqog 
5s ye auTOj 6 rap^of, ttu^m 
TIC sTnxuQi^ca" tin 6^si\o§.^ 

T) Xiav fiXsa), 6 jarj (^i- 
Xeco onTiov. 

Asivog 6 yyv)) svpKrxw 
Tsxvri' 



Ch. 41. 



125 



2 1 . The historian and poet do 
not differ in their expressing\hmgs 
in verse or in prose ; for were the 
writings of Herodotus put into 
metre, they would nevertheless 
be a history in metre,| as well as 
without it. But the difference 
lies in this, in the one telling 
things as they really are, the 
other as they may be. (loquen- 
do,) (narrando.) 

22. A person may know the 
age of bees in this manner ; those 
which are but a year old are 
glossy, and like oil in colour; 
but the elder ones are rough 
both to see and to touchy and 
appear wrinkled by their age. 
(visu,) (tactu.) 

23. He who fears death, either 
dreads a loss of sense, or to have 
other kind of feeling ; now if you 
lose sensation, you will feel no 
pain ; if you obtain other kind of 
feeling, you will be another kind 
of animal, and will not cease^OTW 
living, (a vivendo.) 

24. When he was prevented 
from doing public duties himself, 

by being employed about greater 
things, he exhorted Archiadas, a 
religious man, to it. (a faciendo.) 

25. To speak in a word, all 
those persons appear to have 
erred far from thinking as they 
ought, who have pubHshed their 



T>)j, ou 6 >j s[X[ji,sTpog Ae- 

ju,<° yap 0L)f 6 'Hgodorog eij 

hig^^ f^ixpog ay si^i^i^ i(7* 
Topio. Tig (/.STU fLsrgov ij 

OtVSU [Jt,STpOV, AWu OUTOS 

dio(,<pega), 6 o^^ jxsv o y»vo- 
(ji,oct^ Xsycii, 6 de, olo§ uv 
yivoiJ^uiJ^ 

vooa-xcti^ Tig otv, 6 rpo-nof- 
ovTog' 6 ^zy avTOSTtig (rriX- 
iTVOS Ts sifxi, xai g/xco™^' 
eXaioVf 6 ^poia,^' 6 h Trpscr- 
^vg rpatyvg xon eidco^ xon 

UTTTOfX^Ull yiVO[XOCl^ pV(TOi 

5s bqaui^ Sia 6 yt\pot.c.^ 

oci<tQvi(J-is hepoios' uXKcc 
sirs ovxsTi ai<r&Yi<rig^, ovds 
xaxog^ Tig oii<rQoivofj.ui'^ sits 
aXXoioTspog ai(7$i^<rig xtoio- 
fji^oii^ uXKoiog ^cjoov sifxi, 
xai ^aa> oo Trauco.™"^ 

E7r£jS>) ItpuafTOi OiVTOg 

xcoXuoo'^ 6 7roX<Tixo^P'"% Sia 
6^ xoii TTsgi i^syag^ 0L(7y(^Q- 
Xsofji^aJ, Ap^ia^cxxy 6 o 
deoj^ <fi\o;^ STTi ovTog^ -Tra- 

^OVgXOVTi £<7rOV, TTOpCOt) 

syot) doxscti a.^t3-TyiiJ.i 6 6 
^soy^^ Xoyi^Ofi^amoiS e^s^g, 
ofTQcrog rj/u^*) crcojxa a^o- 



126 



Ch. 4e. 



opinion that the soul is corpo- 
real; for what can the fineness 
of breath do to us, to produce 
ideas and reasoning? or what 
form of atoms, beyond others, 
has such force and power, as to 
produce sentiment, when it is 
mingled into the form of another 
body? (a cogitando.) 

26. Proclus was very lovely 
to he seen ; for not only was the 
symmetry of his members per- 
fect, but it is wonderful, how the 
vigour of his mind shone in his 
body, like a vital light, and it is 
not possible to he expressed in 
language, (visu,) (dictu.) 



(paivco*"** TJj yap 6 o 
%vsv[xo(. syoti AsTrroT))^ Trpo 
sp-yov yivofxon^^ av, si§ 
(pcx.VTcx.oria. xoli XoyKTix.o^^^ ; 
Tij ds 6 arojxoj (rp^^jjM-a to- 

hvvcx.[x,ig xai pOTTYl, chcTTS 
^govi^(7ig yswaoo, orav e»f 
hsgog TrAacrij syKctTafxty- 

Eidco^^ si[xi <r(pod§ci spcta-' 
[xiog 6 JJgoxKog' xai yag 
OV ILOVQV UVTOS^ 6^^"® 6 

cvfifJiSTgicx. ev e%co, aXAa 



yap xai o 

.h 



(TCfil^CC, oloVSl 



STTUVQSU) 

<pctig ^ooTixoc, ^cx.Uf^.oto'ios 
o(ro§^^ aTTOcTTiX^co^, xai ov 
TTctw ^ga^co^ 6 \0y05 Syva- 
T05, 

27. De rebus incertis vero, oraada consultum mittebat 
suos, an suscipienda essent. 

28. At iste certe pater tuus ajptior est addocendum minus 
quam plus habere. 



CHAP. XLII. 



Verbal adjectives, governing a dative of the agent, and 
the case of their own verbs, are used to signify necessity. 

Cum significatur necessitas, &c. JS^ow, Wetten,, and 

Holmes, 
The gerund in d2im of the nominative, &c. Bell, 

1. We must not overcome 'wo- Ov trSsvog (vixijTeov) eyco 
men by force, (vincendae sunt.) yyvij. 



Ch. 42. 



127 



2. If it be not possible to be 
saved with honour, we must choose 
death, (mors eligenda est nobis.) 

3. All those who speak, and j/ow 
who hear, must choose the best 
things, and those which will be' sa- 
lutary, instead of the easiest and 
most pleasant, (eligenda sunt, 
&c.) 

4. The wise man ought to avoid 
living for fame, and regarding 
things pleasing to the multitude, 
without making right reason the 
ruler of his life, (fugiendum est 
sapienti.) 

5. But first we ought to ex- 
amine, whether there be any art 
of sublimity or depth ; for some 
persons think that they are quite 
mistaken, who would reduce such 
things to artificial precepts, (no- 
bis exquirendum est.) 

6. ^ I say then that you ought 
to give aid to these things in two 
manners; first, in saving the 
cities to the Olynthians, and 
sending the soldiers who will do 
this; and secondly, in injuring 
his country, by ships, and by 
other soldiers, (auxilium a vobis 
negotiis ferendum esse.) 

7. I think that aperson should 
captivate those, whom he would 
wish to make willing assistants of 
the works of war, by all good 
works and deeds, (captandos 
esse.) 



alpsTsov eiii.i* 

'O Xsyui^ uTTug, koh 6 
axooo) <TXJ, b uyuQag xon b 

6 y)5uj TTpOUipSTSOV, 



^evxTsov 6 (r«)(p§ov£co'' 
6"^ TTpog So^a K^^^^y ^^^ o 
6 7roXv§ ^ojcsi^ TrsgKTXOTrsa), 
xon fji,ri 6 ogQog Koyo^ ^ys- 

Eyco 5s sxsivog SiaTroprj- 

TSOV £V OLpyri, gj gJjOti u\I/oc 

6 TOiouTO§ ayoD^ sig rs^vixog 
TTugccyyeKfxa, 

eijxi 6 Trguyi^a. crv 6^ re, 6 
TToXi^ 6 OXvvQiog (7a>^a>*, 
xui 6 ouTog TTOieco^^ crrpa- 
TicoT)}? 6X7rgjU,7ra;* xai 6, 6 
sxsivog "XViqoL xuxcog ttoisoo^, 

XOLi TpiYjgrig, XOLl (TTpiXTKJOTVig 

ersgog. 

'Oj 6 g<j 6 TToXsfJi^og sp- 
yoy TTOiscu^^ rig ^ouXo[xcx.i^ 
(Tvvsgyog %po^v[Ji.og, ouTog 
TravraTracr/, syw y= Zoxsi, 
uyenQog ^y)paTeov siiJn xon 
\oyos ^^i ''pyov. 



U8 



Ch. 43. 



8. If you wish that the gods 
should be propitious to you, i/ou 
must worship the gods ; or if you 
would wish to be beloved by your 
friends, i/ou must do good to your 

friends ; and if you desire to be 
honoured by your city, you must 
do service to your city, (colendi 
sunt Diij &c.) 

9. We must not omit one dream, 
the last and greatest, which gave 
him all his hope, (omittendum, 
&c.) 



E< 6 bso^ iXaoj Bi^Li cry 
/3oyAojU.aj, ^spcnrsuTeov (cro) 
^soc' eiTS VTTO ^1X05 gfisXo) 
ayuTToiu), 6(^1X05^ svsgysrri- 

TEOV SITS VTTO TTOXl^ STTldw- 

XyjTsov. 



*0 8s Te\svTaio$ koli 

sXTTig -JTUs v7ro<pcnvoo% ovoig 
ouh syco 'TraquKsiTtrsov. 



10. Si quis, quum tibicen bonus non sit, videri velit, 
quid ei faciendum sit ? An non imitandi boni tibicines in 
Us, quae sunt extra artem ? ac primum quidem, quum illi 
instrumenta pulchra habeant, multosque pedissequos cir- 
cumducant, etiam ipsi hcec facienda. 



CHAP. XLIII. 



Every verb may take an accusative of a cor^'esponding 
noun. 

Quodvis verbum admittit, &c. Eton. 

All verbs govern the accusative, &c. BelL 

Verbum quodvis accusativum, &c. Holmes, 

1. The rich liveaTanch more *0 'TrXoua-iog tvoXv u^Kio^ 
miserable life than ye. trv 6 ^loc ^lou), 

2. Lest some one shall fie a M»} tjj syw^ yqc^t^oi^^ 
hill of impiety against us, before y^«(p*j a.<Ts^s\a, sin 6 'P«- 
Rhadamanthus. Sajtxctvdyj.s 



Ch. 43, 



1^9 



3. And they were greatly afraid, 
and said to each other; Who 
then is this, that the sea and 
winds obey him ? 

4. Then, O Pythagoras, we ate 
a splendid supper, consisting of 
many kinds of meat, laid on much 
gold and silver ; and there were 
golden cups, and beautiful ser- 
vants, and musicians, and buf- 
foons. 

5» You awakened me being 
rich, enjoying the most pleasant 
dream, and extremely happy » 

6. He, who has formed base 
designs, if fortune favours him, 
has obtained his desire, never- 
theless he has intended badly. 

7. IT I 'make the justest proposal 
among friends ; for if I shall ap- 
pear to have done any wrong, I 
will confess the injury; but if I 
appear neither to have done, nor 
intended any evil, will not you 
confess that you are not injured 
by me? 

8. Tragedy having undergone 
many changes, rested, when it had 
got its proper nature and Ms- 
chylus first brought the number 
of actors from one to two, and 



\u)v' Tig apa. sifxi ourog, 
OT* 6 Kia,KoL(r(ra, am 6 avs- 
^Log vTraxovai avrog ; 

TOVVTSVQSV, SgJTTVeCO-, 00 

Yiv^ayoqag, TToXvo^og Tig 

XOCl TTOlXlXog hlTTVOV, STTl 

'^quo'Qv^ TToXvg x.oti ugyvDOV 
xoti SKTrcoixoe. sifxi ^gurrsog, 
xa< diiX-KOvog chgoiiog, acii 
fx.ovo'ovp'yog, xai ysKooTO" 

TTOlOg, 

^v eyo) 'TtKo'JTB'jj, xcti 
Yi^vg ovsipog^ (Tuvsiixi, kchi 
^uuiLCKTTog £u^tx.ipi,ovta eu- 
8a<jU,ovea>, BTrsysipa). 

'O jSouAsuco"*^'^ aid^puig, 

SI 6g 6 TU^Yl STTKyKUi^^, 

eugi^[/.a. svgKTXcu, [xixgog^^ 
ds ovdsig 6c^ xctxoog /3ou- 

'O £V (piXog dlXOClOC VTTO- 

Qsa-ig sycti UTroTi^rjjXj'". yjv 
yotg T<$^"^ syu) (puivoo xuxog 
TTOjeco'^, 6[j.o>\.oysai^adixeco^* 
>jv [MsvTOi fJ.Yj^sig 0aiv«j'^ 
xaxog 'TTOiscti'^, [XYids ^ovko- 

fXCH^'^, OV XCLl (TV CiV OlMOXO' 

ysaP fLYi^sig^^ vtto eyoi aSi- 
X£M ; 

UoXvg iLBrci^oKf^ jxeToi- 
SaXXco^ Tgaycodiot, '^a.vco^ 
errsi syja^ 6 suvtov (pvcrig' 

XOLl 0, TS 6 V7rOXQlTV}g tc-Ky^-' 

^oc, 6^ sic sig Ivo, -nguiTOg 



130 



Ch. 44. 



lessened the parts of the cho- 
rus. 

9. Tliey killed moreover the 
sons of Cleander, and put to 



X^pOC sXciTTOOO. 

Ilgocrccvcupsa)^ ^s xai 6 
TTOiig KXetxv^pog, Traj* re 



death all whom they knew to be oa-o^^ eihsco^ exsivog'^ ^<Xoj 

sig 6 o^sTOS piTTTM (pegoo.^ 



friends to him ; and having drag- 
ged their bodies, and tfrated them 
with evety ki?id of abuse, at last, 
carrying them thus insulted, they 
threw them into the sewers. 

10. Ye have seen, in the 
comedy of Aristophanes, one 
Socrates carried about, and say- 
ing that he walked in the air, and 
babbling much other folly » 



'OpaCO, SV ApKTTO^CiVYig 

(pXvagiu ^Xuapeco. 



11. Populo amicus erat, et \nmfiigit hancjugam. 

12. Videntes autem stellam, gavisi sunt gaudio magno 
valde. 



CHAP. XLIV. 

Verbs of sense, with the Attics, take an accusative. 

Attice vero omnia verba sensus, &c. Eton, 
Also verbs signifying, &c. BelL 
And the Attics construe, &c. Holmes. 



1 . It is not safe for you to say, 
nor- for me to hear such things, 

2. Yoti heard these things tinte, 
O Menippus ; and I have died, 
as you see, being able to be im- 
mortal. 



Oux aa-<paA)jf ovts crv 



Xsyot), 



eyoj 



TOlOVTOg, 

MsviTTTTog' xcci ^vv)<rxcti, dig 



Ch. 44, 



181 



3. Now ye seek to kill me, 
who have spoken the truth to 
you, *wliich I heard from God : 
Abraham did not this. 

4. Every one lories his own 
nsoork. 

5. ^ And why need I speak 
about the world ! who heard, 
every day from them, ideas, and 
incorjporeals, and atoms, and va- 
cuums, and such a multitude of 
names. 

6. Jesus saith unto them. 
Draw ye out now, and bear unto 
the governor of the feast ; and 
they bare it. When the ruler of 
the feast tasted the water that had 
been made wine, he calls the 
bridegroom, and says to him, 
Every man sets forth the good 
wine, and when men have well 
drunk, then the smaller wine; 
thou hast kept the good wine 
until now. 

7. And Isaac, his father, said 
unto him. Come near to me, and 
kiss me, my son. And having 
come near, he kissed him ; and 
he smelted the smell of his gar- 
ments, and blessed him. 

8. Esau, my brother, is a hairy 
man, and I am a smooth man ; 
my father peradventure will feel 
me, and I shall be before him, as 
a deceiver. 

ic 2 



Nuv ^jjTcOJ eyw aTro- 

(TV, Of CtKOVM TTlXCOt, ©£0$* 
TTCiCO. 

Usgi jxev 6 KO<Tp.os^ rig 
^grj Kui Xsyoo; 6(rys losa, 
Kcii aa-Mi^oc, xui ciro[jJog, 
xai ycBVof-^, Ktxi TOiovrog Tig 
^X^^S OVOfJ^Ci, oo-Yifi^sgcii, 
iioL^a. oivrog axovcoJ^ 

Aeyoo avTog o Ir)(rouf, 
AvtAsw^ vvv, Koti fspco 6 
ctp^iTpixXivog' Koci (ps^cy. 
'Gig ds ysvu)^ 6 ap^iTpixXi- 
vog b vhjiq oivog yivopi^xi^, 
(pcavsco 6 vufx^ipiog, kki Xsyo) 
uvTog, Yiag avQpcoTTog Trpoo- 
rog^^ 6 xoiXog oivog TiQr)[xt, 
xon orav i^sQvoo^^, tots 6 
fj^ixpog' (TV Ti^gscti 6 xaKog 
oivog ecog apTi. 

Ka* eiTTOV avTog Yaaux, 
6 TraTvjg uvTog, Kyyit^x-^ 
syco^, xoti <piXsoo^ ^y<^9 tsx- 
vov, Koii syyi^oo^y (^iKsm 
otUTog' xoLi 0(r(pgotivo[Ji,cii^ 6 

OfTU^Yl 6 IfJl^UTlOV OLUTOg, Xdl 

£v\oy£oo uvTog, 

E/jtA* E<7ay, o oiBsK<^og 
syoo, avYip da(rvg, syoo ^= 
avYip Xsiog' (jlyittots vf/yjAa- 
C^aui^^ zyc/i b iraTfiq, xai 
si[ji.t svuVTiov uvTOg, wg 
xuTufgovecti,'^- 



132 Ch. 45. 



9. Bonum gastaverunt Dei veibum. 

10. Audio hcEc de te. , 

1 1 . Sentiunt prccsentia. 



CHAP. XLV. 

Participles and adjectives are often put, by attraction, 
in the same case with the noun or pronoun to which they 
refer. 

The Attics often put the relative, by attraction, in the 
same case with the antecedent ; and, sometimes, the ante- 
cedent in the same case with the relative. 

Attice relativum et antecedens, &c. 
Attice quoque antecedens, &c. 
Genitivus sequentis adjectivi, &c. Eton. 
The Attics put the relative, &c. 
Sometimes the antecedent, &c. 
The antecedent is sometimes, &c. BeU, 
Frequenter relativum et antecedens, &c. Wetten, and 
Holmes. 

RELATIVE ATTRACTED BY THE ANTECEDENT 

1. In his righteousness that he Ev 6 8<xaiO(ruv>3 uuTog 6$ 
hath done he shall live. "Troisco^ ^aco."" 

2. Your body is the temple of 'O o-wfjiu o-uP' vaos 6 ev 
the holy spirit in you, which ye <tv ayios Trveyjooa ejjtxi, if 
have from God. ep^w wito Qeo;. 

3. There are some, who will Eifx,t ri$, bs bi jtcsv <rw 
not admire you at all more, upon 5«Sc;jjix» xpTijw-a, ouSs j^ixpov 
account of the things nsohich you oinog Ivexa o-y /xaXAov ^olu'-' 
give. jx«Jcc.^ 



Ch. 45, 



133 



4. I do not ask for the world, 
but for those *whom thou hast 
given me, because they are thine. 

5. And now, O father, glorify 
thou me, with the glory which I 
had, before the world was. 

6. Remember ye the word which 
I said to you ; if they persecuted 
me, they will also persecute you. 



Tctu), uWcx. TTsgi (tovtmv) 

Of SiSwjXi syco, on cog ei/x*. 

Ka» vuv lo^ct^oo^ sycti <tu, 

6 6 xocTju-oj* eijxi/ 

eyco siTiov aw ei syoi Ikoxco, 
xai (TV licojicti.^ 



ANTECEDENT ATTRACTED BY THE RELATIVE. 



7. There is no public office, 
through which he had not gojie. 

8. And some of the disciples 
from Cassarea came with us, 
bringing one Mnason, a Cyprian, 
an old disciple, with whom we 
should be lodged. 



O 



5 



fjiO-QriTri^ ciTTO KaKTctpzici (tuv 
eyco, ocycti, Tragct 6§ ^svi^co^, 
Mvota-ctiv TIC, KvTrpiog, up- 
Xccio; (MuSviTvig. 



PARTICIPLE AND ADJECTIVE ATTRACTED BY THE 
SUBSTANTIVE. 



9. It has been ordained by 
fate for most men, when successful, 
never to be wise. 

10. He was hrothei'-in-Um of 
me shameless. 

11. The finest tragedies are 
composed about Alcmaeon, and 
Oedipus, and Orestes, and others 
to whomsoever it has happened 
either to suffer dreadful things, 
or to do them. 

12. They say that there are 
with them two hinds of reasoning, 
the one which is hettei', and the 
other which is worse. 



*0 T:0\'O(i [/.SlpO) jaJjSsTTO- 

re, sv %qa(r(roi^'^, <pgovsa3,^ 



AotYip SjttOJ £l[J,l xuvco- 



7r<j, 



fg 



'O xuXog Tpayoadia. cruv- 
Tiflijjxi TTsgi AAxjttata3V% xai 
OidiTTOv;, xon Opsari^s, xcn 
6(rog^ aXXos Gvy^ooLivcti" ») 



E<a* TTixpot avTog <pY,{JH 
ct[x(pM 6 \oyog^^^^\ xgsic-'- 
(Tcjoy^ 6(7TJf" ei[xi, xui 6 



K o 



134 



Ch. 45, 



PROMISCUOUS. 



13.^ He comes then to a city 
of Samaria, called Sichar, near 
the ground iioJiich Jacob gave to 
his son Joseph. 

14. When they landed, they 
see a fire lying, and small fish 
lying upon it, and bread. Jesus 
says to them, Bring of the small 

Jishes which ye caught just now. 

1 5. At every disagreeable ap- 
pearance accustom yourself to 
say, that it is an appearance, 
and not at all what it seems; 
then examine it, hy these rules, 
"which you have. 

16. Do ye now desire peace, 
for any other thing than this, that 
ye think ye are able to live more 
safely, when peace is made, than 
making *war P 

17. Socrates said that those 
persons were mad, who explored 
by divination the things, which 
the gods permitted men learning 
to discern ; and he said that they 
ought to learn those things, which 
the gods permitted them learning 
to do. 

18. He desired him to come 
to the army, that they might con- 
sult about the castles "which they 
had taken. 

1 9. His eunuchs and servants 
dug a grave for him, when he 



laxojo la;o'T3(p ^ ^'O? uoTog, 

oifUpiOV STTlXSlfJiGilf KCil OLq- 

T0$. Asycti uvTOs o I>Jcrou^, 

<l>g^W^ 6X O'^uqiov OS 
TrKX^OO vvv, 

l^sXeTUoo^ sTTiXsyco, or* (pav- 
roiO-Kx si[ji,i, Koti ov TrotVTctig 

6 XOiVOOV OVTO§^ 6j sx^' 

AXKo; 6 )j ovTOs ys 
evsKUf sipy^vri^ vvv emQuiJisoo^ 
6t< VG[j,i^oo cta-<poiX6<rTegov 
BuvaiJ^ai ^oioo, sipYjVY} yivo[j,on, 

Yj TTOXefLSOO;^ 

Aoii[xovoico^, <pYi[j.i 6 2a;- 
xpccTYis, b [iciVTSuo(ji,a.i^y bg 
b avSgoDTTog d.^oofjLi b Qsog 
jitaQwv^ diaxpivcti' (pr^j^i Se, 
Sc*, bg [xct^MV^ TTOisco didoopn 
b 0sog, fxavQavcti, 



BTTl b (TTqarSVfXOL^, bTTcog 
freqi b (pgovgiov^ bg Kccy.- 

*0 [XSV Bvvovy(^og KOH 
^sponroQv oiVTog^opva<roo d>jx)j 



Ch. ^5. 



13.5 



died; and his wife sits on the 
ground, having adorned her hus- 
band with whatever things she 
had, and having his head upon 
her knees. 

20. That you should be mur- 
derers, and pollute your hands 
with royal blood — see that it be 
not villainous at present, and 
dangerous to you afterwards ; for 
I am not conscious to myself^ 
that I have given you any cause 
of uneasiness, 

21. What then does the God 



say 



? For indeed I am not con- 



scious to myself that I am wise, 
much or little. 



6<* Te\stjTcx.oy>^* o 8e yuvr, 

y.Ci^Y^^(X.i ^OtfJl^Ctlf KQCTflSOi^ 

avTOs 6^0) STTi 6 yovv.^ 

ds^iu ouii.oLj oguco jtcyj Trgog 
6"^ vuv uvo<riog, xen mrsqov 
(Tu e7r<x<vSuvoj e/jw,*^' oo yap 

TTSOO^^ (TV, 

Tig mors Ksyco 6 Qsog; 
syu) yotg S>), ovts i^syot ovts 

0-y.lKpOV, (TVVSldsOO^'^ S[/,UVTOU 



22. Persarum quidem longe pulcherrimus est pater 
mens, Medorum vero, quotqicot ego vidi, longe hie meus 
avus pulcherrimus est. 

23. Philosophis edicere, non fingere nova vocabula, 
neque nugari de quibus non norunt. 



K 4^ 



136 



CHAP. XLVI. 



An adjective is sometimes put in a different gender from 
the substantive with which it stands, as agreeing with some 
other substantive understood. 



Sometimes a neuter adjective, &c. 
The relative sometimes agrees, &c. 



Bell 



1. Poetry is more philoso- 
phical and laboured than history. 

2. Teach ye all nations, bap- 
tizing them in the name of the 
Father, and of the Son, and of 
the Holy Ghost. 

3. I say that expression is the 
interpretation (of thought) by a 
fit appellation, *wJiich has the 
same power in poetry as in prose. 

4. The whole multitude having 
performed the sacrifice, came into 
the temple. 

5. How deep you slept, O so7i, 
who did not leap up ? But how 
then did Ulysses escape ? 

6. 11 When he saw the woman 
sitting on the ground, and the 
dead man lying, he wept for the 
misfortune, and said, Alas ! O 
good and faithful soul, thou art 
gone then having left us ! 



dutos 7roiri(ri^ Wroptu si[x,i, 

^oLTtTi^ui CLuroc^ eig 6 ovoixu 
6 TTUTTigy xcci 6 ulo:, xai 6 
ayio$ Trvsufj^ci, 

Asyoo Ke^ig ei[Xi 6 Si« 6 
ovofj,cii7ici^sp[j.YiVsia., og^^xon 

STTl 6 eiXtXBTpOc'^^, XUl STTl 6 

Eg^ofion^ ci; 6 Ugov, ^v~ 
(rmg ^^™, 7r«c o ttXyi^oc. 

Tsxvov, 6$^ OVK ex^ogsco; 

'O ds OUV Odu<T(T£VC TTWg 

^Kx0cvy'j} ; 

Ettsi ds eiSw- yvvr} yjx- 
[xoii xot^Yjixai, xu; 6 v=xpo§ 

XclftUl, duxgVM T£ 67r» TTOi- 

Sog^, xcti sirrrov, (^sv, w stya- 
bog xai 'JTicTTOc '^'J^yj, oix^" 
lj.cii E>3 dTToXiTroQV^ syoo. 



Ch. 46. 



137 



xr>]jU.«j ctQuvixrog, 

4>ucnj5 TO ^aq^aqov <pi~ 



*]. There Qxe internal sensations Aoyog sv kKucrros^ syoo, 

in each of us, W^zc// we call hopes. 6/ eXTrij ovof/^ui^aj, 

S. Think that the hearing of 'Hygo|xai 6 axowo-jaaspi 

many things is better than much ttoXXoc ttoXvs sijx* x?W°'' 

riches; for the latter speedily uya^o^' o ju,sv ya§ ra^soog 

perish, the former endures for uTroXeiTrco^ 6 Ss Traj o xp^^^S 

ever; for wisdom alone, of all 7rupa[ji,svcjii*(ro(piu'ycip f^ovos, 
possessions, is immortal. 

9. TTie barbarians are, by na- 
ture, fond of money, and des- 
pising dangers, they either pro- 
vide what is necessary for their Sgo/xr)^ jcai s(po^og 6 xp^^^' 
sustenance, by incursion and in- Brjj"^ irgog 6 fSios Tropilca^y 
vasion, or purchase peace for )j i^^yo^i i^ktQos^ 6 £/pr)v>j 
great rewards. uvriKctTuXKaa-a-co,^ 

10. Cities have made death 'O ttoAjj stt* 6 j«.eyaf 
the punishment for the greatest a5i?c))]xa^ Ini^^^ QctvoiTog 
crimes, as not being able to re- ttoisco, ms ovk uv, jw-eyaj 
strain injustice, by the fear of a Kotxog 6 <po/3oj, 6 ulixiu 
greater evil. Trai/crcov.™ 

11. Oblectatio^ cum honestate, est optimum; sine hac, 

12. Prceclarum est, publicorum actorum custodia, 

13. Gentes ambulant in vanitate sensus sui alienati a 
vita Dei. 



laa 



CHAP. XLVII. 



A noun of the dual number may have a verb, adjective, 
or relative plural ; but a plural noun can have a verb, ad- 
jective, or relative dual, only when it signifies two. 

Omne duale necessario, &c. 

Contra vero omne plurale, &c. Eton, 

Cum verbi prima dualis, &c. 

Ajw,^w et Suco, &c. Wetten. 

Sometimes the dual number, &c. Bell. 

Dualia non necessario, &c. Holmes, 



1. Why then are you offended 
against them ? for they both suffer 
just punishment. 

2. But one thing vexed me 
not a little; Thesmopolis dis- 
turbing me, and teaching me, 
that two negatives make one af- 
firmativec 

3. In treating of every art, 
two things being required, the 
first, to show what the subject is, 
and the second in order, but the 
more important, how, and by 
what methods, this may be ac- 
quired by us. 

4. And ye rivers, and earth, 
and ye two who punish the dead 
men below. 

5. % If the two hands, which 
God made to assist each other, 



TtJ ODV OLyUVCi'H.TSCa XCiTOl, 

(xiJTO§ ; SiScoju-j yap a.[x,<poo 
xctXog 6 S<x>j. 

nx>3V aXXoe. sl§ syoo Au- 

xw, chg 6 duo a7:o(pci(ns, sis 
x.a.T(X(pa.<ng uttotsXsoo, 

Etti TTug Ts^voXoyioc^, 
Bvoi txTTonTsa), TTpoTsgog^ [J^SV 
6^ hsixvvfx^i^ Tig^^ 6 UTTOxet- 
/xa»% hvT6go$ h 6 ra^i§, 6 
^vvuixi; §e xvgiog, Troog etv 
syco^ cnuTog ovto$, koli 8<a 
6j ns fJ-e^odog^ x-njrof yivo- 

Ka< TTOTOriJiog, xa* ycmx, 
xa< 6g^ inrsvspOs xa/xvco^*^ 



Ch. 48. 



139 



*m)uld turn themselves to impede 
each other ; or if the t^o feet 
x<Dould impede each other ; would 
it not be great ignorance, and 
unhappiness ? 

6. They two went reluctant 
along the shore of the barren 
sea, and came to the tents and 
ships of the Myrmidons ; and 
they found him at his tent and 
his black ship. 

7. And let these two themselves 
be witnesses to this, before the 
eternal gods, and mortal men. 



xcoXvu) a\hri\ai^ **"*^' ij ei o 

xai Kouto^uifjiovici; 

'O 5s asKcov ^uivcti^ TTccpoc 
^iS ocks urgvysTog, 
Mvpixi^oov 5e sTTj T6 xXi(na* 

xui vuv$ Ixoi^oti,^ 
'O 5s Bupia-KVi^ TraqoL ts 

To 5s (XVTOg fJl,CipTUpOS^^ 
Si/Xl, 

Upog TS ^sof^ [x^uKOig, irqos 

TS ^vYiros avSpctiTTOs, 



8. Quare vero non et nos duo extruimus montes alios 
super alios, ut habeamus accuratiorem prospectum ? 

9. Equi mihifatigaii sunt excitanti populum. 



CHAP. XLVIII. 



Two or more negatives strengthen the negation. 

Duse aut plures negativae, &c. Eton, 
Duse negativae, &c. Wetten. 



1. 1 AGAIN asked you to give 
me a thing, than which I know 
you had nothing of less value 
to give me : no7' any easier to be 
commanded. 



^SCt)^ OVTS (TV f/.ixpo$ eijltl'^ 

5<5co]U,i^ eyct) ovhis* ovts 
pot^iog eTTiTOitjirw* oo5s«<r. 



140 



Ch. 48. 



2. Why do I say these things ? 
Tbat ye may know, that 7iothing 
is formidable to you when atten- 
tive : nor, if ye be neghgent, any 
thing such as you will. 

3. I would not pay even an 
obolus to any person. 

4. Ye see that ye profit nothing, 

5. Thus there is not one wise 
person. 

6. Verily, verily, I say unto 
thee, the cock shall not crow, 
until thou shalt have denied me 
thrice. 

7. He does not then regard 
praise from such persons who do 
not even please themselves. 

8. Never expect, having done 
any base thing, that you will es- 
cape notice ; for though you may 
escape others, you will be con- 
scious to yourself. 

9. ^ When he saw him un- 
able to bear the spear, he gave 
him the other things, and did 
not fear, that he would be unable 
to bear them. 

10. Let death and flighty, and 
all things that appear terrible, 
be daily before your eyes; but 
most of all, death ; and you will 
never think any thing mean, nor 
excessively desire any thing. 

1 1 . They who are most hos- 



Ti^ evzKd ouTOs Xeyvj; 
'Jvot etSoj, OTi ovhig ovTi 

OUTS, av oXiyoogsco^, toiov- 
Tog oloc oLV (TV SovXo[ji,a.i. 

OuK av ccTTohidoofj.i^'^ ovds 
uv o^oXog ovdeig, 

©eojosoj OTi OVK ax^sXsu) 
ovhig, 

OvTcag ovK sifj,i (TO^og 
ovd; elg, 

Ajtjtyjv, cifXT^v, Kzycti av, 
ou jw,>) uXsKTcop (poovea), eoog 
6g^ etTTupysoy^oLi^^ eyu) Tqig. 

Ou TOivm ou5s 6 Trapa 6 
roiovTog Biroiivog ev Koyog 

MyjSgTTore, [xrileig o.i<T- 

^pOg TTQISM^, eXTTl^M Kotv- 

^uvvi^'^K xeti ycto ccv 6 ctX- 

Kog Xctv^avui^, crsuvTov ys 
(rvvsideoo,^^ 

'Q,g ogoLoo- avTcg ou ^v- 
vai^ui ficca-Tu^co^ 6 Bopv, 6 
uKKog di^oojjLi", X.OCI oux <^o~ 
^eco™-, /^vj ov Ivvuii.ai^ (^spto 
avTOg. 

SoivccTOc, xcn <puyr}, xoii 
TTug 6 ^sivog <paiVco™'^, Trpo 
Q(pQo(.k[j,og e^iJ^i (TV xoiTOc y;- 
[xepoi' fjiuXi<rTcc S= 7r«j 6 
^ocvuTog' xa* oudug oySs- 
TTQTS rocTTSivog evSy/Aeo/x-aiP'^, 
OUTS ayocv STriQufjisco^ Tig.^ 

'O s^$go: ziULi^ sv au' 



Ch. 48, 



141 



tile in the play, having become 
friends, at last go out, and no one 
is killed by any person, 

1 2. 'Neither then do you think, 
that any of those things, which 
neither affect the nature of our 
body, or our soul, is grievous. 

13. Let your conversation be 
without covetousness; being con- 
tent with such things as ye have ; 
for he hath himself said, I will 
not leave thee, nor forsake thee. 
So that we may boldly say, The 
Lord is my helper, and I shall 
not be terrified at what man 
shall do unto me. 

14. The war itself will dis- 
cover the frail parts of his af- 
fairs, if we apply to it ; but if we 
sit at home, hearing the orators 
reviling, and blaming each other, 
none of the necessary things can 
emr be done by us. 



9oj, ^jAoj yivoju^ai^ ziti Te- 

0v»)crxco* ovists vtto ov^eigl^ 
M>j ovv [xrih av, ^ijts 

^aXSTTOg Tig 6 TOIOOTOJ, 6$ 

fJi^YjTS 6 crco[/,tx, ,a>jTs o 6 ^^u- 
yji syo) cpvarig^ TrgocrYixca, 
vofj.i^co eijtxi. 

Kn^iXupyvqog rgoTTOs' 
apjceo)^ 6 -TTocpeifji,!,^' ocvTog 
yap psa), Ov ju,>) cry aviij/x-j, 
ovhs ov [jiYi (TV syxaraXsiTro;.'* 
'flcTTS ^uppsct)^ Xsyco^ syot)^^ 
6 Kvpiog syco^ ^oi^Sog, xon 
ov (poSsM^ Tis iroieoi syta 
uvQpooTros, 

Ey^jcxco'*^ 6 cru^gog 6 
sjcsivos TTpayy^cc olvto^ 6 'jco- 
\sij,o$, uv sTTiysipsco'av w-sv- 
TOJ KU&viiJioti oiKOi, KoidopecjD^ 
uxovoD, xai onTioico"^ aXX)}- 
Acov^P^ 6 Xeyco^^, oy5e Trore 
ovhis eyoD ou jw-)j yivoiw-ai* 
6 hi. 



15. Dixerim ego equidem, nemini ullam esse institu- 
tionem ab illo qui non placeat. 



14^<f 



CHAP. XLIX. 



The article is used to mark a distinction or emphasis. 
With the infinitive, it supplies the place of nouns, ge- 
runds, and supines. With a participle, it is translated by 
the relative and indicative. With jxsv and 5e, it signifies 
partly; and it is often used for ornament. 

Articulo praepositivo, &c. Eton, 
Articulus sequente Ss, &c. 
Utuntur autem Grseci, &c. 
Infinitivus cum, &c. Wetten, 
The infinitive with the neuter, &c. 
The prepositive article, &c. Bell, 
Articulus quando vocibus, &c. Holmes, 



1. It is honourable even for 
an old man to learn, 

2. Death is frequently more 
eligible than life, 

3. It is better to he dead, than 
to live miserably. 

4. To those that are and that 
have been. 

5. These things, want of sleep 
and cares, have been the cause 
of death to me. 

6. Two men went up to the 
temple to pray ; the one a Pha- 
risee, and the other a publican. 

7. Havini^ seen the star, and 



KlqsTog si[xi TToAAaxij, 6 

KaA05 6 /x>j ^aw sj^ai, rj 
^oLOi aQ\ioog. 

'O vvv xoci 6 Trgoregov, 

OuTog eyoo 6 oi7rohr](rxco^ 
ctiTict yivoixon^, arypuTTViu 
xai (ppovTi$, 

AvQgooTTOg ^vo ctvocSccivoo^, 
£i; 6 ispov 7rpoa-sv^o[ji,at^' 

6 sl$ ^(XpKTOllOC, XOtl 6 

E;5w® 5 acTTvjp, xoti sp^o- 



Ch. 49. 



14S 



come into iJie house, they found 
the child. 

8. We spend the time of action 
in making ourselves ready. 

9. A sower went out to sow ; 
and as he sowed, some seeds fell 
by the way side, and the birds 
came, and eat them up. 



10. Having made use of this 
sentiment, he has conquered, and 
possesses all things; partly, as 
one would possess, having taken 
them in war, and partly, having 
made them fi'iends, and auxilia- 
ries to himself. 

1 1 . There maybe great excess 
in all the things, which we have 
mentioned; on the one hand, 
drawing us to extravagance ; on 
the other, driving us to baseness, 

12. He that hath my com- 
mandments, and keepeth them, 
he it is who laveth me; and he 
who loveth me, shall be beloved 
by my father. 

13. Pay ye the things which 
are Caesar's, to Ccesar, and the 
things which are God's, to God. 

14?. ^ Poverty, and meddling 
about other people's affairs, fol- 
low laziness, and indolence. 

15. This word, "man," or 
" white," does not denote the 
time when ; but this, *^he walks," 



6 TtOLillOV, 

6 7rocgct<Txsvot^eo avaXicrxco. 
'E.^sg^ofj.ai^ 6 (TTrsipoo 6^ 
(nrsigct)' xai ev 6 a-TTsipui 

OoTog ^guofji^ui^ 6 yvco- 
fx^T)^, Traj xaracTTpstpcoP, xa< 

Tig ep^w^TToXejttOf, o 5e, crujw,- 



SITTOV, «j«,£T§<a TTOKVS' 6^^ 
jXSV, TTpOg 6 TTOkVTSKYig^^ S^- 

aycii 6^ 6s, Trgog 6 pvrrotpoc^^ 
(rvyooQsco, 

'O c%6w 6 svToXri syoo, xaj 
TYigso) txvTog, sxsivog s</x* 6 
uyccTTocao sycti' 6 5= uyaTraa) 
syco, dyccTTotcii utto 6 '/rocrrip 
syco. 

KuKTup, KOLi 6 6 0eoc, 6 
0eo^ 

'O*^ agyeca^, xoti (y^oKu- 

^(O, STTOfJl^OLl 0^^ aTTOpSCJO, 'KUi 

b aXKoTpiog TroAuTrgayjxo- 
vsoo. 

'O"^ ^=v, uv^pcoiroc, >j, 
Asuxoj"% oil nrpodYiy^a.ivoi to 



144 



Ch. 49. 



or, "he has walked," the former 
denotes the present time, the 
latter^ the past. 

16. Caecilius, the Roman aii^ 
thor, gives this proof that Rome 
*xas founded by the Grecians, 
that it still retains the original 
Grecian custom of sacrificing to 
Hercules. 



KatxiXfOf, 6 'VooiJLonog 

aUTOJ TTCCTQIOC ^UCTlCt 

xXe>3?. 



17. Horum minime est, qui prudentiam exercent, vim 
hiferre ; sed illorum est, qui vires habent absque consilio, 
talia facere. 

18. Quo autem modo mihi visus sit familiaribus suis 
prodesse, partim opere seraetipsum demonstrans, qualis 
esset, partim coUoquiis usus, scribam. 



ELLIPSIS. 



EAAEI^IS est defectus vocis, unius, duarum, vel plurium, 
quae ad integram et justam structurain, requiruntur. 

L. BOS. 



14G 



CHAP. L. 

NOMINUM, PARTICIPIORUM, ET PRONOMINUM. 

1. Qui nesciat, Ephesiorum civitatem aedituam esse 
magnae deae Dianae, et simulacri ab Jove delapsi. 

2. Qui quam vacuam reperit, plenam reddidit urbem 
nostram bonorum. 

3. Sum statua Phanodici, filii Hermocratis Proconesii. 

4. Quidam de Asiae principibus, qui erant amici ejus, 
miserunt nuncios ad eum. 

5. Postridie sublatis anchoris navigabamus. 

6. Alexander autem ex Onchesto tollens cursum. 

7. Moriens autem, ad amicos respiciens, Magnos, inquifc, 
ludos funebres video mihi futuros. 

8. Ex sereno et puro aere ambiente sonuit vox. 

9. Proposuit victoriae jprcEmia totis etiam ordinibus. 

10. Qua de causa magis Trojani decem annis restiterunt. 

1 1 . Si quod est in hoc viro crimen^ accusent eum. 

12. Non invenientes causam, quomodo punirent eos. 

13. Plaustris onerariis imposuit ligna. 

14. De desertis vitibus putabat se adeo facile decerp- 
turum uvas. 

15. Ea quae ad Y)q\jltq. pertinent. 

16. Dicunt homines, 

1 7. Nam et tale quiddam de mortuis dicitur. 

18. Omnibus hominibus notum est. 

19. A teneris unguiculis. 

20. Qui cum diceret cauponam cam magno p-etio 
vendere. 



147 



CHAP. L. 



1. '03 ou yivaxrxsi Tr)v E^ecriajv ttoAjv vsujxooov ov<rctv tijj 
(ji,eye(.\Yi§ deaj Agrejx^Soj, xai roy Aiottstovs Act. 19. 

2. 'Oj 67ro*>jcr6 tijv ttoXiv ^jxcov /xeorijv , eugcov ett*- 
Xe*A>). Aristoph. de Themistoc. . 

3. 4>ayo5ixoy £//x« tou 'Etpfiox parous tou ITgo- 
xovjjo-iou. Inscrip. Sig. 

4. Tij/ej Twv Ao"jag;^ctiV, ovts; etVTco (piXoi, eTrejxvJ/av tt^oj 
aoTOv . Act. 19. 

5. T)] STrioocr*) apuvrs^ eTrXsojaev. Act. 27. 

6. 'O §£ Ax?^(xv^go§ £0 Oy^yjcTToy apaj . Arrian. 

7. A7ro5v>](rxcov Ss, tt^oj touj kroiipovg iScuv, eipyj, Meyav opw 
fi.ov Tov 67r»Ta<p<ov eo-o/x-evov. Plut. in Apoph. Alex. 

8. E^ uv6(psXQu xui lionQgoo tov 7rsgiep(^ovTO$ ■'IX'J^^ 
(pmrj. Plut. in Syll^. 

9. UgosiTrs vixriTripiot xui oXaj^ rixig ra^so'i. Xen. Cyr. 

10. 'Hi xa» [uaXKov ol T^cog?, t« Ssx« st>) «VTei;)^ov. 
Thucyd. 

11. Ei Ti 60-TJV ev Toj oLvlpi TOUTW , xaT^jyogstToxTay 
uuTou. Act. 25. 

12. MijSsv evgia-KOVTsg to ttojj xoXotcrovTai avrouc. 
Act. 4. 

13. Ta/j G-Kevo(popoig eTreflijxs ^uAa. j^Slian. 

14. EpYifxotg ws^' ouTcii pcilioog TpvyYjo-eiv. Aris- 
toph. 

15. Ta 7rpo5 tov 0£ov . Hebr. 2. 

16. ^a<nv >j AsyoucTiv 

17. AeysTa* yap ti Trspi Tcav oi^ofj^svcov xai 
ToiouTo Liban. 

18. EcTTiV TTOIVTI S>jX0V. AthCH. 

19. E^ ovy;^cov. Prov. 

20. Etts* 5' £(paTO irooXsiv auT>]y tov xa7r>)Xov ttoA.- 
Aoy. iElian. 

L 2 



148 Ch. 50. 

2 1 . Quadrigas quidem fecerunt. 

22. Rursus de novo iwincipio seditiones moverunt ad- 
versus se invicem. 

23. Vi se urbe expulsos caussati, ab imperatore qui tunc 
in Italia imperium obtinebat. 

24. Hastasque et scutum bovinum. 

25. Et levato artemone secundum aurcje flatuin. 

26. Hoc est opus Dei, ut credatis in mm, quern misitille. 

27. Illi vero cum celerrimo accurrissent gressu. 

28. Quintovero anno Aristodemi 7'egni. 

29. Diodes tertio lihro brevis pertractationis dicit. 

30. Peragere vitam in pace. 

31. Noctepostprecemtransmutaviti^zVflTW, i.e. mortuus est. 

32. Non accipiebant eum in urbem, neque in commune 
consilium, 

33. Si quando in unum consilium consultabimus. 

34. Deliberandum esse communi consilio et tibi et mihi 
censeo. 

S5. Non quod jam acceperim braheum, aut jam perfectus 
sim. 

36. Post haec os suum aperuit Job, et execratus est diem 
suum natalem, 

37. Praestantes muliebri generi, tanquam infirmiori vasi, 
honor em. 

38. Ao-To^cvoi vocantur, qui genere quidem conveniunt, 
in aliena vero tejra nati sunt. 

39. Usque dum in pacata regione vel terra sumus. 

40. Non omnes Graecorum linguam intelligunt. 

41. Cognosces, an et divina w/ww^fl^^ vel 5^«r^;z^/a urbem 
non sis destructurus. 

42. Populus scivit; Tisamenus 5^;z^6';2if/«?72 dixit. 

43. Cineas ad Senatum Romanum arcanis Uteris scripsit, 

44. A patria, tai>quam a sacra linea, incipiebat semina 
pacis abjicere. 

45. Nova quaedam numina infers auribus nostris. 



Ch. 50. 149 

21. TsQpiTTTroL [JI.SV STTOjyjdray. j3Elian. 

22. AvSig SK vsi^g stt' aAAijAotcriv 6<rTa(ria(r«v. He- 
rodot. 

23. EJsA>jAa(rfia* t»j^ TroKscag amcfiiksvoi /3/a, tt^o^ tou 
Tore xarsp^ovToj xara djv IraAiav yf/si/.ovog, Dion. Halicar. 

24. Kai ^ovpoL xui /3o£i>jv . Anacr. 

25. Kaj sTTocguvTe; rov uqTB[f.ova. t)J TrvEoycrjj . Act. 27. 

26. TouTO ecTj to e^yov tow 0sov, Ij'a wKrreucrijTe sij , 
bv uTTsa-TsiXsv sxsivog. Joan. 6. 

27. Oi 8e riji/ T«^*(rT>jv Trpoa-dpotixovTss . ^lian. 

28. ITsjXTrrw 5e ere; t>jj A.pKTTolfiiJ.QU . Pausan. 

29. AioxX>jj ev T»j rpiTij rijj ETnSpofojj (p)j(7i. Laert. 

30. Aiayeiv sv sipT^vvj, ^lian. 

31. T>) [jiSTu T>3V ey%»3v vuxt/ ]«<sT>jAAa0£V . iEschin. 

32. Oy '!rgo(re^s^<xVTO uvtov ej rijy TroXtv, oyS' g;r* to xoivov 

. Thucyd. 

33. E» 8s TTOT* ej ys /xjav ^ou\sv<ro[ji,6v, Horn. 

34. iSxoTrejv a^ico xoivyj xai trs xaj ejocs. Xeno- 
phon. 

35. Ov^ oTi )j8>j eXuSov , >j jjSij TSTeK6ioo[j^cn, 
Philip. 3. 

36. MeTa ToyTO rivoi^sv Ico^ to (TTOju-a ayToy, xai xaTvjpacraTO 

T>)V Y^lUSqaV UVTOV, Job. 

37. '«^^ ao-flsvso-Tepo) (ncsvsi tw yyva»xg»w wjcovsif.oVTsg 
Ti^riv. 1. Pet. 3. 

38. AcTTO^svor ol ysvsi jasv Trpoo-VjxovTg^, sttj 8s t>3j aAAo- 
8a7r>]j ysyovoTsj. Hesych. 

39. 'Eoog BTi sv (piXiot so-jw,sv. Xen. 

40. Ov^ ccTtuvreg tjjv 'EA.A>3Vcov (TWickti, Luc. 

41. TvooG'son, 61 xon •^so'Trso'iyj ttoAjv oyx aAa-r 
Tra^sij. Horn. 

42. ESo^e tcw 8>jjw,co' Tio-ol^svos sins, Andocides. 

43. Kivsus npog t>]V ^qvKy^v toov 'Pcojaaiwv sypu4>s Si' aTrop- 
pyjTOJv . iElian. 

44. Atto Tvjf TraT^iSoj, cjoCTrsp 0(.<p^ Ispoig , rjpp^sTO 
Ta crnsqfxctrci T>3f siprivi^g uTroppiTTTsiv. Philo, 

45. Hsvi^ovTa T<y« sia-(psgsis sis rug ocHOug Yifxoov. Act. 17. 

L 3 



150 Ch. .00. 

46. Vacuos et noctumos exercituum timores terrores 
panicos vocamus. 

47. Si quis infidelium ad corwivium vos vocaverit 

48. Ut a multis personis in nos collatum donum, per 
multos gratiarum actione celebretar pro nobis. V 

49. Effugisti j9a?««7w, Labes. 

50 Et interjecth aliquot diebus iterum ingressus est 
Capernaum. 

51. Secundum meam opinionem. 

52. Pantherinam pellem humeris habens. 

53. Verum in singulos annos decem millia draclimarum, 

54. Levis armaturas milites ut habebant potestatem cele- 
ritatis sequebantur. 

5B» Nequaquam puto possibile est magnum et juvenilem 
animum eos accipere, qui parva agunt. 

56. Gloria Deo in altissimis hahitaadis. 

57. Jussit eos qui possent natare projicere se primos, et 
ad terram exire. 

58. Regum sententiam immobilem se habere decet. 

59. Armeniam et vicinas eidem gentes LucuUus debel- 
lavit. 

60. Secundum patriae mm^es. 

61. Singulis ^x^w^. 

62. Didicit, ex iis quae passus est, obedientiam. 

63. Nondum erat spiritus sanctus effusus : quia Jesus 
nondum erat glorificatus. 

64. Postquam et mihi dicendi potestatem fecistis. 

65. Saepe blandis verbis alloquutus est. 

- 66, Et a foro venientes, nisi loti fuerint, non edunt. 

67. Quot annos natus es ? 

68. Qui citharam tenet. 

69. Incolarum mansuetum et mite est ingenium. 

70. Virtutem a juvenili cjctate cole. 

71. Vespere Sabbathi quag lucescit in primam diem Sab- 
bathi. 

72. Cras certe veniam. 



Ch. 50. 151 

46. Toug xsvovg xui vuKreptvoug roov (rTguTsv[j.(x,Toov i^o^ovg 
iruviKo, xKriiloiusv, Polyaen. 

47. Ei Tij xaXei wjxaj tcov (tiria-rcov . 1 Cor. 10. 

48. *Iva ex iroWuiV Trpo(rco7rcov to sij rif^a? ^otpic^ot 
diot iroKKoiV ev^upiCTTviQYi wrsg Yifji,oov, 2 Cor. 1. 

49. ExiTs(p£U'yoig co Aa^eg. Aristoph. 

50. Kai TraAiv eio"*)A.5ev e<j KotTrspvaovfji, Si* 
ijljispMv. Marc. 2. 

51. Kara t>jv sjxijv 

52. ITapSaXsyjv ioy^oicriv s;^«;v. Horn. 

53. AxXa [jivpicii xciTot tov sviavrov, Lucian. 

54. 0» 5e \^^Ao< coj ej^ov rap^oyj, supsnrovro* Arrian. 
55* EcTTi S' oxj^sTTOT oifji^ui ^zyoi xoit vsaviTcov 

(ppOVYlfJUOC \ctSsiV [Ji^lKpOC TTpCiTTOVTUg, Dcm. 

56. Ao^ot Qsco ev v-^hio-Toig 

57. ExsXsucrg roug ^uvufji^evovg xoXy/x,^av, aTTOppi^otVTctg 
TTpooTOvg, sTTi Tr^v yYjV e^isvui. Act. 26. 

58. n^sTTSi TYjV rcuv /SacrjAsoJV yvuo^riv c/]w.eraxJVJjTcoj ^X^"' 
. Isocr. 

59. AgijLsviuv xoti Trpccroixa. ToiVTi^g xaTe^roXs/xr/tre 
AouxouXXoj. Julian. 

60. Kara ra irctrqicx, . Thucyd. 

61. K«d' YjfjLspuv, ^lian. 

62. EjU-aflgv, a(p' oov sTraQs, t>3V u7raxo>]V. Heb. 5. 

63. OuTTco 1JV 'TTVsvfji.a uyiov , oTi 6 lyjcrouj 
ouSsTTco sSo^acrdrj. Joan. 7. 

64. E7re*S>j xajxoj Aoyou jo-sraSsScoxaTs . Heliodor. 

65. UoXXoi Ss [LBiXi^iOKTi 'jrpocrYivdu. Horn. 

66* Kai aTTO ayogotg , eav ^yj ^wttti^covtoh, cvx 

s<rQiou(riv. Marc. 7. 

67. Ilocra yeyovug ; 

68. 'O rrjv mQapuv . Luci. 

69. To Tcjov oi^r^Topoov Yifjispov xui Trqciov eo-Tiv . zli]lian. 

70. A^srrjv gx vea.? acrxst 

71. Or|/= o^a^^aTcov t»j e7n(poQ(r>covG-T^ Big i^ictv (Tu^^oltwv. 
Mat. 28. 

72. Ej T/v VG-Tsoutoiv aaXjCTa rj^w. Luciail.' ' 

L 4 



15^2 Ch, 50, 

73. Multa quidem in terra, miilta autem in ?na7^i humido. 

74. Gubernator autem jam lucescente sole anchoras cum 
sustulisset. 

75. Non ab optimo animo, (i. e. sine dolo,) ad rempub- 
licam accedunt. i 

76. Aliusque alii sacra fecit immortalium deorum. 

77. In severarum Dearum iemplum. 

78. Qui mollia vestimenta gestant. 

79. Nunc vero me victam malis navigare submisso malo 
oportet. 

80. In presenti tempore. 

81. Interea. 

82. Cum producunt arbores fnictum, scitis quod jam 
prope e«t aestas. 

83. Et ait illi Petrus, ^nea, sanat te Jesus Christus, 
surge et sterne tibi ledum, 

84. Dicit ei Jesus, Quid mihi et tibi commune negotium estf 

85. Si me hicce ex tuo sinu vi abripiet. 

86. Alexander philosophus visus est sibi morti adjudi- 
catus, 

87. Equitatum et jumenta. 

88. Neque enim guttulam in Thebanam undam evomuit 
Bacchus. 

89. Et ut paucis verbis dicam. 

90. Bene etiam stataria pugna certare edoctus. 

91. Et friimenti addere medimnorum decem millia. 

92. In hac parte, et in ilia parte. 

93. w^qualem mecuni regm partem tene, 
. 94, Exteriorem poculi partem. 

95. Non in opportuna joar/^ est fixa sagitta. 

96. Primas partes ei dederunt. 

97. Coecas et inermes manibus destitutas has corporis 
partes. 

98 . Qui habitant ad hasce Tauri partes. 

99. Ars autem necessitate longa mensura imbecillior est. 

100. Sexto die mensis ineuntis. 



Ch. 50. 1.53 

73. IToAXa jtx,sv ev yjj, ttoWoc. de sf oy^a . Aristoph. 

74. 'O Se xo^spvT^rYii otpri Sia<pcocrxovTOj , apa? 
raj ayxuga^. Polyb. 

75. Owx aTTO Toy ^sKtkttou 7rpo$ ru xokjcx, TtpofT'- 
ep^ovTdt. Plat. 

76. AxXo$ S' aXAw sge^e ^eoov aisiysvsTCKav. Horn. 

77. Eij TO Tcov (r6[xvcf3v dswv . Aristoph. 

78. 01 Ta ftaXaxa <po§ovvTs§. Matth. 11. 

79. Nuv 8' ev KUKOig y^oi ttXejv ti<pg»ju,sv>) Soxsj. Sophoc. 

80. Ev Tw TTupovTi . Thucyd. 

81. Ev ju-so-w . iEschyl. 

82. 'Orav TrpoootKooaiv rjSyj ra SsvSpa , yivoocrxeTi 
6t/ rjSij syyuf to ^spoj s<rTi. Luc. 21. 

83. Kat s^7rev avTco 6 ITsTpoj, Aivea, ioltoli <tb Irj-Touj 6 
XpKTTO^, uvudTr^^i Kdi (TTpcao-QV (TsavTco . Act. 9. 

84. Asysi avTYj o Iricrovs, T< sfjioi xui (TOi ; 
Joan. 2. 

85. El ju,* ouTO^ sx Tojv crcov wku^ztch ^icc. Sophoc. 

86. -AAs^avSpo^ 6 <piXo(ro(pog s^o^s t>)V eTr* .^avaTa; 
xaTccxsxgKrQut, Artem. 

87. T>jv Ts Ittttov xaj Ta <rxsvo(poga, . Dio. Cass. 

88. Oo yap (Mxpuv sig Qyi^uioov vdcop stttvg'sv 6 Aio- 
vvcrog, Dion. 

89. Kai (TvveXovTi (puvai . Constant. 

90. Eu h Koti sv (TTaSijj SeSaijjocevoj avTKpsgsa-Qott. 
Apollon. 

91. Ka< (TJTOU TrpodQsivcn (xvpioSu . Polyb. 

92. T>5 jxev 5 T») Se 

93. Io"ov £jU,o< /Saff-iAsue . Horn. 

94. To s^wSsv Tou TTOTvipiov . Luc. 11. 

95. O'jx sv xonpicti o^v TTotyYi ^sXos, Horn. 

96. Ta TrgooTct sScoxav otuTco, ^lian. 

97. Ta TU(pXct Tov (ToofjiciTog Kui aoTrXa x«< a-yzipcit. tmvtcx. 

, Xen. 

98. Tov$ sTti Tots TOD Toivpou xaroixovvTag . Polyb. 

99. Te^vvj 8' avayxrjj ao-^evscrrs^a [jiaxqco . iEschyl. 

100. 'ExTji la-Tafxevov 



l54 Ch. 50. 

101. Veturius dimidiam partem exercitus adducens. 

102. Non enim magnitudine tanttcm, venim etiam nu- 
mero virtutum longe inferior est Lysias. 

103. Numquid in ea veste initiatus es magnis mysteriis. 

104. Rogavit ipsuin, ut a terra paululum promoveret 
navim, 

105. Videmur ad Bacchi urbem appulisse namm. 

106. Quanam re violavi leges P quid mali patravi ? 

107. Advertere mentem ad eaquae dicebantur. 

108. Ego vero putabam, me compendiosam banc exco- 
git^sse *oiam, 

109. Etprogressus via Babylonem ducente. 

110. Hac via etiam haec dicebantur. 
Ill* Qui in Asia cedes habent. 

112. Est illis forum, ubi et regiae et aliae magistratuum 
cedes sunt exstructae. 

113. Vocant autem me Jocastam ; hoc enim nomen pater 
imposuit. 

114. Gratia vobis et pax a Jesu Christo, qui est Xj&s^'& 
fidelis. 

115. Qaumque intentos haberent ocwZo5 in coelum. 

116. Edentes etbibentes, ea, quce ab ipsis apjponuntur. 

117. Hieme jam instante, regressi sunt. 

118. Celeberrimus Alexander. 

119. Mare saxis occultis plenum. 

120. A Judaeis quinquies quadragenas^/a^os una minus 
accepi. 

121. Tum sagittas in exercitum Graecorum mittit. 

122. Secundo j'^^^M navigare. 

123. Cui cum similem pendas pcenam, laudem habebis. 

124. Incipientes in parvis \yAi\mt poculis. 

125. In duos ^^^^5 erectum. 

126. Vultum ipsius severum et tristem timeo. 

127. Est autem in Hierosolymis, ad ^or^aw pecuariam, 
piscina. 



Ch. 50. 15.5 

101. OusTOUgioj T»jv ^ju,ja-6<av rri$ a-TpuTiot^ eva^o- 
iJLsvo<s, Dion. Hal. 

102. Ou yoip [leysQsi toov apercov, ocWa xcn too ttAjj-- 
Qsi TToXv XeiTTOfjt.svo^ 6 Aucria^, Longin. 

103. Mwv ovv ejxuyjfirjj §>)t* sv uvtco sis t« (isyotKa 
. Aristoph. 

104. npcorvjcrev aurov, a^ro t*)j y))? eTravayayeiv oXiyov 
. Luc. 5. 

105. Bpo/Ajoy TToXiv eojxajxsv eio-^aXsiV . Eurip. 

106. n>] 9r«^s^r]v ; riS'spefa; Pythag. 

107. ITpoo-gp^eiv TO* J XaAoyju-evojf, Act. 16. 
108r Ka* ju,>]v (TyvTO^ov riva TayT)]V wjx>]V STrivevoijxsva* 

eycoys. Lucian. 

109. n^oVcov xai t»jv g;n Ba^uAcovoj. Xen. 

110. Tayrjj x«< raura sksysTO. Plat. 

111. Toy J xara tvjv Ao-<av s^ovrots, Xen. 

112. EcTTJV (xvTOig ayopu, svQot rot re jSacriXgia 
xai ra aWa, up^sioc. TrsTroiYjTon. Xen. 

118. KaAoytn 8' louota-rriv fxs' tovto yug iroLTYiq 

eScTo. Eurip. 

114. 'Ka.gig vynv xa< g<|5)5V>5 aTro I>j(rou X^kttou, o 
[/.uprvg 6 'TTKTTOs. Apocal. 

115. Ken chg ctTsvi^ovTSS r,s-av sig rov ovpoivov. Act. 1. 

116. Eo-fliovref x«i yrivovrsg ra Trap' ayrcov . Luc. 

117. Xgijxo/vo? >j8»j , avzyvipt^dca, Thucyd. 

118. *0 Travu AXs^avS^oj. 

119. ricAayo^ upaXiov ysf/.ov. Chrysost. 

120. 'Ttto louSajcov TrevraKig re(ra'cigccKOVTot Trotga, 
[iiav sXoi^ov. 2 Cor. 

121. Toreroyj lowc a<piYi(riv sig to 'EXX>)vtxov . M. Tyr. 

122. ^^ ouQiocg TrAeJV. 

123. Too <Tu TYjV 6[xoiriv aTroSiSoyj , sttchvov I^sij. Her* 

124. Ag^ofjt^svoi [asv sv jaixpo/j TTJVoycri . Laert. 

125. Etti Toy$- dvo eTToivKTTuiJ^svov opQov, Lucian. 

126. Ae5<a to aKi'QpooTTov uvtov xa* Konvic^sg . Luc. 

127. Eo-Ti Se sv TOIJ 'hpOG-oXVfJiOig, Siri TYj 'KpoSotTlKY} , 

xoAujx^>j9g«. Joan. 



156 Ch. 50. 

128. Paucis verbis scripsi. 

129. Dicito, sed nee longam orationeniy nee cum 
prooemiis. 

130. Considerandum est, an satius sit affirmare. 

131. Plangent super eumpectora omnes natiokes terrse. 

132. Anaxagoras in scripto de regno. 

133. Norunt enim, quibus conditionibus ipsos ducat 
Cyaxares. 

134. Dans autem ipsi equites et nudos milites, 

135. Quando tu excipiebas amicos in natalitiis conviviis, 

136. Ex aequa societate communes expeditiones faciebant. 

137. Solve Junes quibus alligatur navis inlittore. 

138. Amictus sindone super nudo corpore, 

139. Ex aequo imperio imperavi patriae. 

140. Qua pedum celeritate possunt, aufugiunt. 
14?1. In arte equitandi mire superbiebat. 

142. Mortua fuisses, si dignas \msses poenas. 

143. Interficient ex vobis aliqaos, 

144. Non convenit tali viro mentiri, qualis est Socrates. 

145. Magnoya?wor^ ab aliis accipiunt. 

146. Jacebat graviter gemens in loco puro. 

147. Domus in commodo urbis loco aedificata. 

148. Bibunt tantum quantum rapere licet. 

149. Ego vero existimo orationem hancce non expedire 
civitati, et praeter hoc minime justam esse. 

150. Nunc quidem ad mensam hospitalem te invitamus. 

151. Cani capilli caput coronant. 

152. Ne accipiant hi judiciale tribolum. 

153. Ipse dixit, se dudum hoc desiderare, et studere 
omni modo. 

154. Propino tibi> in salutem ducis Herculis 

155. Lotus oceani aqua, 

156. Quam profundum dormivisti somnum, 

157. Per "-^n^rn susvicionem nobis ipsis fiiigebamiis 
tiraore*^. 



Gh. 50. 157 

128. A»* oKiywv sypx'^ia., 1 Pet, 

129. Aeys, jx»j yi^uKpctv ^svTot , jx>j§e ^sra 7rpo»i- 
jajcov. Lucian. 

180. , ju,)] TTOT ouv xgeiTTOv >; Xeysiv. Dion. Hal. 

131. Ko\(/ovTai STT* awTOv iroi<rut a\ (pvXcn rrjj y>jj. 
Apocal. 

132. Avu^oiyopas sv tco Trepi /Sao-iXsiaj. ^lian. 

133. Icrao-i yap, e^' olj auroyj Kvu^ocpYi^ 
aysTcn, Xen. 

134. Aoyj Se auro) liTTrsots re nai 4/iAouj . Arrian. 

135. 'Ots ela-Tias (TV Tovs <pi\ovg sv Toi$ ysveQXioi$ . Xen. 

136. Atto t>jj icr>jj xoivaj o-Tgarsiocg sTroi- 
ouvTo. Thucyd. 

137. Ave ra. wrroysioc . Lucian. 

138. IlsQiSs§\rifji,svo$ (nv^ovu stti yvi^vou , Marc. 

139. >)f?''f sTTKri^s '^a,Tpi^o§. Lucian. 

140. *H< TToSojv gp^0L»(7iv, aTToSiS^acrxoucn. Julian. 

141. Ett* t>j litTtsio, [jisyx s(pgovei. Aristoph. 

142. ATTS&uvsg, SI rvis u^iug siMyyjxvsg . Aristoph. 

143. ©avarcocrouo-jv £0 ujxwv . Lucas. 

144. Oux scTTiv avSgi olw ^coxgarsi rJ/euSscrda* 

145. Aocfx.SciVov(nv siti ttoXXco Trap* hspwv, Plut. 

146. Ke»TO ^agv<TTsv<x^(t)v sv Kot^ugoo . Horn. 

147. Ojxia £V xaXoj t>jj ttoXscos oixoSojXijSstcra. Lucian. 

148. n<voucri oa-ov gcriv ixp%a<Ton. ^lian. 

149. Eyco Sg Yiyovpt^on tov \oyov rovSe c(.<rv[ji,<popov t)j 7roXei> 
Trpo; 8g xai ou Sjxatov. Demost. 

150. Nyv jttgv £771 ^gvja as xaXoyjU,£v. Lucian. 

151. rioAiai xapav (jTs<^QV(n. Anacr. 

152. M>j kotiJt,§otvsTco<Ta.v ovtoi to Sixacrixov . Luc. 

153. AuTOf £^)j, 'kolXoli rovTO £7rtQy/x£iv, xa< (r7rgu5£iy gx 
TToivTog . Lucian. 

154. ir^OTrivo) a-Qi, 'HpuKXsovg ag^i^ysTou, Lucian. 

155. AsXovfxsvos (oxsotvoio . Horn. 

156. *12j ^oL$uv £xo/jx>]fl>)f . Lucian. 

157. A*a X£V>)5 av67rXaTT0jX£v ^/aiv <po^oyj. Dion. 
Hal. 



158 Ch. 50. 

158. Via, quae dticit ad saiutem. 

159. Coeperunt una voce omnes excusare. 

160. Ad utramque j^ar^^w fluvii. 

161. Dextra manu Dei exaltatus. 

162. Una manu aquam, altera ignem ferebat. 

163. Zenothemis utraque manu, altera naso, altera oculo 
prehenso. 

164. Duplicem marmoream loenam, 

165. Populus, in omni re, jam facilis ipsis evaserat. 

166. Res bene se habet. 

167. Filios divites hortantur parentes, ut servent siui bona. 

168. Messenii victoriam brevi tempore Lacedaemoniis 
dederunt. 

169. Pro mortuis erogare etiam \o\o pecuniis, 

1 70. Pro virihus date eleemosynam. 

171. Ex quo tempore, 

1 72. Paululum et non videbitis me. 

173. Famam banc jam olim accepimus. 

1 74. Nisi imperium brevi dissolutum fuisset. 

175. Sufficiet ipsis interim vel hoc supplicium. 

176. In omni montsmsi regione divulgabantur cuncta. 

177. Hie non consenserat consilio illorum. 

1 78. Acceptam cladem ingenua anima non retulit. 

179. Pater noster qui es in coelis. 

180. Qui in foro merces permutant. 

181. Ex quo tempore patres sopiti sunt. 

VERBORUM, 

. 182. Desiderium me tenet audiendi quid dicturus sis. 

183. Hoc Cinyras nymphis sacravit rete. 

184. Vendidit quemcunque cepit abdiicendum trans mare 
indomitum. 

185. Et a foro venientes, nisi laventur, non edunt. 



Ch. 50. 159 

158. 'H 680J5 ^ 7r§0§ <7(tiTYjpiUV 

159. Hp^OtVTO WTTO fJi^lOlS irOLpCX,lT€i(T^OLl TTOLVTS^. LuC. 

160. Hotg^ ejcuTspoi rov iroTU[f,Qv. ^lian. 

161. T>j h^icc TOW Q>sou w\[/6o9£<j. Act. 

162. T>j jaev u5w^ £(popsiy tyj h srspcc to Trup. 

163. Z>jvo9s/x,<j aiu^OTspuig t*} ftev rijf pivoc, t>j 8s 
Toy o(p$a\[jt,ov, s7rs»X>]jU.]U.svoj. Lucian. 

164. AiTrXaxa i^^uq^cnqsY^v . Horn. 

165. 'O ^Yi[x,o§, BIS iroLQ-uv , >j§>j TiSacro-o^ otVTOis 
sysyovsi. Plut. 

166. xaXcoj e;^e< 

167. Toij TraicTi ro<f 7rh.QV(noig ol Trarspej ^uXAarrsiv 
Tragaivoutnv. Plut. 

168. 01 Ms(ro-*)Vio* t>jv vtx>]v oy 5*a fji^oixpou Aaxs- 
daifx,ovioig edcaxoiv* Polyaen. 

169. MeXXco ys xa» sxriveiv wTrsp vexgcov. Lucian. 

170. Ta svovTflt Sots s\sri[jt,o(TvvYiv. Lucas. 
17L Ef ou . Horn. 

172. Mixpov xa» ou ^ecoggtre jx?. Joan. 

173. Tijv (p>jft>3v ex TToWou '7rugsi\Yi<poi[ji.sv. Isocr. 

174. El [x,Yi ri oip^ri ^la rot)(^scf3V xareXuS*]. Plat. 

175. *Ixav)5 sv Toa-QVTco xa» auT>j Ti[Jioopioi, sa-rai 
avToi$* Lucian. 

176. Ev oXyi t>j opsiVYi SjgXaXeiTo -TroiVTot. Lucas. 

177. Ouroj oox Yjv (Tvyx.oLTotTe^eiii.svog t*j ^ovXyj 
avToiv. Lucas. 

178. T)jv YiTTOiv air sv$eias ovk s^guasv. Plut- 

1 79. ITaTsp ^ju,60v, 6 sv toij oupavois. Matt. 

180. Oi sv T>3 ayogu fji^sTu^uWoiJ^evoi . Xen. 

181. A^' Yis 01 TTdTsgsg sxoijw^ijdjjo-av. 2 Pet. 

182. Ilofi^j 9ravo /xs, 6, ti (pwvsij 5;^=j. Aristoph. 
186. Taiff vujx^aij Kivwgjjj toSs Sixtuov. Epigr. 
184<. Uspvoia-^ 6v tiv lAs(rxs ^e^>jv aAo^ urguys- 

Toio. Horn. 

1S5. Kai airo oLyopoig , sav jxvj fiuTTTKrcavrai, ovx 

sa-hovG-i* Marc. 



160 Ch. 50. 

186. Propitie sit tibi,' Domine, non erit tibi hoc. 

187. Amen, amen, dico vobis, moriar si dabitur huic 
generation! signum. 

188. Mihi videris non his attendere, et hsec fads cum 
sis sapiens. 

189. Necessitas consilii z^r^^-^ me et te. ^ 

190. Vide ne facias. 

191. Si vero velint et ipsi. 

192. Alia eventura erant, aUae jam praesentia erant. 

193. Judicavit mori oportere virum. 

1 94. Per Jovem rogo ut una mecum sis. 

195. Da, O Jupiter, ne prius sol occidat, et tenebrse 
idveniant. 

196. Dona etiam adferentes, quanta quisque ^o^^a/. 

197. Mirum ^5^, quantum praestant. 

198. Veni hue in terram, quamcunque ostendero tibi. 

199. Alexander Aristoteli salutem apprecatur, 

200. Ab avo meo accepi moris esse candidi. 

201. Nunc vero istos dicam^ quotquot Pelasgicum Argos 
abitabant. 

202. Si quidem dabunt praemium magnanimi Achivi, 
isinam. 

203. Quid non ego tibi, quid non tu prastitisti mihi ? 

204. At ille inquit, majus est. 

205. Vereor ne quis mihi Danaorum succenseat. 

206. Si vero non credis, age, tibi jam capite annuam. 

PRiEPOSITIONUM. 

207. Non darem triobolum ^ro Diis. 

208. Eunt pet' campum. 

209. Multos per- labores in meas venit manus. 

210. Propter ea me aspiciebas. 

211. Propter quid me tentatis ? 

212. Sequemur in tuam gratiam. 

213. Expectans in venientem diem. 

214. Lupum ^jr auribus teneo. 

215. Hie Pelopa genuit, ex hoc autem Atreus natus. 



Ch. 50. 161 

186. Ikeoos (Toi KugiSf ov ju,>) s(Ttoh (toi tovto. Matt. 

187. A-i^Yiv, ay^yiVi Xsyoo v[miv, ei hQi^osTui t^ 
ysvscc TauT») (7>jju.£ioy. Marc. 

188. Moi 8ox£<f ou irqods'^siv rov vow TOVTOig, xai tuvto. 

0-0^0$ oov, Plato. 

189. Xpsca /SovXtjj sjxs xai crs, Horn. 

190. 'Ottojj ju.>j 7roi>)(7»)je 

191. Ei Ss xaj awTO* . Horn. 

192. Ta jaev sjxsXXsv , ra S' rjS*) 7ra^y)v. Demost. 

193. Ex^lVSV OLTtO^CLVSlV TOV Otvlpcc, 

194. n^of TOW A<o? oTTcoj Tragsasi p^oi. Aristoph. 

195. Zsu — jx») TT^iV stt' ijfXioy Swvai, xa* 67r< xvs^paj 
eASsiv. Horn. 

196. Aojoa T6, tt)^ kxot(TTOi (psgovTsg. Arriaii. 

197. Aiu(psgov<ri ^ocv[j^oc(rTQv otov. Aristot. 

1 98. Asvgo eij yyjv, rji/ av (TOi hi^ca. Act. 

199. AXsJavSgoj AgicTTOTsKsi ^oci^siv 

200o TlccpoL rov TraTTTTou to xaXovjSsj . M. Anton. 

201. Nuv 8* ayTOuj , 6(r(roi to XlsXas'yix&y A^yoj 
£vciiov. Horn. 

202. E* ju-sv lai<rov(7i yspa; fjt,£yoL^viioi A^atot, Home 

203. Ti 5* oux eyw as , t* 8* oux SjCte cru ; 
Polyb. 

204. 'O 8s 5 aXAa julsj^ov s(tti, ^lian. 

205. M>3 Ti$ ]U,o< Aavocoov ysfj^eay^crsTui. Horn. 

206. El 8' uys, toi xs^uKyj xotTuvsva-ofj^oci. Horn. 



207. OvK uv 8oirjy twv ©scov rg^ca^oXov. Aristoph. 

208. Yigyovrat itshoio, Horn. 

209. YloKXctiv f^o^^cov yjXQs x^ipag sn; sfxag, Eiirip. 

210. Ta'jT* apu xai svsoogag /xo*. Xen. 

211. Ti fjt,s TTsigot^cTs; Marc. 

212. 'Evf/ojxsfla tyiv g-y,v ^^piv. Aristoph. 

213. Tr,v eK7iQv<rav YifjLsguv ^asvoya-a. Eurip. 

214. Auxcv Tcoy wrc/iv xgaToo. 

215. OuTOj ^VTsusi IleXoTra, rovh' Argsvg s(pv. Pjurip. 

M 



162 Ch.dO. 

216. Cum ill Sunium sacrum pervenimus. 

217. Dein iii Marathone cum essemus. 

218. Dividamus igituream 2?i duas partes. 

219. Ut tingat extremam digiti partem m aquam. 

220. Unde ad lianc Siciliam navi advectus advenis ? 

221. iEneas primus jaculum misit in Idomeneum. 

222. Egressum parat, secundum meam sententiam. 

223. Quoad omne verbum otiosum, de ipso redditux'i 
sunt homines rationem. 

224-. De re aliquid audivit. 

225. Die mihi de patre et filio quem reliqui. 

226. Discesserunt cum exercitu. 

227. Ne autem illinc efFugerent, speculatores statu- 
ebas. 

CONJUNCTIONUM ET ADVERBIORUM. 

228. Nemo unquam invenire posset. 

229. Si tanquam servus vocatus es. 

230. Fidelis est Deus, qui vocavit nos, qui etiam bene 
faciet 

231. Vis ut me convertam ad alias aliquas vias ? 

232. Major erit in coelo laetitia, ob unum sontem, qui 
redeat ad frugem, quam ob nonaginta novem insontes. 

233. Descendit hie domum suam justificatus, wzff^zsquam 
ille. 

234. Volo ego populum salviim esse, potius quam perire. 

235. Vide ut facias omnia ad formam monstratam tibi. 

236. Sic corruptos fuisse oculos, ut caecutiret. 

237. Ut in coelo, sic etiam super terram. 

PLURIUM vocu]\r. 

238. Si quis judicum non aUud quam jus respicit. 

239. Per legatos in Peloponnesum missos egit, ut ahquod 
auxilium mitteretur. 

24<0. Ire per viam ducentem ad mortem. 
24- 1 . Et cum paucis multas omnino myriades superavit 
non solum, sed et imperium fecit majus. 



Ch. 50. 163 

216« 'Ors ^ovviov Ipov aipiKOfisQa,. Horn. 

217. Eira Mugot^covi jotsv or yijxsv. Aristoph. 

218. AigAojjtcsv roivuv auryjv §yo jxs§>3. Plat. 

219. 'Iva /3a\f/jj TO ax^ov tou SaxxuAou vZoltos. Lucas. 

220. IToSsv ^<xsXiav rrjv Ss vau(rToXoov Troipei ; Eurip. 

221. Aivsius 5e TrpctiTog uxovtictsv I§6/X£vr)0^. Horn. 

222. E^isvcii, yvM[XYiv ejw-vjv, jxsXXe*. Aristoph. 

223. riav pyjjxa agyov, a7ro5«j(royo-< ^e^i aurou Aq- 
yov. Matth. 

224. Tov 7rpuyiJi,oiTo$ uKY^xoev t/. Aristoph, 

225. EiTTs 8e jao» TrctTgog re xa< ulso^ 6v xuTsXsiTrov, Horn. 

226. ATTs^copi^a-oiv tco g-t^xtcu. Thucyd. 

227. Tou 5e ]U,r)8' evrsvQsv 5<a<psyye»v, ^xottovc xoc- 
^icTTYis. Xen. 

228. OySsij ttots ey^o* . Demosth. 

229. AovXog exX>jflr)f. 1 Cor. 

230. YIkttos 6 0£Of, 6 xotXoov Yifji^otCf 6j xai TroiYia-ei, 
1 Thes. 

231. BouAei rpotTrcofxcii S>)d' oSouj aXXoig Tivag; Eurip. 

232. Xa^a s(rrai ev tco ovgavw, stti evi ccfj^otpTuiXco /xsravo- 
ouvTi, >j sTTi svvsvYiKOVTot 6vvsot hxciioig. Lucas. 

233. Kare^yj outoj SsSixaiWjxsvoj sjj tov ojxov uvrov, 
>j exsjvoj. Lucas. 

234?. BowAo/x' eyco Aaov (TOov eja/xsvai >j ofTroXsaSoii. Horn. 

235. *Opa T0J>3(r>3j ttuvtoi xutcx, tov tu%qv tov Ss/p^fisvTa 
(TO/. Heb. 

236. Aio(.<pSapYivat Toig ov|/£/^, cij ocfjivdpov jSAettsiv. ^Han. 

237. *«0,? ev Gvpavco, xa» £7ri t)}? y>j^ Matth. 

238. Tojy xgiTOiv si ,a>] t<; eTspcaas ^\s7ici. Aristot. 

239. Ej T£ T)3V IIsX07rOVVYI<TOV fTTpxa-a-EV OTTVl 

ofsXsiu Tig ysvYiasTat, Thucyd. 

240. l£Vai TYjV BTTl ^SiyOtTOV 

241. Kcii (Tvv oXiyoig TrocfXTroXkoug ixvpiahotg KCiTYiyMVitreiTO 

, aAA« xon T^v cip^Yiv ixsi^oo sTTOiYias* ^Han. 
M 2 



164 Ch. 51. 

24-2. Salutate fratres qui sunt ex domesticis Aristobuli. 

243. Si quis alius habere possit^ pro annorum conditione, 
nigrum capillum habes. 

244-. Jussit eos duci ad mortem. 

245. Nonne stultum est, quod miser ego donk> hue ad- 
venerim nudo capite ? 

246. Si ego satis doceo vos, quales erga vos invicem esse 
oporteat, bene se res habet ; sin vero minus — 

247. Quomodo enim tibi dabunt praemium magnanimi 
Achivi? Hdim. inique posttdas. 

248. Non solum castra posuit in solitudine circa plata- 
num ; sed et pretiosum ex ea ornatum suspendit. 

249. Pars Asiae quae ad orientem versa est, 

250. Videtis enim hoc omnes, praemium quod mihi fiiit 
transfer tur aha via. 

251. Kimc\\Asid pocida plena propino, vino pari, pari aqiia 
temperata. 

252. Menelae, tibi haec dice, et faciam insuper. 

253. Si enim ^5^/5 Bacchi diebus tragoedos spectassetis. 

254. Propter quid rides, o Diogenes ? Diog. Quid enim 
aliud facerem quam ridere, quando meminerim quaha fecit 
Graecia ? 



CHAP. LI. 

OF THE ANCIENT EGYPTIANS. 

1. Those Egyptians who live in the cultivated parts of 
the country, are, of all whom I have seen, the most ingenious, 
being attentive to the improvement of the memory, beyond 
the rest of mankind. To give some idea of their mode of life ; 
for three days successively in every month they use purges, 
vomits, and clysters ; this they do out of attention to their health, 



Ch. 51. 165 

242. Aa-fTua-oKrQs tous ea tcov A^ktto^ooAou 
Rom. 

243. E< ris uXXos , ^X^'^5 ''^P^S sto$, lusKoLimv 
TYjv T^<%a. Theoph. 

244. EksXsvosv ocvtovs aTrop^flijvai , Act. 

245. To de /xtj xuvijv oiKO^ev gXfle/y ejo-g 
Tov y.uxodaifji,ov s^ovtu > Aristoph. 

246. Ei eyca hotvcos Bidaa-KM v^uus^ ohug X§^ "^^^S ot,\Xr\\otj^ 
sivcn, • ei h ja,>) — Xen. 

247. ITcoj <yup toi Scoo-oycri ysgus [jt,syuQui/,oi Axof-ioi ; 

Horn. 

248. F,xgYi(raTO (rra^/x-a) t>j spriyi^iu t>j Trsqi tijv 
'nKoLTUvov* uKKoL kui ef»3\[/sv aurrjj xoctjooov ttoXuts^yi, JElian. 

249. T>3J Aa-iug y} Trpog tols ccvutoXus, 

25Q, AsvarasTs yotp Toys TtuvTsg 6 jsxo* yeoaj 

o<;^£Ta* aAAr) . Horn. 

251. T>j <piA.0T»3(na gyw [ji,s(rTus TrgOTrivw, icrov icrcp 
Ksxpa[jt,svot$, Athen. 

252. Msi/eXas, (70i de raSe Aeyco, dpoi<roo Ss Trgoj • 
Horn. 

253. Ei ya^ ev A<ovy(7oy rpuycadous 
sSsoKTua-Qs, Demosth. 

254. T< yeXaf, co Aioysveg ; Aioy. T< yap 
«XXo )j 5 ore ave]xv>j(7fi>jv ola g7ro<s* ^ 'EAAaj ; Lucian. 



CHAP. LI. 

IONIC GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO ATTIC. 

1 . ATT12N 8s S)j AiyvTTTKJDv ol [j.sv Trepi t>jv a-Trsipof^svYiv Ai~ 
yuTTTOV oiKsova-i, [/.VYif/^YjV av^gctmctiv Travrcov eTrucrKsovTSs i/^ccKkt- 
rcc, XoyiooruTOi eici /xaxgcw toov syui sg duxTrsigotv oi7rixofx,y)Vt 
TgoTToo h ^o>3f TOioods diot)(^psctiVTcn' <TvgiJi.oii^ou(n Tgsi§ h[^s§°^S 
^'T^^S^S f^^ivog IxacTToy, sy^&TOia-i ^YigcofASVOi rv\v vyisiYiv kui KXv<r- 
(jiua-ij vo(ji.i^ovTS5 ocTTO TMV TgB<^ovTUiv cr^Ticov TTOccrotg T(xs voyo-owj 

M 3 



166 Ch. 5L 

being persuaded that the diseases of the body are occasioned by 
the different elements received as food. Besides this, we may 
venture to assert, that, after the Africans, there is no people 
in health and constitution to be compared with the Egyp- 
tians. To this advantage, the climate, which is here subject 
to no variations, may essentially contribute: chaSages of all 
kinds, and those in particular of the seasons, promote and 
occasion the maladies of the body. To their bread, which 
they make with spelt, they give the name of cyllestis ; they 
have no vines in the country, but they drink a liquor fer- 
mented from barley ; they live principally upon fish, either 
salted or dried in the sun : they eat also quails, ducks, and 
some smaller birds, without other preparation than first salt- 
ing them ; but they roast and boil such other birds and fishes 
as they have, excepting those which are preserved for sacred 
purposes. 

2. At the entertainments of the rich, just as the company is 
about to rise from the repast, a small coffin is carried round, 
containing a perfect representation of a dead body ; it is in size 
sometimes of one, but never of more than two cubits, and as it 
is shown to the guests in rotation, the bearer exclaims, " Cast 
your eyes on this figure : after death you yourself will resemble 
it; drink then, and be happy.' — Such are the customs they 
observe at entertainments. 

3. They contentedly adhere to the customs of their ances- 
tors, and are averse to foreign manners. Among other things 
which claim our approbation, they have a song, which is also 
used in Phoenicia, Cyprus, and other places, where it is dif- 
ferently named. Of all the things which astonished me in 
Egypt, nothing more perplexed me than my curiosity to know 
whence the Egyptians learned this song, so entirely resembling 
the Linus of the Greeks ; it is of the remotest antiquity among 
them, and they call it Maneros. They have a tradition that 
jNIaneros was the only son of their first monarch ; and that, 
having prematurely died, they instituted these melancholy 
strains in his honour, constituting their first, and, in earlier 
times, their only song. 

4. The Egyptians surpass all the Greeks, the Lacedae- 
monians excepted, in the reverence which they pay to age : 
if a young person meet his senior, he instantly turns aside *o 



Ch. 51. 167 



roKTi uvQpcaTTOKTi yiv=or$oii. Eicrt jasv yug xa« uXXooc AiyvTrrtoi 
fj^sTU Ai^ooi; vyiYjgscrToiTOi TTCiVTMv uvQgctiTiMV, rcov chpsoov fsixoi 
Soxsejv) slvsxsv, on ou iJ.sTOLX'kacrcrouG-i cd wgcn' ev yocg TrjTi [j,s- 
Ta^oXYicri TO^G^^ avQgcjOTroKTi al voug-qi [jioiXi(rToe. yivovrotif rcav t= 
aWoov TTUVTcov, Kcti 8)j viOLi Tcov Mgsoov (xaXi(yTa, AgTO(pixyi- 
ovci Se ex toov oXvgeoov TroisvvTsg ctgTov^, rovg sxsivoi KoXKiria-Tig 
ovo[ji,(X^ov<n* Oivco h' sx xgiQea)v ttsttoiyuxsvm dicn^gscovToii' ov yotg 
O'fi eicr* ev tyj %a;^*j cc[j.7rs\oi' i^Qucov Se rovg jxev, Trgog irjXiov 
avYiVOiVTsg, ot}[/,ou$ (yirsovroHj rovg 8* e^ «AjX>)5 TeTa.gi')(e\)y.svQUi* 
ogviQoov 8e rovg re ogToyug^ Koti rue v^(T(rugj xa< toc a-fj^ixgot rcov 
o^vtd'wv cojxa (Tireovrai^ TrgOTa^/p^eiKravTe^* Ta Se ctWa. 0(Tct >] oo- 
y»9a)V Yj i^QvMV s(rTi (Ti^j e^^oaeva, p^co^»? *j oxocro* Cf^i I^oj wjro^s- 
h^otTcn, Tov$ XoiTTOvg OTTTOvg xa< spQovs (nTsovrai. 



2. Ev 8e rpo-i cruvou(nr)(n, tojti 6vla,ifj.o(Ti aurecov, e^reav a^ro 
SeiTVOO ysvcovTai, <7rsgi<^Bgei avrjp vsjcpov ev (To^w ^vXivov TreTTOiYj- 
jxevov, /jts]XjjX>]jttsvov ej ra /xaAjcrra, xai y^^'^J) ^f'"' ^^y^' l^^y^^ot; 
6(rov re tzolvtyi 'r:r)')(uciiOV^ »j 8j7ry)^yv' SsixvDj 8s Ixacrra; tcov 
(ru[/.7roT£ciov, Xsysi, Ej toutov bgsoov, nivs re xa< regTreu* ecre^j ya^ 
uTTO^uvctiV TOiovTog. Taura jxsv ;ra^a ra a-Vjj.'Troa-ici ttqisvo-i. 

3. IIotrgiOKn h ^gsooiJi,svoi voij^oktI) etXXcov ovhva, sttixtscuvtoci. 
ToiCTi aXXa re evu^nx s(Tti vo[j.i(x<x, ncti Zyj xoti aeic^a ev eari, 
Aivof, ooTTTsg ev re 4>oiv<x>3 aojSijaoj eCTi, xai ev KvTrpco, kch 
uKKy xoiTU [j^svTOi sQvsoi ouvo[j.oi. ep^ei* (rV[jL(psgsToci 8e cutjTOj 
e<va/ Tov ol 'EXXijvej Aivov ovo[ji,u^ovts5 usi^ovcrr ware voXXoc 
jttev xa< aXAa a'TToQcoiiju.a^etv jote ra;v Tre^i AiyuTtTOV sovtmv^ ev 

06 Srj X«J TOV AlVOV OKoQsV sXoL^OV ^OLiVOVtOLl Is OCSi XOTS TOVTQV 

aej^ovTsj" ecTTi Se Ajyu7rTi(7TJ 6 Aivoj xaXsuixevos Mavegcjog, 
"Ei^atrav 8e j!a»v AiyoTrTiOi tou Trgctirou ^otcriXsua-avTog AiyuTCTOU 
TTui^ci [ji,ovvoysvsoc y&vs<rQui' aTroQuvovTot 8* oivtov avctigov, ^pr}VGia i 
TOVTOKTi utt' AiywTrriMV TifJ^ri^r^vui' xcci aotSrjv rs tuvtyiv TrgwTYiv 
Kui fxouvYiv (T(pKri y£ve(rScn. 

4. ^uiJi.(psgovTixi 8e xat toIs aXXo AiyvrrriQi 'EXXrjvcov /xouvot Ji 
AaxsSajjtAOViOJcrf ol vecoTegoi auTecov tokti Trgsa-^VTsgoia-i (ryvruy- 
;^ayovT5c, ejxo'jcri tijj 68oy, xa< sxT^a^ovTar kch ewiou(ri, s^ 

M 4 



168 Ch. 51. 

make way for him ; if a senior enter an apartment, the youth 
always rise from their seats ; this ceremony is observed by no 
other of the Greeks. When the Egyptians meet, they do not 
speak, but make a profound reverence, bowing with the hand 
down to the knee. > 

5. Their habit, which they call calasiris, is made of linen, and 
fringed at the bottom ; over this they throw a kind of shawl 
made of white wool ; but in these vests of wool they are for- 
oidden by their religion either to be buried or to enter any 
sacred edifice ; this is a peculiarity of those ceremonies which 
are called Orphic and Pythagorean ; whoever has been initiated 
in these mysteries can never be interred in a vest of wool, for 
which a sacred reason is assigned. 

6. Of the Egyptians it is further memorable, that they first 
imagined what month or day was to be consecrated to each 
deity : they also, from observing the days of nativity, venture 
to predict the particular circumstances of a man's life and 
death : this is done by the poets of Greece, but the Egyptians 
have certainly discovered more things that are wonderful than 
all the rest of mankind. ^\Tienever any unusual circumstance 
occurs, they commit the particulars to writing, and mark the 
events which follow it : if they afterwards observe any similar 
incident, they conclude that the result will be similar also. 

7. The art of divination in Egypt is confined to certain of 
their deities. There are, in this country, oracles of Hercules, 
of Apollo, of Minerva, and Diana, of Mars, and of Jupiter ; 
but the oracle of Latona at Butos is held in greater estimation 
than any of the rest: the oracular communication is regulated 
by no fixed system, but is differently obtained in different 
places. 

.8. The art of medicine in Egypt is thus exercised: one 
physician is confined to the study and management of one 
disease ; there are of course a great number who practise 
this art; some attend to disorders of the eyes, others to 
those of the head; some take care of the teeth, others are 
conversant with all the diseases of the bowels ; whilst many 
attend to the cure of maladies which are less conspicuous. 

9. With respect to their funerals and ceremonies of mourning ; 
whenever a man ofony importance dies, the females of his family, 



Ch. 5L 169 

s^pYjg VTraviCTTSoiTon* Toh (jlsvtoi uWoicri *EXX»)va)y ouSaftoici o-vfjt,- 
(pspovToti, AvTi TOO rirpoa-txyogsusiv aXX>]Xouj ev tjj(7I oSoicjj 
'}rQO(5-KVVsov(ri xarievTsj f^sx^' tow youyaroj n^v xsiga* 



Toyj, oyj xaXsowcri xuKu(ngi§' sin toutokti 8s eigivsu sI^oltol 
Xzvy.cc siravcc^Xi^dov (po^sovo'r ov (jt,sv to* ss ys tcl Igoc s(T<psgsTcin 
eigivsu, ovhe (TuyKaTOL^cnrTsrai <r<^i* ou yoig 6<nov' 6[/,oXoysou(n 8s 
TauTot roi<n Opi^iKOicn xuKeof^evoKTi xcn YLvQuyogeioKTi' ovh yag 
TOUTcav Toov ogyioov fj^sTs^ovTUf 6(ri6v scttj ev sigivsoKTi eli^ua-i 
-&a(^3)3var so-ti 8s 'Trsgi avToov Igos Koyo^ XsyoiJi,svo$» 

6. Ken Ttxh uKXoL AiyuTTTiOKri sa-Ti s^sugYjixsva* ^si^ ts 
ycui riiJ^zgr^ kKCKTT^ ^scav otsv scti* ■koli t)j huoLdTog Yif^sgYj yevO' 
juosvoc, rsoKTi syjivgYiasif xoii oxmc, tsKzuty^(tsi, xcn OKOiog rig sa-rcn 
Tccci TOVTOKTi TOiV 'EXA>]vcov ol sv TroiYiasi ysvo[ji,svoi s^gYjcravTO' 
TegccTcc ts irXsco cr(piv oLvevgrfroLi ij TOicr; aWoia-i catcKTi avSgooTroio-i. 
TsvofjisvQV yag TsgoLTOS, (^iiKu(T(TQV(Ti ygcupofx^svoi rco 'tto^oiivov 
KOLi )jv XOTS (xTTsgov 7rstgoc7rX'^<Tiov TOUTUi ysvYiTcHy Kara, toouto 
voij^i^ovcri wTTO^Yiasa'Qcii, 



7^ Mavr<>c»] 8>j ccutokti a)8s 8<axs£Taj* av^oonoov [j^sv ovhsvi 
TT^ocrxssTai ^ Tsy(yriy toov 8s ^s/vV fxeTs^sTsgoKTi, Koii yag *H- 
gaycKzos fx^ocvTi^'iov ccvtoSi sctti, x«» AttoXAwvo^, x/a A^yjva/TjjjXa* 
AgTeju<»8o^, x«i Agsog, koh Ajof xaj oys [xctXKTTct sv tii^yj ayovToii 

TTOtVTCaV TCtiV fJi^XVTYl'i'JOV y A>)TOUJ SV BoUTOt TTOXi 6(rTl' oO jXSVTOi Upys 

fxuvTri'iai (r(pi xoltu tcjouto s(ttol<ti^ uKKu dicKpopo^ skti, 

8. 'H 8e /rjrgtxvj xara Ta8e (r(pt 8e8acrTaf jx»>3j vova-ov syccicrTOg 

irjTgOg eCTTi, X«< ov TtXsOVMV' TTUVTCC 8' lYjTgOOV StTTl TTkect' ol (X 

yctg, o^QuXpLoov ii^Tgoi xoiTS(rTSoi(n' ol Ss, xsipaXyjj" ol Ss, oSovtwv 

ol Ss, TCaV KOLTCK, V>]SuV 01 8s, TOiV U<^0(,VS(OV VOVCTWV. 



ev 



9» &gr,voi 8s xai Ta<pa; (y(pscjoVf sKn oclh* Toicn uv ciivoysvYi' 
Toil SK TOOV oiXYfioov ctvQgooTTOCy Tov Ti$ Koii Koyor r,j TO d>jAu ys- 



170 Ch. 51. 

disfiguring their heads and faces with dirt, leave the corpse in 
the house, and run publicly about, accompanied by their female 
relations, with their garments in disorder, their breasts exposed, 
and beating themselves severely : the men, on their parts, do the 
same, after which the body is carried to the embalmers. 



OF THE ANCIEI^T GET^. 



iO. Before Darius arrived at the Ister, he first of all subdued 
the Getae, a people who pretend to immortality. The Thra- 
cians of Salmydessus, and they who Uve above Apollonia, and 
the city of Mesambria, with those who are called Cyrminians, 
and Mypsaeans, submitted themselves to Darius without resist- 
ance. The Getae obstinately defended themselves, but were 
soon reduced ; these, of all the Thracians, are the bravest and 
the most upright. 

11, They believe themselves to be immortal; and whenever 
any one dies, they are of opinion that he is removed to the pre- 
sence of their God Zamolxis, whom some believe to be the same 
with Gebeleizes. Once in every five years, they choose one by 
lot, who is to be despatched as a messenger to Zamolxis, to 
make known to him their several wants. The ceremony they 
observe on this occasion is this : three amongst them are ap- 
pointed to hold in their hands three javelins, whilst others seize, 
by the feet and hands, the person who is appointed to appear 
before Zamolxis ; they throw him up, so as to make him fall 
upon the javelins. If he dies in consequence, they imagine that 
the deity is propitious to them ; if not, they accuse the victim 
of being a wicked man. Having disgraced him, the}" proceed 
to the election of another ; giving him, whilst yet alive, their 
commands. The same people, whenever it thunders or lightens, 
throw their weapons into the air, as if menacing their god; and 
they seriously beheve that there is no other deity. 



Ch.51. 171 

vog TTocv TO ex rcav ojxtjVcov tovtoov xcit cjdv eTrXacraro tyjv xspahifiv 

TTriXcO, TJ TCUl TO TTgOaODTrOV' KOLTTSirCt eV TOKTl OlXYHOKTl XlTtOlXTCH TOV 

vsxgov, otvTUi ccvoL r»jv TroAiV (rTgo^co[ji.sv<xi, tutttovtoh S7r6^oo(r[xevotr 
xa* <puivov(ron Tovg fji^a^ovs' <rvv Ss (r<pi ul 'Trgoa-viKoua-a.i 7roi(rcn, 
krsgaiQsv h ol av^gsg TVTTTOVToti, s'TTS^ooa-i^evoi kui ovTor sttschv h 
TccvTcx. TTOiYia-ooa-i ovTM sg T>]v Tagi^eu(riy 7io\j.i^ou(ri* 



10. TLqiV 5s OLTtiKBO'^OH STTl TOV IcTT^OV, TTgCtiTOVg OilgSSi VsTCCg 

Tovg uQuvccTi^ovTccg. 01 jxsv yoig 5>j tov ^aX/xuSyjcrcrov s^ovTsg 
&gYi'iKBS Kcii VTTsg AttoXAcovi)]? T£ xui Msa-eifxSgiYis 7:0X10$ oixyju^svoi, 
xotKsvixsvoi ds KvgiJi.iciya.if xon Mv^uioi, uja^oi^i^ti cr^saj avTOVg 
7rcigsh<ro(.v Accgsico, 01 Bs TsTai, irgos ccyvoofxoarvvriv Tgci7roiJ,svoi, 
avTiKo, eSouAttJ^yjcav, ©^ijVxcov sovTsg avhgsioTUTOi x«i ducuio' 

TOLTOl, 

11. AflavaTi^oucri Ss rovSs tov t^ottov outs otTcoQvria-xsiv 

SOOVTOVg VOfJ.l^OV(Tl, ISVOil TS TOV UTTOXXUfJ^SVOV 'TTOigU ZufXOX^iV 

Saijxova* ol 5s auTscov tov aUTOV toutov vo[j,i^ov<n Te^sXs'i^iv. Aiu 
7revTSTr)^i5oj 8s tov ttuXoo XayoyTO. aisj cripsoov ocutsoov UTroTrsfjiTroua-i 
ctyysXov Tragcn tov Z«ju<oX0*v, evTsXXoi^^svoi Ta)v uv kxaa-TOTS 

SsCOVTai. DsjU-TrOtXTJ 8s ciSs* Ot jXSV aUTSCOV TOt^QsVTSCy CtXOVTlCC 

TgioL £^ov(rr uXXoi h hiaXu^ovisg tov dTrowsfj^'Troi^evov Trotgoc tov 
ZctfjioX^iv Tccg X^igas J^a' Toyj 7ro8aj, ava.xivYi<rctvTs$ olvtov fjiSTs- 
oogov, pi'TTTSovo'i sj Taj Xoy/OL^^ Hv joosv 8)5 aTToQavr) uvoiTroigsK^ 

TOKTlds iXscog 6 ^SO^ SoXSSi g*Vai* TjV 8= ]X;j UTToQciVYj OLlTlOOVTCil OLVTOV 

TOV uyysXoVy (pa.[ji,evoi ^t.iv oLv'^ga xaxov sjvaj. AiTiYia-ctf^svoi 8s 
TOVTOv, uXXov aTTOTTSjXTroyo'i' svTsXXovTai 8s STi ^oovTi' ovTOi ol 
uvTOi ©griijisg xoti Trgog jS^ovTijv ts xat cto-T^aTrrjv TO^svovTsg avo) 

TTgOJ TOV OVgOLVOV, UTTSlXsOVOri TOO ^£0), OySsva aXXoV ^SOV VOl^l^OVTSS 

zivoLi Bi fj^r, TOV (r(psTsgQv. 



172 Ch. 51. 

12. This Zamolxis, as I have been informed by those Greeks 
who inhabit the Hellespont and the Euxine, was himself a man, 
and formerly lived at Samos in the service of Pythagoras, son 
of Menesarchus ; having obtained his liberty, with considerable 
wealth, he returned to his country. Here he found the Thra- 
cians distinguished equally by their profligacy ancb their igno- 
rance ; whilst he himself had been accustomed to the Ionian 
mode of life, and to manners more polished than those of 
Thrace ; he had also been connected with Pythagoras, one of 
the most celebrated philosophers of Greece. He was there- 
fore induced to build a large mansion, to which he invited the 
most eminent of his fellow-citizens : he took the opportunity of 
the festive hour to assure them, that neither himself, his guests, 
nor any of their descendants, should ever die, but should be 
removed to a place, where they were to remain in the perpetual 
enjoyment of every blessing. After saying this, and conducting 
himself accordingly, he constructed a subterranean edifice : 
when it was completed, he withdrew himself from the sight of 
his countrymen, and resided for three years beneath the earth. 
— During this period, the Thracians regretted his loss, and la- 
mented him as dead. In the fourth year, he again appeared 
amongst them, and by this artifice gave the appearance of pro- 
bability to what he had before asserted. 

13. To this story of the subterraneous apartment I do not 
give much credit, though I pretend not to dispute it ; I am, 
however, very certain that Zamolxis must have lived many 
years before Pythagoras : whether, therefore, he was a man, or 
the deity of the Getae, enough has been said concerning him. 
These Getae, using the ceremonies I have described, after sub- 
mitting themselves to the Persians under Darius, followed his 
army. 



Ch. 51, 173 

12. *X2j hs sya) itw^oLVO^ui Toiv rov 'EXX*)(r7rovTOV oixeov 
Tctiv *EAX>jvaJV xa< JJovtov, rov XotfJioK^iv tovtov sqvtcx, uv^goO' 
TTov, SoyXe'Jirat ev ^aju^w* ^ovXsva-ixi 8e nu^ayo^rj ro) Mvvjcra^- 
p^ou* ev&svTsv Ss ayrov ysvo[j.svov eXsvSegoVj ^grjfcoiTix y.Tr^(ra.(r^cii 
dxjyyoL' KTr\(7CiiJt,6VQV ds, otTTsXQeiv ei^ t>]v Icoutoo* are Se xaxo- 
^icov re sovToiv toov Sgr\iKoov xui VTroKppovsa'TsgctiV, rov ZajxoA^iv 

TOVTOV STTia-TOtfJi^eVOV dlOHTUV TS loihcK, XtXl f^^ZOL ^txQvTSpOt >) 

xara Sgi^'iKoig (ola *EXX>]o-i ts oy^iXYicruvru xai *EXA>jv«;v ou 

TOO cL(T^svs<rTa.T(jo (ro(pi(7TYi JJvQ otyogYi J xuTa(rx.evu<Ta.o-^(Xi uv^gsctiva, 
sg Tov TTUv^oxsvovTu Tcav acTToov Tovg 'TrgooTOvg, koh eyoop^sovra, 
uvctdidota-jcsiv 'jo$ ovts avTog ours ol (tv^ttotoli avTOV, ovts ol 
SK TOVTscov 0Lls^ yivofxsvoi wTToQavsovTcHj aXX' y)Jou(n sg X^9^^ 
TOVTOV tvu usi 'TTsgisovTsg 6^ov<ri Tu 'TTocvTo, uyotQoi' sv CO ds 

STTOISS TO. XOLTUKsyPsVTO.} XOlt sKsyS TOLVTUy sv TOVTCO KUTOL" 

yoLiOV 0iY.r\\hcL sttoissto' wg Ss ol 'KuvTsKsuig ei^s to oiKY^iLUy 
sjc [jisv TOOV ©^rjVxoJV rj(pavi(r9>) • xccTu^otg Se xutco sg to xara- 
yoLiov oixrjfji,Uf Siairaro stt' stso. Tgiw ol ds fj^iv siro^sov ts xai 
sTTsv^sov (hg Ts&vsooTci' TSTugToo h sTs'i s(^0Lvr^ TOKTi ^gyfiSh ^^* 
ovToo TTiQccvoc (T(^i sysvsTO TO, sksys 6 Za/xoXfij. TocvTU (pacrt 



13. Eyco h TTsgi /xev tovtov xoh tov xcnTciyaLxov oixYif/i^ciToe 
OVTS ctTnaTsoo, ours oov ttkttsuoo ti Airjv ^oxsoo 8e TtoKKoKTi sts- 
<ri itgoTsgov tov Za.[j.ok^iv tovtov ysvs<rQoci HvQuyogsoo' sirs Sg 
sysvsTO Tij ZaftoXfij uv&gooTrog, sjt so-tj luiiuoov Tig Tstyio-i ou- 
Toj STn^oogiog, '^aigsTOi' ootoi ju.sv Srjj TgoTrco toiovtco ^gsoo^ji^svoiy 
chg sxsigaiQri(roLV vir Aotgaiou x«* UsgcrsMV, sIttovto too ocXXoo 
arguToo- HcrodotUS. 



174 Ch. 51. 



THE FISHERMEN. 



V. 



14. Need, Diophantus, ready wit imparts, 
Is labour's mistress, and the nurse of arts ; 
Corroding cares the toiling wretch infest. 
And spoil the peaceful tenor of his breast : 
And if soft slumbers on his eye-lids creep, 
Some cursed care steals in, and murders sleep. 

Two ancient fishers in a straw-thatch'd shed, 
(Leaves were their walls, and sea-weed was their bed,) 
Reclined their weary limbs : hard by were laid 
Baskets, and all their implements of trade. 
Rods, hooks, and lines, composed of stout horse-hairs, 
And nets of various sorts, and various snares, 
The seine, the cast-net, and the wicker maze. 
To waste the watery tribes a thousand ways : 
A crazy boat was drawn upon a plank : 
Mats were their pillow, wove of osier dank ; 
Skins, caps, and rugged coats, a covering made : 
This was their wealth, their labour, and their trade. 
No pot to boil, no watch-dog to defend ; 
Yet blest they lived, with penury their friend. 
None visited their shed, save every tide. 
The wanton waves that wash'd its tottering side. 
When half her course the moon's bright car had sped, 
Joint labour roused the tenants of the shed ; 
The dews of slumber from their eyes they clear 'd, 
And thus their minds with pleasing parley cheer'd: — 

A. I hold, my friend, that trite opinion wrong. 
That summer nights are short when days are long. 
Yes — I have seen a thousand dreams to-night, 
And yet no morn appears, nor morning light ; 
Sure on my mind some strange illusions play, 
And make short nights wear heavily away. 

jB» Fair summer seasons you unjustly blame, 
Their bounds are equal, and their pace the same ; 



Cii. 51. 17,5 



DORIC. 

14. 'A TTsvidf Aio(pavTe, /x-ovce ras rs^votg eyeigsr 
AuTu TO) [uoy^^oiQ h'^aa-y.ciXoi' ouSs yuq sxjlsiv 
AvSgacriv egyarivajcri xaxa* '7^otgs^ovT^ ix^sgifji^von. 
Kav oXiyov vvhtos ris sin^oiva-Yp-i rov vttvoVj 
A«pviSiov ^ogu^sva-iv e<pi(TTCi^svon ^zXs^cjovoli, 
l^Qvog aygsuTrigeg 6fioo$ 8l»o xsivto ysgovTsg, 
'^T^cjoarufLSvoi ^gvov avov utto TrXsKTUis naXv^oticri, 
KexAjjxsvoi TOi^ca tco (puXXiVw* syyv&i ^ avTOiV 
KsjTO ra Tcx.iv ^etgoiv adA>jjxaT«, roi xaXaSicxoi, 
To* xoiXct(xoiy TaiyKKTTgoty rot, (^UKiosvTot ts Xrfiuy 10 

O^jxeiai, xo^TOi, xa* ex (t^oivcov Xa^vgiv&oif 
MrigivQoiy xcacig re, ysgcav 8* stt* egsjo'jxacn Asjx^oj. 
Ns^Oev raj xe<paAaj (pogfji^os ^goi^v§, elfiuTU, TriXoi, 
OvTOs Tong uXlsva^^v 6 Traj ttovoj oOtoj 6 TrAoyroj. 
OuScJj 5* ou p^UTgav eip^*, ou xuva* ttolvtu TregKrcuy 
ITavT sSoxsi T>)vaf uygus* ttsviu <r(piv huigoi, 
Ovhig 8* sv [j^s<r(rco ysiTMVy 'ttuvtcx. h Ttaq olvty^v 
QXi^oy^svoLV KuXvSuv rgv<psgov Trgoo'evoc^e ^uXoiO'G'oi. 
OuTTOi Tov (xecraTOV dgo(ji,ov awsv agiJi,ot oskavasj 
T0U5 8* uXisig viysigs (piXog ttovoj* sx ^Xe(pugcov 8s SO 

'Tttvov uiraxTuiJ.svoh crfperegajj (pgs(Tiv YjgsQov codoiv. 

A, ^£u8ovTai (piXs 7ravT£c 6(roi T«j vuxraj e(paa'}cov 
Too ^•sgso^ fuivv^siv, OTs Tui^UTU fj^uxgu (psgsi Zsuj' 
H8r) /x-u^i' s(r£i8ov ovgjgara, xouSsttco aa)$. 
Mrj XuQoiJt,viv ; Tt TO xgriiJ^cx. ; ^govov 8* ai vuxtsj s^ovti. 

B. A(r(paX«:<;v, jt^e/^^lJ to xaXov ^s^o^* ou yag 6 xaigo$ 
k(rTOtji.UTWs Trags^a tov eov dgofj^ov' aXXu tov xmvov. 



176 Ch. 51. 

But cares, Asphalion, In a busy throng, 

Break on your rest, and make the night seem long. 

A, Say, hast thou genius to interpret right 
My dream? I've had a jolly one to-night. 

Thou shalt go halves, and more thou canst not wish ; 
We'll share the vision as we share our fish : 
I know thee shrewd, expert of dreams to spell ; *^ 
He's the best judge who can conjecture well. 
We've leisure time, which can't be better spent, 
By wretched carles in wave-wash'd cabin pent, 
And lodg'd on leaves ; yet why should we repine, 
While living lights in Prytaneum shine ? 

B. To thy fast friend each circumstance recite, 
And let me hear this vision of the night. 

A. Last evening, weary with the toils of day, 
Lull'd in the lap of rest secure I lay ; 
Eull late we supp'd, and sparmgly we ate ; 
No danger of a surfeit from our meat. 
Methought I sat upon a shelfy steep, 
And watch 'd the fish that gambol'd in the deep ; 
Suspended by my rod, I gently shook 
The bait fallacious, which a huge one took ; 
(Sleeping, we image what awake we wish ; 
Dogs dream of bones, and fishermen of fish.) 
Bent was my rod, and from his gills the blood 
With crimson stream distain'd the silver flood. 
I stretch'd my arm out, lest the line should break ; 
The fish so vigorous, and my hook so weak ! 
Anxious I gazed ; he struggled to be gone ; 
" You're wounded — I'll be with you, friend, anon — 
" Still do you teaze me ?" for he plagued me sore ; 
At last, quite spent, I drew him safe on shore. 
Then grasp'd him with my hand, for surer hold, 
A jioble prize, a fish of solid gold ! 
But fears suspicious in my bosom throng'd, 
Lest to the god of ocean he belong'd ; 



Ch. 51. 177 

A (pgovTig KOTTTOicrct, (xctxgotv ruv vvxra. ttoisi tiv. 

A. Ap SjU-a^cf xgivsiv ttox svuirviw, %^>jo"Ta yoiq si^qv, 
Ov ere 3'eXa; TOiy^oi (poivraa-fXctTog r}[Jt'SV oi[jt,Oigov* 30 

'X2j xcti Tixv uygav, TCOvsiguTot 'ttuvto. p^spilsv, 
Ov yuq vixa^Yj kcxtol tov vogv' ovTog agia-rog 
EcTTiv ovsigoKgiTotg, 6 ^i^uorxaXog e(TTi irag 00 vovc. 
AWoog xon (t^oXy} earr ri yag ttoisiv av s^oi tjj 
Keif^svog ev <pvk\oig ttotj kv^uti, jU.yjSs Ku^su^oiv 

A<T[Jl,£VOC SV pO-lJiVCpy TO^sXv^ViOV SV TTgVTUVSKti, 

^ctVTi yag otisv uygoiv ro^ s^siv, B. Asys ju,o» ttote vuxtoj 
OvI/<y, TTOLVTcc rsco h Ksycov [jiY}VU(rov krongco, 

A . AeiXivoy dig KotTslcigSov sv svuXiokti 'ttovoictiv, 
Oux jjv ju-av TToXvo-iTOC' (ettsi dsiTrnuvTsg sv (hga., 4>0 

El fJisiJi^vrij Tccg ycKTTgog e^psj^o/xsd') sitov e/jtauTOV 
Ev TTSTgoL ixsf^oLcorof xafis^OjtJtevof 8s Soxeyov 
Ip^^uaj, £x KoiXotixcov 8e ttXoivov ■x.cnsa'siov eScoSav. 
Kai T<^ Tcov T^atpe^cuv oigs^aro' x.oii yug ev vTTVOig 
Ylaa-a. xucuv agjoog {xuvTevsTixi' i^Qifoc XYiyctiv* 
Xco ju-sv TUiyxiG'Tgco 7rors(pvsTO, y.ai psev ctlfj^x* 
Tov xccXafxov S* VTTO Tou xivYi[xcx.rog ocyKvXov si^ov. 
Too %£'^= Tsivofjisvog, TTSQt xvwSaXov svgov ocyctivoc, 
Tloog jxsv sXco [xsyav i^Qvv txi^oivgoregoicri (n^ugotg* 
EiS' \j7:oi^i^voL(TXuiv TOi TgotU[j,o(.Tog, ag s^ji^s vv^sig, 50 

Kai yy^yj ^ctXsTruic' y,ai ou (pevyovTog btsivu. 
Hvoo"* iScov TOV usQXov avYiXxva-a. ^gua-zov i^Qvv 
YloLvra. TM Xguo"a; TrsTryxacjaevov* £j;^e 8c 8s//*a 
M>) Ti ITocsiSawy* TrsXoi 7rs<TnXu[j,svog i^^vg- 



17S Ch. 51, 

Or, haply wandering in the azure main, 

Some favourite fish of Amphitrite's train. 

My prize I loosed, and strictest caution took, 

For fear some gold might stick about the hook ; 

Then safe secured him, and devoutly swore 

Never to venture on the ocean more ; 

But live on land as happy as a king. ^ 

At this I waked: what think you of the thing? 

Speak free, for know I am extremely loth, 

And greatly fear to violate my oath. 

B, Fear not, old friend ; you took no oath, for why ? 
You took no fish — your vision's all a lie. 
Go search the shoals, not sleeping, but awake, 
Hunger will soon discover your mistake : 
Catch real fish ; you need not sure be told 
Those fools must starve who only dream of gold. 



CYCLOPS AND THE SEA-NYMPH. 

15. No remedy the power of love subdues ; 
No medicine, dearest Nicias, but the muse : 
This plain prescription gratifies the mind 

With sweet complacence but how hard to find ! 

This well you know, who first in physic shine. 
And are the loved familiar of the nine. 

Thus the famed Cyclops, Polypheme, when young, 
Calm'd his fond passion with the power of song ; 
When blooming years imbibed the soft desire, 
And Galatea kindled amorous fire. 
He gave no wreaths of roses to the fair, 
Nor apples, nor sweet parsley for her hair: 
Love did the tenor of his mind control. 
And took the whole possession of his soul. 
His flocks untended oft refused to feed, 
And for the fold forsook the grassy mead ; 
While on the sedgy shore he lay reclined. 
And soothed with song the anguish of his mind. 



Ch. .51. 179 

H Tciya. Tocs yKuvKus xsti^ri^m Afi^iTgiTYjg, 

H^e^a §* avTOV syoo ex rcoyxio-r^co wjrsXva-ocj 

M>j TTore TM a-TOfxaTOs r wyxKTrgiu ^gv(rov s^oisv. 

Koti TQV ftsv 'jretoTTYiga-i xaTviyov stt YiTretgo^o. 

^[/,0(roc 8* ouxsTi KoiTtov UTrsg TrsXuyovs ''^o^oi ^simi, 

Ax\u ij,sv6iv STTt yac, xai tcjd x^"^^^ (^ua-iXsueiv. QQ 

TctvTot ^£ xu^viysigs. Tv ^ co ^eve KoiTtov sgeih 

Tav ymf/,ccv' opuov yctg gyco tov s%(ai/.o<Tu rug^cu, 

B. Kai a-v ys [/,yi Tgso-a-Yjs' ovx, (aiL0<7cts' oulz yctg i^Qui^ 
Xgva-sov eiBsg >j sugss' icrai h 4/£vh(nv o^l/sig. 
E< 8' VTTccg, Qu xma-G-cov tv to, ^Wfia Toiura fj^uisvasic^ 
EAttij tmv VTrvoov ^otrsi tov (ragxivov i^Quv 
Mvj (Tu ^uvYis KijLcti xuiTOt p^^U(roi(r<v ovsigoi:. 



J 5. Oudsv TTOTTOV sgMTu TTsi^vxsi (poig(A,oixov olKKq, 
Nixia, OUT zyyjgidTOV, sfjiiv ^oxsi, ovt s7r<7racrTOV, 
H Tcit Uisgi^sg' xov(pov h ti tovto xoli aSu 
FivsT sir avQgcoTTOis' eugviv 8* ov pxliov eo-Ti. 
Tivaxrxey V oiiLui tv xaXoog, locTgov sovto., 
Kai raij evvea 8») TrstpiXafA^evov e^o^a [jLOKraig. 
OuTw youv ^oCiaTOL huy 6 KvxXoo^ 6 ^ug rifxiv, 
'Q,gXoiios IIoAwtpa^Of, ox' YiguTO Tug TotXoiTsiag, 
AgTi ysveict(rda)V Trsgi to oroju-a TOig xgoTa(poog re* 
H^«TO ^ovTi podoig, ov [xotXoig, ovh xixivoi^, 10 

AAX oXoocig fx,civicng' otysiTO 8= ttuvto. Trotospyu. 
UoKKaxi TOii o'isg ttoti t uuXiov avTUi uttyivSov* 
XXuigag sx fioTumg' 6 8e tocv TaXaTtiuv ae<8a)V, 
Ayrco STT* ciiovog xutstocxsto 0uxiosa-(Tag 



N 2 



ISO Cii.51 

From morn to night he pined, for love's keen dart 
Had pierced the deep recesses of his heart : 
Yet, yet a cure he found ; for on a steep, 
Rough, pointed rock, that overlook'd the deep, 
And with brown horror high impending hung, 
The giant monster sat, and thus he sung : — 

" Fair nymph ! why will you thus my passion slight^ 
Softer than lambs you seem, than curds more white, 
Wanton as calves before the udder'd kine, 
Harsh as the unripe fruitage of the vine. 
You come when pleasing sleep has closed mine eye, 
And like a vision with my slumbers fly. 
Swift as before the wolf the lambkin bounds. 
Panting and trembling, o'er the furrow'd grounds. 
Then first I loved, and thence I date my flame, 
Wlien here to gather hyacinths you came ; 
My mother brought you — 'twas a fatal day ; 
And I, alas I unwary, led the way. 
E'er since, my tortured mind has known no rest ; 
Peace is become a stranger to my breast ; . 
Yet you nor pity nor relieve my pain — 
Yes, yes, I know the cause of your disdain ; 
For, stretch'd from ear to ear with shagged grace, 
My single brow adds horror to my face ; 
My single eye enormous lids enclose, 
And o'er my blubber'd lips projects my nose. 
Yet, homely as I am, large flocks I keep, 
And drain the udders of a thousand sheep ; 
My pails with milk, my shelves with cheese they fill, 
In summer scorching, and in winter chill. 
The vocal pipe I tune -svith pleasing glee ; 
No other Cyclops can compare with me : 
Your charms I sing, sweet apple of delight ! 
Myself and you I sing the livelong night. 
For you ten fawns, with collars deck'd, I feed. 
And four young bears for your diversion breed : 
Come live with me ; all these you may command, 
And change your azure ocean for the land. 



Ch.51. 181 

KvTcgio^ ex (j^syaXas, to o» vJTrar* Tra^e ^zKb[j^vov» 
AAAa TO <pcig(x,uxov eugs* xoi&s^O(jt,svog S' stti Trsrgx^ 

12 Aei»x« FaXaTgia, t» tov (^iXsovt aTro^aAXvj; 

AsUXOTSgOi TTdXTOig TTOT/SeJV, aTTOiKooTsgot, 8* agvof, 20 

Mocrp^co yoLvporsgoL, (piotgcoTsgu 0[Ji(paK0^ Mjxocg. 

^oiTYii S* ai»S' ouTWj oxxa yKujiu§ vnvog ep^rjjxs, 

0<%>3 8* syfiuf ioicroi, ohxx yKvxv^ VTrvog oivyi [jt,=. 

^cvy-ig 8' wa-TTsg oig ttoXiov Kukov aQgriG-oio-cc. 

H^acr^yjv |W.ev syooye xogct rev, avixcc Ttgarov 

Hv^cj 2jxa (Tuv (J^ccrgi, ^sXoia uoixivQiva (puKXa 

E0 o^=oj S^cvJ/ao-Oaj* eyoo 8' c8ov YjysfjLOvsvQv. 

YlauTCKT^ai 8' e(n8cuv ti* xa< mrcpov ouZsrt ttw vuv 

Ex T>jva; ^uyix[jioHj nv 8* oy /x=A=< ou fji.cc Aj' ou§=v. 

TlVM(TK(JO '^0LgiS(T(7a, XOpOl TiVOg OVVzKO. (^s'jysic 30 

OvVsXOi JXOJ KoLdia flSV 0(pgU§ STTI TTUVTI fXSTCOTfOO 

E^ ooTog TETUTai TTOTi ^c/jTsgov cti^, [/,ici fxuxgu, 

FjU 8* 0<pQxX[/.Og STTSCTTi' TTAUTSlCt ds plC SXi ^StX?l» 

AAA' OJUTO^ roiovros ecuv^ /3ot« %<Aia /Socrxco, 

Kr)x TOUToov TO xguTKTTOv a/jtsAyojw-svov yaAa Trivto* 

Tvgos 8* oy Ksiirsi jOt*, out* ev -^e^si, out* sv oizcjogri^ 

Ou p^eijxojvoj axgw* Tcnga-oi 8' xjmgoLy^zzg aiei. 

^ugiO"8ev 8* cwj ouTij sTTicTTa/x-aj cuSs KuxAcoTTcoy^ 

Tjv, to <piAov yXvxv y.a.\0Vy aijt,a. XYjiJiuuTOV asi^cav, 

IToAAaxj wxTOg ixoogr Tgs<poi 8s to* Iv8sxa vs^gaog 40 

UoKTot; fLCiVVO(pogoos, xai (rxvfxvoog rs(T(rugo(.c agxroov, 

AAA* ci(piK£V TV TTOT ay,[/.s, xai k^sig ouhv sKoLcraov 

Tav yXoLvxoiv 8s ^ctXuiKrotv eu ttot* -^zgtrov ogs^Sstv, 



N 3 



182 Ch.5L 

More pleasing slumbers will my cave bestow; 

There spiry cypress and green laurels grow ; 

There round my trees the sable ivy twines, 

And grapes, as sweet as honey, load my vines : 

From grove-crown'd ^tna, robed in purest snow, 

Cool springs roll nectar to the swains below. V 

Say, who would quit such peaceful scenes as these> 

For blustering billows and tempestuous seas? 

Tliough my rough form's no object of desire. 

My oaks supply me with abundant fire ; 

My hearth unceasing blazes — though I swear 

By this one eye, to me for ever dear. 

Well might that fire to warm my breast suflSce, 

That kindled at the lightning of your eyes. 

Had I, like fish, with fins and gills been made, 

Then might I in your element have play'd. 

With ease have dived beneath your azure tide. 

And kiss'd your hand though you your lips denied ; 

Brought lillies fair, or poppies red that grow 

In summers solstice, or in winter's snow. 

These flowers I could not both together bear. 

That bloom'd in different seasons of the year. 

Well, I'm resolved, fair nymph, I'll learn to dive. 

If e'er a sailor at this port arrive ; 

Then shall I surely by experience know 

What pleasures charm you in the depths below. 

Emerge, O Galatea ! from the sea, 

And here forget your native home like mc. 

O would you feed my flock and milk my ewes. 

And ere you press my cheese, the runnet sharp infuse .— 

My mother is my only foe, I fear ; 

She never whispers soft things in your ear, 

Attho' she knows my grief, and every day 

Sees how I languish, pine, and waste away. 

I, to alarm her, will aloud complain, 

And more disorders than I suffer feign ; 

Say my head aches, sharp pains my limbs oppress, 

That she may feel and pity my distress. 

Ah Cyclops, Cyclops ! where's your reason fled ? 

If with the leafy spray your lambs you fed, 



Ch. r,!. 183 

W^jiov £V TwvTgco Trap* sfnv tolv vvkto, 8»afeij* 

EvTt i^bKol^ xKT<ros, evT afXTTsKog u yKvavxapTTOg* 

EvTi vI/y%§ov wSco^, TO fxoi a TroKvdsvhgsos Aitvoc 

AsuKotg £K x^^^°^> TTOTOV a^^qo(nov, TTgoiriTi. 

Tis xev TcovSe ^aXa(r(rav ep^eiV )} ycrj^oi,^^ IAojto; 

A» Se TOi auTOj iyui Boxsco Xacncorggoj >3iW'e?3 50 

EvTi B^uoj ^uAa jocoi, xaj utto (TTrodco axu[jt,ciTOV Trug" 

KoiiO[^svog S* OTTO T6U xai rav ^^y%av ave^oii/.uv, 

KoLi Tov ev 0(pQu\[Ji>0Vj TOO i^oi yKuxsgeoTsgov ovhv. 

X2 jxoi or ODX erexsv ]u»* a [/.UTYig ^pot-yyx syovroL, 

'Q,S xareSov ttotj t»v, xa» rav X^^a tsu n^iKoLtra, 

Ai |x>j TO crro\i^oL Xt]$* s(psgov 5s to* rj x§<va Xsvxu, 

H fxaxcav uTTOtXav, sgvSgu TrXaTaywv/ syoia-uy 

AKKol Tct fJLSV ^sgeog, roc Se yiVSTa* ev ^eifji^cavi* 

'Qj(TT ovx uv TOI TotuTcc (psgsiv ufji.cc TTCCVT eSyvaffflrjV, 

Nuv jitav CO xogiOVj vvv ocvtoQi vsiv ye fj^uQsvfLoct, OO 

Atxa Ti^ (Tuv vaV TrXewv ^evo$ coS* a(pix>jTai, 

'12$ xev iSco Ti 7ro6' aSu xaTOixsiv tov ^u&ov Ufitftiv. 

E^evOo<$,raXaTe<a, xai s^svQoia-oc Kcc^oio, 

'Ha-TTsg syco vuv whs xccQYifji,svog, OixaS* a'Trev^siv. 

no*/xa<veJV 8' sSeXoig (tvv s^liv ufLcc, xoli ycc\* ufuzKysiv, 

Kai TUgOV TTOL^OLl, TajXKTOV hgi[Jt,£lOCV SVSKTU, 

'A [j^ctTYig ahxs^ ju-s jU,ova, xai jxejX(pOjxai aoTa. 

OySev Tra tto^^' oXwj tioti tiv (piXov eiTrev utts^ jtteu, 

Ka< TCiVT, ocfLug stt u(jt,(xg ogstxroc jooe Ksitrov eovroc, 

^oc(roo TOLV xs(pix\ccv xui Too$ 'TTohug uy^^OTegctig [isu 'JO 

%(^V(rhiV) wg ayia^^ bttsi xi^ycov avicojxa*. 

O KvxKcti^, KuxAcotJ/, ttoc rug fpevag exTreTTOTaff-ai J 



N 4? 



184 Ch.51. 



Or ev'n wove baskets, you would seem more wise ; 
Milk the first cow, pursue not her that flies ; 
You'll soon, since Galatea proves unkind, 
A sweeter, fairer Galatea find. 



ODE. 

16. More happy than the gods is he 
Who, soft reclining, sits by thee ; 
His ears thy pleasing talk beguiles. 
His eyes thy sweetly dimpled smiles. 
This, this, alas ! alarm'd my breast. 
And robb'd me of my golden rest : 
While gazing on thy charms I hung, 
My voice died faltering on my tongue. 
With subtle flames my bosom glows. 
Quick through each vein the poison flows 
Dark dimming mists my eyes surround. 
My ears with hollow murmurs sound. 
My limbs with dewy chillness freeze. 
On my whole frame pale tremblings seize 
And losing colour, sense, and breath, 
I seem quite languishing to death. 



ANDROMACHE DISSUADING HECTOR FROM BATTLE. 

17. Too daring prince ! ah, whither dost thou run? 
Ah ! too neglectful of thy wife and son ; 
And thinks't thou not how wretched w^e shall be, 
A widow I, a helpless orphan he ? 
For sure such courage length of Hfe denies. 
And thou must fall thy virtue's sacrifice. 
Greece in her single heroes strove in vain. 
Now hosts oppose thee, and thou must be slain. 
O grant me, gods ! ere Hector meets his doom, 
All I can ask of heaven, an earlv tomb ! 



Ch. 51. 185 

Tccv TTagsoKTCiV uf/^sKys' ti tov (p^vyovTu Bjojxejj; 
Eug>)(reij TuKoLTSiuv KToog jcch kxXKiov aWuv, Theocr. 



iEOLIC. 

16. 't>OHVSTCtl (XOi KYIVOC KTOg ^50J(7»V 
EjOt/XSv' iU'VYig, CCTTIJ evavTioj to< 
'la-8avs<, xa< ttXcco-iov aSy (poovsv- 

Ka» ysXciig 8' Ijtcsgosv ro jU,o* /xav 

Ka^Siav ey <rT»]9s(r»y s%ro<x(Tev, 

ils yciq e«5«; ere, /S^op^ecoj |ots (pcovag 

Ovhv &9' »x£j. 
AXXa xotfL(ji6v yXot)(r(r soiys, ay 8s Astttov 

AuT/x«p^^«; TTU^ uTToSsS^OjOtaxsy 10 

07r7raT5(r(r»y 8* ou8<:V ogrjfM, /Soja^euj' 

£y S* a;coai |aoi, 
Ka88' IS^wf \l/iip(;^^o$ p^£=Tai, rgoiJiog 8s 
Ylacrav oiygsi, ^Koogorega 8s Trojaj 
EjU^jCti* TsSvuKi^v 8' oAjyco '7n8ey(ra 

<i>ajvo|xa» cnivous* SappllO. 



THE LANGUAGE OF HOMER. 

17. AaifJLovis, (pQiGsi <T£ TO (TOV [J^svoc, ouS* sXsoiigsi^ 
rrai8a re vyittiu^ov, xixi si^ aiiiLogov, ^ Tap(;a p(;>j^>) 
2sy s(rofLcx.r Ta^cc yug 8s xaraxraysoycriy A^onoi, 
TJccvTsg s(popi^r}Q£VTsg' sjxoj 8s xs xsg8<oy soj 
^gy a(pa/xa^Toy(7-») p^5ova 8yjX?var oy ya^ st «AA)j 



186 Ch.51, 

So shall my days in one sad tenor run, 

And end with sorrows as they first begun. 

No parent now remains my grief to share, 

No father's aid, no mother's tender care. 

The fierce Achilles wrapt our walls in fire ! 

Laid Thebe waste, and slew my warlike sire. V 

His fate compassion in the victor bred, 

Stern as he was, he yet revered the dead ; 

His radiant arms preserved from hostile spoil. 

And laid him decent on the funeral pile ; 

Then raised a mountain'where his bones were burn'd 

The mountain nymphs the rural tomb adorn'd, 

Jove's sylvan daughters bade their elms bestow 

A barren shade, and in his honour grow. 

By the same arm my seven brave brothers fell ; 
In one sad day beheld the gates of hell : 
Wliile the fat herds and snowy flocks they fed ; 
Amid their fields the hapless heroes bled ! 
My mother lived to bear the victor's bands, 
Tlie queen of Hypoplacia's sylvan lands : 
Redeemed too late, she scarce beheld again 
Her pleasing empire, and her native plain, 
When, ah ! opprest by life -consuming woe, 
She fell a victim to Diana's bow. 

Yet, while my Hector still survives, I see 
My father, mother, brethren, all, in thee : 
Alas ! my parents, brothers, kindred, all. 
Once more will perish, if my Hector fall. 
Thy wife, thy infant, in thy danger share : 
Oh prove a husband's and a father's care ! 
That quarter most the skilful Greeks annoy, 
"Wliere yon wild fig-tree joins the walls of Troy : 
Thou from this tower defend th' important post; 
There Agamemnon points his dreadful host. 
That pass Tydides, Ajax, strive to gain, 
And there the vengeful Spartan fires his train. 
Thrice our bold foes the fierce attack have given, 
Or led by hopes, or dictated from Heaven. 



Ch. 51. 187 

Eo-rai ^uXfTcagi^j sttsi oiv (Tuys ttotjxov S7ri(r7r*)j, 

AXX' a%s** ouh ij.01 sa-Ti Trarnq xa* ttotvicx, j«,>jT))g<» 

Hroi yuq TTccTsq a[ji,ov aTrsxTotvs ^log A^iXKsvg, 

Ex h TToKiv ireqarsv KiXixoov ev vctisToccaa-uVf 

^rj^YjV vifiTTvXov' yiUTOL 8* sxTavev Hsricova, 10 

Ouds [XIV e^svugi^s' (rs^ot<T<ruTO yctg Toys ^V[/.a/ 

AXX' agoL fjLiv kutskyjs (tvv svtsg-i ^ui^uKsoktiv, 

H8' S7^^ (r>)|x' s^ssv* Trsgi h tttsXsois s(pVTeu(rctv 

Nu/jt(pai O^scTTiaSej, xovgon Aiog ociyio^oio. 

01 de fji.01 STTTU xoi<nyvY}Toi s<Tav sv [jisyotgoiaiv, 

01 ftsv TTUVTsg ICO xiov yjjxaTi a'idog sktod' 

YlocvTocg yotg xars'TTSi^vs 7rodtxg)CYi§ dio$ A^iXKsug, 

Boucnv s'TT elXi7ro^s<r<n xai a.gysvvYj§ o'is(r(ri. 

MfjTsgtx d\ Y} ^oc<TiXsvev 'TTTOTrXuaco uX*}£(ro->7, 

Tr)V STTsi (xg hug* Yiyay u[x aXKoKri }CTS(XTS(r<Tiv ^0 

A^ OyS TYIV OLTTSXUdey XCC^CJOV UTtigSKjC COTOiVCt' 

HoLTgog S* ev [xsyagoKTij /3aX* AprsiJiiSj lo^songu. 

'ExTog, oiTctg (tu [loi s(r<n iroLTY^g xai ttotvicc jW.>)T)]g, 

H5e x«(riyvyjT0^5 oru ds y^oi ^aXsgog TraguxoiTi^g. 

AXX' ays vvv sXsocigs, xon avTOV ju-ijtcv* stti '^rvgyco, 

M>j TraiS' og(pcivixov ^siYjg, p^vj^yjv ts yuvcuxcf 

Aaov Ss (TTYia-ov -KOLg sgivsoVy sv^u [xuXkttcc 

A(ji^(XTO§ sa-Tt TToXig, xcti eirihgofji^ov sttXsto rsi^og' 

Tgig yag tyj y sXQovrsg sirsigY^crciV^* o\ ctgi(TTOif 

Afjiip* Akxvts dvM, xai ayaxXvTOV I5oftev>ja, 30 

IIS' oiix<f Argsi^ci^f xon TuSsoj otXxii^ov viov. 



188 Ch. .n 



Let others in the field their arms employ, 
But stay my Hector here, and guard his Troy. 



^ 



18. But springing back, he stood before his horses and chariot. 
He depending on his beauty. 
From Erebus the cruel fury heard. 
Dardanian Priam, in counsel equal to the gods. 
To boast to vanquish me with mighty force. 
With tears his eyes were filled. 

The hunter wounded him, when springing from his den. 
He fights assisted by the gods. 
To the splendid walls of Troy. 

Observing when the Grecians would rush from the ships. 
He sent another arrow from the string. 



19. This, thou knowest, I led, a bee, they would be, having 
known, I sung, of a king, I have come, thou shalt see, he would 
strike, now, I was able, I have received, I have seen, having 
lost. 

20. To whomsoever, of a hare, it has been decreed, of a 
serpent, more, to-day, to take courage, this, I have assembled, 
let them strike, I would love, with, a sea, he would enrich. 



21. Being, beseemed, of myself, of muses, to words, we will 
strike, thou strikest thyself, of death, they have been loved, 
to place, an army, himself or herself, of these, them, holy, for 
to them. 



Ch. 51. 189 

Httou Tig (r<piv evktits ^soTrgoTTicov eu stScoc, 
H vu xui uvTMV ^y/xoj sTTOTgvvsi xa< avMyei. 



THE IONIC PARAGOGE OF (p» AND ^JV. 
18. AAX* ava^co^yjcraj 7rgo(r&' I'ttttouv xoh oyz<T(^\v ea-rri. 

'O 5' ayXuiYlipi TTSTTOl^OOS' 



Ey%s(r9at £]X= viXYiTcci xqaTzqi^<pi jSiri^j. 

Tov T £0 euv>3^t ^oqovTa, 3>3gr)T>3^ erup^vjo-e /BaXcov. 

Kara \Kio<^iv xXura T£t;^£a. 

Aeyjut-svoj ottttots v<xv(^iv oti^ogixYi^sisv Ay^aioi, 
AAAov o'jVtov cvtto v£Ugvj<piv laAAfiV. HoiH. 



COMMON GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO ATTIC. 

19* OuTOj, oidag, >3yov^ iJt,£\i(r(7Ci, siYiaccV) £<S>)xco;, £\[/aAa, 
^acriXeoc, ijAuSa, ov|/>j, ruvj/ai, vuv^ eluva[jt.riV) XsKi^foCy wguKa. 
cfjKcog. 

^0. Xllrivi, Auycjoou, i^sy^aqTui, o<^iog, "ttXeiooVj (TYUJ^sgoVj 
^agosiv, Tovrov, rjys^xa, Tv^ciTa)(Toiv, <p*Ao<jx», auv, •&«Aao'cr«, 
TrAoyro/. 



COMMON GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO IONIC. 

21. Ovaa, s^oKsi, sfAavTOV, /xoucrwv, Aoyoij, tvjtoviisv, tutt- 

Twv, o-{paf, j£^oc, IvExa, cr<pi(n. 



190 Ch. 5^2. 

22. Of thee, a brother, a contest, a wonder, self, easy, truth, 
of a king, how, they were struck, they would strike themselves, 
they have been struck. 



25. Fame, to whistle, he, I came, to be, they say, twenty, 
greatness, heaven, to strike, sweet, to, thou shalt receive, flesh, 
a shepherd, thine. 

24. Of nymphs, having sat down, I, to words, laughing, they 
toil, of youth, muses, a song, they laugh, when, foremost, 
where, being, we have died, I will go, of rae, moon. 



CHAP. LII. 



PRIAM BEGGING THE BODY OF HECTOR FROM 
ACHILLES. 



1. Ah think, thou favour'd of the powers divine ! 
Think of thy father's age, and pity mine ! 
In me, that father's reverend image trace. 
Those silver hairs, that venerable face ; 
His trembling limbs, his helpless person, see ! 
In all my equal, but in misery ! 
Yet now, perhaps, some turn of human fate 
Expels him helpless from his peaceful state ; 
Think, from some powerful foe thou see'st him fly, 
And beg protection with a feeble cry. 



Ch. 5^. 191 

22. 'Sou, a8eX(poj, oc^Xoc, ^uufjioi, avTOs, padiog, aAt]0=*av, 

^OL(TIKSOS, TrW$, STUTTTOVTO, TVTTTOIVTO, TSTUjXagVOJ SKTl. 



COMMON GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO DORIC. 



23. 4>)]jx>j, (Tvgi^^siVf sxeivo?, yjX^ov, eivai, (pci<n, eixo(ri, 
jotsyeflo^j ovgotvos, ruTrrsiv, yfivj tt^oj, (TV >^ri^ri, xgeug, iroi- 

[XYIV, (TOV. 

^Yjg, [j,Qua-on, oj8>j, ysXaxn, ttote, TrgooTKTTOS, td;, ovt«, reOvyjxa- 



CHAP. LII. 



HEXAMETER VERSE REDUCED TO PROSAIC ORDER, TO BE 
RETURNED INTO METRE. 



1. MNH^AI <rsio Trotrgog, A;<^iXXsu sttisiksX* ^soigy 
TijAixoy, dxTTCsg eyooVf siti oXoco ovhco yy^gaog, 
Ka/ Trot) ]xsv irsgivuiSTon xsivov aftipif sovTsg 
Tsigova-'y ouSs eoTJV t*?, oliuxjvoli Xoiyov xoti agyiv 
AaV xejvof ys rjroi, axovcov^ as^ev ^csovTog 
Ev ^UjttM ^otigsi, r sXttstui stti ttoivtu t ^ju-ara 



192 Ch. 5'L 



Yet still one comfort in his soul may rise ; 
He hears his son still lives to glad his eyes ; 
And, hearing, still may hope a better day 
May send him thee, to chase that foe away. 
No comfort to my griefs, no hopes, remain : 
The best, the bravest, of my sons is slain ! 
Yet what a race ! ere Greece to Ilion came, 
The pledge of many a loved and loving dame ! 
Nineteen one mother bore —Dead, all are dead ! 
How oft, alas ! has wretched Priam bled ! 
Still one was left, their loss to recompense ; 
His father's hope, his country's last defence. 
Him too, thy rage has slain ! beneath thy steel, 
Unhappy, in his country's cause he fell ! 

For him, through hostile camps I bend my way, 
For him, thus prostrate at thy feet I lay ; 
Large gifts proportion'd to thy wrath I bear ; 
O hear the wretched and the gods revere ! 

Think of thy father and this face behold ! 
See him in me, as helpless and as old ! 
Though not so wretched, there he yields to me. 
The first of men in sovereign misery ! 
Thus forced to kneel, thus groveling to embrace 
The scourge and ruin of my realm and race ; 
Suppliant my children's murderer to implore. 
And kiss those hands yet reeking witli their gore. 



THE HONEY-STEALER. 



2. As Cupid, the sliest young wanton alive. 
Of its hoard of sweet honey was robbing a hive, 
The sentinel bee buzz'd with anger and grief, 
And darted his sting in the hand of the thief. 
He sobb'd, blew his fingers, stamp'd hard on the ground, 
And, leaping in anguish, show'd Venus the wound ; 
Then began in a sorrowful tone to complain. 
That an insect so little should cause so great pain. 



1 



Ch. 5^^. 193 

AvTug TravaTTOTjOuoj syM^ sttsi ocgiarovg vlag tsjcov 

Ev su^siYj T^oir), 8* 0VT^vcc toov AeA=»<p9a* (p>)|x<. 

H(rav ftot TTsvTTjxovra, or ulej A^uioov rjXu^ov 10 

Evv=axai§exa jao< jctsv rjo-av, ex n^g vvj^uof, 

Touj 8* aKXovs yuvciixsg stiktov [jiot svi y^syctqoidi, 

Tcov U.SV Apyjj ^owgoj utto eXvcrev ttoKXoov yovvotT' 

'Oj 8s olog f/.oi £'<]V, §£ e<|ii»TO okttv xat awrouf, 

TOV (TU KTSlVUg TrpoOYjV, aiJt,UVOfJt.SVOV TTUTgYig TTsgi, 

'EnTogcf slve^ tqu vvv Ikocvsi Ap^aiwv v>3«c, 
YiaqoL G-Bio XvcofJisvos, <psgca 8' uTcsqzia-i UTTOiva. 
AAX* ^sovg aihiOy uvtov t eXs>j(rov, A^iXsv, 

2o0 fJiVYl(TOt[J,SV0§ TTOLTDO^' syo) 8* sXsSlVOT£gO$ "KSq^ 

ErXyjv 8', Oi' tij outtw aAXo^ eTtix^oviog figoTog, 20 



DORIC. 



2. Tov EgcoTcc ttot ^Xstttuv xaxa. [ji.sXKr(roc xsvTctaSy 
"^vXsvixsvov XY]giov sk cn[ji,§XMV' axgu 8s ^sipcov 
AotxTuXa VTTsvsv^sv TTOiv^'* 6 8* aXyss, Tcai e(pu<r(rYi yzg 

Tav o8uvav 8sjj£V, xa* fMsi^i^sTO OTTiys tvtQov 
Qvigiov |U,£X<(7cra evTh J^^' uXiksx. Troifi rpuuiJioiToi* 



194 Ch. 5e. 

Venus, smiling her son in such taking to see, 

Said, " Cupid, you put me in mind of a bee ; 

You're just such a busy, diminutive thing, 

Yet you make woeful wounds with a desperate sting." 



BATTLE. 

3. Forth from the portals rush th' intrepid pair. 
Opposed their breasts, and stood themselves the war. 
So two wild boars spring furious from their den. 
Roused with the cries of dogs and voice of men ; 
On every side the crackling trees they tear. 
And root the shrubs and lay the forest bare ; 
They gnash their tusks, with fire their eye-balls roll. 
Till some wide wound lets out their mighty soul. 
Around their heads the whistling javelins sung, 
With sounding strokes their brazen targets rung ; 
Fierce was the fight, while yet the Grecian powers 
Maintain'd the walls, and mann'd the lofty towers : 
To save their fleet, their last efforts they try, 
And stones and darts in mingled tempests fly. 

As when sharp Boreas blows, abroad, and brings 
The dreary winter on his frozen wings ; 
Beneath the low hung clouds the sheets of snow 
Descend, and whiten all the fields below ; 
So fast the darts on either army pour. 
So down the rampires rolls the rocky shower ; 
Heavy and thick resound the batter'd shields. 
And the deaf echo rattles round the fields. 



MORAL SENTiaiENTS. 

4. Who, full of wiles, his neighbour's harm contrives, 
False to himself, against himself he strives ; 
For he that harbours evil in his m.ind, 
Will from his evil thoughts but evil find ; 



Ch.52. 195 



5. Ex 8s Tco aVfavTS, /xap^so-fiyjv Tr^otrfis ttvXuoov, 
EojxoTs <TUi<T<Tiv uygoTsgoKTi, rcti T sv ogs<T<nv 
Aeyuroii lovru xoXo(rvgTOv xvvcav Yjh avSgcov, 
Ao^fioi T a'i<T<rovTe uX>)V ayvvTOV <r<pKTiv Ttsgi, 
Exxa^xvovTsj 7rpu|xv>3V, U7ra» 8e ts xofjivog o^ovrcav 
TiyvsToti, sjcroxe tjj ts IXtjrai sx 3u/xov ^uXcav- 
*£lg yaXxog ^asivoj xoju,9rsi stt* <rT>5Q£0-(p» tcov, 
BaA.Xo|xev«JV avT)jv* ya^ sjxap^ovro jU^aXa xgotrsgoog, 
ITsTroifloTsj XaoKTiv xuQvTrepQsy t]8>j /3*>)<p»v« 

01 8* a^a ;^s^]xa8iOio-*v aTro su8jx>]Ta)v Trvgycov 10 

BaXXov, (7<p«;v t auTOJV ctfjLUVoiJ^svoi, xai KXi<riaoov, 
QiKVTroguiv vijcov t* • vi(pa8ej 8' cuj s^a^s TTiTrrov, 
Aj r avsfiog |a)jj, 8ov>]o-aj (tkiozvtol vs(psu, 

i2j |3sXs' eppsov sx Tcov ysigoov, >jjU,£V A^aiO/V, 
H8>] xai EX Tgcticov otju,^' xopuQsg 8* aureuv auov, 
BaXXo/x£v«i jtfcuXaxs(r<rtj aor7rj8cj xat oix,fo(.Xo5(r(ra.i. 



4. Avy)g Tsuyoiv KcuKu aXKw Tsuysi KOL'KU 
'H 8s |3ouA>] xax*) KUKiCTYj TO) jSouXsucravrt. 



o 2 



19(i Ch. 5Q. 



And, lo ! the eye of Jove, that all things knows, 
Can, when he will, the heart of man disclose ; 
Open the guilty bosom all within, 
And, trace the infant thoughts of future sin. 

O ! when I Hear the upright man complain. 
And, by his injuries, the judge arraign. 
If to be wicked is to find success, 
I cry, and to be just to meet distress ; 
May I nor mine the righteous path pursue. 
But interest only ever keep in view : 
But, by reflection better taught, I find 
We see the present, to the future blind. 
Trust to the will of Jove and wait the end. 
And good shall always your good acts attend. 

These doctrines, Perses, treasure in thy heart, 
And never from the paths of justice part ; 
Never by brutal violence be sway'd; 
But be the will of Jove in these obey'd. 

In these the brute creation men exceed ; 
They, void of reason, by each other bleed; 
While man by justice should be kept in awe. 
Justice, of nature well ordain'd the law. 
Who right espouses through a righteous love, 
Shall meet the bounty of the hands of Jove : 
But he that will not be by laws confined, 
Wliom not the sacrament of oaths can bind, 
^Vho, with a willing soul, can justice leave, 
A wound immortal shall that man receive ; 
His house's honour daily shall decline : 
Fair flourish shall the just from line to line. 

O Perses, foolish Perses, bow thine ear 
To the good counsels of a soul sincere. 
To wickedness the road is quickly found, 
Short is the way and on an easy ground. 
The paths of virtue must bereach'd by toil. 
Arduous and long, and on a rugged soil. 
Thorny the gate, but when the top you gain, 
Fair is the future, and the prospect plain. 



Ch. 52. 197 

Ka; vu €7nhpX6Tai raS* cuk eQe\ri(r'' ouSs I Kyi^si 
Oiriv Be xa» rrjv 8e 8<x>;v espysi ttoXi; evTog. 
Nvv h syoi avTOs /xyjr* Sjxatoj ev av^puyKOKri 

Efjt,fji.sv<xi, SI ye a&ixcorepoj efei jitej^a; Sjxvjv 

AXXa ouTOJ ray* soXira. TspTriKspcivvov A*a reXeiv. 

12 Ilepcryj, Se o"a /SaXXeo tolvtcc fjiSTU crjcr* <ppso'i, 10 

Kai sTTUxovs hxr\^ vv, 67r<X>]9eo /3<yjf S* Tra/xTrav 

Kpovioov yap Sjera^e tov 8e voj«.ov av^pcuTTOKriy 

&y}p<Ti iLsv xui i-^^rri xoti ttstssivoi^ OKovoig 

AWriKovg saSsiv eTrei Six>] ov eoriv e7r* aVTOig' 

AvQpamoicri ^ 8»x>]v e^coxe, y| api<Trr\ ttoAXov 

FiveTa** yap ei t<j x' eOeXjj ayopeyeiv ra Sixai' 

TiVMcrxcoVy ZiSvg supmitoL 5i5o» oA^ov rcw jtx,ev t'. 

'Of Se Xg hxMV l^CipTVqiYi<TlV 0^0(T<TOLg STTlOpKOV 

'^suasTui^ sv jSXavf/aj h S/xyjv, aao-Sv] v»;xeoTOv 

Tou Se T yevev] oif/.uvpoTspYi KzKziitroti jooeTOTTicOe. 20 

AvSpoj V suopKQv oifjieivcov yevejj jxero^icrSev. 

Noeajv 6(r0Aa gpeoj eyco croi S', nepcr)^, jW-eya vrjTrie* 
EcTTiV iXoc^ov xdi kXsa-Qon Tfiv fji^evroi xolxoty^tcc 
'PtjVSicoj* ju^ev oAjy>3 oSoj, vcasi luuKct 5* eyyy^i. 
0eoi e^Yixuv TrgoTTcx.poiQsv t)jj S* ageT>]j idpcjoTu, 
AQocvuiot, 8e oij^oj fxaxgog xui op^iog sit otVTrjv, 
Kai TO irpctiTOV rgri^vs' sttyiv 5' Ixyjat eij axgov, 
A)j7re»Ta 5reXe< p>)V5i>3, -Jreg soucra p^aXsTrrj. 



o 3 



198 Ch. 5^. 



Far does the man all other men excel, 
Who, from his wisdom, thinks in all things well ; 
Wisely considering, to himself a friend. 
All for the present best, and for the end : 
Nor is that man without his share of praise, 
Who well the dictates of the wise obeys ; 
But he that is not wise himself, nor can 
Hearken to wisdom, is a useless man. 



. THE SONG OF MENALCAS AND DAPHNIS. 

5. M. Ye vales, ye streams, from source celestial sprung, 
If e'er Menalcas sweetly pip'd, or sung ; 
Feed well my lambs, and if my Daphnis need 
Your flowery herbage, let his heifers feed. 

D. Fountains and herbs, rich pasturage, if e'er 
Sung Daphnis meet for nightingales to hear. 
Fatten my herds ; if to these meadows fair 
Menalcas drives, O feed his fleecy care. 

M. When here my fair one comes, spring smiles around, 
Meads flourish, and the teats with milk abound. 
My lambs grow fat ; if she no longer stay, 
Parch'd are the meads, the shepherd pines away. 

D. When Milo walks, the flower-enamourd bees 
Work food nectareous, taller are the trees, 
The goats bear twins ; if she no longer stay. 
The herdsman withers, and the herds decay. 

M. O goat, the husband of the white-hair'd flock I 
Drink at the shady fount by yonder rock ; 
'Tis there she lives ; and let young Milo know, 
Proteus fed sea-calves in the deep below. 

D. Not Pelops' lands nor Croesus' wealth excite 
My wish, nor speed to match the winds in flight ; 
But in yon cave to carol with my friend, 
And view the ocean while our flocks we tend. 

M. To teats the drought, to birds the snare, the wind 
To trees, and toils are fatal to the hind ; 



Ch. 52. 199 

OvTog TruvupicTTog ftsv, 6g vovjcre* ttuvtm ocvtco, 

<t>ga.(T(rafjt,svog to. x' xa» >)(r<v oi(/.sivui stisitu tsXo; hj. tjO 

'OcrSg jw.>jd* xs voe>) aurw j«,))T ukouoov olXXm 



HEXAMETER AND PENTAMETER. DORIC. 

5, M. IToTajaoi xai aytcsu, ysvog ^s^ov, en ri MevaAxaj 
'O (TVpiiCTug 7rgo(r(pi\6s tty) tto^ [^sXog uos, 
Ex raj ot[/,vi^us 4"-^%aj /3oo-xo»t'* yjv Ss gv0)j ttox* 

A. Boravai xai Tcguvai, (pUTOV yKwxsgov, uiireg 6[ji.oioVt 
Aoicpvig TOKTiv avjSovicri ]u,oucrjo'8o<, 
II/aiveTe ro /SouxoXjov touto* xtjv r* MsvaXxaj 
Ayayoi tijS*, ^uipcjov vs^oi Travra atpfiova. 
M. 'E«^ TTCiVTOLy vofj^oi 8e TTavTO, yaAaxTOf 8e ttccvto. 

Ux-^Qova-iv ouQura, koli rgs(psTcii ra vscty 10 

Evfi' a Trai^ xaXa sTriVicrcsTar a* 8* av ot(p£p7rv}^ 

A. Evd' o*»V, evQ' 8i8ujxaTop(^Oi cnysg, svQoc (/.sKktctui 
UXYigoucTiV iTiJi^oivsa, koli v^irspon Sguej* 
Ev6' MiXojv xaXo§ %o<nv ^uivsi ai 8* a-v a(peg7r>j, 
Xco ^oaxMVj Totg jScyj, ^al /3oej avoTegai. 
M. 12 Tguys, avsg tocv Xsukccv ociyuv, co uXix$ ^ocQos 
Mvgiov, 00 (TIIJ.OH sgKpoi Seur s<p* udoog' 
Tr]VO§ yug ev tyivco* co xoAe iS', xai MiXw Asye, 

'12f n^wreuj, xa» oov ^sog, svgjxe (pwxaj. 2-0 

A. M>] yav risAoTroj jmoi, jw.>j raXavTU ^gvtrsia, [i^oi 
E») g^etv, jxrjSs .&esjv Trgoa^s avsfj^cov 
AAA' ep^cov TU ayxaj, acrojxat otto ra irsTgct raS* 
%vvyoiJja y.uX* s<T0g(Ov eg rav ^ixeXav uXu» 
M, Xsijt^cov cpo^sgov fxev xotKOV ^sv^gscri, au^fjiog, 8* uSao"/, 
'TcTTTKuy^ 8* ogvKTiv, ctygoTsgoig Bs, Xiva, 
o 4 



200 Ch. 5± 



To man the virgin's scorn. O, father Jove ! 
Thou too hast languish'd with the pains of love. 



ORESTES TO HIS ATTENDANT. 



^ 



6. O thou most loved of servants, strong the proofs 
Thou givest me of thy goodness, and firm faith ; 
For, as the generous steed, e'en in old age, 
Of his high courage in the fierce alarm 
Abates not, but with pride sustains the charge, 
So dost thou urge me forward, and advance 
E'en in the front of danger ; for this cause 
I will unfold my counsels ; to my words 
Give thou attentive heed, and where I judge 
Amiss, thy riper prudence be my guide. 

When to the fate-foretelling shrine I came 
Of Pytho, and enquired by what best way 
I on his impious murderers might avenge 
My father's blood, this answer Phoebus gave, 
" In arms advance not, nor with martial force, 
But steal upon them, and with fraudful hand 
Let thy just fury strike the avenging blow." 
These mandates known, as time and chance present 
A fair occasion, enter thou this house. 
And learn what passes there ; me much imports 
Clear information ; thee they will not know 
Absent so long, and changed by hoary age : 
Nor, thus attired, suspicion wilt thou wake 
Thou art a stranger, so address thy tale. 
Of Phocis, sent by Phanoteus, now joined 
In close alliance with them; say, and add 
The sanction of an oath, that by the force 
Of ruthless fate Orestes is no more, 
Hurl'd from his chariot in the Pythian games. 
This be the purport of thy tale. Meantime, 
Obedient to the god, my father's tomb 
We, with libatixins, and these sever'd locks, 
Will honour. Tlience returning, in our hands 



Ch. 52. 201 



IAMBIC. 



6. X2 otvS^cow 7rgO(77roXcov (^lATar, ch^ (rai^rj jotoi, 
Oaivsi^ 0"y)jae»a yzycog eaQXos sig y^fj^otc, 
'^(j-TTsg yag evysvii]^ 'iTTTTOg xav yegMV rj, 
Oux aTTcoXso-gv ^Ujxov ev tokti hivoig, 
AAX' l(rTYi(nv ovg og^ov (haccoroig Is cry, 
Orguveij T Yjf^oigj KcnuTog Ittvj ev irgairQig, 
Toiyotg S>]Xcocrco jotev ra So^avra* cry Se 
AiSouj o0=<av flcxoyjv to<j s/jtoij Xoyojj, 
MsSagjOtoo-ov, £i ja>5 T\)yyoLvoi tj Kongov, 

Eyco ya^ »xojx>)v ^v<;^', to Ily^ixov^ 10 

MocvTSiov, cof TTctTgog fxaSoifAi oroo rgoTToo 
AgojjOtyjv 5<xaj irciga, roov <povsv(ravToov 
'O 4>ot^Of ^gYj roiauS' jOtoi, cov Ta;](;a 7rsv<rYi' 
AvTOV u<TKevov (TTgocTou Ts xa; ao-TTiScov 
KXsrJ/ai (Tipaycig svdi>coug "X^sigog do\oi(n. 
'Ot ovv ei(rYiKOUGrcc[jt,sv roiovBs %^>j(r|itov 
^y ju-ev fxoXcov, ot/xv xaigog sKrccyrj os, 

AoiJ(,CJOV TMV^' Sa-Mf TTXV TO S^a'/X-SVOV io-Qi, 

'Ottcoj ocv, 6»Scoj, otyysiArjj (ratp)] y|ju,{y. 

Oy ya^ ju,>j ce y>3f « ts xa< (j.ax.gcjo yjgo'voi 20 

FvcocT* oyS' rivQia-[j.svov co8' vTroTrnva-cjocriv. 

Xgoo 5s TOicoS* Aoyoj, 6t< st jw,ev 0svoc, 

<I>cox5y^, YIX.COV TTccg avdgos ^avorsoos* 6 yccQ 

Tvy^uvsi y.eyKTTog dogu^svMv aiyroic, 

AyysXXe, Trgoa-nQsic 8* ogxco 69' ovvsxu 

OgecTTYig TsQvyjJc' s^ uvoiyKcuot; ru^YiCj 

UuSiyiOKTiv uQXoKTi, ex. rgo^YiXoiTMv 

KvXicrQsi; ^K^goov coS' Ic^TaTco 6 [jt,vQoc, 

H|U<e<j 8e Ty/x^ov rraT^c, c/;^ s^isto 

Aoj^a<(r», jca* ^Xidotig xagotTOfxoic, TrpMTOV 30 

^Te\|/avT£c, siT u^opfiQV TTdXiV rihtji,r>/ 



202 Ch. 5^2. 



The brazen sculptured urn, now, as thou know'st, 
Hid in the tangled thicket, we will bring ; 
That we may thus deceive them with a tale 
To them most grateful, that my wretched corse 
Already on the funeral pile is burnt, 
And my cold ashes in this urn enclosed. 
Why should this grieve me that in words I die, 
When I indeed am saved, and by them raised 
To glory ? Nor ill omen'd shall I deem 
A word which gives the promise of success. 
Oft e'en the wise have I observed, by fame 
Reported dead, return, and rise again 
To higher honour. Such shall be my boast. 
I from this rumour shall be found alive, 
And, like a star, to my astonish 'd foes, 
Yet shine. But, O my country, and ye gods, 
The guardians of my country, to your care 
Receive me, and protect me in these ways ! 
And thou, my father's house ! for I am come 
With vengeance, at the impulse of the gods, 
To purge thy stain away ; send me not hence 
Dishonour'd, but to wealth, to greatness raised, 
Give me thy ancient glories to restore ! 



Ch. 5^. 203 

'O xa< (TU ojcrfia x£x§UjW,jU,£Vov ttow ^ajxvoij. 

'Ottwj xXsTTTOVxej Aoyoj, <paTJV ^Seiav 

AvToig (p6go;jttsv, «j touu^ov hy.u§ sppsi, 

HS>) (pXoyio-Tov xa» xa-njvS^axcojt^svov. 

T* yag Xu7re< /x-s tou9', orav ^avcov Aoyo?, 

!^a;9a) eqyoKn^ xa^sveyKcofji^on xXsog ; 

OuSev ju-ev p*)!"'* dojcco Kotxov (TVV jcsghi. 

HS>) yotg TToXkuJcig xcn Tovg o'O'povg eiSov 40 

Marrjv ^v>]0-xovTaj Xoyw, sid* orav hofiovs 

E\Qoo(nv, ctvSis 'ttXsov eKiSTiiuf^vrui, 

Eri A«jx\I;e*v, SeSogxor coj aorrgov gp^fgo*?. 
AXX' CO yr) Trar^coa, 0eo; t ey^cagioi 

^u T CO Scojw-ot TTUTgooov (Tou yug 6g^o[j,ai 

A<x>j d)gfji.r,fjt,iVGg KoiQotgTYjg irgog ^zmy, 

AAX* ag^sTrXovTOVj Kai So/xcuv xaracTTaTr^v. 50 



S04 



CHAP. LIII. 



A LITERAL TRANSLATION OF A PARAPHRASE, BY SOCRATES, 
OF THE OPPOSITE GREEK. 



V ENiT Chryses filiaeque redemptionis pretia ferens, et sup- 
plex Achivorum, praecipue autem regum ; et orabat illis quidera 
deos dare, capientes Trojam, ipsos etiam servari, filiam vero 
sibi ipsi solvere, accipientes redemptionis pretia, et deura 
veritos. Talia locuto illo, alii quidem venerabantur et assentie- 
bantur; Agamemnon vero exasperatus est, jubens nunc et 
abire, et rursus non venire, ne illi et sceptrum, et dei coronae 
non subvenirent ; prius vero quam solvi illius filiam, in Argei 
dixit senecturam cum se ; abire autem jussit, et non irritare, ut 
salvus domum veniret. Senex autem audiens timebat et abiit 
silentio ; digressus vero e castris, multa Apollini precatus est, 
et cognomenta dei inclamans, et in memoriam revocans et re- 
petens, si unqnam vel in templorum structuris, vel in victima- 
rum sacrificiis gratum largitus sit, quorum turn gratia impreca- 
batur ulcisci Achivos suas lacrymas illius sagittis. 



'205 



CHAP. LIII. 

METAPHRASIS, OR POETRY, TO BE PARAPHRASED IN 
PROSE. 



• 'O yotg yjA^e ■&o«j stt* VYiotg A^aiMVj 

Av(ro[j,svo§ Ts ^uyctrpct, (fisgcav t uTrsgsKn* oittoivoc, 

'Kgvasco uvu crxv^Trr^o;* xai eXiCGrero TravTot^ A^onou$y 

AT^sidai re, xcn (xKXoi siJxvYi(Jndsf Apd^ajoi, 

'A^o^asvoi A<oj ulov ljc>]^oAov A'ttoXKcovoi, 

Ev6' aAAo< ]U<sv ttuvtss s'7rsv(pv}[/.vi(ra.v Ap^aio*, 
AiSsicrSat ^' t=^>5a xai ayXacx. Ssp^Sa* wkoivol* 
AAA' oux At^si^jj Ayot(/.eijivovi yjvSavs ^v(jt,af 
AAAa xctxcos a(pisif xguTsgov 8' sttj jxuflov srsAAe* 

Mr] ere, yggov, xoiArjcnv syco 7r«^a vvjycri Ki^sioo, 
H vuv SyjflyvovT, rj v(7Tsgov auTi§ lOVTot, 
Mr) w TOi ou ^puKTixrj (TXYiTrrgov, xa* creju-jtjta ^£« • 
T>3V 8* syui ov Xvaoo, tt^jv jaiv jcch yriqa.^ STreia-iv, 
' HfAsr sgca svi oixco sv Agys'ly tyjXoQi TruTgYig, 

JCTTOV 6%0l^0fJ.£VYI'^y X.OH S^OV Xs^Og aVTlOUXTCiV 

AAA' »9i, [J^Yj fi,' speSi^s* (TauiTsgog chg xs v£yjaj' 

'Slg sipotT' £88e»cr£V 8' 6 ysgoov, xai sttsiQsto {/^u&co' 
B>j 8* axscav Trotga ^ivct 7rQXv(pXoKT^oio ^aXaa-dYig, 
TloXXa. sirsiT WTravsv^s xicov r}ga^' 6 ysguiog 
AttoAAwvi ocvoiXTiy Toy r^iixoy^og t£X£ A>)tco* 

KXvSi jtjcsu, AgyvgoTO^*, bg Xpvcrriv a/x(p»^£§rjxac, 
K»AAav T£ ^«fie>]V, Tev£8o<o T£ i<pi avacrcrei^, 
2/xivdsu* £i 7roT£ TOt yagizvT ctti v>)Ov sg=-<l/(X, 
H £1 8>37roT£ roi xara TTJOva /xrj^j' irxrja 
Taygojv Yj^ aiycaVf roh u,oi x^>]»)vov ££A8a;^* 
Ticreiav Aavaoj £jaa 8ax§ua (roicri j^eXea-cnv. 

END OF THE EXERCISES. 



OBSERVATIONS 



ON 



SOME IDIOMS 



OF THE 



GREEK LANGUAGE. 



I. ATTRACTION. 



1. One of the most striking peculiarities of the Greek Lan- 
guage is what is called Attraction. This originates in the 
association of ideas ; and, occasionally, supersedes the common 
rules of construction. For, as the ideas are associated, in the 
mind of the writer, or speaker, they are expressed, independ- 
ent of mere technical precepts. Hence we may perceive gome 
latitude, in the application of Attraction ; the influence of 
words being, sometimes, but the dependence of ideas, gene- 
rally, observed. 

2. Thus, the quality of any subject is, generally, expressed 
by an adjective ; but the juxtaposition ot two terms suggests 
that one of them expresses a quality of the other ; and hence 
the former, losing its own independent meaning assumes the 
dependent character of an adjective ; as,* 

'EXXa? f &)y>j. The Greek language, 

'T^ptv ay£j)a. An arrogant man. 



* Compound terms are formed, in the same manner, in English; as 
<inarket-day, cherry-tree. 



208 



3. Again, a common rule of Syntax is, that the adjective 
shall agree with its substantive, in gender and number, as well 
as in case ; but, by the association of ideas, we find this rule 
violated, when the persons, or things, alluded to, differ, in 
number, or gender, from the substantives expressed ; as, » 

B/3£^o5 ^f povra ro^ov. An infant, (i. e. a boy) bearing 

a botv. 

MaOi^TEva-are iravTO, ra eOvrjf /9a7r- Teach ye all nations, baptizing 
TiC^ovrsq avrovq, them (i. e. the persms). 

4. By the same principle, a noun is often put in the accusa- 
tive, in consequence of its proximity to a transitive verb ; 
which should, more regularly, be used in the nominative, in 
connection with the succeeding verb ; as ^ 

Oi'da ere riq 6<, for oiloo tk; £i (tv. I knotv tvho you are. 

Tov KiKepcova, d£i(ra(;, y.ri %£ipov S<a- Fearing lest Cicero luould con- 

jaytcTTjai, for tzKTaq //.'/j o Ki- tend worse» 

Ke^av y.. t. X. 

5. On the contrary, a noun, which, according to the con- 
struction of Latin, and other languages, should be in the ac- 
cusative, before the infinitive, is regularly attracted into the 
nominative, when it expresses the same person, or thing, with 
the subject of the preceding verb ; as, ^ 

Mot oiAoa-a-ov irpo(p^cov api^^eiv, for Stvear to me that you tvillingly 
icpofpovot. luill defend me. 

6. In this manner, the infinitive loses all its usual influence, 
in requiring an accusative before it, and may be preceded by 
any case, that is attracted to the foregoing noun ; as ^ 

.Mo* yioaTia-rov tan (AocO'/jTri era It IS best Jbr me to become thy 
yevio-dai. disciple. 

7. Lastly, The relative, instead of being governed by the 



^ See Jones's Greek Grammar. 

Perhaps the construction of neuters plural, with verbs singular, may be ac- 
counted for, by conceiving the same association of ideas ; neuter, and inani- 
mate objects, being considered generally, but animate agents, indivictuaUy. 

^ The Latins have sometimes imitated this idiom ; as, ScirC me in quantis 
sim gaudiis. 

'^ The Latins, sometimes, imitated this idiom ; as, 

Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis. Hor. 

Sensit medios delapsus in hostes. Virg. 

^ The Latins imitated this idiom, also, in allowing a substantive verb to be 
preceded by any case, except a genitive ; as, . 
Mihi negligenti esse non licet. 



'209 



verb on which it depends, is, very commonly, attracted into the 
same case with its antecedent ; as, 

Xjia'/xat oli; s^a, for ;^p7j/Aao-<y a I use the things that I posscss. 

8. As to the antecedent's being attracted into the same case 
with the relative, it may be considered as nothing more than 
the full expression of what is commonly uttered elliptically ; 
for the relative is an adjective, having its substantive always 
understood, if not expressed, as,^ 

\yovrtq itaf a I^vktBuuev Mvcktu- Bringing [Mnaso\ xvith xiohich 
VI, is equivalent to Ayovreq Mnaso ive should be lodged, 
Mvaa-avaf itag a Mvaaavi c,s.- 

VKrBwfJLBV. 



II. ELLIPSIS. 



9. In Greek, as in other languages, many words are usually 
omitted, which are necessary to complete the grammatical 
construction of sentences. These omissions were directed by 
local convenience, habit, and other causes, for which we can- 
not now account ; but they are such as a native could easily 
supply; and, in general, may be understood, by a careful 
reading of the best authors. Those ellipses which occur, most 
regularly, are reducible to the following heads.^ 

10. Substanti'ces understood. Whenever the substantive ex- 
pressing the person or thing owned, or possessed, has been dis- 
tinctly mentioned, or alluded to, before ; or when the nature 
of the expression is such as to suggest it, that substantive may 
be omitted ; as,<^ 

Erpa^Tjv zv irar ooq [oiycia). J was reared in my fathers 

[house). 



* Tlie Latins have adopted this manner of expression also ; as, 
Qui fit Maecenas, ut nemo, quam sibi sortem, 
Seu ratio dederit, seu fors objecerit, ilia 
Contentus vivat. Hor. 
^ The reader who would wish to enter more minutely into this subject, 
will find much satisfaction in reading Bos's JEllipses GrceccB. 

^ This practice is common in other languages, although more frequent, 
and regular, in Greek. 

Ventum erat ad Vestac (templum). Hor. 
And thus we say, « I have been at St. Paul's" (church) ; and the like. 

r 



210 



AXefaySpo?, o (ylo^) 4fiXimrov. Philip's Alexander, i. e. Alex- 

ander, [the son) of Philip. 

O'Kvfji.ma^y 17 (/*'?T'Jf) AXcfav&pov. Olympias, {the mother) of 

Alexander. 

Aiairav nx^v £v K^oktov [^aa-iXei- He had his diet in Crcesus 
otff). [palace). 

11. When a part of any thing is meant, the word /xfoo? is 
almost always omitted ; as, V. 

^a,yoyi.a.i (/A£j)o$) a§rov. I eat [part) of the bread. 

12. In many instances, adjectives are placed absolutely, 
agreeing with their substantives understood; the nature of the 
sentence readily suggesting the substantive ; as, 

Eo-T* ntaa-iv (av^/jwiroK) SijXov It is evident to all [men). 

Ev (piXiqi, [xaoa) eo-iJiey, We are in a friendly country. 

Ev oKiya (%pova). In a little time. 

13. To this principle may be reduced the substantive nature 
of adjectives put absolutely, with the neuter article; as. 

To v.a.\ov [x^rjfAo). Beauty. 

To evyeveg (%p>j/Aa). Nobility. 

To a/AsXe? [yfdoq). Negligence. 

14. Also such adverbial phrases ; as, 

Ttj fji,£v (jtAcpiSi), T»j §£ [fMspih). Partly, partly. 

15. And, frequently, the nature of the subject suggests the 
substantive understood ; as, 

E7r£/A\|/a nrpq avzov [ayyeXov, v] I sent [a messenger, or letter) 

ETria-ToXyjv). to him. 

Apocvreq [r-/}v ayycvpav) Having Weighed [anchor). 

16. Adjectives are seldom omitted, except when they have 
been already inserted in the sentence, and would become tire- 
some, by repetition ; an ellipsis, common in all languages ; as, 

Inqv^acioi yovEtq, v.ai (cTroySaiOi) Good parents, and {gOod) Sons. 



17. The pronominal adjectives, nq and etc, may be often sup- 
plied, instead of /xcpo?, before a genitive plural ; as, 

SwxpaTij? ecrrt (t*? vj ft?) ^av <to- Socrates is [one) of the tvise 
fav, men. 



^ill 



18. Tlie antecedents roaoq and tqiqc,^ or tojowto?, are frequently 
understood, before the respondents ha-o^ and oio?; as, 

Wivovai (too-ov) oo-ov eoriv dpitatrai. Thei/ drink [as much) as tJiey 

can snatch. 

XoipaSf^ -jroXXat £*(7;, IC uv ov% There are many rocks, through 
olare e<t7i irXeiv (ovk tcrrt roi- tvhich it IS impossible {there 

avra ^p-^fAarce, olae, 'nXsiv). is no siich thing as) to sail. 

Oy% oloi T£ ria-av avra iroivjcrai. Thei/ tvere not able to do if, 
{qvx. vjcrav toiovtoi oloi avro [They ivere not such persons 
<7ro*^o-at eSuvavTo.) as were able to do it.) 



19. Verbs are seldom omitted, except in order to avoid re- 
petition. In one instance, however, the ellipsis is frequent. 
When a strong imperative is required, the verb, which would, 
regularly, be in the imperative, is put in the infinitive ; and opa, 
^Xette, or the like, is understood; as, 

(Opa) i^yj -TTOiEtv TovTo. (See that you) do not this. 



20. Participles, particularly of substantive verbs, are, fre 
quently, omitted, after the article ; as, 

'O TO ha,l-fi(Aa, {'^%av). He that (has) the crown. 

TlaTrjp '^/xwv, o [uv) ev Toiq ovpa- Our Father, who [art) in hea- 
votq. ven, 

21. Prepositions are, very commonly, omitted, before cases 
that follow words, which have no influence upon them; or 
whose influence requires different cases from those by which 
they are followed; as, 

MaXa [v-ara) ^vjxov £%(3Aa)0vj. Tie Was greatly enraged (tJi) 

his mind. 
liopha (airo) Tfiq itoXeccq. Far {from) the city, 

Aiayceiy {Tcepi) ^avccrov. To accuse {of) a capital crime, 

22. Conjunctive and adverbial particles are seldom omitted. 
It is not uncommon, however, to find an ellipsis of those that 
convey a subjunctive meaning; which, indeed, is usual, m 
other languages ; as, 

'Ops, {Iva) Tzoiria-rq. Vide {ut)feceris. See {that) you make, 

23. We sometimes find i^ev, also, without its respondent Ie ; 

and vice versa ; as, 

IciTpoq ovQu [(AEv) £xov(rct, r spycx, Having the name, but not the 
B' ov. deeds of a physician. 

V 2 



^ontji, Y ocXXcTE [jiEv TtpocrO' 'Ekto- He goes Sometimes before Hec- 
poif aXKor (fie) oTtiaSev. toVy and sometimes behind 

him. 

24. The foregoing are almost the only instances of ellipses, 
that occur with a frequency approaching to regularity. Many 
other expressions are found, sometimes elliptical, and sometimes 
complete, according to the pleasure of the writers. 



III. PLEONASM. 



25. In order to express ideas strongly, without instituting 
any direct comparison of them with others, the same words are 
sometimes repeated, or synonymous ones used.^ 

26. Nouns Substantive, and Adjective. 

Ay^iov, ay^ioy eXvto?. A cruel, cruel luound- 

2i;y Xj)io-Tiw Bivai, iroXko) [AaXXov To be with Christ, is far het- 

y.^£Kra-ov. ter. 

Eire/ytil/fv Kooiaoq £<; t^skfovi; vi^vj- Crcesus sent to Delphi tivo 

T'/j^a; hvo {JieyeQe'i [AeyaAovq.^ botvls exceedingly large. 

27. Verbs. 

Vl%ovto aTCiovTeq. They departed quickly. 

O^eXov yLar£v6v>9£ivja-av at oSoi i^ov.^ O that my xvays luere directed. 
Bao-K tBi. Go quickly. 



^ This practice is founded in nature ; thus, infants natural] y repeat epi- 
thets, as " good, good," to express a high degree. This primitive manner 
of expression is used, with great beauty, in the ancient Hebrew and Celtic 
languages. Thus, 

mxj2? nin* ©np ©np wnp iok") m bx m x-ipi 

And one cried to another, and said, Holy, holy, holy, is the Lord of hosts. 

Isaiah, vi. 3. 
]n the Celtic language, synonymous epithets are more used; and, in the 
choice of these, a correspondence, in initials and cadences, is studied ; so as 
to give, at once, melody of sound, and harmony of expression ; while, by dif- 
ferent shades, as it were, of the same colour, the picture is completed : thus, 
An curaidh, crodha, calma, Conlaoch, The gentle, valiant, hero Conloch. 
^ This idiom is borrowed from the Hebrew, which language, having no 
superlative degree, expresses it by two words of the same import; as, 
*TOn n"jCX darkness of obscurity, i. e. very thick. Exod. x. 22. ^ 

*^ The double optative, in this expression is exceedingly beautiful ; and 
completely justifies the departure from the common rule, which requires 
oipfKov to be followed by the infinitive. 



213 



A>co7} aKova-erSf v.ai ov fxvj a-vvvjT£. ^ By hearing ye shall hear, and 

not understand. 

Aot; avva-aa-a.. ^ Give me instantly. 

B>j V i[X£v av T£ (xax^v. And he 'went eagerly up the 

battle. 

Aizey.^iQrj Kai, Biire. ^ He answered and said. 

28. In some instances there appears to be a pleonasm in the 
use of sivai, when there is really none ; for, by analysing the 
expressions, we shall find every word have its own distinct 
force ; as, 

OuK av ypsvZoiVTO Iy.ovt£<; eivai. Verbatim, ova. av i^fuSotvro, they 

•would not be lying, i-Aovreq, toilling, eivai, to be, i. e. They would 
not be willing to be lying. 

Oi^TS 'Kvpoq evcojv etva* ditrof/iai. Verbatim, ovtc, neither ; -Tfypo^, 
Jire ; v/iav, willing ; stvai, to be ; divTOfxai, I am touching, i. e. 
neither am I willing to be touching Jire. 

'Exwv tivai £7rtXa0o/x,evo(j, not, willingly forgetting, but willing to 
be after forgetting. 

29. Prepositions are, sometimes, and Particles, very fre- 
quently, repeated, or synonymous ones used, especially nega- 
tives. It is not, for a moment, to be imagined that the Greek 
language, which is so extremely accurate and energetic, in 
all its parts, could admit the use of one superfluous word. 
Wliat is said therefore of expletive particles, proceeds only from 
the ignorance of those who use the expression, and who would 
conceal their own incompetency to explain the minuter parts of 
the Greek language, under a grievous charge against the writers 
of it. At the same time it is evident, that the same pleonasm 
is used, with respect to particles, and for the same purpose, as 
in the other parts of speech ; thus, 

AjM,^i TTsp* KOTjj/Tjv. Round about a fountain. 

Ov y.t] a-s ava. I will not at all leave you. 



* This idiom Is, also, adopted from the Hebrew original ; viz. lyo^ 13'an 

^ The double past tense, in this command, is incapable of being expressed 
in any other language. 

•= It has been ingeniously conjectured that the augment of verbs is a remain 
of an original method of repeating the verb, to express time past ; as, 
Terv(pa for rvTr-TV(pa. Hence the Attics use o\-u\a, for wAa, and the like. 
See Jones's Greek Grammar, ATreKpidri is very frequently used, at the be- 
ginning of a speech, particularly in the New Testament, where it signifies 
only, that what is said, followed in conse<}-^ience of some circumstances then, or 
before, mentioned. In this sense it is equivalent to apa, or cTretTo, in a 
similar situation ; as tou 8' a^ Tj/uetSero. Tov 5' Tj/iet^er' eTretra. Therefore, or 
thereupon, he answered to him. 

p 3 



^14 



TofTw S' Qv TtaXiv avTiq ccttoktetov But the stvifi horses shall not 

&?x££? iinroi. bear them atvai/ back again, 

Aj(x7jv, a/ATjv Xsya vfjuv. Verily, verily, I say unto you, 

Avrap aoa, Zev<; Soj-xe (o-KvjTTTpov). Again {or next) then Jupiter 

gave the sceptre. 

To otjwijy, is equivalent roi, i. e. lovra [x^rjiJLari), or, ra {tpycc), in 
this thing, really, which is often repeated, especiallj^^ after yap, 
101 yap Tot, for really, really, 

30. Upon the same principle that the preposition which fol- 
lows a verb, or noun, must be of the same import with that 
verb, or noun, particles corresponding to the sense of the words 
with which they are connected, are very frequently used ; as 

Mtv itaXiv avOiq avrjaei ^vfxoq a- His bold spirit ijoill return him 
yf\vap, back again, 

IV. ANAKOAOY0IA. 



31. This kind of expression is, when a term is used absolutely 
in the nominative, in the beginning of a sentence, though a 
more regular arrangement of ideas required it to be placed far- 
ther in the sentence, and in an oblique case ; and vice versa ; as, 

'0 Ss A<7<rvpioq, £ya [aev oifxoci Itc- The Assyrian, I think that he 
Tceai; a^eiv (for tov Aa-a-vpiov). tvill bring cavalry ; for, / 

think that the Assyrian, &c. 

Aeyov(Tt S' oj/>ta?, uq ukiv^vvov ^lov They say that tve live a life 
t^afxiv, free from danger, 

32. To this principle may be reduced such expressions as 
the following : a 

IIoXXo) yap ^ <rrpa.ria ovtrrj, ov Tra- For, the army being numerous, 
a-fjq £Trai iioKBuq v'jto^£^a<Tdai, it tvill not be in the po'wer of 

every state to accommodate 
them. 



* This corresponds to the nominative absolute, in English, as will be seen, 
by comparing the Greek words with the translation. 

Instances of avaKoXovQia are to be found in all languages. If too frequent, 
(hey would be disgusting ; but, occasionally used, give a pleasing variety and 
animation to plain narrative, or didactic style ; as, 

Quaj prima solo ruptis radicibus arbos 

Veilitur, hinc atro linquuntur sanguine guttae. Virg. 

Quae quatuor, quanquam inter se colligata atque implicata sunt, tamen ex 
singulis certa officiorum genera nascuntur. Cicero. 

He that planted the ear, shall he not hear? Psahn xciv. 



ns 



Such are a few remarks upon the most striking, and genera, 
idioms of the Greek language. The following observations, 
on the idiomatical use of certain parts of speech, will assist 
the learner, in forming an idea of it. 



V. ARTICLE. 



33. The article corresponds, in its general use, to the definite 
article, in English ; as, ayOpuivog, a man ; 6 avBpuitoc;, the man. 

S^. In arrangement, the article precedes its noun ; but, 
when two or more nouns, with articles connected with each of 
them, come together, the prior article agrees with the posterior 
noun; as, 

O* T'/jv Tojv d^avTwv (ppovTiha, They ijoho have the care of all 
£XovTE(;, the things, 

35. But besides the use of the article, which is common to 
Greek, and English, it is frequently used, in Greek, where the 
expression, in English, could not correspond, without under- 
standing it as elliptical ; or, at least, more emphatical than the 
Greek appears to be. » 

36. Thus the article is, often, used before proper names ; as, 
'ZccY.pajriq, Socrates. In English, we prefix it only to the 
plural of such words; as, the Addisons. 

37. The names of abstract ideas also, are, usually, specified, 
in Greek, by the article ; as, '^ apBTq, virtue ; ^ >ca>tia, vice. ^ 

38. When the force of the possessive pronoun is included in 
the nominative to the verb, the following noun, commonly. 



* The subject of the Greek article has been, lately, investigated by the 
Rev. T. F. Middleton, in his Doctrine of the Greek Article. In this in- 
genious treatise, he gives a multitude of rules, and examples, to show when 
the article is to be used, and when omitted. But, as the greater number of 
such rules are liable to exceptions, it appeared unnecessary to transcribe any 
of them. These observations were written, before Mr. Middleton 's work was 
known to the author : and, in the general principles, appear to coincide witli 
his view of the subject. After all that can be said upon it, notliing but 
practice, and the careful reading of the best authors, can be a guide to tlie 
writer in Greek, as to the insertion, or omission, of the article. 

^ The French language approaches more nearly to the Greek idiom, in 
such expressions as these ; thus, la vcrtu, le vice ; fai mal a la tcte. 

r 4 



216 



has the article ; as, akytu t^v xf^aXvjv, / have a pain in my 
head. » 

39. With the infinitive (which mood expresses a substantive 
state of beings action^ or passion) the neuter article is used, in 
all the cases of the singular, with strict propriety. The Latins, 
and even the English, have a very vague method of translating 
this Greek idiom ; as, , 

TO epav, amare, to love. 

rov epav, amandi, of loving. 

Where we may observe that the nominative only is properly 
translated, and used, accordingly, as the subject of a verb, as, 
amare est jucundum, to love is pleasant. TJhe other cases are 
rendered by the inflections of the gerund, in Latin, and by the 
present participle in English. ^ 

40. The article is, frequently, used with a participle put ab- 
solutely in the number, gender, and case of the substantive 
understood. This is perfectly agreeable to the English idiom ; 
but the ellipsis is much more correct, and definite, in Greek, 
than in English. For we always supply the word person, or 
thing, whereas the Greek often requires the identical word to 
be inserted : as, 

'O (avflpa-Tros) £j)%o/>t£yo^. The [person) coming. 

Xapiq %aptv Eariv ^ [y^ocpiq) riY.- A favour IS the {thing) pro- 
rova-a. ducing a favour. 

The Latin idiom requires such expressions to be made by 
the relative, and indicative ; which is also admissible, both in 
Greek and English ; as, 

'O Tt/TTTajy, he, rvirrei, qui verberat, he "who strikes. 

4L That the article is, originally, a pronoun, appears, from 
the frequent use of it, by the early Ionic, anri Doric writers, 
in place of difi"erent pronouns ; as, 

AoytficJTaTot £t(rt tojv [uv) sya iq They are the most ingenious of 
liaTceipoiv a.nciv.oij.'qy. any Uchom I knoxio. 

ApTovq rov^ [oik;) eyistvoi ovofjia- Bread vohich they call Cylles- 
"^ova-i KvKXTjcmi. tis. 

Tijv '(cxetvTjv) V £ya) ov "Kvaa. But I tjoill not release her. 



• See Note ^ page 215. 

•> Yet some of our old English poets followed the Greek idiom more 
strieilyj as, 

« For not to have been dipp'd in Lethe's lake 
Could save the son of 'JQietis from to die." 



217 

O (eKEJvo?) 7' wq tiitav. He having spoken thus. 

Tcp [rovr'ji) vvv rja-at oyttSi^wv. For this reason, you now sit 

reviling. 

42. And even, after the Attic writers had begun to observe 
a regular distinction between the article and pronoun, they 
frequently used it, nearly in the same manner with the ancients ; 
as, 

Kav W £x6pov TCP [tivi) rovTo And if this should happen to a 

frvy.€aiyri. person hy an enemy. 

To (touto) tJ/A£K Qxa,'^ EiTTw. Wkcn I say this word ye. 

Oy Xeyova-i to (exetvo) liaTi. ^^^h ^0 not say that word for 

what. 

'O V lri(rov(; siTvev avTa to (tokto), Jesiis said unto him this, if 

El dvvacrai 'i:ia-rEvcrai, iravra 8v- thou canst believe, all things 

vara, toj nzKmvovri. are possible to the believer. 

KvB' orov (ov Tivo?). For what cause. 

E^' oToj (oj Tivt). In what affair. 



VT. NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE AND 
ADJECTIVE. 

43. From the three persons, singular, of the perfect passive, 
of many verbs, are formed three nouns ; the first denoting the 
effect, or thing done; the second, the doing of it; and the third, 
the doer ; as, 

7r£7rot>j|iAa», »r£7roi7](ra<, 7r£7roi>jTa*. 

nzoi'fii/.a,, iioirj(Tiq, "ttoitjtij^. 

poem, poetry, poet. 

TTETrpa-y/xa*, itsTtoa^xi, nrsirpatcrai. 

nrpacyfxa, TzpaBiq, it^ocv-rrjc;, OV TToay.T'^p, 

thing done, action, or doing, doer. 

44. The Greeks express certain ideas by the peculiar termi- 
nations of derivative adjectives; thus. 

From £4X0?, like. 

AvdpcoTToq, a man. avOpccmKoq, manlike, 

Baa-iXevq, a king. Baa-iXiy.oq, kingly. 

From Eiloc, similitude. 

Ilvp,Jire. Tcvput-tiq, fiery. 

b^podoq, dew. tpoaoitiriq, devoy. 

From Iri,, apparently an abbreviation of Eiloq. 

Ylr^Evq, Peleus. l\'fikEilriq,the son of Peleiis, 

'E-ATap, Hector. 'Y.-Atopilriq, the son of Hector. 



218 

From oloi;, like, suck as 
ria?, all. TcavroKx;, of every form, 

<I>iX£a.', to love (piXvjroq, lovcli/, suck as to be loved ^^ 

From T£o,'. 
Upaaa-ccj to do TrpaxTEo?, that must be done. 

From oifAOi;, a luai/. 
Bk/c, life. ^lua-if^oq, worth living.\^ 

na;)aSo3-i;, surrender irapa^cccrifAoc, liable to be suri'cn- 

dered, in the voay of being 
surrendered. 

With others too tedious to enumerate, which will be learned by 
practice. 

45. To denote a person of rank, he is represented as sur- 
rounded with attendants ; as, 

01 izz^i. A>.£^av'bpov. Alexander. 

TIq)J<oi tXrfkvBEia-av Tcpoq rxq ite^i Many had come to Martha and 
MapOay xat Mapiav Mary. 

46. Yet the periphrasis is sometimes used to include the 
attendants also. This, however, is seldom done ; and the con- 
text will show whether they are included or not; as, 

O* Ttspi rov Kvpov. Cyrus and his soldiers. 

47. On the same principle that plurality implies dignity, 
nouns are often put in the plural, although the things which 
they signify are singular; as,^ 

Ey Toii; ovpavoiq. In heaven. 

48. If the person were eminent for any particular quality, 
it is expressed, with his name in the genitive ; as, 

AIete Is. lioiai^oioi ^ir,v. Ye shall bring the vigour of 

Priam (i. e. Priam). 

Mtvo^ AXy.ivooio. The energy of Alcinous (i. e. 

Alcinous). 

49. This is sometimes expressed by an adjective derived from 
the proper name ; as, 

Aatyy/xevot Kara SwjtAa jSti9$ Et£o- Banqueting in the house of the 
%Xrj£i7)i;. Eteoclean vigour (i. e. of the 

brave Eteocles). 



' The same principle is recognized in English, French, &c., in which 
languages an individual is addressed, in the second person plural. The Ger- 
mans carry this manner of expression to a most absurd length, for they address 
a person of consequence, in the tliird person plural ; as, 

iHein^err, ^iz erjeigen mix biele JFreunBscf)aft. 

Sir, they (you) express much friendship for me. 



219 

50. To denote a great or important thing, xs'^lf^"- is used, with 
the genitive of the thing ; as, 

Jlvoq xoy\fji.a, yivtrai fxeya. There is a mighty boar. 

To x^fiiJi-a Tiuy vvvtrav ocrov aits^x- Uoxv endless is the night ! 

TOV. 

51. A name of distinguished eminence is often joined to a 
substantive, or adjective, as countenancing, or strengthening 
it; as,^ 

Aa-reioq tw Sea Beautiful to God (i. e. very 

beautiful). 
Eo-rai [xeyaq evccniov tov Kvoiqv.^ He shall be great before the 

Lord (i. e. very great). 
'Or iTti^oKT-^ Aioq oy.tfo;. When the flood of Jove (i. e. 

impetuous shower) descends, 
BccQv'Arjrsa. luovrov. The ivhale-deep (i. e. very deep) 

ocean. 

52. To express a quality tvhich has entire possession of the 
subject, the adjective specifying that quality, is turned into 
the possessive case of a corresponding substantive ; as, ^ 

'O KotTTj? TTj? aSixia?. The entirely unjust judge. 

Alpsa-eiq aitaXeia^. ' Totally pernicious heresies. 

1o)u.cc rcnt£ivcoa-£u<;. The entirely humble body. 

53. To the same principle may be referred such expressions 
as the following; viz.^ 

'Kctk^cciav TratSs^. The Chaldeans. 

TUq kyjxim. The Grecians. 



* This is, originally, a Hebrew idiom, and occurs, frequently, in the 
Bible ; as, 

Thy righteousness is like the mountains of God (i. e. the great mountains). 

It is not improbable that tlie exp-ression of the Centurion at our Saviour's 
crucifixion, AXtjOus vtosQeov 7}v ovtos, TtuItj this xvas the Son of a God, is equi- 
valent to 5ioTpe(pr}s jSacriAevs, a divine-bred king, or the like. Especially, as 
they are the words of a heathen, and are rendered by St. Luke Ovtus, Sikuios 
7}v 6 avdpuiros ovros, Really this was a righteous man. 

^ Thus also, 

A mighty hunter before the Lord (i. e. a very great hunter). 
^ ITiis very expressive idiom is borrowed from the ancient Hebrew and 
Celtic languages ; as, 

nmnn "ii 

Sons of destruction (i. e. persons appointed to die). 
Lucht na bhfiacha. The people of debts (i. e. the debtors) . 
" We use the same mode of expression, but instead of referring to our 
jrrogenitors, we mention our country, as the common parent of all ; tlius, Tlie 
sons of Albion, of Erin, &c. Thus also ws say, after the Hebrew, A man of 
sorroics. , 



220 



(Avd/jwTTo?) ycx,(TTpoi; vjttwv. a glutton — a slave to appetite, 

(AyBpuTToq) spuroq aXarrav. A slave to love. 

54'. The positive degree, with the article, is often used to 
express a superlative sense, exactly according to the English 
idiom; as, 

sometimes, also. 



55. We 
these : 

yiwoq rav ccXkcov ovy. stiXanov. 



The many are of opinion. 
meet with such expressions as 

/ alone of the others "was not 

lamenting. 
Most short-lived of the others. 



These solecisms are to be found in the writings of respectable 
English, as well as Greek authors ; but they should rather be 
understood than imitated. 

56. Besides those combinations of numbers, which are ex- 
pressed in Greek, as they are in Latin, an idea of such expres- 
sions, as are peculiar to Greek, may be acquired from the 
following examples : 



EtKOtTiv £T'/j, evoq ^Bovroq. * 
Afotv Sfovra, evcarov ettj. 
SsyoKXstSTj?, 7r£[X'Kroq avrog. 
Oy'boov Nw£ £^vXa|e, 

Te<T(7a§a,Y.oyra (TrXTjya^) Trapa jOtiav 

&Ka,tov. 
'Eviavroi e^So/AojvcovTa Trape^ovra* 

7j[A,£pa<; itevTYiKOvraCy Kai di'/jKO<ricx.(;, 

v.(X\, k^a.v.i(T'/ji,\i(xc,t v.ai dta-jAv^taq. 
*H xpvKVj avLfxa^it Ttspi ra ivoq ^£iv 

'^avT'/jKQvra st'/j. 
'iTTTTca^ Eli; 0}tTaxt(7%;Xtov5 aysi. 

'ETa^iQi r§ia,v.ovra, irpoq loiq kv-arov. 

O'ATOO Bttl tQiq tVVEVfjY.OVra, £T>J. 

Ticcp kvoc, TO<rovroi. 

Hv Iv)<rov<; aasi zrcov rpia,v.oyra ap- 

^au.evoq. 
Tp£i5 Ttpoq roig rpia,Y.ovra. 
^ItitEocq ov TtoXv XftTTOVTe? e^avticr- 



Nineteen years. 
Ninety-eight years. 
Xenoclides, with four others. 
He preserved Noah, with seven 

others. 
I received thirty-nine stripes. 

Seventy years furnish twenty - 
six thousand, two hundred^ 
and fifty days. 

The mind is vigorous about the 
forty-ninth year. 

He brings about eight thousand 
horse. 

An hundred and thirty fur- 
longs. 

Ninety-eight years. 

As many, wanting one. 

Jesus began to be about thirty 
years old. 

Thirty-three. 

Not much less than six thousand 
horse. 



^ Thus the Latins say, 
Unde octoginta annos natus. Seventy-nine years old. 

The French use moins, in the same way j as, 
Trois heures moins d'un quart. Jfithin a quarter of three Q^dodi. 



^221 



VII. PRONOUN. 

57. In the use of the possessive pronouns there appears a re- 
markable affinity between the Greek and English languages ; 
as the genitives £(Movy a-cvy &c. are frequently used for the 
possessive c/xo?, <ro<i, &c.; just as my, mine, thy, thine, in Eng- 
lish; as,* 

Eratjjo? BfAoq, or ^f^ov. My, or mine associate. 

Oix[A.a,Tnc arov, or (ra,. Thy, ov thine eyes. 

58. This practice of using the primitive genitives, and the 
possessive pronouns, indifferently, has given rise to some ex- 
pressions, that have an odd appearance to a learner ; as 

Evvoia tpw T7J o-Tj.^ I 'will speak for love of you. 

Ovv. aia-Oavsrai Aayie^ctifAoviovi;, <po- He does not perceive that the 
€a) TO) 7JiA£r£^<i}, itcikB^'qcrskQvraq. Lacedemonians are desirous 

of declaring ivar, forfoar of 
us. 
To a-ov fAoyvjq S&j p^/>ca. ^ The gift of thee alone. 

Aovvfjievoq ttar^oq ^vycc nXeo? tjS' Justifying the great fome of my 

sfjiov avrov. father and my otvn. 

Mevccv £v vjfAsrepov {oiy.a) for tj/x&jv, Remaining in our house, 

or VJlJI.STB§a. 

59. To express identity of person, or possession, the Greeks 
use compound pronouns ; thus. 



Euavrov 



I myself. ^^ "^^°^ > thijself. t^ "^^°^ \ himself. Sec, 

In the use of kavxt^v, it is remarkable, that we sometimes find 
it joined with pronouns of the first and second person ; as, 

OvV avaXatety eavrovq ay Tj^vvYiQr}- We could not have recovered 
y.£y, ourselves, 

60. The pronoun nq, as an indefinite, corresponds, pretty 
nearly, to the French indeterminate on, from which we have 
adopted a pecuHar use of the word one ; as, 

EtTTot av Tiq. On diroit. One tvould say. 

61. And to limit this indefinite expression to an individual, 



* It is questionable, however, v?hether mi/, mine, thy, thine, should be called 
genitives, or only possessives, corresponding vnth the French man, mien, ton, 
tien ; or more probably formed from the German ClCinCr, llt-Citt, iJCinCr, tiCtn* 
In the latter language, however, the genitive case is not used for the possessive 
pronoim, 

'' So, Amor Dei, The love of God to us, or of us to God. 

•^ So, in Latin, Ut sua unius gratia esset. That it might be his ovrnfaimtr 
ahme, Livy. 



C}C}C) 



the Greeks use a compound word, exactly coiTesponding to 
the English ; as, 

'O deivv', Toy ^eivot;, tqv Setya Ecr^jy- Such a one, the son of such a 
yeiXe. one, accused such a one. 

62. The different relations of quality, quantity, and numbers, 
are expressed by pronominal adjectives, compounded with the 
article ; thus, 

ro,the. roios, of the Icind. rotxos, of the mmiber. tt^Kikos, of the size. ' 

6, which. olos, of which kind. bcros, of which mimber. ti^ikos, of which size. 

TTo ; what? iroios; of what kind ? 'ttoctos ; of what number F tttiKlkos ; of what size F 

OTTO, what. oTToios, of what kind, oiroaos, of what number. 6iTTqKiKos,\f what size. 

and from ovroq, this, 

roiovroq, of this hind; rocrovroq, of this number; TTjXiycovroq, of 
this size. 



VIII. VERB. 

VOICES. 

63. Besides the Active and Passive voices, in the use of which 
the Greek language does not differ materially from the Latin, 
the Middle voice is used to express xvhat ive do directly to our- 
selves ; or to another, having a reference to ourselves ; as, 

E^Xai^a/Aiyy. / hurt myself. 

'EliA.ara, €<rcray.€Voq. Having put on his clothes. 

64. Hence verbs of gesture, motion, and sensation, are gene- 
rally in the middle form ; as, 

^E'^o[xcx,i, I sit J TTopevoy-ai, I go ; aiaBavoi^ai, I perceive. 

65. In many instances, the relation to self is not very clearly 
distinguishable ; and this is particularly the case with the later 
writers, such as Plutarch, Lucian, Herodian, &c. which pro- 
bably arose from their familiarity with the Latin, in which 
language this nice distinction is unknown. Although even 
Demosthenes sometimes uses the middle voice, in a transitive 
sense. In the writings of the ancient authors. Homer, Hero- 
dotus, Xenophon, &c. the distinction between the active and 
middle voice is much more strictly observed. In fact, it is 
impossible to reduce to any universal rules the use of parti- 
cular words, and phrases, established by custom; and which, 
though seeming irregular to a foreigner, must have been com- 
pletely familiar to a native. The following observations may 
be sufficient to inform the reader, when a middle verb is tran- 
sitive, and when reflected; but practice only, and the careful 
imitation of the best authors, can direct the writer, when to 
use the middle, and when, the active voice. 



2^23 

66. First y When a middle verb has no object expressed ; or 
is followed by one corresponding to its agent, it is evidently 
reflected ; as, 

Uocp£(ryf.£vcc(Ta[A.r}v [xev syays fAax^a-- I yrepared myself to Jight* 
6aif is equivalent to Trape- 

(TKEvaa-a Efjt,avrov vc. T, X. ^ 

Ey&jv £fA£ Xva-oiAui, I ivill redeem mi/self. 

67. The same is the case, if a word corresponding to its 
agent, or subject, is expressed, or clearly understood after it, 
in the dative, as the end to which the action tends ; as, 

*0 yap yjKQe ^octq siti vvja? A%af(»v, For he came to the swi/i ships 
Ava-ofxsvoq re ^vyar^oc {iavre^). of the Grecians ; being about 

to redeem his daughter, for 
himself. 
EvQ<r(pta-aro (iavr^) aito t*j? t</a7j?. He secreted part of the price 

for himself. 

68. Secondly, When a middle verb is followed by any of 
those cases that other transitive verbs require, but not of a 
word corresponding to its own agent or subject ; and does not 
manifestly admit of such a word being supplied, in the dative, 
it is completely transitive ; as, 

YIoiyja-ofAo. roy Xoyov. I tjoillform the discourse. 

69. Thirdly, The present and imperfect middle, which agree 
in form with the same tenses, in the passive voice, are generally 
distinguished from them, in construction, by the passive being 
followed by a genitive of the agent ; as, 

E^KocTrTOfjiyjv. I tvas hurting myself. 

E^XaTrTOjWTjy into aov. I tvas in hurting, by you. 

70. But in Greek, as in Latin, there are many deponent 
verbs which are inflected in the middle and passive voices, 
while their signification is transitive ; whereas many neuter 
verbs are used, chiefly, in the active voice; as, (pdeyyo/xai, I 
speak; (jievcc, I remain. 

71. Besides these, certain verbs have come, by custom, to be 
used in particular tenses, with a signification different from 
that of the voice in which they are found ; thus, 

OX\v[A.i, to lose. perf. mid.'' 
* *0 vlo(; fA.ov fiv amXaXaq, My SOn Was lost. 

* The use of the middle voice is evidently taken from the Hebrew Hith- 
pael, which signifies what we do to ourselves ; as, lo^nn fte did teach himself. 
In the same manner the Celtic expresses verbs in a reflected form ; as, ta me 
mo chomhnuidh, / live. Following which manner of expression, the French 
say, je me leve, I rise. 

*^ What grammarians call the perfect, and pluperfect middle, are really only 
other forms of the same tenses in the active voice. Few verbs have both these 
forms J and, when they do occur, their signification is precisely the same. 



mi 



'AXia-yca, to take. 2. aor. act. et perf. act. 
Tvvaiy.Bg taXaaav iraa-an. All the tvomen twere taken. 

^£vhy.£voi; kakuv-a. I have been caught in a false- 

hood. 
Baiva, to go. 1. aor. tt-qa-a^ I caused another to go. 2. aor. e^tjv, 

/ luent. 
*Io-Tij/>w, to set. 1. aor. ea-Trjcra, I placed. 2. aor. f 0-T7JV, I stood, 

72. The passive aorists of some verbs are used, frequently 
in a middle sense ; and the perfect passive in a transitive one ; 
as, 

'Toq xprjfAoc, ixsyia-rov avBfavvj ijpj/ A monstrous hoar hqs appeared 

£v T7) xapoi,, in our country. 

'Cl(; tyu roiovTQ ri ^lairs'Kpayi/.ai. That I have done such a thing. 

Instances of this kind are not very numerous ; and the con- 
text will always enable the reader to ascertain the sense in 
which the verb is used, a 

MOODS. 

73. Besides the use of moods common to Greek and Latin, 
the Greeks use the optative mood, to express a wish, or desire; 
as, 

E^EvOoii; TaXareia, ycai bI^vBokto, Galatea, I ivish that thou 

Xadoio, ivouldst emerge from the sea, 

'ClcnrBp eya vvv wSe v.aBfif/.Byoq oi- and, having emeiged, forget, 

aiitvBtiv. as 1 7101V do, sitting here, to 



y.ac 



depart home. 



3 Many verbs appear to be used, transitively, in the passive aorists, which 
are not really so ; the following accusative depending on Kara understood ; 
as, 
Ou (po§r}6evTes (Kara) r-qv Tore Qt}- Not being alarmed at the power which 

€aiois [>wfjL7iu vTrapxovaav. the Thebans then possessed. 

Akovw signifying to be called, and ex« to be, are improperly classed with 
verbs which have a middle, or passive signification, under an active form. 
The nominative following the verb, depends upon attraction to the agent pre- 
ceding, and is, generally, connected with an infinitive understood ; as, (see 
obs. 5.) 
'SafiapeiTTis aKovei (^ovofiaXeaOai or He is caUed (Jiears himself named, or 

KKriQi]vaL,) Kai Saifiovcov. called) a Samaritan and a demo- 

niac. 
Ex* va-vxos. Be quiet. 

This is not more singular than if it were expressed, 
^<rt 'Sa/xapeiTris etvot. He says that he is a Samaritan. 

Indeed, words taken tlms, materially, are seldom inflected ; pjyita, verbum, 
or the like, being understood as the object of the verb ; as, 
'T^ets, « av^pes AQrivauii, to Se {prjfJLa) Ye men of Athens, but when I say ye, 

vfJLCis biav eiira>. 
So Horace, 

Frater, pater adde. 



225 



Eivj TO [AvOcc^eq \a€eiv la-ropiai; I ivisk the Jahulous to have the 
Q-^iv. appearance of history, 

74. As the propriety^ or expediency of desire, depends, fre- 
quently, on certain circumstances, or conditions, it was usual to 
join conditional particles to the expression of volition ; as, 
H v.£V yyj9v}(Tai Hpta/xos TlpiafAOio 

re irai^sc. 



AXXoi T£ Tpcceq [xsyoc v.£V v.tyjx.- 



Truly Priam, and the sons of 
Priam, toould rejoice as they 
desire. 

And the other Trojans 'would 
exult greatly in the gratifica- 
tion of their passion. 

If they learn, xvhat they luish, 
all these things about you two 
contending. 

75. In this subjunctive sense not only the inclination of mil, 
but the determination of judgment is expressed by the opta- 
tive ; whatever a person might be induced to do, think, believe, 
&c. whether agreeable, or not, to his wish ; as, * 

OvK otSa rivi ocv aXka itia-rtv- I do not Jcnouo 'what other per- 
(TEiai;, roiq asavrov ofdaXj^on; son you 'would be induced to 
aitia-rccv, believe, 'when you doubt your 

o'wn eyes. 

76. Even the indicative, in as far as condition can be at- 
tached to it, is frequently used, with subjunctive particles. 
But the distinction between it, and the subjunctive, is retained 
in the sense ; inasmuch as the subjunctive implies uncertainty, 
and the indicative asserts positively, or with a precision nearly 
equal to positive assertion ; as, 

If it 'was proposed to speak 
about any ne'w thing — vohich 
it is not. 

But come, let us exert our- 
selves, if by any means 'we 
shall (not may chance to) 
arm the sons of the Gre- 
cians. 

Even I Vioidd surely have been 
afraid of you, if I had not 
•well known that you are an 
ass. 



Et (Aiv Ttspi xaivov rivoq nrpayixcc- 
roq ttpovn^fero Xeysiv. 

AXX' ayer , ai v.tv tcuq ^upriqoixev 
vlaq A%a<a!V. 



Kayoj av at efot-fiBriv, ei jtxij TjSftv <re 
ovov ovrcc. 



* The same observation may be made, with respect to the use of the opta- 
tive mood, as of the middle voice, (see obs. 65.) When the Greeks became 
conversant with the Romans, in whose language the optative and subjunctive 
are the same, they gradually fell into some imitation of the Latin form of 
expression. Hence the use of the optative is with difficulty distinguished 
from that of the subjunctive, in many p£Ksages of the later Greek authors. 



226 



77. The imperative is expressed, with singular precision, in 
Greek. An injunction in the nature of a request is expressed 
by the subjunctive, with ivot, understood; a simple command, hy 
the imperative ; and a command in the nature of a threat , by 
the infinitive, with o^a, pxeirs, or o-/.07re< understood ; as, » 

IIpo? Tov Trarpo?, a (piXrarov 'Ep- For the sake of your father ■) 
y,y}^iov, pt.7) Y.a.rocXi'ifriq //,£. dearest little Mercury, do 

not leave me. 

EtTre, u MsviTTTre, ov axXXiav aoi Tell me, Meiiippus, do not 
Sojtw ; you thinh me handsomer ? 

M^Ti har^itziv toy c/aov %oAoy, Do not retard my anger. 

78. Tlie same urgency of command is, sometimes, expressed 
by the subjunctive, with /SAsTre Iva, understood ; as, 

(BXetts hcc) /x.^ o-£, 7£/)ov, KoO^'/jixiv Old man,, see that I may not 
Byu irapa v'/]vari Ki%£<w. catch you, at the hollo'vo 

shijjs. 

79. Besides the common use of the infinitive, as in Latin, 
it is completely a verbal noun, and is inflected as such with 
the article ; as, (see obs. 39.) 

Ex tov o^tfv yiyverat to fpotv. From seeing arises love. 

80. Hence the infinitive supplies the place of those verbal 
nouns, the gerunds and supines, in Latin. Except the ablative 
gerund, denoting the agent, which is expressed by a parti- 
ciple ; as, 

Kaipo? Toy ^o'/jBeiv. Temjnis auxiliandi. 

ETreixypa^Aev TiiAoOaov £i$ to cTTi^pi- Misimus Timotheum ad con- 

|a< i5/Aa?.b Jirmandum vos. 

Uoieiv aia-xpov. Twpe Jactu. 

'P»Sio? mXsfAi^Hv. Facile bellatu. 

V^vBpytruv ccvrovq £v:rv}3-ciciA^y. Benefaciendo acquisivi eos. 



TENSES. 

81. In addition to what was said of the imperative mood 
(see obs. 77, 78.) it may be observed that this mood, in past 
tenses, combines the future perfect with an urgent command. 



^ See more on the imperative, obs. 81. 

•^ "Whether the preposition cjs or -npos, before the Greek infim'tive, gave rise 
to the English sign to, is uncertain j the French pour is evidently taken from 
it ; as, 
Nu/cTos Kai 7ifji.€pas epyaXo'xevos, irpos to IForking day and night [jiour ne pas 

uq eTn§ap7](rai riva vfxcov. etre de charge) not to be burthen- 

some to any of you. 



^227 



This cannot be well expressed in Latin, but we have several 
such imperatives in English ; in the passive voice, they are all 
such ; as, 

IToiTjo-ov. Have done. 

Tevov, Become. 

Tfay\iov. Finish the 'writing. 

'O |tA£v Xtjctt^j? oi5to<j £? Tov Hv^i- Let tMs Yobbev be cast into 
^XeyeOovra, efA^etXrjadu. Puriphlegethon. 

82. Besides the past tenses common to other languages, the 
Greek aorists are of singular use and beauty. 

The primary use of these tenses is to denote the time past, 
generally ; without alluding to any other point of time, past or 
present ; and without specifying whether the circumstance was 
beginning, going on, or ending. These tenses, therefore, are 
peculiarly convenient for historians, and used by them accord- 
ingly ; as, 

HX0OJ/ TT/jo? 0-e. / came to you, 

Eryi/za EKSivov, / struch him. 

83. But there is a secondary, and very common use of the 
Greek aorists, which is, to express a thing as usual, or custom- 
ary ; as, 

OKiyoq xfovoq raq tuv (pavXav A little time usually destroys the 
crvvv}deia(; ^leXvcrs. Confederacies of the tuicked. 

"Txl/Qi; TTov Kccipicoq e^evrjxOev, ra re A siibUme expression, xvhen sea- 
'jcfayijiccra,, Smvji/ (Tv.YjT:rov Sivj- sonably produced, like light- 
<popvj<7ey, Y.a.1 t^j/ rov pnTopoq ev- ning,Jlashes through the sub- 
6vq aBpoccv Eyahei^ocro Svya/xiv. ject, and shotvs, at once, the 

entire potver of the orator. 

84-. Other tenses are, sometimes, used in this consuetudinal 
sense: as, 
'Oi/ K£ ^Eoiq ETcntsidviroci [xaXa, t The gods particularly regard 

eyf-Xvov avrov. the person who obeys them. 

'CI; Se Xeav, ev ^ov(Ti ^opaVf cf av- As a Hon, springing among 

X£va a^ei^ Tloprioq tj jSoo?. oxen, will break the neck of 

a heifer, or an ox. 

PARTICIPLES. 

85. There is nothing in which the Greek language is more 
happy than in the use of participles. The Latin is very de- 
ficient, in this respect, having no present participle passive, nor 

^ Thus also we say — a man shall have many good qualities, and yet be 
neglected. 

Some tense is used in this consuetudinal manner, in every language. The 
Celtic has a distinct inflection of the verb for this purpose ; as, ca bhfuil tu ? 
Where are you now ? ca mbiann tu ? Where are you usually? 

Q 2 



228 

past participle active : but the English, although having few 
inflexions of the verb, approaches near to the expression of 
the Greek ; thus, 

Afif akcc EKcrai xreivo/x-evou^. To drive the [Grecians) in, or, 

a hilling'' around the shore. 
Tu^'a?. Having struck, 

86. As in English, so in Greek, many verbs, particularly 
those signifying an aflfection of the mind, are followed by par- 
ticiples; as, 

Lier^itEv spevvuy. He continued searching. 

®£oy ov XtjIw Ttpoa-TaTfiv f%wy. / shall not cease having God 

for my defender, 

AUXILIARY VERBS. 

87. The Greek language admits the use of several verbs, 
accompanied by the participles, or infinitives of other verbs, to 
express, most minutely, the time, and manner, of action, or ex- 
istence. In which respect, it differs, entirely, from the genius 
of the Latin, but has been followed, in many instances, by the 
English. Thus, 

88. To express a purpose of doing, or the proximity of an 
event, [abXXu, with the infinitive, is used. When that event is 
to follow immediately, the present infinitive is employed ; when, 
at an indefinite distance of time, the future; as, 

*0 T* [AeXKBiq Xeyeiv. Whatever you are about to say. 

MeXXsi apiaiv. He mil govern hereafter. 

89. The various modes of action, or existence, are expressed 
as follows, by auxiliaries and participles ; viz. 

Commencement, by yivoixai. 
Eyevaro avO^ccitoq emza-Taky.avoq. There ivas a man sent. 

Simple existence, by eif^i. 
Uv Maca-ycccv avrovq. He Ivas teaching them. 

OvK aiaQat; m. Not being accustomed. 

Priority, by iitapxa. 
'Tirvjp^oc £v Tcoiuy as. I first served you. 

Energy, by a^a. 
Toy X&yov (tw ^a.v\t.a<rac, zy^w}^ I have admired y OUT discouTSC. 

K^ek(p7iv T>jv £/AV}y y^j/Aa? £%£*?. You have married my sister. 



* From this use of the present participle, in English, it appears to be pas- 
sive as well as active. In which, as in many other instances, the English 
follows, exactly, the ancient Celtic idiom j as, ta me in mo bhualadh, lam in 
my striking ; i. e. in a state of being struck. 

** The past participle, in English, appears to be transitive, in such expres- 
sions as tMs. The Latins say habebat persuasum sibi — habuisse stispectas — 



2'i9 

Accident^ by Kupw, or rvy%avu, 
MevE aq 'Av^ziq tyjuiv (<r£avTov). Remain as you are, 

Tvyxavei itepncaroov. He is ivalkijlg, 

'0<ttk; cov tvyxavti. Whoever he is. 

90. To express the completion of an event, £ifjii is used, with 
a past participle. The present of £</x(, in such an expression, 
is equivalent to the pluperfect tense, but it is much more em- 
phatical ; while sa-of^ai expresses the future perfect, in the in- 
dicative ; as the subjunctives of the aorists do, in that mood ; 
as, 

Tovq a-vKofavraq rriq 'rtoXecoq ^v §*- He luas after driving the in- 

u^aq. formers from the city. 

KT>jjM,a xa< ipi^xKiv £7ri avaredti- You ivill have offered an ac- 

yiaq. quisition and lucky gain. 

91. Anticipated performance is expressed by <p6avco, or izpo- 
(p9av&>, with a participle. This expression is so energetic, that 
it cannot be literally rendered into any other language ; as, 
^vvTiOevrai fBaaai n ^aTuvTzq *j They conspired to do something 

'jvaOeiv. to avoid siiffering. 

Ovy. av (pBavoiq li'qyoviAzvoq. You cannot too quicTdy tell. 

'OjTTi.^ av (pdav^ (piKov eve^yeruv. Whoever has first conferred a 

kindness on his friend. 

92. Secrecy, so as to escape not only the knowledge of ano- 
ther person, but even a person's own consciousness, is express- 
ed by "kavBavu, with a participle. As the Latin and English 
have no word corresponding to XavBava, in this sense; the 
phrases, in which it occurs, are rendered adverbially ; as, 
EXaflov riviq ^eviaavreq ayyeXovq. Some persons entertained an- 
gels unaiuares. 

Ar}<rova-i Xeyovrsq d (jlv) hei. They toill be ignorantly saying 

tvhat they ought not. 

93. A variety of other circumstances are expressed, by join- 
ing appropriate adjectives with e*//,*, and participles; as, 

^avepoq iqy diAoc^ravuv. He sinned openly^ 

AStjXo* sa-ofAeBoc iroiovvTeq. We Ivill do it secretly. 

Ov nrcoTcoT e^apvoq £y£vo[AV}v i^aOuv I never denied that I hadlearn- 
ri ed any things. 

94. Sometimes the indicative, or infinitive, is used, instead 
of the participle ; as, 

AijXot a)/A£v, on ovv. cx,y.ovreq [aocxo- Let US shoiu that 'we fight ivil- 
[AiOa. lingly. 

and the like. But they cannot com'bine two participles ; as, exwj' rapa^as, 
having disturbed ; which they render, q-uum turhassem — cs — el, &c. 



£30 



E* 7rap£i%£y, a^rjXoi; sa-ri. It is not certain, ifhejurnished. 

Ovy. av e^apvot; yevoio jocvj ova t^ot; You cannot deny that you arc 
vloq tivai. my son, 

95. Strong regret or dissatisfaction at a past event, is ex- 
pressed by the imperfect, or second aorist of ofsiKa, to aive; 
agreeing, in number, and person, with its subject; and, com- 
monly followed by the infinitive. The particle ene is fre- 
quently joined with o^stXw; as, 

M^ otpsXov viVLOM. I ought not to have overcome 

Atd' Q(p£kov [Miivai, I ought to have remained. 

OfeKsq okeaQooi. You ought to have perished. 

96. Imperious duty, or necessity, is expressed by verbal ad- 
jectives in T£o? ; either agreeing with their substantives, or, 
which is more usual, having their agents in the dative, and 
governing their objects, as the verbs do, from which they are 
derived; as, 

'O ayaQoq y^ovoq t</avjt£c^. The good man alone must be 

honoured. 
T*yt TTjy xafiv la-reov ; 2 tvhom is the favour to be 

acknowledged? 
<[>£i;xT£oy ra a-ufpovovvTi to irpoi; The wise man must avoid male- 
So|ay ^Tjy. ing glory his object in life. 



IX. PREPOSITIONS. 

97. There is nothing more necessary, in acquiring a know- 
ledge of the Greek language, than to have a clear idea of the 
manner in which the various relations are expressed, by means 
of the prepositions. 

Two methods have been adopted, by philologists, to ascer- 
tain the meaning of the prepositions ; but both very unsatis- 
factory. The first is by deriving each preposition from some 
word, either in Greek, or Hebrew, or Arabic, that seems to 
have a resemblance, in sound, and sense, to the meaning which 
they have already attached to the preposition. But it will be 
evident to any person, who thinks seriously upon Lhe subject, 
that this derivation, a posteriori, will afford little instruction; 
when the deriver can know nothing, and may guess any 
thing. 

The second method is more unphilological still : That is 
by supposing the meaning of the preposition to change, ac- 
cording to the case to which it is prefixed. Nothing can be 
more certain, than that every word has only one original 
meaning ; and, although it may be very difficult to analyze a 
phrase, so as to ascertain the meaning of each constituent part, 



231 



when they are amalgamated ; yet we are not rashly to pro- 
nounce that it is impossible, or to charge the noblest, and 
most accurate language, with a violation of the first principles 
of philology. 

A more philosophical and natural manner of acquiring a true 
understanding of the prepositions is, to follow the course of 
nature, in the formation of language ; and, from considering 
what the primary relations are, to ascertain how they have 
been expressed. 

98. The first manner, therefore, in which it is probable that 
relations were denoted, was by variety of termination, or dif- 
ferent cases. Thus the genitive was used to denote that hy 
•which any thing ivas possessed, or from tuhich it proceeded; the 
dative that to ijohich any thing ivas acquired, from luhich it ivas 
taken, or by tvhich it ivas done, and hence, interchange in gene- 
ral; while the accusative denoted the general object of action. 
But, as these cases express relations only in a general manner, 
it became necessary to specify them with more precision; 
hence prceposita were used to denote the various modes of re- 
lation, each having its own distinct and unalterable meaning, 
but blending with the meaning already expressed by the case, 
to complete the idea intended to be expressed. 

99. Every person knows, that the idea of one word govern- 
ing another is merely an arbitrary invention of philology, and 
can have no foundation in nature. Hence the same preposi- 
tion would be prefixed to different cases, without either chang- 
ing its own meaning, or having any influence in requiring those 
particular cases. The use of the case must depend upon the 
nature of the subject, while the preposition is merely prefixed 
to give precision to the expression. 

100. As the relations of place are the most obvious, it is 
probable that they were the first denoted by prepositions: 
and an attention to them, in their simplest form, will enable 
us to ascertain the primary meaning of the prepositions them- 
selves. 

A very simple and easy manner of understanding them is, to 
conceive one body, in a state of rest, and then to consider, in 
how many different positions another body may be placed, with 
respect to it. 

These may be reduced to the following twelve categories ; 
viz. 

1. In conjunction. 5. Below. 9. Around. 

2. In opposition. 6. Before. 10. To. 

3. In. 7. Behind. 11. Through. 

4. Above. 8. Beside. 12. From. 



232 

101. These, with their several modifications, are expressed 
by the prepositions ; thus, 

In conjunction, 2uv, luitk. 

In opposition. Avt*, against; and, as the part opposed must 
be considered the front, avr*, before. 

In, Ei?, into, and in ; sv, within; and, where several objects 
are placed together, /xera, in among. 

Above, 'T-TTEp, completely over ; ava, risen to top; ett*, come to, 
and upon ; Kara, descended upon. 

Below, 'T'jto, completely under; v.arot., descended to bottom. 

Before, IT/jo, before, in place, or order ; avn, in opposition. 
See above. 

Behind, Mera, af^er, in order, * ^ 

Beside, Mera, following beside ; v.ara, descending, or set 
down beside ; Trpo^, merely, or nearly in contact ; itapa, in com- 
plete juxta-position. 

Around, AfA(pi on each side ; itsfi, completely around. '^ 

To. Mera,, following after, or coming over to ; vpoi;, towards, 
to contingently ; siti, to and on ; £ii;, to, into ; icapa,, unto, com- 
ing along side; ay a,, up to ; v.ara, down to, 

Thrqugh, kva, through, from bottom to top ; v.ot,ra, through, 
from top to bottom; S<a, through, as dividing; pervading, or 
moving i?i any direction, except directly up or down. 

From, U^og, from slight adhesion ; ntapa., from strong adhe- 
sion ; onto, from surface, or resting on; ex, out of ; v.a,ra, from, 
bottom descending, 

102. From this theory, the true meaning of the prepositions 
may be easily ascertained ; and it will appear that those which 
seem to have the most opposite meanings, as icapa, and itpoq, 
retain in every instance, one signification ; viz. that of moving 
in a direct line from one body to another, arriving and remain- 
ing at it, or passing by it, 

1. A/A^*, on each side. 

2. Am, up to, up through, upon,^ 
S» Ayr*, opposite, before. 



^. When the relations to be expressed were more complex, including those 
of three or more objects ; such as, behind, beyond, &c.; or when the idea of 
distance, or the like, was to be added to the primary relation, adverbs of place 
were introduced. 

^ Aficpi and irepi are sometimes used together : as, a/xcpi, irepi, ^wp.ov, round 
about an altar ; sometimes they are used indifferently for each other, and, in 
some books, as the septuagint, o/i^t is hardly ever used. 

« Contrary to every principle of philology, ava is said to mean, sometimes, 
up and down ; and the assertion is illustrated by such examples as- 
E§?j ava arparov. He went up and down the army. 

But what occasion is there to suppose that the person mentioned, returned 
upon his steps at all ? Would any critic say that ava (nparov cpx^TO KrjAcf^eoio, 



233 



4. Am, from surface^ or resting on. 
3. A<a, through, 

6. E<?, intOf in. 

7. E-/C, out of. 

8. Ev, fw, tuithin. 

9. E-TTi, ww^o, ow. 

10. Kara, rfoton to, down through, or besidcj at oottom, doiun 
from. 

11. M-^ra, folloxuing over to, with, among. 

12. Xiapa, unto, beside, from adhesion. 

13. Ilepi, around. 

14. II/jo, before. 

15. n^o?, towards, to, at, from contingency. 

16. 2t;v, together mth. 

17. 'TTrep, over. 

18. 'Ttto, under. 

103. From the relations of place, the transition is easy to 
those of time, and the modes of thought. And the primary 
meaning of the prepositions is, in general, easily discernible, 
in these various applications of them. Yet it is not strange 
that, in the use of a language which flourished for many 
centuries, extended to various countries, and was spoken in 
several dialects, local circumstances and habit should have 
introduced a considerable variety in the use of the prepo- 
sitions. That this was the case will be evident to a person 
who compares the ancient Ionic with the modern Attic 
writers.^ Hence the propriety of following nature in the 
progress of language, in order to ascertain the true meaning 
of the prepositions ; rather than endeavouring to deduce 
their sense from the various uses of them by so many different 
authors. 

104. It would very far exceed the limits of these observ- 
ations to exhibit a general list of the peculiar and idiomatical 

should be rendered, The a-n'ows of the God went up and down the army ; as if 
an arrow sent from a bow could change its direction ? 

Even when ava and koto are applied to motion on a plain, they retain their 
original meaning ; and are used according as the speaker conceives the object, 
to which he moves, above or below the level on which he stands : and a 
very little observation will convince any person, that we regard almost every 
object in one or other of these relations. 

■ Let the reader compare the language of Chaucer, or any other of our 
ancient poets, with that of the present day, and he will readily conceive the 
changes to which a living language is subject. 

Multa renascentur, quae jam cecidere ; cadentque 
Quae nunc sunt in honore vocabula, si volet usus, 
Quem penes arbitriura est, et jus, et norma loquendi. 

R Jlomt. 



234 



use of the prepositions, 
a specimen of it : 



The following examples may serve as 



EXaa-aq rov lirirov ava xparo?. 
Kocrea-Ki^-ipav, ava %ooyov, eiq itoXs- 

f^ovq. 
EXabov ava S>jvap;ov. 
A>0' uv dmaia tivoitiTt. 
Atto yXuo'crvjf; idsyjBi^crav, 
Ot aito r'fi<; 2Toa?, airo t^? Ana- 

Svjpa?, v.. T. X. 
Ot aTTO T7J? ^ovXvjt;, 
A<« TptTVJ5 ^[Atpaq, 
Ta x^'^jA.ara avruv St' wt^cXcia? 

Atee ^povov iupuKSiv avrov. 

Ilavraq riv.tiv Ad»jva^f, ft? ttjv o-f- 

AyTt<r%oyT£? ft? ocrov cveSep^sTO, 

*Opxov xapatT7j<7at «x twv tvowccv, 

Tijy £y wecty (^wpav) ati nrsiparai 
alpeiv. 

Toy? vcTaTOv? smovrat; ev ooyri 

*0 fTTt Tuv ^aa-i'Ai'A.cov cr(ppayi^a)V. 
Eirct £^* eafTwv eyEVSTO ra crrparO' 

•Tra^a, 
E'TTt apj^ovTO? kB'fivaioiq N<vtoo-T|3a- 

TOV, 

Ta ;M.£y £<7Tty £^* ^w*"} Ta Se ov>t 

f^' •^y.iv. 
"Efie iTt ayaOoiq ^ia7cp£irE(TT£pav 

(pavvjvai. 
Bao-iXft? ot ETTt $taSo%ot? itaia-iv 

srs'kBvrrja'av, 
*H Kara TroSa? -^ixspa. 
O'l A67jvaioi, Kara jutav vavv re- 

ray[A,£voif •ns^ieit'kEOV avrovg nv- 

xXft?. 

Tlapa TO(TOVTov ov y.arEX'/j(p6vjf icao' 
oa-ov ot ^iu^avzeq rrj? evOetat; 
eqerpaitTjo-av. 

AVT^ /ACV SvjjtAO?, "TT/JO TTOXXOV T^? 

-ttoXeo?? ovTt, »7r>jyTa. 



Driving the horse at full speed. 
In progress of time they tvere 

engaged in war. 
They received one penny each. 
Because you did just things. 
They made a verbal request. 
The Stoics, the Academics, 8fc. 



^ 



The senators. 

Every third day. 

Their property they made their 

otvn, put to their otvn benefit. 
It teas long since I had seen 

him. 
That all should come to Athens, 

at the ne'vo moon. 
Having resisted as long as they 

could. 
Avoid an oath as much as pos- 
sible. 
He endeavours altjoays to take 

the country to which he 

comes. 
You are angry at those who 

spoke last. 
The keeper of the king's seals. 
When the armies were in their 

quarters. 
When Nicostratus was Archon 

of Athens. 
Some things are in our power, 

other things not in our power. 
That I shall appear much more 

conspicuous. 
Kings who died, leaving chit' 

dren to succeed them. 
The following day. 
The Athenians, having their 
fleet drawn up in a single 

line, sailed round them in a 

circle.^ 
By this means only he escaped 

being taken, that the pursuers 

turned out of the way. 
The people met him a consider- 
able way before the city 



'235 

Tlpot; Ato?, hvjyy)<rM ij/xtv. For the saJce of Jove relate to 

us. 
Ilpoq BTtia-ToKaii; eivai, To be ivriting letters. 

105. There are, likewise, many adverbial phrases, made by 
the combination of prepositions with nouns, or adjectives ; 
such as, 

Atto o-ttouSoj?, diligently. Airo rov cixoro?, unlikely. 

Atto tou (pavepovj openly. Ai' a-npi^eiaqy correctly. 

E<? v€piy, contumeliously. Hap* oXiyov, nearly. 

Eiri rvx-fii accidentally, Upoq %aj)iv, agreeably. 

Kara [Aeya, greatly. Ilapa ttoXu, not nearly. 

X. CONJUNCTIVE AND ADVERBIAL 
PARTICLES. 

106. No language abounds more in the use of particles than 
the Greek. Besides such as are common to other languages, 
the Greek has certain particles to denote,] 

1. Emphasis ; such as ij, Stj, truly ; ntov, probably, no doubt ; 
Toi, really ; and ye, which is connected with the emphatical 
word in the sentence, although several other words sometimes 
intervene; as, 

E< /A7J oXov, if-spoq ye. If not all, at least a part, 

2. Consequence; such as, av, next; apa and pa, therefore, 
then ; ay, denoting that the verb to which it is prefixed, ex- 
presses an idea consequent on that expressed by the preceding 
verb ; as, (see obs. 74', 75, 76.) 

Avrap ETiti v-ara t£hv' efaye arpov- Next, therefore, tvhen he de- 
Ooio, voured the young of the 

sparroxjo. 
Apa oia-Oa; Do you knotv therefore? 

Eyuy* av sivov £i itapuv trvyxavov. If I had been present, I would 

have spoken. 

3. Distinction ; Mev is, generally, placed in the first clause 
of a paragraph, and Se, in each of the succeeding ones ; as, 
(see obs. 23.) 

Ta jtAcv t<Triv t(f '^f/.iv, ra Sc ouk Some things are in our poiuer, 
tf ^/x*v. and other things not in our 

poiioer. 
EfXQi [Aev TO fapy.av.ov, Htoiolwpa He gave the poison to me, 
Se TO a<pa2iA.<xy.rov sTreSwxe. but the unpoisoned {cup) to 

Ptoiodorus. 



23(5 



107- Some ancient writers, particularly Homer, make so 
frequent use of particles denoting emphasis, and conse- 
quence, that critics, wanting inclination to investigate the 
meaning of each particle, have contented themselves with 
calling several of them expletives. But however they may 
appear to persons whose language has no exactly correspond- 
ing words, it is certain that each of them has its proper, and 
distinct signification ; and, where the same particle i»3 repeated, 
or synonymous ones are used, it is done for the sake of em- 
phasis, (see obs. 29, 30.) 



THE END. 



London: 

Printed by A. & R Spottiswoode, 

New- Street-Square. 



^410 2'^ 



,c 



H 



^^i*^ 



'>■ V 



^^ 



.0 :. 



*> ' ^ « . V 






i' y^. 



-'^^'c 



%, 






^ ^'' 



\ 



'^-^^ 



•r- 



^viC- 






< ^ ' ■ . ^'- ''-J ., / ^ - 






^f*C4>i/ 











■-.. ,^^ 












* '^> 






.0 



o^ -/-^ 



v.O- 



..:?-• 



^^. " 



.0- 






^,.^' 



-s^ <■. 



/ . 

'' :'^^'*' '^-o^ 






4- Deacidified using the Bookkeeper prooe»s. 
' ' Neutralizing agent: Magnesium OxWe 
Treatment Date: July 2006 

VT^""; PreservationTechnologies 

* * ^ A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 



>- V^ 



1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



,^ -^ri. 



i"'.".^C^' 



**.^ 



^ ^^ 






.,^*% 



•n- V* 



kV '*, 



'' -A 









- 












o- 

> -f^ 



.-^v 












^ . ^'b. 






-'^^ <^^' -^ 









.**!C?»w.'' 



'6 






':^, *- 



--42^^ .. 






. ,0^- 



K^"^ ■''; 




,^>^x 









^--■^ 




'^ 


».^ 






.<^ 


■"*.. 
"■-.: 

•* 












.r-^ 










"^^ 


v^^ 





mak 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



003 035 587 8 



